Cat. No. W465-E1-05
SYSMAC CS and CJ Series
CS1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX)
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP (100Base-TX)
CJ2M-CPU3@ (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
EtherNet/IP Units
OPERATION MANUAL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX)
CJ1W-EIP21 (100Base-TX)
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP (100Base-TX)
CJ2M-CPU3@ (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
EtherNet/IP Units
Operation Manual
Revised February 2010
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Program-
ming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
Trademarks and Copyrights
EtherNet/IP is a registered trademark of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association).
Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are registered
trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
Other names of systems or products that appear in this document are trademarks or registered trade-
marks of the respective company.
OMRON, 2007
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxii
xxii
xxii
xxiv
xxiv
xxvi
SECTION 1
1-1 EtherNet/IP Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Communications Services Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Network Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
4
4
6
10
SECTION 2
2-1 EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Nomenclature and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Selecting the Network Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
21
28
SECTION 3
3-1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3 Mounting to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Setting the Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9 Tag Data Link Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Other Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Communications Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
36
38
41
44
46
50
52
57
61
65
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
4-1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 DM Area Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 User Settings Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Auxiliary Area Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
70
83
85
88
SECTION 5
5-1 IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Private and Global Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
94
106
SECTION 6
6-1 Overview of Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Setting Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
121
183
SECTION 7
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 FINS Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Explicit Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Message Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Message Communications Error Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Message Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
190
192
193
194
195
SECTION 8
8-1 Overview of FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 FINS/TCP Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5 Using FINS Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
207
211
220
232
SECTION 9
9-1 Sending Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
9-2 Receiving Explicit Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10
10-1 Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2 Adjusting the Communications Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3 I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5 Message Service Transmission Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
268
283
291
294
SECTION 11
11-1 Overview and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 FTP Server Function Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Using the FTP Server Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 FTP Server Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5 Using FTP Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6 Checking FTP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7 Using File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8 FTP File Transfer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9 Host Computer Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
303
305
307
308
314
315
320
321
SECTION 12
12-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
325
328
328
SECTION 13
13-1 Maintenance and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2 Simple Backup Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-3 Using the Backup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
333
336
SECTION 14
14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4 Error Log Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
340
347
358
364
368
371
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A
B
C
D
E
F
CS/CJ-series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP Status Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CIP Message Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports . . . . . . . .
EDS File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
375
377
379
381
391
419
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About this Manual:
This manual describes the operation of the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and the built-in EtherNet/IP
ports on a CJ2 CPU Unit for constructing applications and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install or operate the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. Be sure to read the
precautions provided in the following section.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in
EtherNet/IP ports.
Section 1 introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
communications services.
Section 2 provides the specifications of EtherNet/IP Units and introduces recommended network con-
figuration devices.
Section 3 explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Section 4 describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet/IP Units or
built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
Section 5 explains how to manage and use IP addresses.
Section 6 describes tag data link functions and related Network Configurator operations.
Section 7 describes message communications using FINS messages and explicit messages.
Section 8 provides information on communicating on EtherNet/IP Systems and interconnected net-
works using FINS commands. The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communi-
cations in reference to EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
Section 9 describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program
in the CPU Unit of the PLC.
Section 10 describes the communications performance in an EtherNet/IP network, and shows how to
estimate the I/O response times and transmission delays.
Section 11 describes the functions provided by the FTP server.
Section 12 provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function, including details on spec-
ifications, required settings, operations from CX-Programmer, and troubleshooting.
Section 13 describes cleaning, inspection, and Unit replacement procedures, as well as the Simple
Backup Function.
Section 14 describes error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting proce-
dures needed to keep the EtherNet/IP network operating properly. We recommend reading through the
error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected
more quickly.
Appendices provide information on EtherNet/IP network parameters, the buffer configuration, TCP
status transitions, ASCII characters, maintenance, and inspections.
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relevant Manuals
The following table lists CS- and CJ-series manuals that contain information relevant to EtherNet/IP
Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
Manual
number
Model
Name
Contents
W465
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
EtherNet/IP Units
Operation Manual
(this manual)
Provides information on operating and installing Ether-
Net/IP Units, including details on basic settings, tag data
links, and FINS communications.
Refer to the Communications Commands Reference
Manual (W342) for details on FINS commands that can
be sent to CS-series and CJ-series CPU Units when
using the FINS communications service.
Refer to the Ethernet Units Operation Manual
Construction of Applications (W421) for details on con-
structing host applications that use FINS communica-
tions.
W420
W421
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Units Oper- Provides information on operating and installing
ation Manual 100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including details on basic
Construction of Net- settings and FINS communications. Refer to the Commu-
works
nications Commands Reference Manual (W342) for
details on FINS commands that can be sent to CS-series
and CJ-series CPU Units when using the FINS communi-
cations service.
CS1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Units Oper- Provides information on constructing host applications for
ation Manual
Construction of
Applications
100Base-TX Ethernet Units, including functions for send-
ing/receiving mail, socket service, automatic clock adjust-
ment, FTP server functions, and FINS communications.
W343
W342
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN11
Ethernet Units Oper- Describes the installation and operation of the 10Base-5
ation Manual
and 10Base-T Ethernet Units.
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU@@-V1
CS1W-SCU@@-V1
CS1W-SCB@@-V1
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
Communications
Commands Refer-
ence Manual
Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS communi-
cations commands used when sending communications
commands to CS-series, CJ-series, CP-series, and SYS-
MAC One NSJ-series CPU Units.
CJ2M-CPU@@
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
CP1E-E@@D@-@
CP1E-N@@D@-@
CP1H-X@@@@-@
CP1H-Y@@@@-@@
W472
W473
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
CJ-series CJ2 CPU Provides hardware information for the CJ2 CPU Units.
Unit Hardware
User’s Manual
Information is included on features, system configuration,
component names, component functions, installation,
setting procedures, and troubleshooting.
CJ2M-CPU@@
Use together with the CJ-series CJ2 CPU Unit Software
User’s Manual (W473).
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
CJ2M-CPU@@
CJ-series CJ2 CPU Provides software information for the CJ2 CPU Units.
Unit Software User’s Information is included on CPU Unit operation, internal
Manual
memory, programming, setting procedures, and CPU
Unit functions.
Use together with the CJ-series CJ2 CPU Unit Hardware
User’s Manual (W472).
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual
number
Model
Name
Contents
W474
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
CJ2M-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions
trollers Instructions
Reference Manual
supported by CS-series and CJ-series PCs. Use this
manual for CJ2 CPU Units.
CS1G/H-CPU-@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@-V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1G-CPU@@
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
W339
W393
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
Programmable Con- Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installa-
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
trollers Operation
Manual
tion, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CS-
series PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro-
gramming Manual (W394).
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Provides an outline of, and describes the design, installa-
trollers Operation
Manual
tion, maintenance, and other basic operations for the CJ-
series PLCs. Information is also included on features,
system configuration, wiring, I/O memory allocations, and
troubleshooting.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Pro-
gramming Manual (W394).
W394
W340
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
Programmable Con- Describes programming, tasks, file memory, and other
trollers Program-
ming Manual
functions for the CS-series, CJ-series, and NS-J-series
PLCs.
Use together with the Programmable Controllers Opera-
tion Manual (W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-
series PLCs).
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
CS1G/H-CPU@@H
CS1G/H-CPU-@@V1
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Con- Describes the ladder diagram programming instructions
trollers Instructions
Reference Manual
supported by CS-series and CJ-series PCs. Use together
with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-series
PLCs), and the Programmable Controllers Programming
Manual (W394).
W463
W446
CXONE-AL@@C-V4
CS-One Setup Man- Describes the setup procedures for the CX-One. Informa-
CXONE-AL@@D-V4
ual
tion is also provided on the operating environment for the
CX-One.
WS02-CXPC@-V9
CX-Programmer
Operation Manual
Provides information on how to use the CX-Programmer,
a Windows-based programming device. Use together
with the Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
(W339 for CS-series PLCs and W393 for CJ-series
PLCs), Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
(W394) and the Programmable Controllers Instructions
Reference Manual (W340) to perform programming.
W464
CXONE-AL@@C-V4/
CXONE-AL@@D-V4
CS/CJ/CP/NSJ-
Describes the operating procedures of the CX-Integrator
series CX-Integrator that can be used to set up and monitor networks.
Ver. 2.@ Operation
Manual
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per-
sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xviii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series
Unit Versions
A “unit version” has been introduced to manage Units in the CS/CJ Series
according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
■ CS1W-EIP21/CJ1W-EIP21
Product nameplate
CS1W-
UNIT
Unit version
Example for unit version 1.0
Lot No.
Lot No. 040401 0000 Ver.1.0
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
■ CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CJ2M-CPU3@
Product nameplate
CJ2H-
UNIT
Indicates that the unit
version of the CPU Unit
is 1.0.
Indicates that the unit
version of the built-in
EtherNet I/P port is 2.0.
Lot No. 080701 CPU Ver. 1.0 EIP Ver.2.0
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
In this manual, the version of the EtherNet/IP port built into the CJ2H-
CPU@@-EIP/CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Unit is given as the unit version.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using the
Unit Manufacturing Information.
Note The unit versions of Pre-Ver.1.0 Units cannot be confirmed in Unit Manufac-
turing Information. The following dialog box is displayed.
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing informa-
tion - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unit version
Note
The unit version will be displayed in the Unit Manufacturing Information Dialog
Box.
Using Unit Version Label
The following unit version label is provided with the EtherNet/IP Unit.
This label can be attached to the front of the EtherNet/IP Unit to differentiate
between EtherNet/IP Units with different unit versions.
Unit Versions and CX-Programmer Versions
Use the following versions of the CX-Programmer to make the Unit settings for
the EtherNet/IP Unit.
Unit version
CX-Programmer
Ver. 8.0
Ver. 7.1 or lower
---
---
Ver. 8.02 or higher
Unit version 1.0
Unit version 2.0
OK*
OK
OK
OK
* The following auto update must be applied to use CX-Programmer version 8.0:
CX-Common Components/CPS Upgrade Software 2008.08 0302
Unit Version Notation
In this manual, the unit version of a EtherNet/IP Unit is given as shown in the
following table.
Product nameplate
Notation used in this manual
Special remarks
Ver. 1.0 or later number Ethernet Unit Ver. 1.0 or later (See note.)
shown to right of the lot
number
Information without reference to specific Unit
Versions applies to all versions of the Unit.
Note
Some Support Software products call the EtherNet/IP Unit version the “revi-
sion.” “Revision” is also sometimes used in this manual.
CIP Revisions and
Unit Versions
The CIP revisions corresponding to the unit versions of the EtherNet/IP Unit
are given in the following table.
Unit version
Version 1.0
Version 2.0
CIP revision
Revision 1.01
Revision 2.01 or 2.02
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of EtherNet/IP Units or
built-in EtherNet/IP ports. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxvi
xxvi
6-1
6-2
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Audience
1
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned appli-
cations.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
xxii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Precautions
3
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the Programmable Controller or
another external factor affecting the operation of the Programmable Control-
ler. “Programmable Controller” indicates the CPU Unit and all other Units and
is abbreviated “PLC” in this manual.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O con-
trol section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be
detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such
errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the
system.
• Provide measures in the computer system and programming to ensure
safety in the overall system even if errors or malfunctions occur in data
link communications or remote I/O communications.
!Caution Execute online editing only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before changing or transferring to
another node the contents of a program, the PLC Setup, I/O tables, I/O mem-
ory, or parameters. Changing or transferring any of these without confirming
safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
xxiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Environment Precautions
4
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit and Slaves before
attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may
result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
Memory Packs, or Master Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the EtherNet/IP Unit, built-in EtherNet/IP port, or the system, or could damage
the Ethernet Unit. Always heed these precautions.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external cir-
cuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
xxiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application Precautions
5
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures
• Make sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, terminal block screws,
and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the
relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications
cable.
• Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high-ten-
sion lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending ra-
dius.
• Do not pull on the communications cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables.
• Always lay communications cable inside ducts.
• Use appropriate communications cables.
• Make sure that the terminal blocks, expansion cable connectors, and
other items with locking devices are locked in place.
• Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in this manual.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount terminal blocks and connectors only after checking the mounting
location carefully.
• Check the user program (ladder program and other programs) and
parameters for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not
checking the program may result in unexpected operation.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC.
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• After replacing a Unit, resume operation only after transferring to the new
CPU Unit, Special I/O Unit, or CPU Bus Unit the contents of the DM Area,
HR Area, programs, parameters, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunc-
tion or damage.
xxv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Conformance to EC Directives
6
• When transporting the Unit, use special packing boxes and protect it from
being exposed to excessive vibration or impacts during transportation.
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
• When the settings (IP address or tag data link settings) of the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port are transferred from a Programming
Device, all of the destination EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP
ports (nodes) will be reset in order to enable the transferred settings.
Transfer settings to the EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports only
after verifying that restarting the Units will not cause any problems in the
system.
• If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet/IP tag data links (cyclic communica-
tions), the network's communications load will increase, data collisions
will occur frequently, and stable communications will be impossible.
Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network.
• Before resetting a CPU Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit, always verify that
restart the Unit will not cause any problems in the system.
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility) and EMI (Electromagnetic
Interference) Standards in the EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) stan-
dards are as follows:
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS1W-EIP21
EMS
EN61000-6-2
EMI
EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m
regulations)
CJ1W-EIP21
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
xxvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 1
Overview of EtherNet/IP
This section introduces the functions and protocols used in EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port communications
1-1 EtherNet/IP Unit Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 Communications Services Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5 Network Configurator Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-2 Network Configurator Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-5-3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
4
4
6
10
10
10
11
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit Features
Section 1-1
1-1 EtherNet/IP Unit Features
CX-One Support
Software
(3) Switching hub
(2) Twisted-pair cable
(1) Built-in EtherNet/IP port on
CJ2 CPU Unit
100 m
max.
(1) CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP
Unit for CS-series
(1) CJ1W-EIP21
EtherNet/IP Unit
(CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/
CJ2M-CPU3@)
Ethernet (LAN) port
CS-series
PLC
CJ-series
PLC
CJ-series
PLC
EtherNet/IP System Configuration Example
EtherNet/IP is an industrial multi-vendor network that uses Ethernet compo-
nents. The EtherNet/IP specifications are open standards managed by the
ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association), just like DeviceNet.
EtherNet/IP is not just a network between controllers; it is also used as a field
network. Since EtherNet/IP uses standard Ethernet technology, various gen-
eral-purpose Ethernet devices can be used in the network. The EtherNet/IP
Unit and built-in EtherNet/IP port have the following features.
High-speed, High-capacity
Data Exchange through
Data Links
The EtherNet/IP protocol supports implicit communications, which allows
cyclic communications (called tag data links in this manual) with EtherNet/IP
devices. Data can be exchanged at high speed between Controllers and
devices, using high-volume tag sets (up to 640 words for the CJ2M and up to
184,832 words for other CPU Units) between PLCs.
Tag Data Link (Cyclic
Communications) Cycle
Time
Tag data links (cyclic communications) can operate at the cyclic period speci-
fied for each application, regardless of the number of nodes. Data is
exchanged over the network at the refresh cycle set for each connection, so
the communications refresh cycle will not increase even if the number of
nodes is increased, i.e., the synchronicity of the connection’s data is pre-
served.
Since the refresh cycle can be set for each connection, each application can
communicate at its ideal refresh cycle. For example, a processes interlocks
can be transferred at high speed while the production commands and the sta-
tus monitor information are transferred at low speed.
Note
The communications load to the nodes must be within the Units’ allowed com-
munications bandwidth.
Communicating with FINS
Messages (FINS/TCP and
FINS/UDP)
Data can be exchanged with other OMRON FA devices using SEND, RECV,
and CMND instructions from the ladder program, because EtherNet/IP sup-
ports OMRON’s standard FINS message communications services.
There are two kinds of message services, using UDP/IP and TCP/IP (called
FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP), allowing flexible data exchange for different appli-
cations.
Note
There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS messages to OMRON
Ethernet Units (CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21) in an Ethernet network.
Network Connections with
Controller Link
Mutual connections of Controller Link and EtherNet/IP are also supported
(using the FINS communications service). The Controller Link connection
allows a PLC on the Controller Link network to be monitored from a PLC on
the EtherNet/IP network. Conversely, data can be exchanged with a PLC on
the EtherNet/IP network from a PLC on the Controller Link network.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit Features
Section 1-1
FTP Server
A built-in FTP server is provided to enable transferring files in the PLC to and
from a host computer. This enables transferring large amounts of data from a
client without any additional ladder programming.
Automatic PLC Clock
Adjustment
The clocks built into PLCs connected to Ethernet can be automatically
adjusted to the time of the clock in the SNTP server. If all of the clocks in the
system are automatically adjusted to the same time, time stamps can be used
to analyze various production histories.
Note
A separate SNTP server is necessary to automatically adjust the PLC clocks.
Manage the Network with
an SNMP Manager
Internal status information from the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port can be passed to network management software that uses an SNMP
manager.
Note
A separate SNMP manager is necessary for network management.
Specify Servers with Host
Names
DNS client functionality allows you to use host names instead of IP addresses
to specify SNTP servers and SNMP managers. This is useful, for example,
when server IP addresses change for system revisions because the IP
addresses are automatically found when host names are used.
Note
(1) A separate DNS server is necessary to use host names with the DNS cli-
ent.
(2) The DNS server is specified directly using its IP address.
Set Classless IP Address
with CIDR
A subnet mask can be set to use classless IP addresses, allowing more flexi-
bility in address settings.
Plentiful Troubleshooting
Functions
A variety of functions are provided to quickly identify and handle errors.
• Self-diagnosis at power ON
• PING command to check the connection with another node
• Error Log functions record the time of occurrence and other error details
Note
The CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) is a shared industrial protocol for the
OSI application layer. The CIP is used in networks such as EtherNet/IP, Con-
trolNet, and DeviceNet. Data can be routed easily between networks that are
based on the CIP, so a transparent network can be easily configured from the
field device level to the host level.
The CIP has the following advantages.
• Destination nodes are specified by a relative path, without fixed routing
tables.
• The CIP uses the producer/consumer model. Nodes in the network are
arranged on the same level and it is possible to communicate with
required devices whenever it is necessary.
The consumer node will receive data sent from a producer node when the
connection ID in the packet indicates that the node requires the data.
Since the producer can send the same data with the same characteristics
in a multicast (either multicast or unicast can be selected), the time
required for the transfer is fixed and not dependent on the number of con-
sumer nodes.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Devices Required for Constructing a Network
Section 1-2
1-2 Devices Required for Constructing a Network
The basic configuration for an EtherNet/IP System consists of one switching
hub to which nodes are attached in star configuration using twisted-pair cable.
CX-One Support
Software
(3) Switching hub
(2) Twisted-pair cable
(1) Built-in EtherNet/IP port on
CJ2 CPU Unit
100 m
max.
(1) CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP
Unit for CS-series
(1) CJ1W-EIP21
EtherNet/IP Unit
(CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/
CJ2M-CPU3@)
Ethernet (LAN) port
CS-series
PLC
CJ-series
PLC
CJ-series
PLC
The devices shown in the following table are required to configure a network
with CS1W-EIP21 and CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Units or the built-in EtherNet/
IP port in CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Units.
Network device
Contents
(1) CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP These are Communications Units or built-in ports
Units for CS-series PLCs, that connect a CS-series or CJ-series PLC to an Eth-
CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP erNet/IP network.
Units for CJ-series PLCs,
or built-in EtherNet/IP port
in CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/
CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Units
(2) Twisted-pair cable
The twisted-pair cable connects EtherNet/IP Units or
built-in EtherNet/IP ports to the switching hub, with
an RJ45 Modular Connector at each end.
Use an STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of category
5, 5c, or higher.
(3) Switching Hub
This is a relay device that connects multiple nodes in
a star-shaped LAN.
Recommended
Switching Hubs
For details on recommended devices for constructing a network, refer to 2-3-1
Recommended Network Devices.
Note
If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet/IP tag data links (cyclic communica-
tions), the network’s communications load will increase, data collisions will
occur frequently, and stable communications will be impossible. Always use a
switching hub when using tag data links in the network.
1-3 Support Software Required to Construct a Network
This section describes the Support Software that is required to construct an
EtherNet/IP network. Make the tag data link settings and Unit setup settings
for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. Both of these settings are
stored in the EtherNet/IP Unit’s non-volatile memory (See note.). Support
Software is provided for each, as described below.
Note
Unlike the Ethernet Units, the EtherNet/IP Unit’s TCP/IP settings are not
stored in the CPU Unit’s CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area. The settings are
stored in the EtherNet/IP Unit itself.
Unit Setup: CX-
Programmer
The CX-Programmer is used to set basic parameters, such as the local IP
address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port and the subnet
mask. (The CX-Programmer is included in the CX-One.)
The CX-Programmer can also be used to check if data I/O is being performed
correctly for tag data links.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Support Software Required to Construct a Network
Section 1-3
Computer
CX-Programmer
EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in
Edit Parameters
Dialog Box
EtherNet/IP port
Unit settings
(Built-in non-volatile memory)
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446) for informa-
tion on the CX-Programmer.
Tag Data Link Settings:
Network Configurator
The Network Configurator is used to set the tag data links for the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. (The Network Configurator is included in CX-
One version 3.0 or higher.) The main functions of the Network Configurator
are given below.
1) Setting and Monitoring Tag Data Links (Connections)
The network device configuration and tag data links (connections) can be cre-
ated and edited. After connecting to the network, the device configuration and
tag data link settings can be uploaded and monitored.
2) Multivendor Device Connections
EDS files can be installed and deleted to enable constructing, setting, and
managing networks that contain EtherNet/IP devices from other companies.
The IP addresses of EtherNet/IP devices can also be changed.
Computer
Network Configurator
EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port
Edit Device
Parameters
Dialog Box
Tag Data Link Settings
(Built-in non-volatile memory)
Transferred
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
For details on the Network Configurator, refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link
Functions.
Routing Table Settings:
CX-Integrator
Propriety OMRON FINS network system can be constructed from OMRON
Communications Units. When FINS services are used, the CX-Integrator
allows you to set routing tables to define transmission paths. (The CX-Integra-
tor is included in the CX-One.) If FINS services are not used, then routing
tables are not required.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Services Overview
Section 1-4
Personal computer
running Windows
CX-Integrator
Routing table
settings
EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port
Routing Table Area
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Refer to the CX-Integrator Operation Manual (Cat. No. W464) for information
on the CX-Integrator.
1-4 Communications Services Overview
The following communications services are supported.
CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) Communications Services
1) Tag Data Links (Cyclic Communications)
A program is not required to perform cyclic data exchanges with other devices
in the EtherNet/IP network.
Normally, the tag data links in an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
are started by grouping the tags created with the Network Configurator into a
tag set, and establishing a connection with the target device using that group
of tags. One connection is used per group (tag set). Up to 32 connections for
the CJ2M and up to 256 connections for other CPU Units) can be registered.
The following table gives the tag and tag set specifications.
Tags
CJ2M-CPU3@
Tag sets
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ2M-CPU3@
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
Total size of all tags ≤
184,832 words
Total size of all tags ≤ 640
words
Maximum size of 1 tag set ≤ Maximum size of 1 tag set ≤
722 words
20 words
(The maximum size is 721
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
(The maximum size is 19
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
Maximum size of 1 tag ≤ 722 Maximum size of 1 tag ≤ 20 Number of tags per tag set ≤ 8
words
words
(7 tags/tag set when the tag set includes the PLC status)
(The maximum size is 721
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
(The maximum size is 19
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
Note Input and output variables cannot be combined.
Number of registrable tags ≤ Number of registrable tags ≤ Number of registrable tag
256 32 sets ≤ 256
Number of registrable tag
sets ≤ 32
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Services Overview
Section 1-4
Connection information
• Target IP address
• Target tag set
• Originator tag set
• Packet interval (RPI)
Connection
Tag Set (Inputs)
Tag Set (Outputs)
Tag set name: SP1_IN
Tag set name: SP1_IN
PLC Status
Tag a
Tag b
Tag c
:
PLC Status
Tag i
Tag ii
Data flow
Tag g
Target
device
Originator
device
EtherNet/IP
Note
In this example, a connection is established with the originator’s tag list con-
taining tags a to g (inputs), which are grouped in a tag set called SP1_IN, and
the target’s tag list containing tags i and ii (outputs), which are grouped in a
tag set called SP1_OUT.
2) Message Communications (Unconnected Message Service)
User-specified CIP commands can be sent to devices on the EtherNet/IP net-
work. CIP commands, such as those for reading and writing data, can be sent
and their responses received by executing the CMND instruction from the CS/
CJ-series CPU Unit’s user program (without using a connection).
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
CMND
CIP command
Ethernet
(EtherNet/IP)
Response
CIP messages (CIP commands and responses) can also be transferred to
another CIP-based network via the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port using the CIP routing function for message communications.
In the CS/CJ Series, CIP routing is possible only through two EtherNet/IP
Units or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Services Overview
Section 1-4
EtherNet/IP
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
Ethernet
(EtherNet/IP), etc.
EtherNet/IP Unit
FINS
Communications
Service
FINS commands can be sent to or received from other PLCs or computers on
the same Ethernet network by executing SEND(090), RECV(098), or
CMND(490) instructions in the ladder diagram program. This enables various
control operations such as the reading and writing of I/O memory between
PLCs, mode changes, and file memory operations.
Note
There are no particular restrictions when sending FINS messages to OMRON
Ethernet Units (CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21) in an Ethernet network.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
UDP or TCP
UDP or TCP
FINS
IP
FINS
IP
CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
Ethernet Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
User program
SEND(090),
RECV(098), or
CMND(490)
instruction
Various control operations (such as the reading and writing of I/O memory
between PLCs, mode changes, and file memory operations) can be executed
from the host computer by sending the corresponding FINS command with a
UDP/IP or TCP/IP header attached.
For example, it is possible to connect online via Ethernet from FINS communi-
cations applications such as the CX-Programmer, and to perform remote pro-
gramming and monitoring. (See note.)
Note
Use CX-Programmer version 4.0 to use TCP/IP. For lower versions of CX-Pro-
grammer, FinsGateway Version 2003 or higher is required to use TCP/IP.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Services Overview
Section 1-4
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
UDP or TCP
IP
FINS
CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
The FINS gateway function enables access to PLCs on not only the same
Ethernet network but on various other networks, including SYSMAC LINK and
Controller Link.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configurator Overview
Section 1-5
1-5 Network Configurator Overview
1-5-1 Overview
The Network Configurator Ver. 3.0 or higher is a software package designed
for building, setting, and controlling a multi-vendor EtherNet/IP Network using
OMRON's EtherNet/IP. It is included in CX-One version 4.0 or higher. The
Network Configurator provides the following functions for building, setting, and
controlling EtherNet/IP.
Network Control
The Network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether
the Network Configurator is online or offline. The Network configuration can
be read from a file or the network.
Hardware (EDS File)
Control
EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted.
1-5-2 Network Configurator Requirements
Item
Specification
Operating environment
Refer to the CX-One Setup Manual (W463).
CXONE-AL@@C-V4/CXONE-AL@@D-V4
CS1/CJ1
Network
CJ2
connection
method
Serial interface
Ethernet interface
CPU Unit’s Peripheral or RS-232C port
EtherNet/IP Unit’s Ethernet port
CPU Unit’s USB or RS-232C port
CPU Unit’s Ethernet port
EtherNet/IP Unit’s Ethernet port
Location on Network
A single node address is used (only when directly connected to EtherNet/IP).
Number of Units that can be
connected to Network
A single Network Configurator per network (More than one Configurator cannot be
used in the same system.)
Main func- Network control
• The network configuration can be created and edited regardless of whether the Net-
work Configurator is online or offline.
tions
functions
• The network configuration can be read from a file or the network.
Hardware control
functions
The EDS files used by the Network Configurator can be installed and deleted.
Supported file formats
Configurator network configuration files (*.nvf)
Configuration files (*.ncf) created using the Network Configurator for EtherNet/IP
(version 2) can be imported by selecting External Data - Import from the File
Menu.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configurator Overview
Section 1-5
1-5-3 Precautions When Using the Network Configurator
Only an OMRON EtherNet/IP Unit can be set as the originator for a connec-
tion using the Network Configurator.
• The Network Configurator can be connected to the EtherNet/IP network
through the following ports:
• CS1/CJ1-series CPU Unit’s serial port (peripheral or RS-232C) or
Ethernet port on EtherNet/IP Unit
• CJ2-series CPU Unit’s serial port (USB or RS-232C), Ethernet port on
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
• The Network Configurator can be connected directly to the EtherNet/IP
network from the computer’s Ethernet port. When connecting directly to
the EtherNet/IP network, an Ethernet port must be set up in the computer
in advance. In this case, the Network Configurator will be connected to
the EtherNet/IP network as a single node. If there isn’t an unused node
address available, the Network Configurator can’t be connected directly to
the EtherNet/IP network.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Configurator Overview
Section 1-5
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 2
Unit Specifications
This section provides the specifications of EtherNet/IP Units and introduces recommended network configuration devices.
2-1 EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-3 Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-5 Software Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Nomenclature and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Selecting the Network Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Recommended Network Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Network Devices Manufactured by OMRON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Switching Hub Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 Switching Hub Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
14
14
17
19
20
21
21
26
28
28
28
28
29
29
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
2-1 EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
Specifications
2-1-1 General Specifications
The general specifications conform to those of the CS-series and CJ-series
PLCs.
2-1-2 Unit Specifications
CS-series EtherNet/IP Units
Item
Specifications
Model number
Type
CS1W-EIP21
100Base-TX (See note.)
CS-series PLCs
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
Mounting location
CS-series CPU Bus Unit
CPU Rack or Expansion Rack
Number of Units that can be
mounted
8 max. (including Expansion Racks)
CPU Unit
Allocated CIO Area
25 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
words used words (CPU Bus Unit
words)
These words contain control bits and flags, the target node PLC’s operating and
error information, Unit status, communications status, registered/normal target
node information, and FINS/TCP connection status.
Allocated DM Area
words (CPU Bus Unit
words)
100 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
These words contain the IP address display/setting area
User-set area
Any usable data area words
Target node PLC’s operating and error information, and registered/normal target
node information
CPU Bus Unit System Not used.
Setup
Non-volatile memory within Ether-
Net/IP Unit (See note.)
The following settings are stored in the EtherNet/IP Unit’s non-volatile memory.
Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units, the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU
Unit is not used for these settings.
1. Unit setup (communications settings for the EtherNet/IP Unit, such as the IP ad-
dress, DNS server settings, host name, baud rate, FINS/UDP settings, and FINS/
TCP settings)
2. Tag data link settings (device parameters)
Transfer
specifica-
tions
Media access method CSMA/CD
Modulation method
Transmission paths
Baud rate
Baseband
Star form
100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX)
Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e
Transmission media
Transmission distance 100 m (distance between hub and node)
Number of cascade
connections
There is no limitation when a switching hub is used.
Current consumption (Unit)
Weight
410 mA max. at 5 V DC
171 g max.
Dimensions
35 × 130 × 101 mm (W × H × D)
Other general specifications
Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CS-series
Note
If tag data links are being used, use 100Base-TX. Otherwise, 10Base-T can
be used, but this is not recommended.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
Item
Specifications
Model number
Type
CJ1W-EIP21
100Base-TX (See note.)
CJ-series PLCs
Applicable PLCs
Unit classification
Mounting location
CJ-series CPU Bus Unit
CPU Rack or Expansion Rack
8 max. (including Expansion Racks)
Number of Units that can be
mounted
Note Up to seven EtherNet/IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP CPU
Unit. Up to two EtherNet/IP Units can be connected to a CJ2M CPU Unit.
CPU Unit
Allocated CIO Area 25 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
words used words (CPU Bus
Unit words)
These words contain control bits and flags, the target node PLC’s operating and error
information, Unit status, communications status, registered/normal target node infor-
mation, and FINS/TCP connection status.
Allocated DM Area
words (CPU Bus
Unit words)
100 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
These words contain the IP address display/setting area.
User-set area
Any usable data area words
Target node PLC’s operating and error information, and registered/normal target
node information
CPU Bus Unit Sys-
tem Setup
Not used.
Non-volatile memory within Ether- The following settings are stored in the EtherNet/IP Unit’s non-volatile memory.
Net/IP Unit (See note.)
Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units, the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU
Unit is not used for these settings.
1. Unit Setup (communications settings for the EtherNet/IP Unit, such as the IP ad-
dress, DNS server settings, host name, baud rate, FINS/UDP settings, and FINS/
TCP settings)
2. Tag data link settings (device parameters)
Transfer
specifica-
tions
Media access
method
CSMA/CD
Modulation method
Baseband
Transmission paths Star form
Baud rate
100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX)
Transmission media Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e
Transmission dis-
tance
100 m (distance between hub and node)
Number of cascade There is no limitation when a switching hub is used.
connections
Current consumption (Unit)
Weight
410 mA max. at 5 V DC
94 g max.
Dimensions
31 × 90 × 65 mm (W × H × D)
Other general specifications
Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ-series.
Note
If tag data links are being used, use 100Base-TX. Otherwise, 10Base-T can
be used, but this is not recommended.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
CJ2 CPU Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
Item
Specifications
CJ2M-CPU3@
Model number
Type
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
100Base-TX (See note.)
Unit classification
CJ2 CPU Unit built-in port (CJ2 CPU Bus Unit)
CPU Unit Allocated CIO Area 25 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
words used words (CPU Bus
Unit words)
These words contain control bits and flags, the target node PLC’s operating and error
information, Unit status, communications status, registered/normal target node infor-
mation, and FINS/TCP connection status.
Allocated DM Area
words (CPU Bus
Unit words)
100 words/Unit (one unit number’s words)
These words contain the IP address display/setting area.
User-set area
Any usable data area words
Target node PLC’s operating and error information, and registered/normal target
node information
CPU Bus Unit Sys-
tem Setup
Not used.
Non-volatile memory for the CJ2
built-in EtherNet/IP port
The following settings are stored in the non-volatile memory for the built-in EtherNet/
IP port.
Note Unlike the regular Ethernet Units, the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area in the CPU
Unit is not used for these settings.
1. Unit Setup (communications settings for the built-in EtherNet/IP port, such as the
IP address, DNS server settings, host name, baud rate, FINS/UDP settings, and
FINS/TCP settings)
2. Tag data link settings (device parameters)
Transfer
specifica-
tions
Media access
method
CSMA/CD
Modulation method
Baseband
Transmission paths Star form
Baud rate
100 Mbit/s (100Base-TX)
Transmission media Shielded twisted-pair (STP) cable
Categories: 100 Ω at 5, 5e
Transmission dis-
tance
100 m (distance between hub and node)
Number of cascade There is no limitation when a switching hub is used.
connections
Current consumption (Unit)
Weight
For CJ2 CPU Units, refer to the CJ2 CPU Hardware Operation Manual (W472).
Dimensions
Other general specifications
Other specifications conform to the general specifications of the CJ2 or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port CJ2 CPU Unit.
Note
If tag data links are being used, use 100Base-TX. Otherwise, 10Base-T can
be used, but this is not recommended.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
2-1-3 Communications Specifications
Item
Number of connections 256
CS1/CJ1
CJ2H
CJ2M
CIP
service links
(Cyclic
Tag data
32
Packet interval (refresh 0.5 to 10,000 ms (in 0.5-ms units)
cycle)
1 to 10,000 ms (in 0.5-
ms units)
Can be set independently for each connection.
communi-
cations)
Can be set indepen-
dently for each connec-
tion.
(Data is refreshed over the network at the preset
interval and does not depend on the number of
nodes.)
(Data is refreshed over
the network at the pre-
set interval and does
not depend on the
number of nodes.)
Allowed communica-
tions bandwidth per
Unit
6000 pps (See note 1.)
3000 pps (See note 1.)
Note Including the heartbeat.
Note Including the
heartbeat.
Number of tags that
can be registered
256
32
Tag types
CIO Area, DM Area, EM Area, Holding Area, Work Area, and network
symbols (See note 8.)
Number of tags per
connection (= 1 tag
set)
8 (7 tags when the tag set contains the PLC status)
Maximum link data size 184,832 words
per node
640 words
20 words
Maximum data size per 252 words or 722 words (See note 2.)
connection
Note Data synchronicity is maintained within
Note Data synchronic-
ity is maintained
within each con-
nection.
each connection.
Number of registrable 256
32
tag sets
(1 connection = 1 tag set)
(1 connection = 1 tag
set)
Maximum size of 1 tag 722 words
20 words
set
(The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag set
contains the PLC status.)
(The PLC status uses 1
word when the tag set
contains the PLC sta-
tus.)
Maximum number of
tags that can be
refreshed per CPU Unit 19
cycle (See note 3.)
Output/Transmission
(CPU → EtherNet/IP): (CPU → EtherNet/IP): (CPU → EtherNet/IP):
Output/Transmission
Output/Transmission
256
32
Input/Reception
Input/Reception
Input/Reception
(EtherNet/IP → CPU): (EtherNet/IP → CPU): (EtherNet/IP → CPU):
20 (See note 4.)
256
32
Data that can be
Output/Transmission
Output/Transmission
Output/Transmission
refreshed per CPU Unit (CPU → EtherNet/IP): (CPU → EtherNet/IP): (CPU → EtherNet/IP):
cycle (See note 3.)
7,405 words
6,432 words
640 words
Input/Reception
Input/Reception
Input/Reception
(EtherNet/IP → CPU): (EtherNet/IP → CPU): (EtherNet/IP → CPU):
7,405 words 6,432 words 640 words
Changing tag data link Supported (See note 5.)
parameters during
operation
Multicast packet filter
function (See note 6.)
Supported
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
Item
Class 3 (connected)
CS1/CJ1
CJ2H
CJ2M
CIP
Explicit
Number of connections: 128
service messaging
UCMM (unconnected) Number of clients that can communicate at one Number of clients that
time:
32 max.
can communicate at
one time:
16 max.
Number of servers that can communicate at one
time:
32 max.
Number of servers that
can communicate at
one time:
16 max.
CIP routing
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
FINS service
(See note 7.)
FINS/UDP
FINS/TCP
Agent
Supported
16 connections max.
SNMPv1, SNMPv2c
MIB-II
SNMP
MIB
EtherNet/IP conformance test
Ethernet interface
Conforms to A5
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX
Auto Negotiation or fixed settings
Note
(1) In this case, pps means “packets per second” and indicates the number
of packets that can be processed in one second.
(2) To use 505 to 1,444 bytes as the data size, the system must support the
Large Forward Open standard (an optional CIP specification). The SYS-
MAC CS/CJ-series Units support this standard, but before connecting to
nodes of other companies, confirm that those devices also support it.
(3) If the maximum data size is exceeded, the data refreshing with the CPU
Unit will extend over two or more cycles.
(4) If status layout is selected in the user settings, the maximum number of
tags that can be received is 19 tags.
(5) If parameters are changed in the EtherNet/IP Unit, however, the Ether-
Net/IP Unit will be restarted. When other nodes are communicating with
the affected node, the communications will temporarily time out and au-
tomatically recover later.
(6) Because the EtherNet/IP Unit is equipped with an IGMP client (version
2), unnecessary multicast packets can be filtered by using a switching
hub that supports IGMP snooping.
(7) The EtherNet/IP Unit uses the TCP/UDP port numbers shown in the fol-
lowing table.
Service
Tag data links
Class 3, UCMM
DNS
Protocol Port number
Remarks
Fixed value
UDP
2222
44818
53
TCP/UDP
UDP
FINS/UDP service UDP
FINS/TCP service TCP
9600
9600
20, 21
123
Port numbers in the Unit
Setup can be changed with
the CX-Programmer.
FTP
TCP
UDP
UDP
UDP
SNTP
SNMP
SNMP trap
161
162
(8) Network symbols can be used only with a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-
CPU3@ CPU Unit.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
2-1-4 Dimensions
CS1W-EIP21
EIP21
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
UNIT
0
NO.
NODE
0
1
NO.
×161
×160
IP ADDRESS
130 mm
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
35 mm
31 mm
101 mm
CJ1W-EIP21
65 mm
EIP21
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
4
6
UNIT
No.
2
2
C A
E
4
4
6
NODE
No.
6
2
C A
C A
E
E
x161
x160
90 mm
IP ADDRESS
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
2.7 mm
66.2 mm
90 mm
65 mm
2.7 mm
79.8 mm
74.5 mm
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Unit and Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Specifications
Section 2-1
CJ2M-CPU3@
76.16 mm
2.7 mm
90 mm
2.7 mm
62 mm
75 mm
84.5 mm
2-1-5 Software Configuration
Memory Card/
EM file memory
Interface with CPU Unit
FINS
encapsulization
FINS
FINS
Cyclic
FINS
Tag data link function
Explicit messaging
FINS Service
(FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP)
Automatic
clock adjustment
FTP
CIP
Encapsulation
UDP
TCP
ARP
ICMP
IGMP
IP
LAN controller driver
LAN controller
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
2-2 Nomenclature and Functions
2-2-1 Nomenclature and Functions
CS1W-EIP21
EIP21
MS
NS
LED Indicators
COMM
100M
10M
UNIT
Unit number
0
NO.
setting switch
NODE
Node address
setting switches
0
1
NO.
×161
×160
IP ADDRESS
Label showing
IP address
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
Backplane
Connector
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Ethernet
connector
CJ1W-EIP21
EIP21
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
LED Indicators
4
UNIT
No.
Unit number
setting switch
C
4
4
NODE
No.
Node address
setting switches
C
C
x161
x160
IP ADDRESS
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
Label showing
IP address
255.255.255.0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Ethernet
connector
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port in CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
LED Indicators
Unit number
setting switch
Node address
setting switches
Label showing
IP address
Ethernet
connector
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port in CJ2M-CPU3@
LED Indicators
Unit number
setting switch
Node address
setting switches
Label showing
IP address
Ethernet
connector
Ethernet Address Notation
A specific Ethernet address is allocated to all devices connected to the Ether-
net network. The EtherNet/IP Unit’s address is listed in 12-digit hexadecimal
on the right side of the Unit.
CS1W-EIP21
ETHERNET/IP UNIT
Lot No.
OMRON Corporation
MADE IN JAPAN
@@@@@@@@@@@@
Ethernet Address
Ethernet address (12 digits)
Note
DATA READ command. For details, refer to Appendix E FINS Commands
Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports.
(2) An IP address label is included with the EtherNet/IP Unit, so the user can
record the user-set IP address and subnet mask on the label, and affix
the label to the front of the Unit. When this label is affixed to the front of
the Unit, it is easy to confirm the Unit’s IP address and subnet mask.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
EIP21
Example label
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
IP ADDRESS
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
4
4
UNIT
No.
C
C
255.255.255.0
4
NODE
No.
C
Affix the label on the front of the
EtherNet/IP Unit, between the
node address switches and the
Ethernet connector.
x160
x161
IP ADDRESS
192.168.250.1
SUBNET MASK
255.255.255.0
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
Indicators
A EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP port is equipped with the following
indicators that indicate the operating status of the node itself and the overall
network.
CS1W-EIP21
EIP21
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
CJ1W-EIP21, CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, and CJ2M-CPU3@
EIP21
MS
NS
COMM
100M
10M
Status Indicators: MS, NS,
COMM, 100M, and 10M
The MS (Module Status) indicator indicates the status of the node itself and
the NS (Network Status) indicator indicates the status of the network.
The COMM, 100M, and 10M indicators indicate the status of Ethernet com-
munications.
The MS and NS indicators can be green or red. The COMM, 100M, and 10M
lowing table shows the meaning of these indicator conditions.
Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing for details on
using these indicators for troubleshooting.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
Indicator
Name
Color LED status
Indicated operating status
MS
Module Status Red
Lit
Fatal error
Flashing
Recoverable error
Normal
Green Lit
---
Not lit
Lit
Power supply OFF
Fatal error
NS
Network Status Red
Flashing
Recoverable error
Green Lit
Tag data link and message connections established
Tag data link and message connections not established
Offline or power supply OFF
Flashing
Not lit
---
COMM
100M
10M
Communication Yellow Lit
Not lit
Yellow Lit
Not lit
Yellow Lit
Not lit
Transferring data
Not transferring data
100 Mbps
10 Mbps
100BASE-TX link established
100BASE-TX link not established
10BASE-TX link established
10BASE-TX link not established
Seven-segment Display
When the power is turned ON (or the Unit is restarted), all of the segments will
flash twice, the IP address set in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port will be displayed on the 7-segment display just once, from right to left.
Afterwards, the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address is displayed in hexadecimal
during normal operation.
Example 1: Displaying IP Address 192.168.250.10
The IP address is displayed in decimal, flowing from right to left.
If the Unit is operating normally, the last digit of the
Unit's IP address is displayed in hexadecimal.
Flashing: The tag data link is stopped.
Lit: The tag data link is operating.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
If an error occurs, the error code will be displayed alternately with the right-
most byte of the affected device’s IP address. For details on error codes, refer
to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing.
Displaying Multiple Error Sources
• A d6 error (failed to establish connection) occurred with IP address
192.168.250.8.
• A d6 error (failed to establish connection) occurred with IP address
192.168.250.9.
• A d5 error (verification error, target nonexistent) occurred with IP address
192.168.250.64.
• A C6 error (multiple switches ON) and EA error (EtherNet/IP expansion
setting error) occurred at the local EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port, IP address 192.168.250.10.
The error code is displayed and then the last digit of the target node's
IP address is displayed in hexadecimal.
Displays errors that occurred
within the Unit.
The last digit of the Unit's IP address
is displayed in hexadecimal.
• There is no particular priority to the order in which the errors are dis-
played. All of the errors are displayed repeatedly in order.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
Right and Left Dot LEDs
If an error occurred in two or more devices with the same rightmost byte in
their IP addresses, the Right Dot LED will be lit while the devices’ error is
being displayed.
Example: Displaying the Following Errors
• A d6 error (failed to establish connection) occurred with IP address
10.0.1.8.
• A d6 error (failed to establish connection) occurred with IP address
10.0.2.8.
2-2-2 Switch Settings
Unit Number Setting
Switch
The Unit Number Setting Switch sets the unit number of the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port as a CPU Bus Unit. The unit number determines
which data area words are allocated to the Unit to contain data such as con-
trol bits, flags, status information, and connection information.
F
8
0 E
1
32
D
C
4
B
5
A
6 7 9
Setting method
One-digit hexadecimal
Setting range
0 to F
Note The unit number is factory-set to 0.
The unit number can be set to any number in the setting range (0 to F), as
long as the same number is not set on another CPU Bus Unit in the same
PLC.
Note
(1) Use a small screwdriver to make the setting, and be sure not to damage
the rotary switch.
(2) Always turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before setting the unit number.
(3) The unit number is factory-set to 0.
(4) If the same unit number is set on more than one CPU Bus Unit mounted
in a PLC, a unit number duplication error will occur in the PLC and the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port will not be able to start oper-
ating.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nomenclature and Functions
Section 2-2
Node Address Setting
Switch
The Node Address Setting Switch sets the node address of the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
0
1
X161
X160
Setting method
Two-digit hexadecimal
Setting range
01 to FE
Note The node address is factory-set to 01. With the default settings, the values set
on these switches become the last two digits of the local IP address of the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Default IP address = 192.168.250.node address
With the factory-default node address setting of 01, the default IP address is
192.168.250.1.
The node address can be set to any number in the setting range (01 to FE),
as long as the same address is not set on another node in the network.
Note
If the node address setting is changed during operation, the MS Indicator will
flash red.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Network Devices
Section 2-3
2-3 Selecting the Network Devices
2-3-1 Recommended Network Devices
The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether-
Net/IP.
Part
Maker
Model number
Inquires
Switching
Hub
Cisco Systems, Inc.
Consult the manufacturer.
Cisco Systems, Inc. Main Corpo-
rate HQ
Contec USA, Inc.
Phoenix Contact
Consult the manufacturer.
Consult the manufacturer.
CONTEC USA Inc.
Phoenix Contact USA Customer
Service
Twisted-pair
cable
100BASE-TX
Fujikura
F-LINK-E 0.5mm × 4P
Fujikura America, Inc.
---
EtherNet/IP compliant cable
STP Plug
Connectors
(Modular
plug)
Panduit Corporation
MPS588
Panduit Corporation US Headquar-
ters
Boots
Tsuko Company
MK boot (IV) LB
Tsuko Company Japan Headquar-
ters
Note
(1) Always use a switching hub when using tag data links in the network.
(2) If a repeater hub is used for EtherNet/IP tag data links (cyclic communi-
cations), the network’s communications load will increase, data collisions
will occur frequently, and stable communications will be impossible.
2-3-2 Network Devices Manufactured by OMRON
The following network devices are manufactured by OMRON for EtherNet/IP
networks.
Name
Model
Function
Number of Error detection
ports output
Switching Hub W4S1-03B
W4S1-05B
Packet priority control (QoS):
EtherNet/IP control data priority
3
5
5
None
None
Failure detection: Broadcast
storm, LSI error detection, 10/
100Base-TX, Auto-Negotiation
W4S1-05C
Provided.
2-3-3 Switching Hub Types
Unmanaged Layer 2 (L2)
Switching Hubs
These switching hubs use the Ethernet MAC address to switch ports. Ordi-
nary switching hubs have this function. Switching hub functions and settings
cannot be changed.
Managed Layer 2 (L2)
Switching Hubs
These switching hubs use the Ethernet address to switch ports. Switching hub
functions and settings can be changed using special software tools for switch-
ing hubs running on a network node. Analytical data can also be collected.
These switching hubs provide more-advanced functions that unmanaged
layer 2 switching hubs.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Network Devices
Section 2-3
2-3-4 Switching Hub Functions
This section describes the switching hub functions that are important when
using an EtherNet/IP network. When using an EtherNet/IP Unit, set the follow-
ing two functions.
• Multicast filtering
• QoS (Quality of Service) for TCP/UDP port numbers (L4)
Multicast Filtering
Multicast filtering transfers multicast packets to the specific nodes only. This
function is implemented in the switching hub as IGMP Snooping or GMRP.
“Specific nodes” are nodes equipped with an IGMP client that have made
transfer requests to the switching hub. (OMRON EtherNet/IP Units are
equipped with an IGMP client.)
When the hub does not use multicast filtering, multicast packets are sent to all
nodes, just like broadcast packets, which increases the traffic in the network.
Settings must be made in the switching hub to enable this function.
There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used.
QoS (Quality of Service)
Function for TCP/UDP
Port Numbers (L4)
This function controls the priority of packet transmissions so that packets can
be sent with higher priority to a particular IP address or TCP (UDP) port. The
TCP and UDP protocols are called transport layer protocols, leading to the
name L4 (layer 4) QoS function.
When tag data links and message communications are executed on the same
network, tag data links can be sent at higher priority to prevent problems such
as transmission delays due to message communications traffic and packet
losses due to buffer overflow. Settings must be made in the switching hub to
enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link packets.
Support for the above two functions is as follows for the different types of
switching hubs.
Hub
Multicast
filtering
L4 QoS
Remarks
Unmanaged L2 switching hub
Managed L2 switching hub
None
None
---
Provided.
Provided.
Provided.
Both functions must
be set with a special
software tool.
OMRON W4S1-series Switching
Hubs
None
L4 QoS is set using
a switch. No soft-
ware tool is neces-
sary.
Note
If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec-
tion settings to a multicast connection, multicast packets will be used. If the
connection type is set to a point-to-point connection, multicast packets will not
be used.
2-3-5 Precautions When Selecting a Switching Hub
The functions supported by the switching hub may affect tag data link trans-
mission delays and the configuration. In addition, if the switching hub supports
advanced functions, special settings are required for those functions.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Network Devices
Section 2-3
When selecting a switching hub, it is necessary to consider whether the
switching hub will be selected based on the kind and amount of communica-
tions that will be performed in the network or the kind of switching hub that you
hub.
Refer to 10-2 Adjusting the Communications Load to estimate the communi-
cations load for tag data links.
Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Types of Network Communications
Executing Tag Data Links
Only
We recommend using an L2 switching hub without multicast filtering or an L2
switching hub with multicast filtering.
Using an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering prevents increased traffic
due to unnecessary multicast packets, so the tag data links can operate at
higher speed. If either of the following conditions exists, the amount traffic will
be the same for both kinds of L2 switching hubs (with or without multicast fil-
tering).
• The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net-
work. (The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network,
just like a broadcast.)
• The tag data link settings are all one-to-one (unicast) and multicast pack-
ets cannot be used.
If multicast filters are being used, settings must be made in the switching hub.
There must be enough multicast filters for all of the networks being used.
Executing Tag Data Links
and Message
Communications
We recommend using an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering and L4 QoS.
By setting tag data links for higher-priority transmission, it is possible to pre-
vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications
traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow. Settings must be made in the
switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link
packets.
Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast
filtering function and L4 QoS function.
Selecting the Switching Hub Based on the Hub’s Supported Functions
L2 Switching Hub without
Multicast Filtering
We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag data links are exe-
cuted and any of the following conditions is met.
• The tag data links are set to share the same data with all nodes in the net-
work. (The multicast packets are transferred to all nodes in the network,
just like a broadcast.)
• The tag data link settings are all one-to-one (unicast) and multicast pack-
ets cannot be used.
• There is little traffic in the tag data links.
No special settings are required for an L2 switching hub without multicast fil-
tering.
L2 Switching Hub with
Multicast Filtering
We recommend this kind of switching hub when only tag data links are exe-
cuted and the following condition is met.
• There are many 1:N links (where N represents some number of nodes in
the network) in the tag data link settings, i.e., there are many multicast
packets used, or there is heavy traffic in the tag data links.
Special settings are required for an L2 switching hub with multicast filtering.
There must be enough multicast filters for the network being used.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Network Devices
Section 2-3
L3 Switching Hub with
Multicast Filtering and L4
QoS Functions
We recommend this kind of switching hub when both tag data links and mes-
sage communications are executed.
By setting tag data links for higher-priority transmission, it is possible to pre-
vent problems such as transmission delays due to message communications
traffic and packet losses due to buffer overflow. Settings must be made in the
switching hub to enable this function and give higher priority to tag data link
packets.
Special settings must be made in the switching hub when using the multicast
filtering function and L4 QoS function. There must be enough multicast filters
for the network being used.
Note
(1) Ask the switching hub manufacturer for setting procedures for the switch-
ing hub.
(2) Install the switching hub so that its environmental resistance capabilities
are not exceeded. Ask the switching hub manufacturer for information on
the environmental resistance of the switch hub.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting the Network Devices
Section 2-3
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 3
Installation and Initial Setup
This section explains how to install and make the initial settings required for operation of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
3-1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 CS-series EtherNet/IP Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and CJ2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port. . . .
3-3 Mounting to a PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-1 Mounting to a CS-series PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2 Mounting to a CJ-series PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-3 Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-4 Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4 Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-1 Basic Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-2 Recommended Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-3 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-4-4 Using Contact Outputs (Common to All Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5 Connecting to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-1 Ethernet Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5-2 Connecting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6 Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-1 I/O Table Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-6-3 Procedure for Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-7 Setting the Local IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-1 Setting Procedure with the CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8-2 Making TCP/IP Settings with the Network Configurator . . . . . . . .
3-9 Tag Data Link Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9-1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-10 Other Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11 Communications Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11-1 PING Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-11-2 EtherNet/IP Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Operation. . . . . . . . .
3-11-3 Host Computer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
34
36
36
37
38
38
38
39
40
41
41
41
41
43
44
44
44
46
46
46
46
50
52
52
55
57
57
61
65
65
65
65
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Initial Setup Procedures
Section 3-1
3-1 Overview of Initial Setup Procedures
3-1-1 Procedures
Initial Settings
1,2,3...
1. Set the unit number and node address with the switches on the front of the
Unit.
Refer to 3-2 Switch Settings.
2. Mount the Unit in the CPU Rack.
A maximum of seven EtherNet/IP Units can be connected to a CJ2H-
CPU@@-EIP CPU Unit (making eight EtherNet/IP ports including the built-
in EtherNet/IP port).
CPU Unit.
Refer to 3-3 Mounting to a PLC.
3. Wire the Ethernet network with twisted-pair cable.
Refer to 3-4 Network Installation and 3-5 Connecting to the Network.
4. Prepare a computer with Support Software installed on it and a serial cable
or an Ethernet cable (twisted-pair cable) to connect to the PLC. These are
required to perform network settings using the Support Software (e.g., Net-
work Configurator, CX-Programmer, and CX-Integrator).
5. Connect the PLC to the computer and create the I/O tables using the CX-
IP port on the CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@.
Refer to 3-6 Creating I/O Tables.
6. Set the IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port using
one of the following methods.
a) Using the Unit without setting the IP address:
• The default IP address is 192.168.250.Node_address.
b) Setting a particular IP address:
• If you want to store the setting in the CPU Unit, set it in the EtherNet/
IP Unit’s allocated DM area within the CPU Unit.
• If you want to store the setting in the Unit, set the IP address in the Edit
grammer, and transfer the setting to the Unit.
Refer to 3-7 Setting the Local IP Address and 3-8 TCP/IP and Link
Settings.
7. When necessary, set the following items in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box
just Time, Status Area, SNMP, and SNMP Trap
Refer to 3-10 Other Parameters.
8. When necessary, set the routing tables.
If the FINS communications service is being used and multiple network
Communications Units are mounted in the PLC, set the routing tables from
the CX-Integrator, and transfer the table.
Refer to the CX-Integrator Operation Manual (Cat. No. W464) for the set-
ting procedure.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Initial Setup Procedures
Section 3-1
Send a PING command to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Refer to 3-11 Communications Test.
Settings Required for Tag Data Link Service (Cyclic Communications)
1. Using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters
With this method, there is no flexibility in the settings, but you can easily set
conform to Controller Link data link parameters. Refer to 3-9 Tag Data Link
Parameters or SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions.
2. Using the Tag Data Link Setting Function in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters
With this method, you can set the connections that define the tag data links for
ity using both memory addresses and network variables. Refer to SECTION 6
Tag Data Link Functions for information on how to make these settings.
Settings Required for the Message Communications Service
program.
Refer to SECTION 9 Message Communications.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switch Settings
Section 3-2
3-2 Switch Settings
3-2-1 CS-series EtherNet/IP Units
Setting the Unit Number
The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than
one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC. Use a small screwdriver to
make the setting, taking care not to damage the rotary switch. The unit num-
ber is factory-set to 0.
UNIT
No.
Setting range:
0 to F
Note
(1) Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number.
(2) If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed, then I/O tables
must be created for the PLC.
the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that are set.
For details, refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations.
Setting the Node Address
When there are multiple EtherNet/IP Units or Ethernet Units connected to the
Ethernet network for the FINS communications service, the EtherNet/IP Units
are identified by node addresses. Use the node address switches (NODE
NO.) to set the node address between 01 and FE hexadecimal (1 to 254 deci-
mal). Do not set a number that has already been set for another node on the
same network.
NODE
NO.
Setting range:
01 to FE (1 to 254 decimal)
× 161
× 160
The left switch sets the sixteens digit (most significant digit) and the right
switch sets the ones digit (least significant digit). The node address is factory-
set to 01.
Note
Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address.
Relationship to IP
Addresses
When IP addresses are generated automatically (either dynamic or passive),
the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address is set to the same value as
node address value cannot be used, the IP address table method or the com-
bined method must be used for address conversion. (For details, refer to SEC-
TION 5 Determining IP Addresses.)
If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net-
work, then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more
EtherNet/IP Units. The setting, however, must be made within a range of 01 to
FE. If a value outside of this range is set, the MS indicator will light red, the 7-
segment display will indicate code H4 (node address setting error), and the
EtherNet/IP Unit will stop operating.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switch Settings
Section 3-2
3-2-2 CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and CJ2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
Setting the Unit Number
The unit number is used to identify individual CPU Bus Units when more than
one CPU Bus Unit is mounted to the same PLC. Use a small screwdriver to
make the setting, taking care not to damage the rotary switch. The unit num-
ber is factory-set to 0.
UNIT
No.
Setting range:
0 to F
Note
(1) Turn OFF the power supply before setting the unit number.
(2) If the unit number is being set for the first time or changed, then I/O tables
must be created for the PLC.
allocated in the CIO Area and DM Area according to the unit numbers that
are set. For details, refer to SECTION 4 Memory Allocations.
Setting the Node Address
With the FINS communications service, when there are multiple EtherNet/IP
Units connected to the Ethernet network, the EtherNet/IP Units are identified
by node addresses. Use the node address switches to set the node address
between 01 and FE hexadecimal (1 to 254 decimal). Do not set a number that
has already been set for another node on the same network.
NODE
Setting range:
No.
01 to FE (1 to 254 decimal)
× 16 1
× 16 0
The left switch sets the sixteens digit (most significant digit) and the right
switch sets the ones digit (least significant digit). The node address is factory-
set to 01.
Note
Turn OFF the power supply before setting the node address.
Relationship to IP
Addresses
When IP addresses are generated automatically (either dynamic or passive),
the rightmost byte of the host ID of the IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port is set to the same value as the node address. (Refer
not be used, the IP address table method or the combined method must be
used for address conversion. (For details, refer to SECTION 5 Determining IP
Addresses.)
If the FINS communications service is not being used on the Ethernet net-
work, then it is all right for the same node address to be set on two or more
EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports. The setting, however, must be
made within a range of 01 to FE. If a value outside of this range is set, the MS
indicator will light red, the 7-segment display will indicate code H4 (node
address setting error), and the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port will
stop operating.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting to a PLC
Section 3-3
3-3 Mounting to a PLC
3-3-1 Mounting to a CS-series PLC
EtherNet/IP Units can be mounted to any slot in a CS-series CPU Rack or a
CS-series Expansion CPU Rack, but the number of slots to which they can be
mounted depends on the Backplane. Up to four EtherNet/IP Units can be
mounted to a single PLC. If it is mounted in combination with other CPU Bus
Units (e.g., Controller Link Units), the maximum total number of CPU Bus
Units that can be mounted is 8.
Note
Tighten PLC Backplane mounting screws to a torque of 0.9 N⋅m, and the
Unit’s screws to a torque of 0.4 N⋅m.
CS1W-BC023/BC033/BC053/BC083/BC103 CPU Backplane
CS-series CPU Rack with
2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
Can be mounted in any slot.
2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
(Expansion Backplane not possible with 2-slot CPU Backplane.)
CS1W-BI033/BI053/BI083/BI103 CS-series Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Rack with
3, 5, 8, or 10 slots.
Up to eight Units can be mounted
to the slots shown in the diagrams
on the left.
Can be mounted in any slot.
3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
CS1W-BI033/BI053/BI083/BI103 CS-series Expansion Backplane
CS-series Expansion Rack with
3, 5, 8, or 10 slots.
Can be mounted in any slot.
CPU: CPU Unit
PS: Power Supply Unit
3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
Note
The CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit’s maximum current consumption is
410 mA. Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected
to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the
output capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
3-3-2 Mounting to a CJ-series PLC
EtherNet/IP Units can be mounted in a CJ-series CPU Rack or a CJ-series
Expansion CPU Rack. Connect the EtherNet/IP Unit in any of the positions
shown below using the sliders on the top and bottom of the Unit. Up to seven
EtherNet/IP Units can be mounted for a CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP CPU Unit
(enabling up to eight EtherNet/IP ports if you include the built-in EtherNet/IP
port). Up to two EtherNet/IP Units can be mounted for a CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU
Unit.
If EtherNet/IP Units are mounted in combination with other CPU Bus Units
(e.g., Controller Link Units), the maximum total number of CPU Bus Units that
can be mounted is 16.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting to a PLC
Section 3-3
End cover
10 Units max.
CPU Rack
P
S
C
P
U
I
C
End cover
10 Units max.
10 Units max.
10 Units max.
Expansion Backplane
P
S
I
I
Up to eight EtherNet/IP
Units can be mounted.
End cover
Expansion Backplane
P
S
I
I
End cover
Expansion Backplane
P
S
I
I
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IC: I/O Control Unit
II: I/O Interface Unit
Note The CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit’s maximum current consumption is
410 mA. Be sure that the total current consumption of all the Units connected
to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane does not exceed the
output capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
3-3-3 Mounting
Mount the EtherNet/IP Unit to the Backplane using the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. Hook the claw on the top of the Unit onto the Backplane.
Claw
Backplane
2. Insert the Unit into Backplane connectors and securely tighten the screw
at the bottom of the Unit. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.4 N·m.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mounting to a PLC
Section 3-3
3. When removing the Unit, first loosen the screw at the bottom of the Unit.
Fixing screws
Note
When mounting the Unit, provide the clearance shown below to facilitate easy
mounting or dismounting.
Duct
20 mm min.
Backplane
20 mm min.
Duct
Phillips screwdriver
3-3-4 Handling Precautions
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before mounting or dis-
mounting a Unit or connecting or disconnecting cables.
• Provide separate conduits or ducts for the I/O lines to prevent noise from
high-tension lines or power lines.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if wire clippings or other foreign matter enters the
Unit. Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper
heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
Remove the label after wiring.
MS
NS
COM
100M
M
10M
UNI
NO
T
.
0
1
NO
DE
NO
.
0
161
160
IP ADDRE
SS
192.168.250.1
SUB
25N5E.2T5M5A.2S5K5.0
10
1
0B
A
S
SE
E
-T
-T
X
0
BA
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Installation
Section 3-4
3-4 Network Installation
3-4-1 Basic Installation Precautions
• Take the greatest care when installing the Ethernet System, being sure to
follow ISO 8802-3 specifications. You must obtain a copy of these specifi-
cations and be sure you understand them before attempting to install an
Ethernet System. Unless you are already experienced in installing com-
munications systems, we strongly recommend that you employ a profes-
sional to install your system.
• Do not install Ethernet equipment near sources of noise. If a noisy envi-
ronment is unavoidable, take adequate measures against noise interfer-
ence, such as installing network components in grounded metal cases or
using optical cable in the system.
• When installing an EtherNet/IP network that combines an information sys-
tem with the control system, and the communications load may be heavy
due to tag data links, we recommend configuring the network so that the
load does not affect communications. For example, install the tag data
links in a segment that is separate from the information network.
Note The maximum current consumption of the CS1W-EIP21 and CJ1W-EIP21
EtherNet/IP Units is 410 mA. Be sure that the total current consumption of all
the Units connected to the same CPU Backplane or Expansion Backplane
does not exceed the output capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
3-4-2 Recommended Products
The following table shows the devices recommended for use with the Ether-
Net/IP Unit 2-3 Selecting the Network Devices.
3-4-3 Precautions
Precautions on Laying Twisted-pair Cable
• Noise resistance may be reduced by ground loops, which can occur due
to improper shield connections and grounding. Ground the shield at one
location, as shown in the following diagram.
• Do not connect the shield to the EtherNet/IP Unit’s connector.
• If a cable connects two hubs, connect the shields at only one end.
Hub
Hub
Connect shield.
Connector
Connector
Connector Connector Connector
Do not connect shield.
GR
GR
EIP
Power
Unit
Supply
Unit
STP
Connector
GR
STP
terminal
(Shield)
(Shield)
EIP
Unit
Power
Supply
Unit
Connector
GR
STP
terminal
(Shield)
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Installation
Section 3-4
• Press the cable connector in firmly until it locks into place at both the
switching hub and the EtherNet/IP Unit.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable together with high-voltage lines.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable near devices that generate noise.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to high temperatures
or high humidity.
• Do not lay the twisted-pair cable in locations subject to excessive dirt and
dust or to oil mist or other contaminants.
Switching Hub Installation Environment Precautions
• Do not ground the switching hub in the same location as a drive-system
component such as an inverter.
• Always use a dedicated power supply for the switching hub’s power sup-
ply. Do not use the same power supply used for other equipment, such as
an I/O power supply, motor power supply, or control power supply.
• Before installation, check the switching hub’s environment-resistance
specifications, and use a switching hub appropriate for the ambient condi-
tions. Contact the switching hub manufacturer for details on switching
hub’s environment-resistance specifications.
Switching Hub Connection Methods
Connect two hubs to each other as follows: Connect an MDI port to an MDI-X
port with a straight cable; connect two MDI ports with a cross cable; and
connect two MDI-X ports with a cross cable.
Note
It is very difficult to distinguish cross cables and straight cables by appear-
ance. Incorrect cables will cause communications to fail. We recommend
using cascade connections with straight cables whenever possible.
MDI ports
Straight cable
Cross cable
MDI-X port
(cross)
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Switching
Hub
Some switching hubs can automatically distinguish between MDI and MDI-X.
When this kind of switching hub is being used, straight cable can be used
between switching hubs.
Note Adjust the link settings of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port to
match the communications settings of the connected switching hub. If the set-
tings do not match, the link will become unstable and prevent normal commu-
nications. The following table shows the allowed settings for each switching
hub communications mode.
Switching hub setting
EtherNet/IP Unit setting
10 Mbps (fixed) 100 Mbps (fixed)
Auto-
negotiation
Full
Half
Full
Half
duplex
duplex
duplex
duplex
Auto-negotiation
Best
---
OK
---
OK
10 Mbps Full duplex ---
OK
---
---
---
---
---
---
(fixed)
Half duplex OK
OK
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Network Installation
Section 3-4
Switching hub setting
EtherNet/IP Unit setting
10 Mbps (fixed) 100 Mbps (fixed)
Auto-
negotiation
Full
Half
Full
Half
duplex
duplex
duplex
duplex
100 Mbps Full duplex ---
---
---
---
---
Best
---
---
OK
(fixed)
Half duplex OK
Note Best = Recommended; OK = Allowed; --- = Not allowed.
3-4-4 Using Contact Outputs (Common to All Units)
When an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port and Contact Output Unit
are mounted in the same Rack or connected to the same PLC, communica-
tions errors may occur due to noise generated by the contact outputs. Use
one or more of the following measures when installing Contact Output Units
and EtherNet/IP Units on the same Rack.
Mounting Location
Mount (or connect) any Contact Output Units as far away from the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port as possible.
Contact Output Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
To switching hub
Contact outputs
Cable Location
Separate the transceiver cable or twisted-pair cable connecting the EtherNet/
IP Unit as far from the wiring to the Contact Output Units as possible. The
coaxial cable must also be placed as far away from the Contact Output Units
and their wiring as possible.
Contact outputs
EtherNet/IP Unit
Contact Output Unit
To switching hub
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Network
Section 3-5
3-5 Connecting to the Network
3-5-1 Ethernet Connectors
The following standards and specifications apply to the connectors for the
Ethernet twisted-pair cable.
• Electrical specifications: Conforming to IEEE802.3 standards.
• Connector structure:
RJ45 8-pin Modular Connector
(conforming to ISO 8877)
Connector pin
Signal name
Abbr. Signal direction
1
Transmission data +
Transmission data –
Reception data +
Not used.
TD+
TD–
RD+
---
Output
Output
Input
---
2
3
4
5
Not used.
---
---
6
Reception data –
Not used.
RD–
---
Input
---
7
8
Not used.
---
---
Hood
Frame ground
FG
---
3-5-2 Connecting the Cable
!Caution Turn OFF the PLC’s power supply before connecting or disconnecting twisted-
pair cable.
!Caution Allow enough space for the bending radius of the twisted-pair cable as shown
in below.
35 mm
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting to the Network
Section 3-5
1,2,3...
1. Lay the twisted-pair cable.
2. Connect the cable to the switching hub. Be sure to press in the cable until
it locks into place.
3. Connect the twisted-pair cable to the connector on the EtherNet/IP Unit.
Be sure to press the connectors (both the switching hub side and Ethernet
side) until they lock into place.
Example: CS1W-EIP21
RJ45 Modular Connector
EtherNet/IP Unit
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating I/O Tables
Section 3-6
3-6 Creating I/O Tables
3-6-1 I/O Table Overview
I/O tables are used to identify Units mounted to the PLC, and to allocate I/O to
them. With CS-series and CJ-series PLCs, whenever there is a change to the
Unit configuration it is necessary to create I/O tables and register the mounted
Units in the CPU Unit.
The I/O tables can be created in the following ways.
• Using the CX-Programmer offline.
• Using the CX-Programmer online to create the I/O table based on the
Units mounted to the PLC.
• Using the Programming Console to create the I/O table based on the
Units mounted to the PLC.
• Using the CPU Unit's automatic I/O allocation at startup. (This method is
available for the CJ Series only.)
3-6-2 Connecting Programming Devices to the PLC
To create the I/O tables, connect a Programming Device (such as a CX-Pro-
grammer or Programming Console) to the PLC.
Applicable Programming Devices
The following Programming Devices can be used with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Programming Console
Model number
Key Sheet (required)
Recommended cable (required)
C200H-PRO27-E
CS1W-KS001-E
CS1W-CN224 (cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (cable length: 6.0 m)
CQM1-PRO01-E
CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.1 m)
Note A Programming Console cannot be used with the CJ2H-CPU@@(-EIP)
and CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Units. Use the CX-Programmer.
CX-Programmer
For information on how to connect and operate the CX-Programmer, refer to
the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446).
Connecting a Programming Console
To connect a Programming Console, attach a CS/CJ-series Key Sheet and
then connect the Console to the CPU Unit’s peripheral port. (It cannot be con-
nected to the RS-232C port.)
3-6-3 Procedure for Creating I/O Tables
Programming Console
This section provides the procedure for creating the I/O tables using a Pro-
gramming Console. For details on using the Programming Console, refer to
the Programming Console’s operation manual.
Note
(1) With the CJ Series, it is necessary to create I/O tables only when the user
is allocating I/O manually. With the CS Series, it is always necessary to
create I/O tables.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating I/O Tables
Section 3-6
(2) With the CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP and CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Units, the built-in
EtherNet/IP port is set in the I/O tables by default and cannot be changed.
It is not necessary to register it in the I/O tables.
Use the following procedure to create the I/O tables.
Initial screen
CH
*DM
SHIFT
000000 I/O TBL ?
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT
????
WRITE
Password
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
(Save or clear the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.)
or
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
CX-Programmer (Version 8.0 or Higher)
This section describes how to register an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port in the I/O tables using the CX-Programmer (version 8.0 or higher).
Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446) for details on
the operating procedures.
This section describes how to register the CJ1W-EIP21 in the I/O tables by
creating the I/O tables on a computer with the CX-Programmer. In this
example, the computer is connected to the PLC using a serial cable. The
CJ1W-EIP21 is connected to a CJ1H-CPU67 CPU Unit.
1,2,3...
1. Start the CX-Programmer, and then select PLC − Auto Online − Direct
Connection from the menus.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating I/O Tables
Section 3-6
2. The Direct Online Dialog Box will be displayed. Select a serial connection,
select the name of the applicable computer serial port, and then press the
Connect Button.
3. If the connection process is successful, the system will be connected on-
line. Here, check the operating mode of the PLC. If the operating mode is
not PROGRAM mode, change the mode by selecting PLC − Operating
Mode − Program from the menus.
4. Double-click IO Table and Unit Setup Icon in the project workspace in the
CX-Programmer. The PLC IO Table Window will be displayed. Select Op-
tions − Create from the menus.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating I/O Tables
Section 3-6
5. The EtherNet/IP Unit will be displayed at the position it is mounted in the
PLC.
Note If it is not displayed, select Options − Transfer from PLC from the
menus.
Note Creating I/O tables is not required if the built-in EtherNet/IP port of a CJ2 CPU
Unit is used. It is registered as a built-in port/Inner Board with a model number
of CJ2B-EIP21 for the CJ2H and a model number of CJ2M-EIP21 for the
CJ2M. You cannot delete a built-in port from the I/O tables.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Local IP Address
Section 3-7
3-7 Setting the Local IP Address
This section describes the 3 ways to set the local I/O address of an EtherNet/
IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Method 1: Using the default IP address:
The default IP address is 192.168.250.Node_address.
(The node address is set with the rotary switches on the front of
the EtherNet/IP Unit or, for the built-in EtherNet/IP port, on the
front of the CPU Unit.)
→ This method can be used to make a temporary or preliminary
connection to the Ethernet. In this case, leave the TCP/IP Con-
figuration and the allocated DM area IP address settings at their
default values (0.0.0.0).
Method 2: Setting an IP address in the CPU Unit’s allocated DM area:
→ If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set-
ting in the CPU Unit, set it in the EtherNet/IP Unit’s allocated DM
area. The IP address can be set from the CX-Programmer, Pro-
gramming Console, or ladder program.
Method 3: Setting the TCP/IP Configuration from the CX-Programmer:
→ If you want to set a particular local IP address and store that set-
ting in the EtherNet/IP Unit, set the IP address from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
When FINS communications are being used, it is necessary to show the cor-
respondence between the IP addresses and FINS node addresses. Refer to
SECTION 5 Determining IP Addresses for an explanation of IP addresses as
well as the correspondence between FINS node addresses and IP addresses.
The three setting methods are described in the following paragraphs.
Method 1: Using the Default IP Address (192.168.250.Node_address)
When the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is just mounted in the
PLC and the I/O table is created, the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port will operate with its default IP address. This default address is enabled
when the local IP address in the allocated DM area and the TCP/IP Configu-
ration are both set to their defaults (0.0.0.0).
The default IP address is 192.168.250.Node_address, where Node_address
is the node address set with the rotary switches on the front of the EtherNet/IP
Unit. This address is also used as the FINS node address.
The following table shows the various settings in the Unit Setup when the IP
address and TCP/IP Configuration are all set to their default values.
Setting
Operating status
192.168.250.Node_address
IP address
Subnet mask
255.255.255.0 (class C mask)
Default gateway
Preferred DNS server
Alternate DNS server
Host name
None (IP routing disabled)
None
None
None
Domain name
None
Baud rate
Auto-detect
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Local IP Address
Section 3-7
Method 2: Setting the Address in the CPU Bus Unit's Allocated DM Area
With this method, an IP address is not set in the TCP/IP Configuration (left at
its default setting), and an IP address is set in the allocated DM Area words
(the IP Address Display/Setting Area in words m+98 and m+99).
The IP address can be written in the two IP Address Display/Setting Area
words using the CX-Programmer or the Programming Console. To enable the
new IP Address setting, the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port must
be restarted or the PLC’s power must be turned OFF and then ON again.
Beginning word m = D30000 + (100 x unit number)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m+98
m+99
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)
IP Address: (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (Hex)
The following table shows the various Unit Setup when only the IP Address
Display/Setting Area is set, and the other TCP/IP Configuration settings are
left at their default values.
Setting
IP address
Operating status
IP address set in words m+98 and m+99 (IP Address Dis-
play/Setting Area) of the DM Area words allocated to the
EtherNet/IP Unit as a CPU Bus Unit
Subnet mask
Determined by class of the IP address
Default gateway
Preferred DNS server
Alternate DNS server
Host name
None (IP routing disabled)
None
None
None
Domain name
Baud rate
None
Auto-detect
Method 3: Setting the TCP/IP Configuration from the Network
Configurator
This method can be used to set IP addresses from the CX-Programmer.
For details, refer to 3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings.
If the IP address is set in the TCP/IP Tab Page, that IP address setting will be
displayed in the IP Address Display/Setting Area (words m+98 and m+99) in
the DM Area words allocated to the Unit/port.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP and Link Settings
Section 3-8
3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings
This section describes the TCP/IP-related settings, such as the local IP
address and subnet mask for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Use the CX-Programmer to make these settings. The settings are stored in
non-volatile memory in the Unit.
Note
Unlike the Ethernet Units, the TCP/IP settings of the EtherNet/IP Unit and
built-in EtherNet/IP port are not stored in the CPU Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Sys-
tem Setup Area.
3-8-1 Setting Procedure with the CX-Programmer
1,2,3...
grammer, the EtherNet/IP Unit and built-in EtherNet/IP port will be dis-
played in the I/O tables. Refer to 3-6 Creating I/O Tables for details.
2. Right-click the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port in the I/O table
and select Edit - Unit Setup from the menus. The Edit Parameters Dialog
Box will be displayed.
3. Make the necessary settings on the TCP/IP Tab Page of the Edit Parame-
ters Dialog Box. (The IP address is set here.)
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP and Link Settings
Section 3-8
4. Place the CX-Programmer online with the PLC and transfer the settings to
the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
5. After transferring the settings, a message will ask if you want to restart the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. The Unit/port must be restart-
ed to enable the settings.
6. Check the 7-segment display for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port.
7. If the 7-segment display is tested again after it goes OFF, and finally
displays the IP address, it indicates that the EtherNet/IP Unit has
recognized the new TCP/IP Configuration settings (the IP address in this
case).
Note
(1) The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port must restart in order to
enable the parameter settings that are transferred to it. Verify that restart-
ing the Unit/port will not cause any problems in the system before restart-
ing it.
(2) If the target node address (IP address) is not set correctly, invalid device
parameters may be set in the wrong PLC, so check the connected PLC
before downloading parameters.
Settings on the TCP/IP Tab Page
Settings for the following items are provided on the TCP/IP Tab Page of the
Edit Parameters Dialog Box in the CX-Programmer.
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
• Broadcasting
• Preferred DNS server
• Alternate DNS server
• Domain name
• IP router table
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP and Link Settings
Section 3-8
IP Address
Sets the local IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Set the local IP address on the TCP/IP Tab Page when not setting the IP
address in the CPU Unit’s allocated DM Area or using the default IP address
(default IP address = 192.168.250.Node_address).
When the IP address is set on the TCP/IP Tab Page, it will be stored as the IP
address in the DM Area words allocated to the Unit/port as a CPU Bus Unit.
Subnet Mask
For the subnet mask, all bits corresponding to the bits in the IP address used
as the network ID are set to 1, and the bits corresponding to the host number
are set to 0. The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port supports CIDR
(Classless Inter-Domain Routing). The subnet mask can be set to 192.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.252. (CIDR is supported by unit version 2.0 or later.)
If no subnet mask is set, or if an illegal value is set, the following values will be
used depending on the IP address class.
In normal applications, we recommend setting the subnet mask defined for
the class.
Class
Subnet mask
255.0.0.0
Class A
Class B
255.255.0.0
Class C
255.255.255.0
With the default setting (0.0.0.0), a subnet mask corresponding to the IP
address class is used.
The following table shows the various parameters in the Unit Setup when only
the IP address and subnet mask are set and other settings are left at their
default values.
Setting
Default gateway
Preferred DNS server
Alternate DNS server
Host name
Operating status
None (IP routing disabled)
None
None
None
Domain name
None
Broadcasting
4.3 BSD specifications
None
IP router table
Default Gateway
Broadcasting
Sets the default gateway’s IP address.
This setting is not required when the default gateway is not being used.
Sets the IP address specification method for broadcasting with FINS/UDP.
• All 1’s (4.3BSD): Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 1’s.
• All 0’s (4.2BSD): Broadcasting is performed with the host ID set to all 0’s.
Normally, use the default setting of all 1’s (4.3BSD).
Preferred DNS Server and Alternate DNS Server
When accessing another node from the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port using the host name, the DNS server searches for the other node’s IP
address from the other node’s host name to the DNS server. These settings
register the IP addresses of the preferred and alternate DNS servers that will
perform the search. At this time, the EtherNet/IP Unit is not equipped with any
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP and Link Settings
Section 3-8
functions that require a DNS server, so these settings are not used. (The
functionality required to use a DNS server is not provided on EtherNet/IP
Units with unit version 1.0. The DNS server cannot be used with these Units.)
Domain Name
IP Router Table
Sets the domain name of the domain to which the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port belongs. The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
does not use a domain name in actual communications.
Set the IP router table to route EtherNet/IP communications for specific nodes
through an IP router other than the default gateway.
Settings on the Ethernet Tab Page
The following settings are provided on the Ethernet Tab Page of the Unit
Setup for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• Link settings (baud rate and half/full duplex)
Link Setting
Sets the communications baud rate.
Setting
Auto (default)
Meaning
The baud rate with the switching hub is detected automat-
ically. If possible, the Unit operates in 100Base-T (full
duplex).
10 Mbps, Half Duplex
10 Mbps, Full Duplex
100 Mbps, Half Duplex
100 Mbps, Full Duplex
Operates in 10Base-T, half duplex.
Operates in 10Base-T, full duplex.
Operates in 100Base-TX, half duplex.
Operates in 100Base-TX, full duplex.
Note Adjust the EtherNet/IP Unit’s link settings to match the communications set-
tings of the connected switching hub. If the settings do not match, the link will
become unstable and prevent normal communications. The following table
shows the allowed settings for each switching hub communications mode.
Switching hub setting
EtherNet/IP Unit setting
10 Mbps (fixed) 100 Mbps (fixed)
Auto-
negotiation
Full
Half
Full
Half
duplex
duplex
duplex
duplex
Auto-negotiation
Best
---
OK
---
OK
10 Mbps Full duplex ---
OK
---
---
---
---
(fixed)
Half duplex OK
OK
---
---
---
100 Mbps Full duplex ---
---
Best
---
---
(fixed)
Half duplex OK
---
---
OK
Note Best = Recommended; OK = Allowed; --- = Not allowed.
3-8-2 Making TCP/IP Settings with the Network Configurator
Use the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for any device
other than a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in port. You can also use
the Network Configurator to change IP address settings for a CS/CJ-series
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in port.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator online.
Refer to 6-2-9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for
details on connecting the Network Configurator to the EtherNet/IP Unit.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP/IP and Link Settings
Section 3-8
2. Select Tools - Setup TCP/IP Configuration to display the following Setup
TCP/IP Configuration Dialog Box, and set the TCP/IP Configuration for the
target device. In the following example, the settings are all at their default
values.
3. Enter the IP address to set and press the Get from the Device Button. The
present setting will be obtained. Change the IP address in the New Con-
figuration Box if required.
4. Press the Set to the Device Button. The IP address will be transferred to
the device. The applicable device is the device specified in the Target IP
Address Box. The device must be reset to enable the transferred setting. If
the device is not reset when the new IP address is transferred, click the Re-
set the Device Button.
When the EtherNet/IP Unit is reset, the IP address will be displayed once
in flowing text on the 7-segment display on the front of the Unit.
Note
(1) The transfer function for IP address settings is defined by ODVA specifi-
cations. Target devices that do not support these specifications cannot be
set. When setting the IP address of the target device with the Network
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Parameters
Section 3-9
Configurator, connect the devices one at a time, and download the TCP/
IP Configuration’s IP address parameters. If TCP/IP parameters are set
for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port from the Network Con-
figurator, the EtherNet/IP Unit may automatically be reset and restarted.
Before setting the TCP/IP parameters, make sure that no system prob-
lems will occur when the Unit is restarted. If the Unit does not restart au-
tomatically, click the Reset the Device Button.
(2) If the target node address (IP address) is not set correctly, invalid device
parameters may be set in the wrong PLC, so check the connected PLC
before downloading parameters.
TCP/IP Parameters
The following TCP/IP parameters can be set from the Network Configurator.
• IP address
• Subnet mask
• Default gateway
• Preferred DNS server
• Alternate DNS server
• Domain name
• Link parameters (baud rate and full/half duplex)
3-9 Tag Data Link Parameters
Set the following parameters when using tag data links with an EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. The parameter settings are saved in flash
memory in the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU Unit. (See note.)
Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings for an
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. This point is different from the
operation of Ethernet Units.
Refer to SECTION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for details.
3-9-1 Network Configurator Setting Procedure
The methods for setting tag data links using the Network Configurator can be
roughly divided into the following two.
1. Using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters
With this method, there is no flexibility in the settings, but you can easily set
the data link parameters using only memory addresses, and the settings will
conform to Controller Link data link parameters.
2. Using the Tag Data Link Setting Function in the Network Configurator to Set the Parameters
With this method, you can set the connections that comprise the tag data links
flexibility using both memory addresses and network variables. Refer to SEC-
TION 6 Tag Data Link Functions for details on how to perform these settings.
This section presents a setting example using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool.
Using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool
The method that is described here is used to set memory addresses in tables
to specify data links between EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports
on CS/CJ-series PLCs.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Parameters
Section 3-9
The following method can be used to easily set the data links shown in the fol-
lowing figure using a wizard in the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool.
Node #2: CJ1H-CPU67H
(IP address: 192.168.250.2)
Node #3: CJ1H-CPU67H
(IP address: 192.168.250.3)
Node #1: CJ1H-CPU67H
(IP address: 192.168.250.1)
EtherNet/IP
Area 1
W0
W0
50 words
W0
#1
#2
#3
#1
#1
W50
50 words
#2
#3
#2
#3
W100
50 words
Area 2
D50
D50
D50
100 words
#1
#2
#3
#1
#1
D150
#2
#3
#2
#3
100 words
D250
100 words
1,2,3...
1. Start the Network Configurator, select the applicable EtherNet/IP Unit in
the Tree View on the left, and then paste it into the Device Configuration
Pane on the right.
Note If an EtherNet/IP system has already been installed, you can create a similar
Network − Upload from the menus.
Refer to 6-2-9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for infor-
mation on connecting.
2. Select Network − EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool from the menus to start the
EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Parameters
Section 3-9
3. Select Datalink − Wizard from the menus in the Datalink Tool when it has
started.
4. In the Datalink Wizard Dialog Box, enter 50 words starting from memory
address W000 for area 1 and 100 words starting from D00050 for area 2,
and then press the OK Button.
5. The data link settings will be automatically created in the window of the
EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool. Select File − Save to end. The settings will be
saved in the Network Configurator.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Parameters
Section 3-9
6. In the Device Configuration Window of the Network Configurator, a
mark will be added to each EtherNet/IP Unit to show that data links have
been set.
7. Connect the Network Configurator to the EtherNet/IP network and select
Network − Download from the menus. The data link settings will be down-
loaded to the EtherNet/IP Units, and the data links will operate.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Parameters
Section 3-10
3-10 Other Parameters
In addition to the tag data link parameters, the EtherNet/IP Unit and built-in
EtherNet/IP port also have the following communications and operation
parameters.
• FINS/UDP
• FINS/TCP
• FTP
• Auto Adjust Time
• Status Area
• SNMP
• SNMP Trap
These parameters are set as Unit Setup from the CX-Programmer. The
parameter settings are saved in flash memory in the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU
Unit. (See note.)
Note The CPU Bus Unit Setup Area is not used for tag data link settings for an
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. This point is different from the
operation of Ethernet Units.
Using FINS/UDP
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
FINS/UDP
FINS/UDP Port
Specifies the local UDP port number to use in the FINS communi-
cations service. The UDP uses the UDP port number to distinguish
the application layer (FINS communications service in this case).
• Default value (9,600)
• User-set value (1 to 65,535)
Conversion
Selects one of the following methods to convert from the FINS
node address to an IP address (FINS/UDP only).
• Automatic generation (dynamic setting)
• Automatic generation (static setting)
• IP address table
• Combined method
IP Address Table
Sets the IP address table that defines the relationship between
FINS node addresses and IP addresses.
This table is effective only when FINS/UDP is being used and the
IP address conversion method is set to the IP address table.
Dynamic change the tar- Selects dynamic change of other FINS/UDP nodes’ IP addresses.
get IP addresses
To disable dynamic changes, deselect this option by removing the
check mark.
When necessary, set the routing tables using the CX-Integrator.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Parameters
Section 3-10
Using FINS/TCP
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
FINS/TCP
FINS/TCP Port
Specifies the local TCP port number to use in the FINS communi-
cations service. The TCP uses the TCP port number to distinguish
the application layer (FINS communications service in this case).
• Default value (9,600)
• User-set value (1 to 65,535)
FINS/TCP Connection
Setup
This is the network API used when TCP is used for the FINS com-
munications service. Up to 16 APIs can be used at a time, and they
are identified by connection numbers 1 to 16.
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port can thus simulta-
neously execute the FINS communications service by TCP with up
to 16 remote nodes.
Protection Setting
Select this check box to refuse connection requests from any IP
address not set as the target IP address when the server/client
setting is set to a server and the target IP address is set to any
value other than 0.0.0.0.
This check box can be selected to prevent inappropriate opera-
tions on the PLC for FINS commands from specific nodes.
When necessary, set the routing tables using the CX-Integrator.
Using FTP
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
FTP
Not Use FTP or
Use FTP
Specifies whether to use FTP. FTP connections from external
devices will not be possible if Not Use FTP is specified.
Login
Sets the login name for FTP connections to the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port from external devices
Password
Port No.
Sets the password for FTP connections to the EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port from external devices.
Sets the FTP port number of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port.
It is normally not necessary to change this setting.
Two ports are used with the FTP: a control port and a data transfer
port. Only the control port can be set. The data transfer port num-
ber will be one larger than the control port number.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Parameters
Section 3-10
Using the Automatic Time Adjustment
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
Auto Adjust Time
Not get the time informa- Specifies whether to set the clock in the CPU Unit to the time on
tion from the SNTP
server or
the SNTP server.
The time can be set only in CPU Units with an EtherNet/IP Unit or
Get the time information a built-in EtherNet/IP port.
from the SNTP server
Auto Adjust time
Sets the time to access the SNTP server to automatically adjust
the CPU Unit clock.
When the specified time arrives, the SNTP server will be accessed
and the clock in the CPU Unit will be set to the time on the SNTP
server.
Server Specification Type Specifies whether to use an IP address or a domain name (i.e.,
host name) to specify the SNTP server to use for automatic time
adjustment.
IP Address
Sets the IP address of the SNTP server to use for automatic time
adjustment.
This IP address is valid only when the Server Specification Type is
set to an IP address.
Host Name
Sets the host name of the SNTP server to use for automatic time
adjustment.
This IP address is valid only when the Server Specification Type is
set to a host name.
Port No.
Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNTP server for
automatic time adjustment. It is normally not necessary to change
this setting.
Retry Timer
Sets the time to wait before retrying the connection when connect-
ing to the SNTP server fails.
It is normally not necessary to change this setting.
Adjust Time
Sets the time to offset the clock in the CPU Unit when setting the
clock in the CPU Unit to the time obtained from the SNTP server.
To use the time from the SNTP server as is, enter 0 for the Adjust
Time.
Using the Status Area
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
Status Area
Layout Type
Specifies whether to use the default setting or a custom setting for
the words allocated to the status area.
Allocation Area
Sets the first word in the status area when the Layout Type is set
for a customer setting.
With CS1/CJ1 CPU Units, only an I/O memory address can be set.
With CJ2 or NE1S CPU Units, either an I/O memory address or a
symbol defined in the CPU Unit can be set.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Parameters
Section 3-10
Using SNMP
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
SNMP
Not use SNMP service or Specifies whether to use the SNMP.
Use SNMP service
SNMP Port
If not using the SNMP service is specified, an SNMP manager will
not be able to connected from an external device.
Sets the port number to use when connecting from an SNMP man-
ager.
It is normally not necessary to change this setting.
SNMP Contact Informa- Specifies the contact information as text.
tion
This information can be read from the SNMP manager.
SNMP Location Informa- Specifies the location information as text.
tion
This information can be read from the SNMP manager.
Authentication Check 1/2 Specifies the SNMP managers that can access the PLC.
To restrict access to only specific SNMP managers, specify the
SNMP managers using IP addresses or host names. Community
names can also be specified (e.g., public).
Ether one or two settings can be made.
Using SNMP Trap
Tab Page in Edit
Setting
Function
Parameters Dialog Box
SNMP Trap
Not use SNMP Trap ser- Specifies whether to use the SNMP trap.
vice or
If not using the SNMP trap service is specified, SNMP traps cannot
Use SNMP Trap service be sent to the SNMP manager.
SNMP Trap Port
Trap 1/2
Sets the port number to use to connect to the SNMP manager.
It is normally not necessary to change this setting.
Sets the SNMP manager destinations for SNMP traps.
The SNMP managers can be specified using IP addresses or host
names. Community names can also be specified (e.g., public).
Either one or two trap destinations can be set.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Test
Section 3-11
3-11 Communications Test
If the basic settings (in particular the IP address and subnet mask) have been
made correctly for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, then it
should be possible to communicate with nodes on the EtherNet/IP network.
This section describes how to use the PING command to test communica-
tions with the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
3-11-1 PING Command
The PING command sends an echo request packet to a remote node and
receives an echo response packet to confirm that the remote node is commu-
nicating correctly. The PING command uses the ICMP echo request and
responses. The echo response packet is automatically returned in the ICMP.
The PING command is normally used to check the connections of remote
nodes when configuring a network. The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port supports both the ICMP echo request and reply functions.
If the remote node returns a normal response to the PING command, then the
nodes are physically connected correctly and Ethernet node settings are cor-
rect.
EtherNet/IP Unit
Remote Node
(host computer or EtherNet/IP Unit)
TCP
UDP
IP
Ethernet
ICMP
Echo request
Echo response
3-11-2 EtherNet/IP Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP Port Operation
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port automatically returns the
echo response packet in response to an echo request packet sent by another
node (host computer, or other EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port).
An echo request packet can be sent to another node by issuing the FINS
command to execute the PING command from the PLC.
3-11-3 Host Computer Operation
The PING command can be executed from the host computer to send an
echo request packet to an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. The
following example shows how to use the PING command in the host com-
puter.
Command Method
Input the following command at the host computer’s prompt ($):
$ ping IP_address(host_name)
The destination is specified by its IP address or host name. If the host name is
used, the host name must be defined in the /etc/hosts file.
Note The PING command is not supported by some host computers.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications Test
Section 3-11
Application Example
In this example, a PING command is sent to the node at IP address
130.25.36.8. The “$” in the example represents the host computer prompt.
Normal Execution
$ ping 130.25.36.8
← Executes the PING command.
PING 130.25.36.8: 56 data bytes
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
:
:
:
:
:
64 bytes from 130.25.36.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
← Press the Ctrl+C Keys to cancel execution.
---- 130.25.36.8 PING Statistics ----
9 packets transmitted, 9 packets received, 0% packets loss
round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/1/16
$
Error Occurred
$ png 130.25.36.8
PING 130.25.36.8: 56 data bytes
← Executes the PING command.
← Press the Ctrl+C Keys to cancel execution.
---- 130.25.36.8 PING Statistics ----
9 packets transmitted, 9 packets received, 0% packets loss
$
Refer to the OS command reference manual for your computer for details on
using the PING command.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 4
Memory Allocations
This section describes the words allocated in the CIO Area and the DM Area for EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP
ports.
4-1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 CIO Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 DM Area Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3-2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4 User Settings Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-1 Overview of the User Settings Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-4-2 User Settings Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5 Auxiliary Area Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-1 Read-only Bits/Words. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5-2 Read/Write Bits (User Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
70
70
71
83
83
83
85
85
85
88
88
89
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit
Section 4-1
4-1 Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit
The following CPU Unit words are allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port.
• CPU Unit’s allocated CIO Area words
Contains software switch and status information.
• CPU Unit’s allocated DM Area words
Contains the IP Address Display/Setting Area
• CPU Unit’s user settings area
Contains status information. (This area can be used only when the allo-
cated CIO Area words are set to user settings.)
Note The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port has the following
two data areas in its non-volatile memory. (Unlike the Ethernet
Units, settings are not stored in the CPU Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Sys-
tem Setup Area.)
• Unit Setup: Settings such as the IP address and FINS/UDP set-
tings. The Unit Setup is set from the CX-Programmer.
• Device parameter settings: Settings such as the tag data link set-
ting parameters. The device parameter settings are made from the
Network Configurator.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Memory Allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit
Section 4-1
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
● Allocated CIO Area words
(Allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.)
Local memory
CIO 1500
CIO 1501
Flags and control bits
Unit number 0
25 words
25 words
Target node PLC's operating
and error information, Unit
status, communications
status, registered/normal
target node, and FINS/TCP
connection status
CIO 1524
CIO 1525
Unit number 1
Unit number 15
25 words
25 words
CIO 1549
CIO 1875
CIO 1899
● User Settings Area
Set in Network Configurator. →
Local memory
64 words
64 words
Target node PLC's operating
and error information, and
registered/normal target
node
● Allocated DM Area words
(Allocated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit.)
Local memory
D30000
Unit number 0
Unit number 1
100 words
100 words
D30098
D30099
D30100
IP Address Display/Setting Area
100 words
100 words
Non-volatile memory in the EtherNet/IP
Unit
Unit settings
D30199
D31500
Settings such as the IP address of the
EtherNet/IP Unit and FINS/UDP settings.
Refer to 3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings
and 3-10 Other Parameters for details.
Unit number 15
D31599
Device parameter settings (tag data link
settings)
Refer to Section 6 Tag Data Links for
details.
Network Configurator
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
4-2 CIO Area Allocations
4-2-1 Overview of the Allocated CIO Area Words
The various kinds of data are stored in the allocated CIO Area words, which
are identified by the offset from the beginning word (n) allocated to each Unit.
There are two patterns for the layout of the allocated CIO Area words: the
default settings and user settings. The layout can be selected in the Status
Area settings in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX-Programmer.
To set a customer areas, select User defined for the Layout Type on the Sta-
tus Area Tab Page.
The beginning word n is calculated by the following equation:
Beginning word n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
Default Settings
Offset
Bit
15
8
7
0
Data direction
Unit control bits
(Reserved)
CPU Unit → EtherNet/IP Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
0
n
1
n+1
Target Node PLC Operating Information
(4 words only)
2
n+2
3
n+3
4
n+4
5
n+5
Target Node PLC Error Information
(4 words only)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
6
n+6
7
n+7
8
n+8
9
n+9
Unit status 1
Unit status 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
n+10
n+11
n+12
n+13
n+14
n+15
n+16
n+17
n+18
n+19
n+20
n+21
n+22
n+23
n+24
Communications status 1
Communications status 2
Communications status 3
(Reserved)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
Registered Target Node
(4 words only)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
Normal Target Node
(4 words only)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
FINS/TCP Connection Status
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
User Settings
Offset
Bit
15
8
7
0
Data direction
Unit control bits
(Reserved)
CPU Unit → EtherNet/IP Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
0
n
1
n+1
2
n+2
3
n+3
4
n+4
5
n+5
6
n+6
7
n+7
8
n+8
9
n+9
Unit status 1
Unit status 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
n+10
n+11
n+12
n+13
n+14
n+15
n+16
n+17
n+18
n+19
n+20
n+21
n+22
n+23
n+24
Communications status 1
Communications status 2
Communications status 3
(Reserved)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
FINS/TCP Connection Status
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
Note The reserved words are regularly refreshed with all zeroes.
The functions of the allocated CIO Area words are described in the following
section.
4-2-2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words
Unit Control Bits (CPU Unit to EtherNet/IP Unit) (n)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n
Tag Data Link Start Bit
Tag Data Link Stop Bit
Adjust Clock Bit
Bit
Switch
(Not used.)
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0 to 1
2
---
---
---
Tag Data Link Start ON
Bit
User
The tag data link starts when this bit
is switched from OFF to ON.
OFF
Unit
Turned OFF by Unit after the tag
data link starts operating.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Switch
(Not used.)
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
3
4
---
---
---
Tag Data Link Stop ON
Bit
User
The tag data link stops when this bit
is switched from OFF to ON.
OFF
Unit
Turned OFF by Unit after the tag
data link stops operating.
5
Adjust Clock Bit
ON
User
The clock time is automatically
adjusted when this bit is switched
from OFF to ON.
OFF
---
Unit
---
Turned OFF by Unit after the clock
time has been adjusted.
6 to 15
(Not used.)
---
Tag Data Link Start Bit
(Bit 2)
Start the tag data links by switching this bit from OFF to ON. If the tag data
links are already operating, the signal will be ignored. The tag data link starts
operating automatically after the tag data link parameter settings are down-
loaded from the Network Configurator, the CPU Unit’s power is turned ON, or
the Unit is restarted.
If the tag data links have been stopped by turning the Tag Data Link Stop Bit
(n bit 04) from OFF to ON, the tag data links can be restarted by turning this
Tag Data Link Start Bit (n bit 02) from OFF to ON.
Once the tag data links start, the EtherNet/IP Unit automatically turns OFF the
Tag Data Link Start Bit. Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is automatically
turned OFF by the Unit.
Tag Data Link Stop Bit
(Bit 4)
Stop the tag data links by switching this bit from OFF to ON. Once the tag
data links have been stopped, they will remain stopped until the Unit is
restarted or the Tag Data Link Start Bit is turned ON. (The tag data links will
also start operating automatically when the tag data link parameter settings
are downloaded from the Network Configurator.)
If the tag data links are already stopped, the signal will be ignored.
Message communications can be performed while the tag data links are
stopped.
Once the tag data links have stopped, the EtherNet/IP Unit automatically
turns OFF the Tag Data Link Stop Bit. Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is
automatically turned OFF by the Unit.
Adjust Clock Bit (Bit 5)
Automatically adjust the time on the clock by switching this bit from OFF to
ON. The SNTP server used to adjust the time is set in the Unit Setup.
Once the clock time has been adjusted, the EtherNet/IP Unit automatically
turns OFF the Adjust Clock Bit. Do not force this bit ON or OFF until it is auto-
matically turned OFF by the Unit.
Target Node PLC
These words show the operating status of the target node PLCs that are con-
nected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the originator. This status information is
enabled when the PLC status is included in the communications data in both
the originator and target node.
OperatingInformation
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 2 to n +
5)
the status of nodes higher than node 63, select “user settings” as the layout
pattern. For details, refer to 4-4 User Settings Area.
The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is
ON. If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF, the Target Node
PLC Operating Flag indicates the previous operating status.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Target Node PLC Operat- ON
ing Flags
Unit
The corresponding PLC
is operating. (The pro-
gram is being executed.)
OFF
Unit
The PLC is not operating.
Target Node PLC
Error Information
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 6 to n +
9)
These words show the error status (logical OR of fatal and non-fatal errors) of
the target node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the orig-
inator. This status information is enabled when the PLC status is included in
the communications data in both the originator and target node.
show the error status of nodes higher than node 63, select “user settings” as
the layout pattern. For details, refer to 4-4 User Settings Area.
The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is
ON. If the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is OFF, the Target Node
PLC Error Flag indicates the previous error status.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+6
n+7
n+8
n+9
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Target Node PLC Error
Flags
ON
Unit
A fatal or non-fatal error
occurred in the corre-
sponding PLC.
OFF
Unit
No error occurred in the
PLC.
Unit Status 1
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 10)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+10
Unit Error Occurred
Network Error Occurred
Unit Memory Error
Communications Controller Error
IP Address Duplication Error
Link OFF Error
Status Area Layout Setting Error
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0
Unit Error Occurred ON
Unit
Indicates that an error
occurred that is related to
EtherNet/IP Unit operation.
This flag is turned ON when
any bit in Unit Status 1 is
ON. (Bits 1 to 15 are logi-
cally ORed.)
OFF
Unit
Unit
Indicates that a Unit error
did not occur. This flag is
turned OFF when the error
is cleared.
1
Network Error
Occurred
ON
One or more network-
related errors occurred.
(The bits in Communica-
tions Status 1 and 3 are log-
ically ORed.)
OFF
Unit
Indicates that a network
error did not occur. This flag
is turned OFF when the
error is cleared.
2 to 3
4
(Not used)
---
---
---
Unit Memory Error
ON
Unit
Indicates that an error
occurred in accessing the
Unit’s internal non-volatile
memory (device error).
OFF
Unit
Indicates that a non-volatile
memory error did not occur.
This flag is not cleared even
if it occurs one time. (Flag
remains ON.)
5
6
Communications
Controller Error
ON
Unit
Unit
Indicates that an error
occurred in the communica-
tions controller.
OFF
Indicates that a communica-
tions controller error did not
occur. This flag remains ON
until the power supply is
turned OFF and ON again.
IP Address Duplica- ON
tion Error
Unit
An ARP was sent with the
specified IP address, indi-
cating that an IP address
duplication was detected.
An address duplication is
detected if there is an ARP
response. This flag remains
ON until the power supply is
turned OFF and ON again.
(The Ethernet interface will
stop.)
OFF
Unit
There was no ARP
response.
7 to 8
9
(Not used)
---
---
---
Link OFF Error
ON
Unit
There was an error estab-
lishing a link with the switch-
ing hub.
OFF
Unit
A link was established nor-
mally with the switching hub.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
(Not used)
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
10 to
13
---
---
---
14
Status Area Layout
Setting Error
ON
Unit
Indicates that there was an
error in the allocated CIO
Area’s layout settings. When
this error occurs, the allo-
cated CIO Area layout is set
to the default pattern.
In the following cases, how-
ever, the allocated CIO Area
layout is set to the user-set
pattern. In this case, the
user-set area will not be
refreshed.
• A non-existent area has
been specified.
OFF
---
Unit
---
There was not an error in
the layout settings.
15
(Not used)
---
Unit Status 2
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 11)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+11
Online
Tag Data Link Operating
Operating IP Address Change
User Settings Area Enabled
Multiple Switches ON Error
Error Log Stored
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0
Online
ON
Unit
Indicates that the Unit is
online. (The EtherNet/IP Unit
can perform communications
processing.)
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the Unit is not
online. This bit is turned OFF
in the following cases.
• IP Address Duplication Error
• Ethernet Communications
Controller Error (hardware
error)
• BOOTP Server Error
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
1
Tag Data Link
Operating
ON
Unit
Indicates that the tag data link
is operating. Turned OFF
when communications stop in
the following cases.
• Hardware error
• IP Address Duplication Error
• BOOTP Server Error
• Basic Ethernet Settings
Error
• Memory Error (MAC
Address Error)
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the tag data link
is stopped. Turned ON in the
following cases.
• The Unit is set as the origi-
nator and the power supply
was turned ON or the Unit
was restarted.
• The Unit is set as the origi-
nator and the Tag Data Link
Start Bit was turned ON.
2
Operating IP
Address Change
ON
OFF
---
Unit
Unit
ON if the node address set-
ting is different from the set-
ting when the power was
turned ON.
OFF if the node address set-
ting is the same as the setting
when the power was turned
ON.
3 to 10 (Not used)
---
---
11
User Setting Area ON
Enabled
Unit
Indicates that the user set-
tings area data is enabled.
ON when “user settings” have
been specified as the layout of
the allocated CIO Area, and
refreshing of the user settings
area has started.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the user set-
tings area data is invalid.
The bit is turned OFF in the
following cases, because
communications stop.
• The allocated CIO Area lay-
out is set to default settings.
• The allocated CIO Area lay-
out is set to user settings,
but one of the following prob-
lems occurred.
• A Layout Setting Error
occurred.
12 to
13
(Not used)
---
---
---
14
Multiple Switches ON
ON Error
Unit
ON when two or more control
bits are ON simultaneously.
(Unused bits are ignored.)
OFF
Unit
Turned OFF when the next
control bit operation starts.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
15
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
Error Log Stored
ON
Unit
Indicates that an error record
is registered in the error log.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that no error records
are registered in the error log.
Also turned OFF when an
error log clear request is
received.
Communications
Status 1
Word n+12 contains status flags related to the tag data links, as shown in the
following diagram.
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 12)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+12
Verification Error
Tag Data Link Error
Invalid Communications Parameter
Tag Refresh Error
Tag Database Error
All Tag Data Links Operating
Tag Data Links Operating
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0
Verification Error
ON
Unit
Indicates that the information
registered for a target node in
the tag data link parameters is
different from the actual node
information.
Main causes:
• The specified target does not
exist.
• The variable name does not
match.
• The connection size is differ-
ent.
• Connection resources are
insufficient.
OFF
---
Unit
Indicates that a verification
error has not occurred. Also
turned OFF when a verifica-
tion error is cleared.
1
2
(Not used)
---
---
Tag Data Link Error ON
Unit
Indicates that there were two
or more errors in a connection
as an originator.
This status does not indicate
the following errors.
• Connection as a target
• Connection timeout due to a
Link OFF Error with the
switching hub
OFF
---
Unit
---
Indicates that the errors listed
above did not occur.
3
(Not used)
---
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
4
Invalid Communi- ON
cations Parameter
Unit
ON when there was an error
in the validation check of tag
data link parameters stored in
the Unit’s non-volatile mem-
ory, and a checksum error
occurred. (Includes parame-
ters related to basic Ethernet
settings.)
The tag data links will stop.
OFF
Tag Refresh Error ON
OFF
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
OFF when the validation
check of parameters in non-
volatile memory was normal.
5
6
ON when a specified data
area or address range is not
supported in tag data links.
OFF when the specified data
areas and addresses are sup-
ported in tag data links.
Tag Database
Error
ON
ON if a tag database error
occurs in the CPU Unit when
a symbol name is used incor-
rectly in a setting for the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port (tag data
link, status area allocations
setting, etc.). (CJ2H-CPU6@-
EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@ only)
OFF
Unit
OFF when a symbol name is
not used in a setting for the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port, when a tag
database error has not
occurred, or when a previous
error has been cleared.
7 to 13 (Not used)
---
---
---
14
All Tag Data Links ON
Operating
Unit
Indicates that tag data links
are communicating in all con-
nections as the originator.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that a tag data link
failed in on or more connec-
tions as the originator.
(OFF even if some tag data
links are communicating.)
15
Tag Data Links
Operating
ON
Unit
Unit
Indicates that tag data links
are communicating in one or
more connections as the origi-
nator.
OFF
Indicates that not even one
tag data link is communicating
in connections as the origina-
tor.
(OFF even if the Unit is com-
municating as a target.)
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Communications
Status 2
Word n+13 contains status flags related to the Ethernet, as shown in the fol-
lowing diagram.
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 13)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+13
Link Status
FTP Status
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0
FTP Status
ON
Unit
ON when the FTP server is
operating (i.e., when there is
an FTP client connection).
OFF
Unit
OFF when the FTP is on
standby (i.e., waiting for a cli-
ent connection).
1 to 13 (Not used)
---
---
---
14
Link Status
ON
Unit
ON when a link is established
with the switching hub.
OFF
---
Unit
---
OFF when the link with the
switching hub is stopped.
15
(Not used)
---
Communications
Status 3
Word n+14 contains status flags related to the Ethernet errors, as shown in
the following diagram.
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 14)
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+14
Basic Ethernet Settings Error
IP Address Table Error
IP Router Table Error
Routing Table Error
Ethernet Expansion Settings Error
BOOTP Server Error
Address Mismatch
Non-volatile Memory Error
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0 to 1
2
(Not used)
---
---
---
Basic Ethernet
Settings Error
ON
Unit
One of the following parame-
ters is invalid.
• TCP/IP Configuration set-
tings
(IP address, subnet mask, or
Link settings)
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
Unit
OFF when the parameters
above are valid.
3
IP Address Table
Error
ON when the IP address table
information is incorrect.
OFF
OFF when the IP address
table information is correct.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
4
IP Router Table
Error
ON
OFF
---
Unit
ON when the IP router table
information is incorrect.
Unit
OFF when the IP router table
information is correct.
5
6
(Not used)
---
---
Routing Table Error ON
Unit
ON when the routing table
information is incorrect.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the routing table
information is correct.
7 to 8
9
(Not used)
---
---
---
Ethernet Expan-
sion Settings Error
ON
Unit
One of the following parame-
ters is invalid.
• FINS settings
OFF
ON
Unit
Unit
OFF when the parameters
above are valid.
10
BOOTP Server
Error
One of the following errors
occurred when using the
BOOTP server.
• The IP address received
from the BOOTP server is
incorrect.
• A communications timeout
occurred with the server.
OFF
---
Unit
---
OFF when the errors listed
above did not occur.
11 to
13
(Not used)
---
14
Address Mismatch ON
Unit
ON when the target IP
address conversion method is
set to Automatic generation,
but the local IP address’ host
ID does not match the FINS
node address.
OFF
Unit
Unit
OFF when the values match.
15
Non-volatile Mem- ON
ory Error
ON when an error occurred in
the Unit’s internal non-volatile
memory.
OFF
Unit
OFF when the Unit’s internal
non-volatile memory is oper-
ating normally.
Registered Target
Node Table
Words n+16 to n+19 show the registration status of the target nodes that are
connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the originator.
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n + 16 to n
+ 19)
the status of nodes higher than node 63, select “user settings” as the layout
pattern. For details, refer to 4-4 User Settings Area.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+16
n+17
n+18
n+19
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Registered Target
Node Flags
ON
Unit
Indicates that the node’s tag
data link is registered.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the node’s tag
data link is not registered.
Normal Target Node
Table (EtherNet/IP
Unit to CPU Unit)
(n+20 to n+23)
Words n+20 to n+23 show the connection status of the target nodes that are
connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the originator. With revision 2 or
higher, the flag turns ON after all data for multiple connections for individual
target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit. With revision 1, each flag immedi-
ately turns ON when all connections are established.
the status of nodes higher than node 63, select “user settings” as the layout
pattern. For details, refer to 4-4 User Settings Area.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+20
n+21
n+22
n+23
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Normal Target Node ON
Flags
Unit
Revision 1: Flags immediately
turn ON when all connections
are established.
Revision 2 or higher: Flags turn
ON after all data for multiple
connections for the target
device is refreshed in the CPU
Unit.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the connection is
not established
FINS/TCP Connection
Status
Word n+24 shows the status of FINS/TCP connections. For details, refer to
SECTION 8 FINS Communications.
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit) (n+24)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+24
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
0
FINS/TCP Connec- ON
tion 1
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Turned ON by the Unit when a
connection is established.
OFF
Turned OFF by the Unit when
the connection is terminated.
1
FINS/TCP Connec- ON
tion 2
Turned ON by the Unit when a
connection is established.
OFF
Turned OFF by the Unit when
the connection is terminated.
:
:
:
:
:
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIO Area Allocations
Section 4-2
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
14 FINS/TCP Connec- ON
tion 15
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Turned ON by the Unit when a
connection is established.
OFF
Turned OFF by the Unit when
the connection is terminated.
15 FINS/TCP Connec- ON
tion 16
Turned ON by the Unit when a
connection is established.
OFF
Turned OFF by the Unit when
the connection is terminated.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area Allocations
Section 4-3
4-3 DM Area Allocations
4-3-1 Overview of the Allocated DM Area Words
The various kinds of data are stored in the offset positions shown in the fol-
lowing diagram, from the beginning word in the area for each Unit.
The beginning word m is calculated by the following equation:
Beginning word m = D30000 + (100 x unit number)
Offset
Bit
15
Data direction
08 07
00
m
(Not used)
m+97
m+98
Ethernet Unit to CPU Unit or
CPU Unit to Ethernet Unit
IP Address Display/Setting Area
m+99
4-3-2 Details of the Allocated DM Area Words
IP Address Display/Setting Area (m+98 and m+99)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
m+98
m+99
(1)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(8)
(1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (Hex)
IP address: (1)(2).(3)(4).(5)(6).(7)(8) (Hex)
If the local IP address is set to a value other than 0.0.0.0 in the TCP/IP Config-
uration, this area (words m+98 and m+99) will act as an IP Address Display
Area and the local IP address set in the TCP/IP Configuration will be read and
stored here when the power is turned ON or the Unit restarted.
If the local IP address in the TCP/IP Configuration is set to 0.0.0.0, this value
is read by the EtherNet/IP Unit when the power is turned ON or the Unit
restarted and is used as the local IP address.
If the local IP address in these words and the TCP/IP Configuration are both
set to 0.0.0.0, the default IP address (192.168.250.Node_address) will be
used. For details on the IP address settings, refer to SECTION 5 Determining
IP Addresses.
Application
Setting device
Setting area
Remarks
Simple operation (i.e., The TCP/IP Programming Con-
Allocated words in
the DM Area
• The setting in the allocated DM Area
words is enabled only when the IP
address is set to 0.0.0.0 in the TCP/IP
Configuration.
Configuration is left at its default
settings. Only the IP address is
set.)
sole (CX-Program-
mer can also be
used.)
• If the IP address is set to a value other
than 00.00.00.00 in the TCP/IP Con-
figuration, this value is stored in the
allocated words in the DM Area.
Operation with the desired IP
address set in the TCP/IP Configu- (Unit Setup)
ration.
CX-Programmer
Setup TCP/IP Con- The IP address set in the Setup TCP/IP
figuration Dialog Box Configuration Dialog Box is stored in
the allocated DM Area words.
Note
(1) If an IP address other than 00.00.00.00 is set as the local IP address in
the TCP/IP Configuration, the IP Address Display/Setting Area words
(m+98 and m+99) will be overwritten with the TCP/IP Configuration’s IP
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DM Area Allocations
Section 4-3
address, even if a non-zero IP address was set in the IP Address Display/
Setting Area words beforehand.
(2) It is not possible to set the following IP addresses. If any of these values
are set, the ERH indicator will flash.
• IP addresses where all network number bits are 0 or 1.
• IP addresses where all host number bits are 0 or 1.
• IP addresses where all subnet number bits are 1.
• IP addresses that start with 127 (7F hexadecimal, e.g., 127.35.21.16).
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Settings Area
Section 4-4
4-4 User Settings Area
4-4-1 Overview of the User Settings Area
When the layout of the allocated CIO Area words is set to user settings, the
user settings area can be used in addition to the allocated CIO Area words
and allocated DM Area words.
The beginning word of the user settings area can be set in the Status Area
Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX-Programmer.
4-4-2 User Settings Area
The user can allocate any available area to contain the registered target node
information, normal target node information, target node PLC operating infor-
mation, and target node PLC error information.
Offset
Bit
15
Data direction
08 07
00
+0
Registered target node
(16 words)
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit → CPU Unit
+15
+16
Normal target node
(16 words)
+31
+32
Target node PLC's operating information
(16 words)
+47
+48
Target node PLC's error information
(16 words)
+63
Registered Target
Node Table
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit)
These flags indicate the registration status of the target nodes, and are valid
only when the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator of the connection. For details
on the default settings, refer to 4-2-2 Details of the Allocated CIO Area Words.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
+2
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
+3
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
+4
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
+5
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
+6
111
127
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
110
126
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
109
125
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
108
124
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
107
123
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
106
122
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
103
119
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
102
118
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
101
117
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
100
116
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
99
98
97
96
+7
115
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
114
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
113
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
+8
+9
+10
+11
+12
+13
+14
+15
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Registered Target
Node Flags
ON
Unit
Indicates that the node’s tag
data link is registered.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that the node’s tag
data link is not registered.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Settings Area
Section 4-4
Normal Target Node
Table (EtherNet/IP
Unit to CPU Unit)
These flags indicate the connection status of the target nodes. With revision 2
or higher, the flag turns ON after all data for multiple connections for individual
target devices is refreshed in the CPU Unit. With revision 1, each flag immedi-
ately turns ON when all connections are established.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+16
+17
+18
+19
+20
+21
+22
+23
+24
+25
+26
+27
+28
+29
+30
+31
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
111
127
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
110
126
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
109
125
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
108
124
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
107
123
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
106
122
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
103
119
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
102
118
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
101
117
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
100
116
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
99
98
97
96
115
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
114
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
113
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Normal Target Node ON
Flags
Unit
Revision 1: Flags immediately
turn ON when all connections
are established.
Revision 2 or higher: Flags turn
ON after all data for multiple
connections for the target
device is refreshed in the CPU
Unit.
OFF
Unit
Indicates that all connections
are not established
Target Node PLC
OperatingInformation
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit)
These flags indicate the operating status of the target node PLCs, and are
valid only when the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator. The flags are valid only
when the corresponding Normal Target Node Flag is ON. If the corresponding
cates the previous operating status.
For details on the default settings, refer to 4-2-2 Details of the Allocated CIO
Area Words.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Settings Area
Section 4-4
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+32
+33
+34
+35
+36
+37
+38
+39
+40
+41
+42
+43
+44
+45
+46
+47
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
111
127
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
110
126
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
109
125
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
108
124
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
107
123
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
106
122
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
103
119
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
102
118
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
101
117
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
100
116
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
99
98
97
96
115
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
114
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
113
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Target Node PLC
Operating Flags
ON
Unit
The corresponding PLC is oper-
ating. (The program is being exe-
cuted.)
OFF
Unit
The PLC is not operating.
Target Node PLC
Error Information
(EtherNet/IP Unit to
CPU Unit)
These flags indicate the error status (logical OR of fatal and non-fatal errors)
of the target node PLCs, and are valid only when the EtherNet/IP Unit is the
originator. The flags are valid only when the corresponding Normal Target
For details on the default settings, refer to 4-2-2 Details of the Allocated CIO
Area Words.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
+48
+49
+50
+51
+52
+53
+54
+55
+56
+57
+58
+59
+60
+61
+62
+63
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
111
127
143
159
175
191
207
223
239
255
110
126
142
158
174
190
206
222
238
254
109
125
141
157
173
189
205
221
237
253
108
124
140
156
172
188
204
220
236
252
107
123
139
155
171
187
203
219
235
251
106
122
138
154
170
186
202
218
234
250
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
217
233
249
104
120
136
152
168
184
200
216
232
248
103
119
135
151
167
183
199
215
231
247
102
118
134
150
166
182
198
214
230
246
101
117
133
149
165
181
197
213
229
245
100
116
132
148
164
180
196
212
228
244
99
98
97
96
115
131
147
163
179
195
211
227
243
114
130
146
162
178
194
210
226
242
113
129
145
161
177
193
209
225
241
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
Bit
Name
Status Manipulated
by
Unit operation
--- Target Node PLC
Error Flags
ON
Unit
A fatal or non-fatal error occurred
in the corresponding PLC.
OFF
Unit
No error occurred in the PLC.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auxiliary Area Data
Section 4-5
4-5 Auxiliary Area Data
The following table and descriptions cover the words and bits in the CPU
Unit’s Auxiliary Area that are related to the EtherNet/IP Unit.
4-5-1 Read-only Bits/Words
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Name
Function
Settings
A202
A20200 to Communications
Bits A20200 to A20207 turn ON when a network
0: Network communi-
A20207
Port Enabled Flags instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) can be cations running
executed with the corresponding port number. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
munications running
1: No network com-
A203 to ---
A210
Communications
Port Completion
Codes
These words contain the completion codes for the
corresponding port numbers when network
instructions (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) have
been executed. Words A203 to A210 correspond to
communications ports 0 to 7.
0000: No error
Not 0000: Error code
A219
A302
A21900 to Communications
A21907 Port Error Flags
Bits A21900 to A21907 turn ON when an error
occurred during execution of a network instruction
(SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR). Bits 00 to 07
correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
0: Normal end
1: Error end
A30200 to CPU Bus Unit
Bits A30200 through A30215 turn ON while the
corresponding CPU Bus Units (Units #0 through
#15, respectively) are initializing. The bits will turn
ON either when power is turned ON or when a CPU
Bus Unit Restart Bit (A50100 to A50115) is turned
ON.
0: Not initializing
A30215
Initializing Flags
1: Initializing (System
will automatically turn
the flag OFF when ini-
tialization has been
completed.)
A402
A40203
CPU Bus Unit Set- Bit A40203 is turned ON when the CPU Bus Units
0: No setting error
1: Setting error
ting Error Flag
actually installed differ from the Units registered in
the I/O tables. The ERR/ALM indicator on the front
of the CPU Unit will flash, but CPU operation will
continue.
(Non-fatal error)
The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is
stored in word A427.
A40207
CPU Bus Unit Error Bit A40207 is turned ON when an error occurs
0: No unit number
error
Flag
during the transmission of data between the CPU
and CPU Bus Units. The ERR/ALM indicator on the
front of the CPU Unit will flash, but CPU operation
will continue. The Unit where the error occurred will
stop.
(Non-fatal error)
1: Unit number error
The unit number of the CPU Bus Unit involved is
stored in word A422.
A403
A40300 to Memory Error
A40308 Location
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error
Flag (A40115) is turned ON and one of the following
flags is turned ON to indicate the memory area
where the error occurred.
0: Normal
1: Error
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Tables
A40307: Routing Tables
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will light and CPU operation will stop.
A410
A41000 to CPU Bus Unit Num- The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the
0: No duplication
1: Duplication
A41015
ber Duplication
Flags
corresponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when
a CPU Bus Unit’s unit number has been
duplicated. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers
0 to F.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will light and CPU operation will stop.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auxiliary Area Data
Section 4-5
Word(s)
Bit(s)
Name
Function
Settings
A417
A41700 to CPU Bus Unit Error, When an error occurs in a data exchange between 0: No error
A41715
Unit Number Flags the CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus
Unit Error Flag (A40207) and the corresponding flag
in A417 are turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
unit numbers 0 to F.
1: Error
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash, but CPU operation will continue.
A427
A42700 to CPU Bus Unit Set- When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203 0: No setting error
A42715
ting Error, Unit
Number Flags
and the corresponding flag in A27 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
1: Setting error
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash, but CPU operation will continue.
4-5-2 Read/Write Bits (User Settings)
Word
A501
Bits
A50100 to CPU Bus Unit
A50115 Restart Bits
Name
Description
Settings
Bits A50100 through A50115 can be turned ON to
reset CPU Bus Units number #0 through #15,
respectively.
OFF to ON:
Unit restarted.
Automatically turned
OFF by system after
restart processing
Note The CPU Bus Unit Initializing Flags (A30200
to A30215) will turn ON when initialization of
the Units begins and turn OFF when it is com-
pleted.
has been completed.
Note When turning ON the CPU Bus Unit Restart
Bit from a ladder program, use the SET
instruction.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auxiliary Area Data
Section 4-5
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 5
Determining IP Addresses
5-1 IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 IP Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Allocating IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-3 EtherNet/IP Unit IP Address Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-4 Subnet Masks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-5 CIDR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services. . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-3 Application Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2-4 Related Products and Communications/Setting Methods. . . . . . . . .
5-2-5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Private and Global Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Private and Global Addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet/IP Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 EtherNet/IP Unit with a Global Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
92
92
93
93
94
94
94
96
102
103
105
106
106
107
109
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses
Section 5-1
5-1 IP Addresses
5-1-1 IP Address Configuration
IP addresses are made up of 32 bits of binary data divided into four 8-bit fields
called octets. These four octets provide the network number (net ID) and host
number (host ID). The network number identifies the network, and the host
number identifies the node (or host) on the network.
The network numbers in an IP address are divided into three classes, A, B,
and C, so that the address system can be selected according to the scale of
the network. (Classes D and E are not used.) The configuration of the IP
address for each of these classes is shown in the following diagram.
Bit 31
23
0
Class A
Class B
Class C
Class D
0
Network number (7 bits)
Host number (24 bits)
Host number (16 bits)
Bit 31
1
15
0
0
Network number (14 bits)
Bit 31
1
7
0
0
0
1
0
Network number (21 bits)
Host number (8 bits)
Bit 31
1
1
1 0
Multicast address
(Cannot be used.)
(Cannot be used.)
Bit 31
Class E 1 1 1 1
Identification address
The number of networks in each class and the number of nodes possible on
the network differ according to the class.
Class
Number of networks
Small
Number of hosts
24
16
8
Class A
Class B
2
2
−2 max. (16,777,214 max.)
−2 max. (65,534 max.)
Medium
Large
Class C
2 −2 max. (254 max.)
The 32 bits of an IP address are divided into four sections of eight bits each,
and expressed as a punctuated number. IP addresses are represented by the
decimal equivalent of each of the four octets in the 32-bit address, each sepa-
rated by a period. For example, the binary address 10000010 00111010
00010001 00100000 would be represented as 130.58.17.32.
Note
The same network number must be set for every node on the same Ethernet
network.
5-1-2 Allocating IP Addresses
IP (Internet Protocol) is a standard communications protocol used throughout
the world, and is designed to enable communications between any Ethernet
nodes regardless of the networks on which they exist. To achieve this, net-
work numbers are allocated by the Network Solutions, InterNIC Registration
Services, to ensure that all Ethernet networks have unique numbers regard-
less of where they exist. The local system administrator is left the responsibil-
ity of allocating unique host numbers locally. You therefore should obtain a
network number from the InterNIC Registration Services to ensure unique-
ness and allow for future network expansions if required.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses
Section 5-1
5-1-3 EtherNet/IP Unit IP Address Settings
An IP address must be set even for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port before Ethernet communications can proceed. Use one of the following
methods to set the IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port. Either use the default IP address setting, use a Programming Device to
set a particular IP address in the DM Area words (CS/CJ Series only) allo-
cated to the Unit as a CPU Bus Unit, or set a particular IP address in the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• If you want to connect the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
immediately, the default IP address is 192.168.250.Node_address. (The
node address is set with the Node Address Setting Switches on the front
of the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU Unit.)
• If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in
the CPU Unit, set it with the CPU Unit’s allocated DM Area words (CS/CJ
Series only).
• If you want to set a particular IP address and store that local IP address in
the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU UNit, set the IP address in the TCP/IP set-
tings of the Unit Setup from the CX-Programmer.
matically from the BOOTP server, TCP/IP settings of the Unit Setup from
the CX-Programmer. For details, refer to 3-8 TCP/IP and Link Settings.
5-1-4 Subnet Masks
Operation and management of a network can become very difficult if too
many nodes are connected on a single network. In such a case it can be help-
ful to configure the system so that a single network is divided up into several
subnetworks. This can be done by using part of the host number as a subnet
number. Internally the network can be treated as a number of subnetworks,
but from the outside it acts as a single network and uses only a single Net-
work ID.
To establish subnetworks, the Host ID in the IP address is divided into a Sub-
net ID and a Host ID by using a setting called the Subnet Mask. The Subnet
Mask indicates which part of the Host ID is to be used as the Subnet ID. All
bits in the Subnet Mask that correspond to the bits in the IP address used
either as the Network ID or Subnet ID are set to “1,” and the remaining bits,
which correspond to the bits in the IP address actually used for the Host ID,
are set to “0.”
The following example shows the Subnet Mask for an 8-bit Subnet ID used in
a class-B IP address.
Bit 31
15
0
Network ID (14 bits)
Class B 1 0
Host ID (16 bits)
Subnet mask 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 = FF FF FF 00
Network number
Subnet number Host number
Set the same Subnet Mask value for all of the nodes on that subnetwork. If no
subnetworks are used, there is no need to set Subnet Masks. In that case, the
following Subnet Mask values will be used depending on the IP address class.
Class
Subnet Mask value
255.0.0.0
Class A
Class B
255.255.0.0
Class C
255.255.255.0
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
5-1-5 CIDR
CIDR, or classless interdomain routing, is used to assign IP addresses that do
not use classes. IP addresses that use classes are separated into blocks
according to net IDs and host IDs, resulting in inefficient usage of IP address
space.
CIDR does not use classes, so IP address space can be divided as required
to more efficiently use IP address space. For example, using a subnet mask
setting with CIDR enables building a horizontally distributed network exceed-
ing 254 nodes even if a class C address block (e.g., 192, 168...).
Subnet mask range
192.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.252
CIDR was added for unit version 2.0.
5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications
5-2-1 Specifying Nodes in FINS Communications Services
With FINS communications services on an Ethernet network, IP addresses,
UDP port numbers, and TCP port numbers are paired with FINS node
addresses to specify nodes on the network.
Application level FINS
Node number
Transport level
UDP
TCP
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
Internet level
Physical level
IP
Must be allocated.
IP address
Automatically allocated
Ethernet
Ethernet address
Note
Use the Node Address Setting Switches (NODE NO.) on the front of the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or, for the built-in EtherNet/IP port, on the front of the CPU Unit
to set the FINS node address.
Allocating Addresses to EtherNet/IP Units and Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
FINS Message Reception
for EtherNet/IP Units or
Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
The IP address, FINS/UDP port number, and FINS/TCP port number set for
the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port are mainly used when receiv-
ing FINS communications messages.
Application level FINS
Node number
Transport level
Internet level
Physical level
UDP
IP
TCP
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
IP address
Ethernet
Ethernet address
Receives communications data
conforming to Ethernet address,
IP address, UDP port number,
and FINS node number.
FINS header
Ethernet V2
IP
UDP
FINS data
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
• Ethernet address:
A fixed number is assigned to each EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port and it cannot be
changed.
• IP address:
Use the default IP address
(192.168.250.FINS_node number), set the
address in the allocated DM Area words, or set
the address on the TCP/IP Tab Page of the Edit
Parameters Dialog Box from the CX-Program-
mer.
• FINS/UDP port No.:
• FINS/TCP port No.:
• FINS node address:
Use the default FINS/UDP port number (9600) or
set the number on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of
the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Use the default FINS/TCP port number (9600) or
set the number on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of
the Edit Parameters Dialog Box from the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Set the number using the Node Address Setting
Switches (NODE NO.) on the front of the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Pairing IP Addresses with
FINS Node Addresses at
Local Nodes
A particular IP address is allocated to each communications node, including
EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports. The IP address must be
paired with the FINS node address (1 to 254) by one of the following methods.
■ Automatic Generation Method (Dynamic/Static)
Set the relationship between the IP address and the FINS node address set-
ting in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port according to the follow-
ing equation. If the setting does not conform to this equation, a setting error
will be generated and the MS Indicator will flash red.
FINS node address = IP address host number
■ IP Address Table Method and Combined Method
With these methods, the IP address and the FINS node address setting in the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port have no particular relationship.
Set both the FINS node address and the IP address so that they are not dupli-
cated in the network.
Sending FINS Messages
from EtherNet/IP Units or
Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
When the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port sends a FINS mes-
sage, it is necessary to determine the remote node's IP address, UDP port
number, and TCP port number. The relationships between all addresses,
such as remote FINS node addresses and IP addresses, are managed by an
internal table at the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Remote FINS node Remote IP address
Connection
Remote port
number (Example)
address
(Example)
192.168.250.1
192.168.250.2
1
UDP
9600
9600
2
UDP
UDP
to
254
192.168.250.254
9600
When the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is turned ON or
restarted, the internal table is generated automatically from the various set-
tings that have been made. Depending on the setting method used, data such
as remote IP addresses may be changed dynamically. (Dynamic changes can
be prohibited.)
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
FINS header
FINS data
Remote node
Internal table
Remote port
Remote FINS
node number
Remote IP
number
address (Example) Connection
(Example)
Application level FINS
1
192.168.250.1
192.168.250.2
UDP
UDP
9600
9600
Node number
2
!
!
!
192.168.250.254
254
UDP
9600
Transport level
UDP
IP
TCP
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
Application level
Transport level
FINS
Node number
Internet level
Physical level
IP address
Ethernet
UDP port
number
TCP port
number
Ethernet address
UDP
IP
TCP
Internet level
Physical level
The remote node's IP address, UDP/TCP
method, UDP port number, and TCP port
number are calculated from the node
number in the FINS message, and an
Ethernet frame is generated.
IP address
Ethernet
Ethernet address
Ethernet V2
IP
UDP
FINS header
FINS data
5-2-2 Pairing Addresses in Internal Tables
FINS/UDP Communications Methods
Automatic Generation
(Dynamic)
When the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is turned ON or
restarted, the following values are set for addresses in the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + remote
FINS node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
With the dynamic method, data in an internal table that has been generated
can be dynamically converted according to FINS messages received from
remote nodes. This is enabled when the remote node is a device such as a
personal computer and IP addresses are dynamically changed by a method
such as DHCP.
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
Remote FINS node number
Local FINS node number
Personal computer
Change
registration
Must be fixed.
Automatic generation
(dynamic setting)
Local FINS node number
Local IP address
Can be changed.
Internal table
Remote IP address
Local IP address
IP address FINS command
IP address FINS response
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
For the remote IP address,
a response is returned to
the changed IP address.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Automatic Generation
(Static)
With the static method as well, the following values are set for addresses in
the internal table when the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is
turned ON or restarted.
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + remote
FINS node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
With the static method, however, data in an internal table that has been gener-
ated is not freely changed.
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
Remote FINS node number
Local FINS node number
Personal computer
Must be fixed.
Must be fixed.
Automatic generation
(static setting)
Internal table
Local FINS node number
Local IP address
Remote IP address
Local IP address
IP address FINS command
IP address FINS response
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
IP Address Table Method
With this method, FINS node addresses are converted to IP addresses based
on a preset correspondence table (IP address table).
The IP address table is set on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters
Dialog Box of the CX-Programmer. Nodes can be registered even if they are
in different segments and have different network IDs
The internal table will be as follows:
• FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
IP address registered to IP address table
• FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
0.0.0.0
With the IP address table method, records of FINS nodes registered to the IP
address table are not changed dynamically. When the Unit is turned ON or
restarted, the IP addresses of remote FINS nodes registered with an IP
address of 0.0.0.0 can be changed dynamically according to FINS messages
received from remote nodes. This can be used effectively when the remote
node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are dynami-
cally changed by a method such as DHCP.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Example
When FINS Command is Sent
FINS node number
IP address table
FINS node
number
IP address
Node number in
IP address table
18
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
20
IP address 153.214.0.129
FINS command sent
23
153.218.51.8
When FINS Command is Received
FINS node number
Internal table
Node number not
in IP address table
25
153.218.51.10
IP address 153.218.51.10
FINS response returned
Changed
Combined Method
The combined method combines the IP address table method and the auto-
matic generation method (dynamic).
First the IP address table is referenced. Then, if the applicable FINS node
address is found, the corresponding IP address is read. If the FINS node
address is not found, the IP address is calculated using the automatic genera-
tion method (dynamic).
The internal table will be as follows:
• FINS Node Address Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
IP address registered in IP address table
• FINS Node Address Not Registered to IP Address Table
The following address is registered to the internal table.
• Remote IP address:
Local IP address network number + FINS
node address
• Remote UDP port number: UDP port number set for local Unit
• Connection method: FINS/UDP
With the combined method, records of FINS nodes registered to the IP
address table are not dynamically changed. When the Unit is turned ON or
restarted and the IP address of a remote FINS node is not registered in the IP
table, the IP address can be changed dynamically according to FINS mes-
sages received from the remote node. This can be used effectively when the
remote node is a device such as a personal computer and IP addresses are
dynamically changed by a method such as DHCP.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Example
When FINS Command is Sent
FINS node number
IP address table
FINS node
number
IP address
Node number in
IP address table
18
153.214.0.62
153.214.0.129
153.218.51.8
IP address
method
20
23
IP address
FINS command
sent
Node number not
in IP address table
Network number: xx.xx.00.00
+
IP address
(See note.)
FINS command
sent
FINS node number: xx
Automatic
generation
method
Automatic
generation
method
When FINS Command is Received
FINS node number
Node number
(dynamic)
Internal table
153.218.51.10
not in IP
address table
Changed
25
IP address
153.218.51.10
FINS response
returned
Note When an internal table IP address has been changed with the reception of a
FINS command, this is sent to the IP address in the internal table.
Prohibiting Dynamically
Changing Remote IP
Addresses
With EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports, it is possible to prohibit
(protect against) dynamic changes to remote IP addresses by each method
(automatic generation, IP address table, or combined method). Use the CX-
Programmer to make this setting.
When dynamically changing remote (destination) IP addresses is prohibited,
the internal table for each method is maintained in the same state it had when
the power was turned ON or restarted. Therefore, protection can be provided
against access using FINS/UDP from personal computers or other devices
that have dynamically changing IP addresses. To prohibit dynamic changes,
clear the selection of the Dynamic change the target IP addresses Option on
the FINS/UDP Tab Page in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX-Pro-
grammer.
Using the ETN11-
compatible Mode
With EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports, operating specifications
can be made compatible with the CS1W-ETN11/CJ1W-ETN11 for all methods
(automatic generation (dynamic), I/O address table, or combined). (Dynamic
changes, however, are prohibited for the destination IP address in ETN11-
compatible mode.) While in ETN11-compatible mode, the following operations
will be performed the same as they are for the CS1W-ETN11/CJ1W-ETN11
for FINS/UDP command data sent from a UDP port number other than the
local FINS/UDP port number (default: 9600) set ion the FINS/UDP Tab Page.
• If the command data is addressed to an Ethernet Unit, a FINS response
will be sent to the source UDP port number.
• If the command data is for any other Unit, such as the CPU Unit, a FINS
response will be sent to the UDP port number set as the FINS/UDP port
number.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Note If the ETN11-compatible mode is used, the internal table will retain the same
content from when it was created after the EtherNet/IP Unit was turned ON or
restarted. This feature provides protection from access via FINS/UDP from
computers that dynamically change their IP address.
FINS/TCP Communications Method
Pairing in the FINS/TCP
Method
With the FINS/TCP method, communications are first established for each
connection, and then remote FINS node addresses are mutually converted.
(See note.) After the FINS node address is converted, FINS message com-
munications are executed.
In this way, remote FINS node addresses and remote IP addresses are paired
for each connection. Therefore, with the FINS/TCP method, there is no need
to set IP address conversions (i.e., pairing FINS node addresses with IP
addresses) as with FINS/UDP. On the other hand, it is necessary to set the
remote IP address for each connection in the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the Net-
work Configurator’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
Note
The internal table is changed after connections are established.
Internal Processing
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port executes the following pro-
cessing when the FINS/TCP method is used.
■ Local Device: FINS/TCP Client
1,2,3...
1. Connections are established in TCP/IP protocol with the remote IP ad-
dresses set for FINS/TCP connections in the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the
CX-Programmer’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
2. The remote node (i.e., the server) is notified of the FINS node address for
the local device.
3. Notification is received from the remote node (i.e., the server) of the re-
mote node's FINS node address.
4. The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port changes the internal table
(FINS node address, IP address, and TCP port number).
5. FINS messages can then be sent and received.
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
■ Local Device: FINS/TCP Server
1,2,3...
1. A request to open a connection is received in TCP/IP protocol from the re-
mote device (i.e., the client, either a personal computer, an EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port), and the connection is established.
2. Notification is received from the remote node (i.e., the client) of the remote
node's FINS node address.
3. The local device provides notification of the local FINS node address.
4. The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port changes the internal node
correspondence table (FINS node address, IP address, and TCP port
number).
5. FINS messages can then be sent and received.
Personal computer or
EtherNet/IP Unit (client)
EtherNet/IP Unit (server) CPU Unit
(1) The connection is established.
Local FINS node number B
Local FINS node number A
Local IP address T
(2) The local device (such as a personal
Local IP address S
computer) sends notification that its
FINS node number is A.
IP address FINS node number transmission
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
FINS node number transmission
IP address
The FINS node number
is converted for each
connection number.
(3) The EtherNet/IP Unit sends notification that
its FINS node number is B.
(4) The internal node correspondence
table is changed.
(5) It then becomes possible to send
and receive FINS messages.
Setting FINS/TCP
Connections
The procedure for setting FINS/TCP connections involves the items described
below. The settings are made individually for each connection (numbers 1 to
16) on the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box of the CX-
Programmer.
■ Local Device: Server
1,2,3...
1. Set the server.
2. Set IP addresses for the devices to be connected.
If the option for protection of IP addresses is selected, set the IP addresses
for clients where connections are permitted. (This step can be omitted.)
3. Automatic FINS node address allocation:
If the client (generally a personal computer) supports FINS/TCP, and if it is
to be used without setting a FINS node address, the value set here (from
239 to 254) can be allocated to the client. The default settings should nor-
mally be used.
■ Local Device: Client
1,2,3...
1. Set the client.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
2. Set IP addresses for the devices to be connected.
Set the IP address for the remote EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port (i.e., the server) connected by FINS/TCP.
This setting must be made if this EtherNet/IP Unit will be used as a FINS/
TCP client.
5-2-3 Application Examples
Responding to Computers with Changed IP Addresses
FINS/UDP
Communications Method
With FINS/UDP, whether using the automatic conversion method (dynamic),
the IP address table method, or the combined method, remote FINS node
addresses and remote IP addresses in the internal table are changed after
FINS messages are received. Therefore, even when a FINS command has
been received from a personal computer (a DHCP client computer) for which
the IP address is dynamically changed, a response can still be sent back to
the computer (the DHCP client computer) from which the command origi-
nated.
Personal computer (client)
IP address changed
(acquired from DHCP server when connected)
FINS command sent
IP address FINS command
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
EtherNet/IP Unit
(with fixed IP address)
IP address FINS response
Response sent back to
changed IP address
FINS/TCP
Communications Method
With FINS/TCP, FINS node addresses and IP addresses in the internal table
are changed with each connection that is established. Therefore, even when a
FINS command has been received from a personal computer (a DHCP client
computer) for which the IP address is dynamically changed, a response can
still be sent back to the computer (the DHCP client computer) from which the
command originated.
Personal computer (client)
IP address changed
(acquired from DHCP server when connected)
FINS command sent
IP address FINS command
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
EtherNet/IP Unit
IP address FINS response
(FINS/TCP server; with
fixed IP address)
Response sent back to
changed IP address
Note
Automatic IP Address Setting by DHCP Service
DHCP service is a method whereby a DHCP server collectively manages all
of the IP address in a network.
Nodes that are functioning as clients acquire IP addresses from the DHCP
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
server whenever the system is started. Therefore, at a personal computer
using the DHCP service, IP addresses may be different with each system
startup.
DHCP service is mainly used for automatic settings in devices such as per-
sonal computers that are used for client applications. Nodes used for server
applications, such as mail servers, are normally allocated fixed IP addresses.
EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports in PLC systems are also allo-
cated fixed IP addresses.
Simultaneously Running Multiple Applications on a Personal Computer
In communications involving previous models, multiple communications appli-
cations were configured on personal computers according to data accessing
uses, and the fact that no more than one UDP port number for FINS commu-
nications could be used on any given computer created a problem. This Eth-
erNet/IP Unit provides a practical solution with an internal table that pairs
remote nodes (applications) with FINS node addresses, enabling dynamic
changes.
FINS/UDP
Communications Method
FINS nodes are allocated individually for each application on the computer,
and the respective FINS/UDP port numbers that are used are also allocated
individually. When FINS/UDP FINS commands are sent from individual appli-
cations to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, the respective
remote IP addresses and remote port numbers in the internal table are
dynamically changed.
FINS/TCP
Communications Method
With this method as well, FINS nodes are allocated individually for each appli-
cation on the computer, and the respective FINS/TCP port numbers that are
used are also allocated individually. Each application is positioned with a
FINS/TCP client, and requests the opening of a connection with the FINS/
TCP server of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. When the
connection is established, the respective remote IP address and remote port
number in the internal table are dynamically changed.
5-2-4 Related Products and Communications/Setting Methods
Models Supporting
Automatic Generation
Method (Dynamic)
Product
Model/Series/
Version
Supports automatic
generation method
(dynamic)?
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
Yes
No: Set by automatic
generation method or
combined method. Com-
munications are not pos-
sible with personal
computers with variable
IP addresses.
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
Yes
No: Set by automatic
generation method or
combined method. Com-
munications are not pos-
sible with personal
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Version 4.xx or
lower
computers with variable
IP addresses.
Version 2003 or Yes
higher
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Product
Model/Series/
Version
Supports automatic
generation method
(dynamic)?
Programmable Terminal
NS Series
---
No: Set manually so that
automatic settings can be
used with the automatic
generation method.
Open Network Controller (ONC)
Models Supporting
Automatic Generation
Method (Static)
Product
Model/Series/
Version
Supports automatic
generation method
(static)?
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
Yes
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
Yes: Simply called “auto-
matic generation
method.”
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
Yes
Yes: Simply called “auto-
matic generation
method.”
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Version 4.xx or
lower
Version 2003 or Yes
higher
Programmable Terminal
NS Series
---
No: Set manually so that
automatic settings can be
used with the automatic
generation method.
Open Network Controller (ONC)
Models Supporting IP
Address Table Method
Product
Model/Series/
Version
Supports IP address
table method?
CS-series Ethernet
Unit
100BASE-TX
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
Yes
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Version 4.xx or
lower
Version 2003 or
higher
Programmable Terminal
NS Series
---
No: Set manually. FINS
communications are not
possible with personal
computers set automati-
cally by DHCP.
Open Network Controller (ONC)
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Addresses in FINS Communications
Section 5-2
Models that Can Use the
Combined Method
Product
CS-series Ethernet 100BASE-TX
Model/Series/
Version
Supports combined
method?
CS1W-ETN21
CS1W-ETN01
CS1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
CJ1W-ETN11
CV500-ETN01
Yes
Unit
10BASE-5
10BASE-T
100BASE-TX
10BASE-T
10BASE-5
No
No
Yes
No
No
CJ-series Ethernet
Unit
CV/CVM1-series
Ethernet Unit
FinsGateway
Version 4.xx or No
lower
Version 2003 or Yes
higher
Programmable Terminal
NS Series
---
No: Set manually. FINS
communications are not
possible with personal
computers set automati-
cally by DHCP.
Open Network Controller (ONC)
5-2-5 Pairing IP Addresses and FINS Node Addresses
The following table shows the methods for pairing IP address and FINS node
addresses, and the relation between fixed and variable address, for both
FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP.
Communi- Method of pairing
IP address determination
Client (personal
computer of PLC)
Server (PLC)
cations
method
of IP addresses
and FINS node
addresses
FINS node IP address FINS node IP address
address address
FINS/UDP By pairing FINS
IP address Automatic gen- Fixed Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
node addresses with conversion eration method
IP addresses in
Ethernet
(static)
Automatic gen- Fixed
eration method
(dynamic)
Fixed or
variable
Fixed
Fixed
IP address table Fixed
method
Fixed or
variable
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Combined
method
Fixed
Fixed or
variable
FINS/TCP By automatic conver- Automatic
sion of FINS node
Connection
method (auto-
matic FINS
Fixed or
can be allo- variable
cated auto-
Fixed or
addresses at Ether-
Net/IP Unit and
remote node (and
node address
conversion)
matically
when not
then sending and
determined.
receiving data)
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Private and Global Addresses
Section 5-3
5-3 Private and Global Addresses
5-3-1 Private and Global Addresses
There are two kinds of IP addresses, private and global.
• Global addresses: These are IP addresses that connect directly to the
Internet. Allocated by application to NIC, each
address is unique in the world, and as many as
4.3 million can be allocated worldwide.
• Private addresses: These are IP addresses for Intranet (LAN) use, and
cannot connect directly to the Internet. Frames that
include private IP addresses are restricted by the
router from being sent outside the LAN.
Generally, as shown below, global addresses in the intranet are allocated only
to IP routers (such as broadband routers) interfacing with the Internet. All
other nodes in the intranet, including the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port, are allocated private addresses.
Intranet
Personal computer,
CX-Programmer, etc.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
Firewall
IP router
PLC
Private address
Private address
Not output to Internet
Internet
Global address
(required)
Not output to Internet
Intranet
Global address
Private address
IP router
Private address
Personal computer,
CX-Programmer, etc.
Firewall
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
PLC
PLC
Private address
Private address
Communications Services
That Require Global
Addresses for EtherNet/IP
Units and built-in
A global address is required for the IP addresses of the EtherNet/IP Units and
built-in EtherNet/IP port when the following communications services are
used over the Internet.
• FINS communications services
EtherNet/IP ports
• Explicit message communications services
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Private and Global Addresses
Section 5-3
5-3-2 Using a Private Address for the EtherNet/IP Unit
Intranet
FINS communications,
Explicit messages
FINS/TCP client computer
with CX-Programmer, etc.
or
CIP client computer with
Network Configurator, etc.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
Communications in intranet
Firewall
PLC
IP router
EtherNet/IP Unit: Private address
Internet
Intranet
FINS communications,
Explicit messages
FINS/TCP client computer
with CX-Programmer, etc.
IP router
or
CIP client computer with
Network Configurator, etc.
Firewall
Communications in Intranet
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
PLC
PLC
Communications
in Intranet
EtherNet/IP Unit: Private address
EtherNet/IP Unit: Private address
Conditions for Using
Communications
Applications
When the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port has a private address,
communications applications can be used under the following conditions:
■ FINS Communications Service
• The FINS communications service can be executed on the intranet
between EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports with private
addresses only.
A device such as a personal computer (with a FINS application, including
the CX-Programmer) cannot connect online and communicate over the
Internet with an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that has a pri-
vate address. FINS communications are also not possible over the Inter-
net between EtherNet/IP Units and or built-in EtherNet/IP ports with
private addresses.
• Either FINS/TCP or FINS/UDP can be used for the FINS communications
service.
• With FINS/UDP, all of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port IP
address conversion methods can be used.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Private and Global Addresses
Section 5-3
• With FINS/UDP, when the IP address (private address) of a computer
serving as a DHCP client is changed, the IP address conversion method
of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port will be the automatic
generation method (dynamic), the combined method, or the IP address
table method. When FINS/TCP is used, IP addresses can be changed
automatically.
■ Explicit Message Communications Service
• The explicit message communications service can be executed on the
intranet between EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports with pri-
vate addresses only.
• A device such as a personal computer (CIP applications including the
Network Configurator) cannot connect online and communicate over the
Internet with an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that has a pri-
vate address. Explicit message communications are also not possible
over the Internet between EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports
with private addresses.
Note Network Security and Firewalls
Setting up an intranet through a global address involves network security con-
siderations. Before doing so, be sure to consult with a network specialist and
consider installing a firewall.
Once a firewall has been set up by a communications technician, on the other
hand, there may be some applications that cannot be used. Be sure to check
first with the communications technician.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Private and Global Addresses
Section 5-3
5-3-3 EtherNet/IP Unit with a Global Address
Intranet
FINS/TCP client computer
with CX-Programmer, etc.
or
CIP client computer with
Network Configurator, etc.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
Communications
over Internet
Firewall
IP router
Private address
Not output to Internet
Internet
Global address
(required)
Not output to Internet
Intranet
IP router
Global address
Private address
Private address
Firewall
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
PLC
Communications
in intranet
EtherNet/IP Unit: Global address
Conditions for Using
Communications
Applications
Communications applications can be used over the Internet under the follow-
ing conditions:
■ FINS Communications Service
• A device such as a personal computer (a FINS application, including the
CX-Programmer) can connect online and communicate over the Internet
with an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that has a global
address.
• FINS/TCP is recommended as the FINS communications service
method.
FINS/TCP is more reliable than FINS/UDP in terms of communications
errors involving IP routers.
• The IP address table method is used as the IP address conversion
method of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• The TCP port number to be used for FINS/TCP cannot be used if prohib-
ited by a firewall in the communications path.
■ Explicit Message Communications Service
• A device such as a personal computer (a CIP application including the
Network Configurator) can connect online and communicate over the
Internet with an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that has a
global address.
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Private and Global Addresses
Section 5-3
• If the TCP port number (44818) or UDP port number (44818) that is used
for EtherNet/IP cannot be used if prohibited by a firewall in the communi-
cations path.
Note Network Security and Firewalls
Setting a global IP address for an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
involves network security considerations. It is recommended that the user
contract with a communications company for a dedicated line, rather than
using a general line such as a broadband line. Also, be sure to consult with a
network specialist and consider security measures such as a firewall.
Once a firewall has been set up by a communications technician, on the other
hand, there may be some applications that cannot be used. Be sure to check
first with the communications technician.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 6
Tag Data Link Functions
6-1 Overview of Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-1 Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-2 Overview of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-3 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1-4 Data Link Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Setting Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-1 Starting the Network Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-2 Tag Data Link Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-3 Registering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-5 Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-6 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-7 Creating Connections Using the Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping . . . . . . . .
6-2-9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-10 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-11 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-12 Verifying the Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-13 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-14 Clearing the Device Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-15 Saving the Network Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-16 Reading a Network Configuration File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-17 Checking Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-18 Changing Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2-19 Displaying Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3-2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
112
113
115
116
121
121
124
125
126
141
150
156
159
161
168
171
172
175
176
177
178
180
181
181
183
183
186
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
6-1 Overview of Tag Data Links
6-1-1 Tag Data Links
Tag data links enable cyclic data exchanges on an EtherNet/IP network
between PLCs or between PLCs and another device. I/O memory addresses
(e.g., in the CIO or DM Area) and symbols can be assigned to tags. The set-
tings for tag data links are made using the Network Configurator. Refer to 6-2
Setting Tag Data Links for information on how to make the settings.
Note
Symbols can be used in tags only for the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP and CJ2M-
CPU3@. If you are using a CJ1W-EIP21 or CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit that
is mounted to a CJ2H-CPU6@ or any CPU Unit other than the CJ2H-CPU6@-
EIP, use I/O memory addresses to set the tag data links.
With tag data links, one node requests the opening of a communications line
called a connection to exchange data with another node. The node that
requests opening the connection is called the originator, and the node that
receives the request is called the target.
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
Inputs
Outputs
Connection
Tag set name: ABC
Tag set name: OUT1
Var-Out1(DM0)
DM00100
I/O refreshed.
DM00100
Var-In
Var-Out1
Var-Out2
Var-Out3
Input tags
Output tags
Var-Out2(DM100)
Var-Out3(DM200)
Var-In(WR200)
DM20000
I/O refreshed.
DM20000
Originator
Target
Inputs
Outputs
DM00200
WR300
Connection
DM00200
Var-Out(WR300)
Tag set name: IN1
Tag set name: XYZ
I/O refreshed.
DM20100
I/O refreshed.
DM20100
DM00200
Var-Out
DM20100
DM00200
WR300
DM20100
Output tags
Input tags
PLC status
PLC status
Target
Originator
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
For communications between PLCs, the connection information is set in the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port of the PLC that receives data (i.e.,
the originator).
Note
For communications between a PLC and an I/O device, the connection infor-
mation is set in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that is the orig-
inator. If an I/O device is used, the Network Configurator must have an EDS
file installed that includes connection information for the I/O device. Refer to
Appendix F EDS File Management for the installation procedure.
The output words and input words for each node for which data is exchanged
must be set in the connection information. These words are called the output
tag set and input tag set. A tag set must specify at least one tag. The size of
the data for data exchange is the total size of the tags included in the tag set.
The size of the output tag set and the size of the input tag set must match.
In this manual, set connection information is called tag data link parameters.
The following section describes how to set tag data links using the Network
Configurator.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
6-1-2 Overview of Operation
Setting and Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters
The tag data link parameters (e.g., connection information) that are described
below are created using the Network Configurator, and then the parameters
are downloaded to all originator devices on the EtherNet/IP network.
Make the following settings using the Network Configurator if tag data link
functionality is used with the CJ2B-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port on the
CJ2H, CJ2M-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2M, CS1W-EIP21, or
CJ1W-EIP21.
Tag Settings
Create input (reception) tags and output (send) tags for addresses in the CPU
Unit's I/O memory areas or for symbols.
The following are the limits for tags that can be created with the CJ2B-EIP21
built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2H, CJ2M-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port
on the CJ2M, CS1W-EIP21, or CJ1W-EIP21.
• A maximum of 32 tags can be created per Unit for the CJ2M-EIP21. A
maximum of 256 tags can be created per Unit for other CPU Units.
• A maximum data size of 40 bytes (20 words) can be used per tag for the
CJ2M-EIP21. A maximum data size of 1,444 bytes (722 words) can be
used per tag for other CPU Units.
With the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@, you can create tags by import-
ing network symbols (i.e., I/O allocation settings) that were created using the
CX-Programmer into the Network Configurator. Output tags can be defined to
clear output data to 0 or to hold the output data when PLC outputs are turned
OFF.
Setting Tag Sets
Create output tag sets and input tag sets and position them. (Up to eight tag
sets can be created). The following are the limits on tag sets that can be cre-
ated with the CJ2B-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2H, CJ2M-EIP21
built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2M, CS1W-EIP21, or CJ1W-EIP21.
• A maximum of 32 tag sets can be created per Unit for the CJ2M-EIP21. A
maximum of 256 tag sets can be created per Unit for other CPU Units.
• A maximum data size of 40 bytes (20 words) can be used per tag set for
the CJ2M-EIP21. A maximum data size of 1,444 bytes (722 words) can
be used per tag set for other CPU Units.
The PLC status can be specified in a tag set to indicate the CPU Unit’s operat-
ing status (operating information and error information).
Setting Connections
The target device output tag set and the originator device input tag set are
associated as connections. A maximum of 256 connections can be opened
per Unit for the CJ2B-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2H, CS1W-
EIP21, or CJ1W-EIP21. A maximum of 32 connections can be opened per
Unit for the CJ2M-EIP21 built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2M.
Counting Connections
The number of connections is the total of the number of input tag sets that
receive data and the number of nodes that send data for output tag sets.
(Refer to the following figure.) One connection is consumed for each connec-
tion setting whether the connection is a multicast connection or a unicast
(point-to-point) connection.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
Example of Calculating the Number of Connections
• EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port with IP address of
192.168.250.254 in bidirectional connection with 128 nodes
192.168.250.1
192.168.250.254
CN.1
Tagset_in1
Tagset_out
Tagset_in
Tagset_in2
CN.2
:
CN.129
CN.130
192.168.250.2
Tagset_out
Tagset_in
Tagset_in128
CN.128
Tagset_out254
:
:
:
:
The maximum number of
connections for node
192.168.250.254 is 32 for
the CJ2M and 256 for other
CPU Units.
192.168.250.128
CN.256
Another EtherNet/IP Unit must be mounted to the PLC to increase the maxi-
mum number of connections. (Refer to the following figure.)
Example of Calculating the Number of Connections
• The maximum number of connections (32 for the CJ2M and 256 for other
CPU Units) per Unit would be exceeded if an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port with an IP address of 192.168.250.254 is used in a
bidirectional connection with 129 nodes. In this case, bidirectional
communications can be performed with 129 nodes or more by adding an
EtherNet/IP Unit with the IP address of, for example, 192.168.250.253 to
the same PLC, creating an output tag set in the new EtherNet/IP Unit, and
creating connections.
192.168.250.254
192.168.250.1
CN.1
Tagset_in1
Tagset_out
Tagset_in
Tagset_in2
CN.2
:
CN.1
CN.2
192.168.250.2
Tagset_out
Tagset _in
Tagset_in129
CN.129
192.168.250.253
Tagset_out253
:
:
:
:
192.168.250.129
Tagset_out
Tagset_in
CN.129
Setting the Packet Interval
(RPI)
The packet interval is the data I/O refresh cycle in the Ethernet circuit when
performing tag data links, and can be set separately for each connection. The
packet interval can be set to between 0.5 and 10,000 ms in units of 0.5 ms for
the CJ2B-EIP21 (built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2H), CS1W-EIP21, or
CJ1W-EIP21. It can be set to between 1 and 10,000 ms in units of 0.5 ms for
the CJ2M-EIP21 (built-in EtherNet/IP port on the CJ2M). The default setting is
50 ms.
With EtherNet/IP, data is exchanged on the communications line at the packet
interval that is set for each connection, regardless of the number of nodes.
Using Multicast and
Unicast Communications
A multicast connection or unicast (point-to-point) connection can be selected
as the connection type in the tag data link connection settings.
With a multicast connection, you can send an output tag set in one package to
multiple nodes and make allocations to the input tag sets.
A unicast connection separately sends one output tag set to each node, and
so it sends the same number of packets as the number of input tag sets.
Therefore, using multicast connections can decrease the communications
load if one output tag set is sent to multiple nodes.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
If multicast connections are used, however, use a switching hub that has mul-
ticast filtering, unless the tag set is received by all nodes in the network.
If a switching hub that does not have multicast filtering is used, the multicast
packets will be broadcast to the entire network, and so packets will be sent to
nodes that do not require them, which will cause the communications load on
those nodes to increase.
This applies only if one output tag set is sent to multiple nodes using a multi-
cast connection with one packet, the connection type of the connections that
receive the output tag set is multicast, and the connection I/O types, packet
intervals (RPI), and timeout values are all the same.
Note
The performance of communications devices is limited to some extent by the
the packet interval (RPI) settings. Refer to 10-2 Adjusting the Communica-
tions Load and set an appropriate packet interval (RPI).
Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links
Tag data links are automatically started when the data link parameters are
downloaded from the Network Configurator. Thereafter, tag data links can be
stopped and started for the entire network or individual devices from the Net-
work Configurator. Starting and stopping tag data links for individual devices
must be performed for the originator.
Software switches in allocated words can also be used to start and stop tag
data links for the entire network. Refer to 6-2-13 Starting and Stopping Tag
Data Links for details.
6-1-3 Tag Data Link Functions and Specifications
Item
Specification
Communications
type
Standard EtherNet/IP implicit communications (connection-
type cyclic communications)
Setting method
After setting tags, tag sets, and connections with the Network
Configurator, the tag data link parameters must be down-
loaded to all devices in the EtherNet/IP network.
With a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Unit, a sym-
bol table can be created with the CX- Programmer and then
imported into the Network Configurator to allocate tags.
After the parameters are downloaded, the EtherNet/IP Units
are restarted to start the tag data links.
Tags
Applicable CPU Unit data: CIO Area, DM Area, EM Area,
Holding Area, Work Area, and symbols. (See note.)
Number of words per tag: 20 max. (40 bytes) for CJ2M, 722
max. (1,444 bytes) for other CPU Units
Number of tags per Unit: 32 max. for CJ2M, 256 max. for other
CPU UNits
Note With the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@, network
symbols (I/O allocation settings) created using the CX-
Programmer can be imported into the Network Configu-
rator.
Tag sets
Number of tags per tag set: 8 max. (7 max. if PLC status is
included)
Number of words per tag set: 20 max. (40 bytes) for CJ2M,
722 max. (1,444 bytes) for other CPU Units
Number of tag sets per Unit: 32 max. for CJ2M, 256 max. for
other CPU Units
Connections
Number of connections per Unit: 32 max. for CJ2M, 256 max.
for other CPU Units
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
Item
Specification
Connection type
Each connection can be set for 1-to-1 (unicast) or 1-to-N (mul-
ticast) communications. (Default: Multicast)
Packet interval (RPI) 1 to 10,000 ms for CJ2M and 0.5 to 10,000 ms for other CPU
Units (in 0.5-ms units)
The packet interval can be set separately for each connection.
System Configuration Conditions for Setting Tags Using Symbols or I/O Memory
Addresses
Local tags for tag data links can be set using I/O memory addresses or net-
work symbols. Support for network symbols, however, depends on the model
of CPU Unit, as shown in the following table.
Communications with the remote node are possible regardless of whether the
remote node tags are set using I/O memory addresses or network symbols.
Name in hardware list
of Network
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port
Symbol name
specification
I/O memory
address
specification
Configurator
CJ2B-EIP21
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU6@
CJ2M-CPU3@
CJ2M-CPU1@
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2M-CPU3@
CJ1W-EIP21
OK
OK
OK
OK
CJ2M-EIP21
OK
OK
CJ1W-EIP21(CJ2)
(CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP and
CJ2M-CPU3@ only)
(See note.)
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
---
---
OK
OK
CS1 CPU Unit
Note
Symbols cannot be set for tags with CJ2H-CPU6@ and CJ2M-CPU1@ CPU
Units.
6-1-4 Data Link Data Areas
Tags
A data link between the local I/O memory and a remote I/O memory is called
a tag. A tag can be set using a network symbol name or an I/O memory
address.
Tag Sets
When a connection is established, from 1 to 8 tags (including PLC status) is
configured as a tag set. Each tag set represents the data that is linked for a
tag data link connection. Tag data links are thus created by connecting one
tag set to another tag set. A tag set name must be set for each tag set.
Note
A connection is used to exchange data as a unit within which data concur-
rency is maintained. Thus, data concurrency is maintained for all the data
exchanged for the tags in one data set.
Example
In the following example, input tags a to g at the originator are a tag set
named SP1_IN and output tags i and ii are a tag set named SP1_OUT). A
connection is set between these two tag sets.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
Target device
Originator device
IP address: #
Connection Information
· Target IP address: #
· Originator tag set: SP1_IN
· Target tag set: SP1_OUT
· Packet interval (RPI)
Tag Set (Output Tags)
Tag Set (Input Tags)
Tag set name: SP1_IN
Tag set name: SP1_OUT
PLC status
PLC status
Tag a
Tag i
Tag ii
Connection
EtherNet/IP
Tag b
Tag c
Tag g
There are both input and output tag sets. Each tag set can contain only input
tags or only output tags. The same input tag cannot be included in more than
one input tag set.
Number of Tags in Tag
Sets
Each tag set can contain one or more tags.
■ Tag Sets with Only One Tag
With basic Network Configurator procedures, each tag set contains only one
tag.
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Tag set SP1_IN
(tag a)
Tag set SP1_OUT
(tag c)
I/O memory
I/O memory
Connection
a
c
One tag each
(Each tag is set using a text
string of the network symbol
or I/O memory address.)
Tag set SP2_OUT
(tag b)
Tag set SP2_IN
(tag d)
Connection
b
d
EtherNet/IP
■ Tag Sets with Multiple Tags
As shown below, tags can be created in groups. Each tag set can contain up
to 8 tags totaling 20 words for the CJ2M or 722 words for other CPU Units.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
Tag set SP1_IN
I/O memory
Tag set SP1_OUT
I/O memory
(group of tags a, b, and c)
a
f
One tag each
(Each tag is set using a text
string of the network symbol
or I/O memory address.)
b
c
g
h
Tag set SP2_OUT
(group of tags d, e)
Tag set SP2_IN
Connection
d
e
i
j
EtherNet/IP
Note
The I/O memory words used in tags in a tag set do not have continuous
addresses. The tags can also be from different I/O memory areas. To enable a
connection, however, each tag set must include only input tags or only output
tags. (Both input and output tags cannot be included in the same tag set.)
Specifications
The following table shows the tag and tag set specifications.
Tags
CJ2M-CPU3@
Tag sets
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ2M-CPU3@
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
Total size of all tags ≤
184,832 words
Total size of all tags ≤ 640
words
Maximum size of 1 tag set ≤ Maximum size of 1 tag set ≤
722 words
20 words
(The maximum size is 721
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
(The maximum size is 19
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
Maximum size of 1 tag ≤ 722 Maximum size of 1 tag ≤ 20 Number of tags per tag set ≤ 8
words
words
(7 tags/tag set when the tag set includes the PLC status)
(The maximum size is 721
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
(The maximum size is 19
words when the tag set
includes the PLC status.)
Note Input and output variables cannot be combined.
Number of registrable tags ≤ Number of registrable tags ≤ Number of registrable tag
Number of registrable tag
sets ≤ 32
256
32
sets ≤ 256
PLC Status
A characteristic function of the CS1W-EIP21 and CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP
Units and CJ2 built-in EtherNet/IP ports is the ability to specify the PLC status
as a member of the tag set. This function reads the operating status (operat-
ing and error status) of the CPU Unit of the PLC in which the EtherNet/IP Unit
is mounted, and includes the PLC status as status flags in the data trans-
ferred by the tag data links.
When the PLC status is specified as an output (produce) tag, it is actually
transferred as the tag set’s leading data in the following format.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PLC Operating Flag
PLC Error Flag
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
To receive the PLC status, specify the PLC status in an input (consume) tag in
the reception tag set as well. When the PLC status is specified in an input tag,
the PLC status flags will be reflected in the corresponding location in the tag
data link’s Target Node PLC Operating Flags and Target Node PLC Error
Flags. The following example shows the relationship between the Target Node
PLC Operating Flag location and target ID of the target node with
192.168.250.2.
IP address = 192.168.250.2 → (Last byte = 2) → Target ID = #002
Target Node PLC Operating Flags:
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+2
n+3
n+4
n+5
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
CPU Unit
CPU Unit
PLC status
PLC status (when included)
Output tag set
PLC status
PLC status (when included)
Input tag set
I/O memory
a
I/O memory
f
Connection
b
c
g
h
Target data link status
EtherNet/IP
Note
The target ID may be duplicated depending on the IP addresses of the target
Configurator. For information on how to change the device number, refer to
step 4 under Registering Devices in the Register Device List on page 141.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of Tag Data Links
Section 6-1
The following table shows the operation of each the bits when multiple con-
nections are used to communicate with a node, and the PLC status is speci-
fied in all of the connections.
Name (allocated area)
Contents
Target Node PLC Operating Flag
Information
Each flag indicates the operating status of the
corresponding target node PLC of connections
in which the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator.
The flag corresponding to the target node’s
target ID will be ON when the PLC Operating
Flags for all connections with that target node
indicate that the PLC is operating.
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+2 to n+5
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+32 to n+47
Note Corresponds to the PLC sta-
Each node address’s flag location (i.e., target
ID) can be changed from the Network Configu-
rator.
tus’s PLC Operating Flag.
The PLC status flags are enabled when the
PLC status is included in the communications
data for both the originator and target.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor-
mation
Each flag indicates the error status (logical OR
of non-fatal and fatal errors) of the correspond-
ing target node PLC of connections in which
the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator. The flag
corresponding to the target node’s target ID
will be ON if even one error is indicated in any
of the connections with that target node.
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+6 to n+9
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+48 to n+63
Note Corresponds to the PLC sta-
Each node address’s flag location (i.e., target
ID) can be changed from the Network Configu-
rator.
tus’s PLC Error Flag.
The PLC status flags are enabled when the
PLC status is included in the communications
data for both the originator and target.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
Normal Target Node Flag Table
Each flag indicates the connection status of
the corresponding target node PLC of connec-
tions in which the EtherNet/IP Unit is the origi-
nator. The flag corresponding to the target
node’s target ID will be ON when connections
are established for all connections with that
target node indicate that the PLC is operating.
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+20 to n+23
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+16 to n+31
Note Does not correspond to the
PLC status.
Each node address’s flag location (target ID)
can be changed from the Network Configura-
tor.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
Note
When the PLC status is not selected in the input (consume) tags, the PLC sta-
tus information (16-bit data) can be used as reception data.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
6-2 Setting Tag Data Links
6-2-1 Starting the Network Configurator
Procedure
Tag data links are set by using the Network Configurator. Use the following
procedure to start the Network Configurator.
■ Starting from the Windows Start Menu
To start the Network configurator, select OMRON - CX-One - Network Con-
figurator for EtherNet/IP - Network Configurator from the Windows Start
Menu.
■ Starting from the IO Table Dialog Box in CX-Programmer
To start the Network configurator, select the Unit in the PLC IO Table Dialog
Box and select either of the options for Start Special Application from the
pop-up menu. Only operation will be started even if Start with Settings Inher-
ited is selected.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
When the Network Configurator starts, the following window will be displayed.
Main Window
The Main Window consists of a Hardware List and a Network Configuration
Window, as shown in the following diagram.
Network Configuration Window:
Displays the layout and network
configuration of devices that are set
and monitored.
Hardware List:
Displays the devices that can
be added to the network.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
When two or more networks are being managed, a new Network Configura-
tion Window can be added by selecting Network - Add.
To change the name displayed in the Network Tab Page, select Network -
Property. The name set in the Comment Field of the Network Property Win-
dow can be changed.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
6-2-2 Tag Data Link Setting Procedure
The section describes the procedure for setting tag data links (i.e., connection
information).
For data links between PLCs, the connection information is set only in the
originator, i.e., the node that receives data.
1. Creating a Network Configuration
Register all EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports for which connections will
be created in the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration Window. (Refer to 6-2-3 Reg-
istering Devices.)
work and upload the network configuration. (Refer to 6-2-11 Uploading Tag
Data Link Parameters.)
↓
2. Creating Connections
Set the connections using one of the following methods.
1) Basic Operation
1-1) Create tags and tag sets for all registered devices (EtherNet/IP Unit or built-
1-2) Create a connection for the originator device (i.e., registered device that
2) Generating a Connection Using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool (Refer to 6-2-5
Connection Settings.)
The EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool is used to create data links between PLCs by
specifying I/O memory addresses in the same manner as for Controller Link.
The following functions can be used with Network Configurator version 3.10 or
3) Creating Connections Using the Wizard (Refer to 6-2-7 Creating Connections
Using the Wizard.)
Create connections between OMRON PLCs following the instructions. Tags and
tag sets must be set for all devices before starting the Wizard. (Refer to Basic
Operation 1-1.)
4) Creating Connections by Dragging and Dropping Registered Devices (Refer to 6-
2-8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping.)
When a target device is dragged and dropped to the originator device, the Edit
Connection Dialog Box will be displayed, and a connection can be created.
OMRON EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports are the only originator
devices for which connections can be created in this way.
↓
Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters (Refer to 6-2-10 Downloading Tag Data Link
Parameters.)
Check that tag data links are operating correctly by using the indicators on the Ether-
Troubleshooting) and the Network Configurator monitor function (refer to 14-1 Check-
ing Status with the Network Configurator).
↓
Check that the output tag data is updated in the input tag by using the CX-Program-
mer's Watch Window or PLC memory function.
Note Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (Cat. No. W446) for the operat-
ing procedures.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
6-2-3 Registering Devices
Register all of the devices required in the equipment (such as EtherNet/IP
Units performing tag data links) as a network configuration.
1,2,3...
1. Register the devices that will participate in the tag data links by dragging
the devices from the Hardware List and dropping them in the Network Con-
figuration Window. (To drag and drop an icon, click and hold the left mouse
button over the icon, move the icon to the destination, and release the
mouse button.)
The icon will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window, as shown
in the following diagram.
Drag and drop icons from
the Hardware List.
Hardware List
Name in hardware list
CIP revision
Rev. 2
EtherNet/IP Unit
CJ2B-EIP21
Built-in EtherNet/IP port on CJ2H
CPU Unit (CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP)
CJ2M-EIP21
Rev. 2
Built-in EtherNet/IP port on CJ2M
CPU Unit (CJ2M-CPU3@)
CJ1W-EIP21
Rev. 1 or 2
Rev. 1 or 2
Rev. 2
CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
connected to CJ1 CPU Unit
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21 (CJ2)
CS1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
connected to CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit
connected to CJ2 CPU Unit
Note
(1) If the revision is unknown, select the newest revision (i.e., the revision
with the highest number). The following table shows the relation between
the CIP revision and the unit version.
Unit version
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 2.0
CIP revision
Revision 1.01
Revision 2.01 or 2.02
(2) When mounting the CJ1W-EIP21 to a CJ2 CPU Unit, select CJ1W-EIP21
(CJ2) from the Hardware List.
2. Click the right mouse button over the registered device’s icon to display the
pop-up menu, and select Change Node Address.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
3. Set the IP address to match the node address (IP address) actually being
used in the device.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3, and register all of the devices participating in the tag
data links.
6-2-4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets
Specifying I/O
Memory Addresses
The tag sets and set member tags required to create connections for a regis-
tered EtherNet/IP Unit must be created. The I/O memory addresses or net-
work symbols that are used in the control programs can be set for the tags.
(Using network symbols is supported only by the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP21 and
CJ2M-CPU3@.) This section first describes the basic procedure for creating
tags and tag sets for using the Network Configurator's device parameter edit-
ing function.
1. Creating Tags and Tag Sets Using the Network Configurator's Device Pa-
rameter Editing Function
Next, the following two procedures, which can be used to effectively use net-
work symbols in tags, are described.
2. Importing Network Symbols Created with the CX-Programmer to the Net-
work Configurator
3. Importing Network Symbols That Were Registered to Tags with the Net-
work Configurator to the CX-Programmer
1. Creating Tags and Tag Sets Using the Network Configurator's Device Parameter
Editing Function
Note
The network symbols described in this section can be used only if you are
using a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP21 or CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Unit.
Creating a Tag Set
1,2,3...
1. Double-click the icon of the device (for which a tag set is being created) to
display the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box. Right-click the icon to dis-
play the pop-up menu, and select Parameter - Edit.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Creating and Adding Tags
3. Click the Edit Tags Button. The Edit Tags Dialog Box will be displayed.
Register the input (consume) tags and output (produce) tags separately.
4. Click the In - Consume Tab, and click the New Button. The Edit Tag Dialog
Box will be displayed.
5. In the Name Field, enter the character string for the CPU Unit's I/O memory
address or a network symbol (e.g., 100, W100, D0, Input_signal).
Addresses in the following I/O memory areas can be set.
CPU Unit’s data area
CIO Area
Address (Text to input in Name Field.)
0000 to 6143
Holding Area
Work Area
DM Area
H000 to H511
W000 to W511
D00000 to D32767
EM Area
Bank 0 hex E0_00000 to E0_32767
Bank 18
hex
E18_00000 to E18_32767
Note (a) The H, W, D, and E characters can also be input in lower case as
h, w, d, and e.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
(b) Be sure to directly enter the CPU Unit's I/O memory address
(e.g., 100, W100, D0) or a network symbol as a character string.
6. Input the size of the tag in the Size Field, in bytes.
7. Click the Regist Button to register the tag.
If an I/O memory address is specified for a tag name, the Edit Tags Dialog
Box will be displayed with the next consecutive address as the tag name
for editing the next tag. Once you have registered the tags, click the Cancel
Button.
8. Click the Out - Produce Tab, and click the New Button. The Edit Tag Dialog
Box will be displayed, like the dialog box for input tags, except for the Over
Load setting. The Over Load setting determines whether outputs are
cleared or continue their previous status when outputs are turned OFF with
the PLC’s Output OFF function. Output inhibit settings are not required for
input (reception) tag sets.
• Follow the output inhibit function: Enabled (default)
Output data is cleared to 0 when a PLC output inhibit occurs.
• Do not follow the output inhibit function: Disabled
Output data maintains its previous status even after a PLC output in-
hibit occurs.
Select Disable or Enable.
Note
When any of the following errors occurs in the originator PLC while tag data
links are in progress, the connection will be forcibly disconnected.
• Fatal CPU Unit error
• I/O refreshing error
• CPU Unit WDT error
• I/O bus error
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
9. When you are finished registering the required tags, click the OK Button at
the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box.
10. At this point, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether
the registered tag names will registered without changes as tag sets. A tag
set can contain up to 8 tags, but tag sets will be registered with one tag per
tag set if the tags are registered as tag sets. In this case, the Yes Button is
clicked to register one tag per tag set.
If the No Button is clicked, more tags can be registered at the end of the
tag set. Refer to step 18 for details on adding tags to the end of the tag set.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Changing and Registering
Tag Sets
11. The following dialog box will be displayed when the tags in the Edit Tags
Dialog Box are registered directly as tag sets.
12. If an input tag has already been registered in an input tag set, and you want
to change its registration to a different input tag set, it is necessary to de-
lete the tag from the tag set in which it was originally registered.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Open the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box, select the tag set containing
the tag that you want to delete, and click the Delete Button in the Edit Tag
Dialog Box. (If there are other tags registered in that tag set, it is possible
to delete just one tag by selecting the tag that you want to delete in the Edit
Tag Set Dialog Box and clicking the
Button.)
At this point, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to confirm that you
want to delete the selected tag set and the tags contained in that tag set.
If the No Button is clicked, only the tag set will be deleted. Click the No But-
ton.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
13. In order to edit a registered tag set and add tags, either double-click the tag
set, or select the tag set and click the Edit Button. The Edit Tag Set Dialog
Box will be displayed.
The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al-
ready registered, and the Candidate Tag List on the right side of the dialog
box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet. To add a tag,
select it in the Candidate Tag List and click the
Button.
14. When the PLC status is being included in the tag set, select the Include
Option at the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
15. If you want to change the tag set’s name, it can be changed in this dialog
box.
16. To save the changes, click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag Set
Dialog Box.
17. Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog
Box.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
18. If you want to just add new tags and register the tag set, first register the
tags with steps 1 to 9. In this example, input tags D00004 and D00005
have been newly added.
19. When you are finished registering the required tags, click the OK Button at
the bottom of the Edit Tags Dialog Box.
20. At this point, a confirmation dialog box will be displayed to check whether
the registered tag names will be registered without changes as tag sets.
Tags are just being added in this case, so click the No Button. Just the tags
will be registered, without registering the tags as tag sets.
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
21. To register the newly added tags in a tag set, either double-click the de-
sired tag set, or select the tag set and click the Edit Button.
The Tag List on the left side of the dialog box shows the tags that are al-
ready registered, and the Candidate Tag List on the right side of the dialog
box shows the other tags that have not been registered yet.
22. Select the tags that you want to add from the Candidate Tag List and click
the
Button.
Up to 8 tags can be registered in a tag set, or up to 7 tags can be registered
and two byes will be added to the size if the PLC status is included in the
tag set.
23. To confirm the changes, click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Tag
Set Dialog Box.
24. Click the OK Button at the bottom of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog
Box.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
2. Importing Network Symbols Created with the CX-Programmer to the Network
Configurator
If the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@ is used, you can create network
symbols using the CX-Programmer, import them into the Network Configura-
tor, and then create tags and tag sets. Use the following procedure.
Creating Global Symbols
Create global symbol with the Global Symbol Editor of the CX-Programmer
and select Input or Output for the network variable properties. Safe the project
when you are finished.
Any global symbols with Input or Output set for the network variable property
will be imported when the import procedure is performed from the Edit Device
Parameters Dialog Box.
Importing Symbols to the
Network Configurator
1,2,3...
1. Start the CX-Programmer and open the project that was saved.
Note
When multiple copies of the CX-Programmer are running at the same time, it
is possible to import only from the CX-Programmer project that was started
first. If the global symbols that are to be imported are stored in multiple CX-
Programmer project files, the projects must be started one by one to import
the symbols.
2. From the devices registered in the Network Configurator, double-click the
icon of the device for which to import the network symbols. The Edit Device
Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed. You can also right-click the icon
and select Device - Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.
3. Click the Import Button on the Tag Sets Tab Page of the Edit Device Pa-
rameter Dialog Box.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
A confirmation message will be displayed. Click the Yes Button.
The symbols will be imported as shown below on the Tag Sets Tab Page.
Each symbol will be imported into a different tag set and the device param-
eters will be automatically edited. (The symbol name will be used for the
tag set name.)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
To place more than one input symbol (input tag) imported from the CX-
Programmer into one tag set, you must delete the input tags that were reg-
istered to separate input tag sets.
Select the tag sets for the symbols that are included in the one tag set and
click the Delete Button. A confirmation message will be displayed. Click
the No Button to delete only the tag sets.
To create a new tag set for more than one tag, click the New Button. To
place more than one tag in an existing tag set, double-click the tab set, or
select it and click the Edit Button.
The Edit Tag Set Dialog Box will be displayed. Imported tags that are not
registered in another tag set will be displayed in the Candidate Tag List
Area on the right. Click the Right Arrow Button to add tags individually.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
4. You can change tag set names in this dialog box. To confirm a change, click
the OK Button in the dialog box.
5. Perform steps 1 to 3 for all the devices that will perform tag data links.
3. Importing Network Symbols That Were Registered to Tags with the Network
Configurator to the CX-Programmer
If the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-CPU3@ is used, you can specify network
symbols for tags using the Network Configurator. The procedure to import net-
work symbols that were created using the Network Configurator into the CX-
Programmer is described below.
Exporting Tags and Tag Sets with the Network Configurator
1,2,3...
1. Select To/From File - Export to file on the Tag Sets Tab Page in the Edit
Device Parameters Dialog Box to export the tag and tag set information to
a CSV file.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Importing the Tag and Tag Set CSV File with the CX-Programmer
1,2,3...
1. In the project global symbol table for the CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or CJ2M-
CPU3@, right-click and select Import Network Variable from the pop-up
menu.
2. You can add a tag as a network symbol by selecting and executing the CSV
file exported using the Network Configurator.
Note
The following precautions apply when importing.
• Tags that have a specified I/O memory address cannot be imported.
• Tags are imported as network symbols in a one-dimensional WORD
array. To change the data type, use the Symbol Editor of the CX-Program-
mer.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
6-2-5 Connection Settings
After creating the tag sets, click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit
Device Parameters Dialog Box, and set the following connection information.
• The target devices with which connections will be opened
• Whether the tag sets are input or output tag sets
• The length of the packet intervals (RPI)
Make the Connections settings in the originator only. The Connections set-
tings are not necessary in the target device.
Note
Make the Connections settings after creating tag sets for all of the devices
involved in tag data links.
Connection Settings (Connections Tab)
Registering Devices in the Register Device List
1,2,3...
1. Display the originator device’s Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box by dou-
ble-clicking the device’s icon in the Network Configuration Window, or
right-clicking the device’s icon and selecting Parameter - Edit from the
pop-up menu.
2. Click the Connections Tab at the top of the Edit Device Parameters Dialog
Box. All of the devices registered in the network (except the local node) will
be displayed.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
3. In the Unregister Device List, select the target device that requires connec-
tion settings by clicking the device so its color changes to gray, and click
the
Button. The selected target device will be displayed in the Reg-
ister Device List, as shown in the following diagram.
4. Target node IDs are assigned to devices registered in the Register Device
List. This target node ID determines the location in the originator node PLC
of the Target Node PLC Operating Flag, Target Node PLC Error Flag, Reg-
istered Target Node Flag, and Normal Target Node Flag. By default, the
target ID is automatically set to the rightmost 8 bits of the IP address. In
the example above, the target device’s IP address is 192.168.250.2, so the
device number is #002. If a target node ID is duplicated and you want to
change the device number, click the Change Target Node ID Button and
change the target ID.
Editing Settings for
Individual Connections
You can edit each connection separately.
Note
Refer to the following page for information on how to perform batch editing in
a table format.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
1,2,3...
1. Select the Connection Tab and then click the New Button.
The following Edit Connection Dialog Box will be displayed according to the
type of device that is selected.
Using an OMRON EtherNet/IP Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP Port as the
Target
Using Other EtherNet/IP Devices as the Target
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The settings are as follows:
Item
Description
Connection I/O Type When creating tag data links for a CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
CJ2B-EIP21, or CJ2M-EIP21, select Input Only (Tag Type).
When creating tag data links for other target devices, select
the connection I/O type specified in that device’s EDS file.
Use the Input Only (ID type) setting when another company's
node is the originator and does not support connection set-
tings with a Tag type setting.
Connection Type
Selects whether the data is sent in multicast or unicast (point-
to-point). The default setting is multicast.
• Multicast connection
Select this type when the same data is shared by multiple
nodes. This setting is usually used.
• Point-to-Point connection
Select this type when the same data is not shared by multiple
dened with an unnecessary load.
Note Refer to 6-1-2 Overview of Operation for details on
using multicast and unicast connection as well as count-
ing the number of connections.
The Connection Structure Field and the following items will not be displayed if the
Hide Detail Button is pressed.
Packet Interval (RPI) Sets the data update cycle (i.e., the packet interval) of each
connection between the originator and target. The interval can
be set to between 1 and 10,000 ms for the CJ2M and 0.5 and
10,000 ms for other CPU Units in 0.5-ms increments. The
default setting is 50 ms (i.e., data updated once every 50 ms).
Timeout Value
Sets the time until a connection times out. The timeout value is
set as a multiple of the packet interval (RPI) and can be set to
4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 times the packet interval. The
default setting is 4 times the packet interval (RPI).
Connection Name
Sets a name for the connection. (32 characters max.)
2. When the settings have been completed, press the Regist Button.
Connections Settings
(Editing All Connections)
The connection settings between the originator and all of the target devices
selected in the Register Device List can be edited together in a table.
1,2,3...
1. Select the Connections Tab, and click the Edit All Button. The following
Edit All Connections Dialog Box will be displayed.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The following table describes the various settings in the dialog box.
Setting
Function
Target Device
Selects the target device.
Connection
Name
Any name can be given to the connection (up to 32 charac-
ters).
If this field is left blank, a default name will be assigned.
This Connection Name can be used for comments.
Connection I/O When making tag data links in a CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
Type
CJ2B-EIP21, or CJ2M-EIP21, select Input Only (Tag type).
When making tag data links in other devices, select the con-
nection I/O type specified in that device’s EDS file.
Use the Input Only (ID type) setting when another company’s
node is the originator and does not support connection set-
tings with the Tag type setting.
In/Out
The connections I/O is automatically displayed based on the
selected connection.
• Input Only: Just In is displayed.
Target Variable Selects and allocates the target node’s tag set.
• In: Selects the target’s output (produce) tag set.
• Out: Selects the target’s input (consume) tag set.
Originator Vari- Selects and allocates the originator node’s tag set.
able
• In: Selects the originator’s output (produce) tag set.
• Out: Selects the originator’s input (consume) tag set.
Connection
Type
Selects whether the data is sent in a multicast or unicast. The
default setting is multicast.
• Multicast connection:
Select when the same data is shared by multiple nodes. This
setting is usually selected.
• Point-to-Point connection:
Select when the same data is not being shared by multiple
dened with an unnecessary load.
Note Refer to 6-1-2 Overview of Operation for details on
using multicast and unicast transmissions, and counting
the number of connections.
RPI
Sets the packet interval (RPI) of each connection between the
originator and target. The interval can be set between 1 and
10,000 ms for the CJ2M and 0.5 and 10,000 ms for other CPU
Units in 0.5-ms units. The default setting is 50 ms (data
refreshed once every 50 ms).
Timeout Value
Sets the time until a connection timeout is detected. The time
out value is set as a multiple of the packet interval (RPI) and
can be set to a 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 512 multiple. The
default setting is 4× the packet interval (RPI).
2. When the settings are completed, click the OK Button.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Confirming the
Connections Settings
1,2,3...
1. An overview of the connections set in the Register Device List is displayed
in the Connections Tab Page.
2. Click the OK Button. The following kind of diagram will be displayed.
Indicates the IP address of the
originator where the connection
was set.
3. Repeat the Connections setting procedure until all of the connections have
been set.
Note After completing the settings, always click the OK Button before
closing the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box and performing an-
other operation. If the Cancel Button is clicked and the dialog box
is closed, the new settings will be discarded.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
4. If the tag set’s size is changed in either the originator or target after the
connection was set, the size will not match the other node and a parameter
data mismatch will occur. In this case, if the connection settings have been
changed, be sure to check the connections. (Refer to 6-2-17 Checking
Connections.)
Automatically Setting
Connections
Tag set names set for devices can be automatically detected to automatically
set connections between input and output tag sets with the same name (or
the same names excluding specified ellipses). Connections are automatically
set under the following conditions.
Output tag set names
Input tag set names
Connection types
Except for specified ellipses, the output tag set name
must be the same as the input tag set name.
Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set
names.
Except for specified ellipses, the input tag set name
must be the same as the output tag set name.
Ellipses can be set for the beginning or end of tag set
names.
The connection type must be Input Only.
Multicast and single cast connection types can be
specified when executing a connection.
RPI
The default setting is used.
The default setting is used.
Timeouts
Example 1: Automatic Connections with the Same Tag Set Names
The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag
set named A_Signal at node A and input tag sets named A_Signal at nodes B
and C.
Excluded characters: None
Node A
Node B
Node C
Output tag set: A_Signal
Input tag set: A_Signal
Input tag set: A_Signal
Connection
Connection
EtherNet/IP
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Example 2: Automatic Connections with the Ellipses
The following connections would automatically be set if there is an output tag
set named O_Signal at node A and input tag sets named I_Signal at nodes B
and C, and “O_” and “I_” were set as ellipses.
Excluded characters: O_ and I_
Node A
Node B
Node C
Input tag set: I_Signal
Output tag set: O_Signal
Input tag set: I_Signal
Connection
Connection
EtherNet/IP
1,2,3...
1. Set the same tag set names for the output and input tag sets for the con-
nection. The tag set names can also include forward and backward el-
lipses.
2. Select Auto Connection from the Network Menu. The connections will be
set automatically.
A dialog box will appear to set forward and backward ellipses for both out-
put (product) and input (consume) tag sets as soon as automatic connec-
tion setting processing has begun.
Input the ellipses and click the OK Button. Automatic setting will be pro-
cessed.
3. If there are tag sets that meet the conditions for automatic connection set-
ting, they will be displayed.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Click the OK Button to start processing.
4. A device connection structure tree will be displayed when processing has
been completed.
5. Use the device connection structure tree as required to change the RPI
and timeout settings.
Device Connection
Structure Tree
Connection settings can be displayed on the network configuration. Select
View Device’s Connection Structure Tree from the Network Menu.
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
• The Display the detail of Connection Check Box can be used to switch
between device-level and connection-level displays of tag data link com-
munications.
• An asterisk will be displayed after the device name of the originator set for
the connection.
• The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box can be displayed by selecting a
connection and clicking the Edit Button. The connections can be edited in
this dialog box.
6-2-6 Setting Tags Using Data Link Tool
Using the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool enables easily setting data links similar to
those for the Controller Link by using only I/O memory addresses. This
method has the following restrictions.
• Settings can be made only for tag data links between OMRON EtherNet/
IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
• Tags must be set using I/O memory addresses.
• A maximum of two tags (area 1 and area 2) can be set in one tag set.
Select Network - EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool from the menus in the Network
Configurator after you have registered all the devices to start the EtherNet/IP
Datalink Tool.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Node List
The following items will be displayed in the Node Area on the left side of the
window.
• IP Address: The IP address of the node.
• Device: The name (model number) of the device at the node.
Note
The node list will display the node registered in the Network Configurator.
Nodes cannot be added or deleted from this window.
Data Link Table
Information
The data link table of the node selected on the left will be displayed on the
right. Each row specifies word that are allocated for data links for that node.
Each row specifies the node settings for the words (area) where a data link
has been created. You can set only area 1 or both area 1 and area 2.
• IN/OUT: Specifies whether the link inputs data to the node or outputs data
from the node. OUT can be selected only once. Once OUT has been
selected for one row, IN will automatically be selected for other rows. A
asterisk will be displayed if the Over Load function is disabled. (See note.)
Note The Over Load function is used to clear output data when all out-
puts are turned OFF from the CPU Unit of the PLC. This setting is
not necessary for inputs.
(a) Over Load function enabled: Output data will be cleared to all ze-
ros when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF from the CPU
Unit.
(b) Over Load function disabled: Output data will be maintained even
when all outputs from the PLC are turned OFF from the CPU Unit.
• Area 1, Link CH: The I/O memory address of the first word in link area 1
• Area 1, Size: The number of words in link area 1. (See note.)
• Area 2, Link CH: The I/O memory address of the first word in link area 2
• Area 2, Size: The number of words in link area 2. (See note.)
Note With the Network Configurator, the PLC status will be shown at the
beginning of each area. The PLC status includes the CPU Unit op-
erating status (operating information and error information).
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
• Tag Set Name: If the Wizard is used, the names will be automatically
assigned using consecutive IP addresses in the following form for both
input and output tags: TagSet1_192168.250.1. There is no reason to be
concerned with these names. If the Wizard is not used, then names will
not be automatically assigned and they must be entered directly into the
data link table.
• Total Size: The total number of words in areas 1 and 2. This value is auto-
matically displayed after the sizes of areas 1 and 2 are entered.
• Node: For an input tag, this is the IP address of the node that provides the
output. For an output tag, “-” will be entered automatically.
• Target Variable: The target tag set name. For an input tag, this is the
name of the target set that provides the output. For an output tag, “-” will
be entered automatically.
• RPI (ms): The requested packet interval for an input tag. For an output
tag, “-” will be entered automatically.
Setting Procedure
The setting procedure is described here along with setting examples.
■ Setting Example A
Area 1 memory area = Work Area (W)
Area 1 start address = 0
Area 1 size = 50 words
Area 2 memory area = DM Area (D)
Area 2 start address = 50
Area 2 size = 100 words
■ Allocations
Node 1
Node 2
Node 3
(IP address: 192.168.250.1)
(IP address: 192.168.250.2)
(IP address: 192.168.250.3)
EtherNet/IP
Area 1
W0
50 words
W0
W0
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
W50
50 words
W100
50 words
Area 2
D50
D50
D50
100 words
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
#1
#2
#3
D150
100 words
D250
100 words
1,2,3...
1. Select Wizard from the Data Link Menu. The Datalink Wizard Dialog Box
will be displayed.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
2. Select the memory area (here, W) in the Memory Field and enter the start-
ing address (here, 0) and number of words (here, 50) in the Start Address
and Size Fields for Area 1.
3. Select the memory area (here, D) in the Memory Field and enter the start-
ing address (here, 50) and number of words (here, 100) in the Start Ad-
dress and Size Fields for Area 2.
4. Select the Enable Over Load Check Box if the Over Load function is nec-
essary.
5. Click the OK Button. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button to continue creating the data link table, or click the No
Button to cancel the operation.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
If the creating the data link table is continued, the data link table will be cre-
ated with the same size of data link for all registered nodes. Examples are
shown below.
Automatic Allocation Results for Node 1 (IP Address: 192.168.250.1)
Automatic Allocation Results for Node 2 (IP Address: 192.168.250.2)
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Automatic Allocation Results for Node 3 (IP Address: 192.168.250.3)
6. After entering all of the settings in the data link table, select Save from the
File Menu. A consistency check will be performed on the table and the re-
sults will be displayed.
a. Table Inconsistencies
The following Check Result Dialog Box will be displayed. Correct the data
link table according to the displayed information.
To save the check results, click the Copy To Clipboard Button and paste
the results to other file, such as the text pad.
Click the OK Button. The following message will be displayed. Click the OK
Button again to return to the EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool Window.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
b. No Table Inconsistencies
The following message will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
7. Select Exit from the File Menu. The EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool will be exited
and you’ll return to the Network Configurator.
8. Returning to the Network Configurator
Click the icon for each device and check the settings made with the Ether-
Net/IP Datalink Tool in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box.
6-2-7 Creating Connections Using the Wizard
You can use the Network Configurator's Wizard to easily create connections
between OMRON PLCs following the instructions provided by the Wizard.
Network Configurator version 3.10 or higher is required to use the Wizard.
Note
The Wizard can be used only with the following OMRON EtherNet/IP devices.
Device name
CJ1W-EIP21
Remarks
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CJ2 CPU Unit
Built-in EtherNet/IP port in CJ2H CPU Unit
Built-in EtherNet/IP port in CJ2M CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CS1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21(CJ2)
CJ2B-EIP21
CJ2M-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
Use the following procedure to create connections (i.e., data links) with the
Wizard.
1,2,3...
1. Set tags and tag sets for all devices before starting the Wizard. Refer to 6-
2-4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets for the setting procedure.
2. For tag data links between OMRON PLCs, a connection is created in the
PLC (i.e., the originator device) that receives data as input data.
First, select the registered device for which you want to create a connec-
tion in the Network Configuration Window of the Network Configurator, and
then select Device - Parameters - Wizard from the menus.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The following dialog box will be displayed before the Wizard starts.
Click the Yes Button to delete the connections that have been set with OM-
RON PLCs before starting the Wizard.
3. Create the connection following the instructions that are given by the Wiz-
ard after the Wizard starts. (See the following figure.)
4. A list of tag sets is displayed on the right side of the Wizard Dialog Box with
target devices that support receiving input data.
Select the tag sets that you want to receive at the originator device.
The following tables describes the meanings of the icons and check marks
displayed in the tag set list.
Icon
Display position
Status
All
All output tag sets for all devices are selected.
Device
All output tag sets for the applicable device are
selected.
Tag set
All
The applicable output tag sets are selected. These
are the tag sets that will be set in the connection.
All or some output tag sets for some devices are
selected.
Device
Some output tag sets for applicable devices are
selected.
All
All output tag sets for all devices are not selected.
Device
All output tag sets for applicable devices are not
selected.
Tag set
Device
The applicable output tag sets are not selected.
The connections for this tag set will be deleted.
No applicable tag sets.
Note
Tag sets that are used in connections that are already set are not displayed.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The following display will appear when you click the Show Detail Button.
The specified values for detailed parameters will be displayed. Change the
values as required. The connection name cannot be set. They are automati-
cally created using the following rule.
default_N (where N is a 3-digit number (001, 002, etc.) starting from 1)
5. Click the Next Button to switch to the table in the following Wizard Dialog
Box. Follow the instructions to select and input from the list box the input
tag set of the originator device that receives the output tag set of the target
device.
• The blank area in the Input Tag Set Column is the connection that you are
creating.
• The rows in which there are input tag sets are connections that are
already set.
• To prevent duplicate settings, input tag sets that have been used are not
displayed in the list box for input tag sets.
• If there is no applicable input tag set, you can edit a tag set or create a
new one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button.
6. Once the input tag set settings have been completed, click the Finish But-
ton. You can check the set connection by selecting Network - View Devic-
es Connection Structure Tree from the menus.
• The Wizard can be ended even if the input tag set includes a blank row. In
that case, a connection is not created for the blank row.
• You can delete a connection by deleting the input tag sets that were previ-
ously set.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
6-2-8 Creating Connections by Device Dragging and Dropping
You can create a connection to the originator by dragging a target device and
dropping it at the originator device. Network Configurator version 3.10 or
higher is required to drag and drop devices to make connections.
Example: Drag the target device at 192.168.250.1 and drop it at the orig-
inator device at 192.168.250.100.
Drag & Drop
Note
The EtherNet/IP originator device (i.e., a device in which connections can be
set) must be one of the following OMRON EtherNet/IP devices.
Device name
CJ1W-EIP21
Remarks
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CJ2 CPU Unit
Built-in EtherNet/IP port in CJ2H CPU Unit
Built-in EtherNet/IP port in CJ2M CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21 mounted to CS1 CPU Unit
CJ1W-EIP21(CJ2)
CJ2B-EIP21
CJ2M-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
Use the following procedure to create connections (i.e., data links) by drag-
ging and dropping devices.
1,2,3...
1. Set the tags and tag sets for the target device that will be dragged.
a. Refer to 6-2-4 Creating Tags and Tag Sets for information on creating
the settings if the target is one of the OMRON EtherNet/IP devices giv-
en above.
b. If the target is another EtherNet/IP device, refer to the manual of that
device and perform settings as required.
2. A dialog box as in the following figure for connection allocation will be dis-
played when you drag the target device and drop it at the OMRON Ether-
Net/IP device.
a. Using One of the Above OMRON EtherNet/IP Devices As Target
Select the output tag set from Target Device Area on the right side of
the Edit Connection Dialog Box, and then select the input tag set to re-
ceive the output tag set in the Originator Device Area on the left.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
• If there is no applicable input tag set at the originator, you can create
a new one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button.
b. Using Other EtherNet/IP Devices as Target
The connection I/O type list box in the upper part of the Connection
Settings Dialog Box displays the connection I/O types that can be se-
lected. Select the connection I/O type according to your application.
• The connection I/O types that can be selected depend on the target
device.
• Items that can be selected will depend on the connection I/O type that
is selected.
• Select the output, input, or both output and input tag sets at the target
and specify the corresponding input, output, or both input and output
tag sets at the originator.
• If there is no applicable tag set at the originator, you can create a new
one by using the Edit Tag Sets Button and Edit Tag Button.
The following display will appear when you click the Show Detail But-
ton.
The specified values for detailed parameters will be displayed. Change
the values as required. Connection names are automatically created
using the following rule.
default_N (where N is a 3-digit number (001, 002, etc.) starting from 1)
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Note
The following dialog box will be displayed if a target device that does not have
I/O data is dropped.
Before dropping again, refer to the manual of the applicable device and create
the I/O data (i.e., output tag sets) required to create a connection.
3. After you have set all of the connection, click the Regist Button to create
the connection. When creating the connection has been completed, the in-
put tag set and output tag set will be blank. Next, you can continue to cre-
ate connections by selecting the connection I/O type and setting a tag set.
6-2-9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network
This section explains how to connect the Network Configurator to the network.
Connecting through
Ethernet
Note
The Windows firewall settings must be changed when making this connection
the firewall settings, refer to Appendix G Precautions for Using Windows XP,
Vista, or Windows 7.
Connect to the EtherNet/IP Unit’s Ethernet port via the Ethernet network.
1,2,3...
1. Select Option - Select Interface - Ethernet I/F.
2. Select Network - Connect.
If there are multiple Ethernet interfaces on the computer, the Select Con-
nect Network Port Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the interface that is
to be connected, and press the OK Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click the OK Button. Select the network to be connected.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The Network Configurator will connect to the EtherNet/IP network. If the
Network Configurator is connected online properly, On-line will be dis-
played in the status bar at the bottom of the window. The network connec-
tion icon will be displayed in blue in the Network Tab Page in which the
Network Configurator is connected.
Network connection icon
The connecting network can be switched by selecting Network - Change
Connect Network.
Connecting through the CPU Unit’s Peripheral or RS-232C Port
Connect to the EtherNet/IP Unit’s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit’s peripheral
port or RS-232C port.
1,2,3...
1. Select Option - Select Interface - CS/CJ1 Serial Port → EIP Unit I/F.
2. Select Network - Connect. The following dialog box will be displayed.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
3. Input the EtherNet/IP Unit’s unit number in the Unit No. Field, select the
connecting COM port number, and click the OK Button.
Usually, the Baud Rate is left at this setting.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
4. After clicking TCP:2, click the OK Button. The Network Configurator will be
connected to the EtherNet/IP network. If the Network Configurator is con-
nected online properly, On-line will be displayed in the status bar at the bot-
tom of the window.
Connecting through the CPU Unit’s USB or RS-232C Port (CJ2 CPU Units Only)
Connect to the EtherNet/IP Unit’s Ethernet port via the CPU Unit’s USB port
or RS-232C port.
1,2,3...
1. Select Option - Select Interface - CJ2 USB/Serial Port to set the com-
munications interface.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
2. Select Network - Connect. The Setup Interface Dialog Box will be dis-
played.
3. Set the port type to either USB or serial.
4. Set the port to use and then click the OK Button. (Leave the baud rate at
the default setting.)
The following dialog box will be displayed.
5. Select the Backplane Icon and click the Refresh Button.
The CPU Unit, CPU Bus Units, and Special I/O Units connected in the PLC
will be displayed as shown below.
6. Click the + icon to the left of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
(CJ1W-EIP21(CJ2) or CJ2B-EIP21). The TCP ports on the EtherNet/IP
Unit will be displayed as shown below.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Select the TCP port of the EtherNet/IP Unit.
7. Select the port for the EtherNet/IP Unit and then click the OK Button. The
Network Configurator will be connected to the EtherNet/IP network. If the
Network Configurator goes online normally, “On-line” will be displayed in
the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Connecting to an EtherNet/IP Network via an Ethernet Unit
Note
for the first time using Windows XP (SP2 or higher), Vista, or Windows 7.
Refer to Appendix G Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or Win-
dows 7: Using EtherNet/IP with Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7 for in-
formation on how to make the changes.
(2) Use the CX-Integrator to correctly set the FINS routing tables for the CS/
CJ-series CPU Unit that will be the relay node.
Network Configurator on
Windows computer
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP Unit
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
CS/CJ-series
CJ2 CPU Unit
1,2,3...
1. Select Option - Select Interface - Ethernet → CS/CJ1 ETN-EIP Unit I/F.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
2. Select Network - Connect.
The following Setup Interface Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Click the Setup Button in the Setup Interface Dialog Box. The Registration
of the connection Dialog Box will be displayed. Enter the network informa-
tion for the connection destination, and then click the Add Button to regis-
ter the settings.
The registration information details are as follows:
a. Registration name
Enter any name.
b. Host (PC) information
Enter information for the computer that has the Network Configurator
installed.
• Network address
Same number as the network address of the Ethernet Unit of the PLC
that will be the relay node.
• Node address
Last value in the computer's IP address (e.g., 1 for 192.168.250.1)
c. Remote Information - EtherNet/IP Unit
Enter the information for the EtherNet/IP Unit of the PLC that will be
the relay node.
• Network address
Network address set in the routing tables
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
• Node address
Last value in the IP address of the Unit above (e.g., 3 for
192.168.251.3)
• Unit number of CPU Bus Unit
Unit number of the Unit above
d. Remote Information - Ethernet Unit
Enter the information for the Ethernet Unit of the PLC that will be the
relay node.
4. Once the settings have been registered, the Setup Interface Dialog Box will
be displayed again. Check the registered information that has been en-
tered, and then click the OK Button.
5. The following dialog box will be displayed. Select TCP:2, which represents
the EtherNet/IP port, and then click the OK Button.
The Network Configurator will connect to the EtherNet/IP network, and
“On-line” will be displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the window
when connection has been properly made online.
Note
A list of nodes on the EtherNet/IP network you are attempting to connect to
will be displayed when the Refresh Button or the icon ( ) at the left of TCP:2
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
is clicked in the dialog box above. (Refer to the following figure.)
6-2-10 Downloading Tag Data Link Parameters
To make tag data links, you must download tag data link parameters, such as
tag set settings and connection settings, to all devices in the EtherNet/IP net-
work. When the download operation is executed, the tag data link parameters
The following procedure shows how to download the tag data link parameters.
Refer to 6-2-9 Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network for infor-
mation on how to connect the Network Configurator to the network.
Note
• If the target node IP address is not set correctly, invalid device parameters
may be set in the wrong PLC. Check the connected PLC before down-
loading parameters.
• If incorrect tag data link parameters are set, it may cause equipment to
operate unpredictably. Even when the correct tag data link parameters are
set, make sure that there will be no effect on equipment before transfer-
ring the data.
• When network symbols are used in tag settings, a connection error will
result if the symbols are not also set in the CPU Unit. Before downloading
the tag data link parameters, check to confirm that the network symbols
Pages described in 14-1-1 The Network Configurator’s Device Monitor
Function, check whether the network symbol, tag, and connection set-
tings are correct.
• When a communications error occurs, the output status depends on the
specifications of the Unit being used. When a communications error
occurs for a Unit that is used along with output devices, check the operat-
ing specifications and implement safety countermeasures.
• The EtherNet/IP Unit is automatically restarted after the parameters have
been downloaded. This restart is required to enable the tag set and con-
nection information that have been set. Before downloading the parame-
ters, check to confirm that restarting will not cause any problems with the
equipment.
• Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or reset or turn OFF the power to
the EtherNet/IP Unit while the parameters are being downloaded
• For EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports with revision 2 or later,
the CPU Unit can download tag data link parameters in either RUN mode
or MONITOR mode. (They can also be downloaded in PROGRAM mode.)
• For EtherNet/IP Units with revision 1, tag data link parameters can be
downloaded only when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode.
• Even for Units with revision 2 or later, all CPU Units must be in PRO-
GRAM mode to download the parameters if any Units with revision 1 are
included in the network.
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator online.
2. There are two ways to download the parameters.
• Downloading to All Devices in the Network
Select Network - Download. The following dialog box will be displayed.
• Downloading Individually to Particular Devices
Select the icon of the EtherNet/IP Unit to which you want to download. To
select multiple nodes, press and hold the Shift Key while selecting addi-
tional icons. (In the following example, 2 nodes are selected:
192.168.250.1 and 192.168.250.2.)
After selecting the icons, click the right mouse button over the icon to dis-
play the pop-up menu, and select Parameter - Download.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button to download the tag data link parameters to the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit.
The following dialog box will be displayed if any of the CPU Units is not in
PROGRAM mode.
• Display When All EtherNet/IP Units and Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports are
Revision 2 or Higher
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
If the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked, all
CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will
be downloaded. Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU
Units are changed to PROGRAM mode. The operating mode can be re-
turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded.
The Download with Current mode Button can be clicked to download
load the parameters even when one or more CPU Units is in RUN or MON-
ITOR mode.
• Display When Even One EtherNet/IP Unit Is Revision 1
When the Download after changed to Program mode Button is clicked,
all CPU Units will be changed to PROGRAM mode and the parameters will
be downloaded. Confirm safety for all controlled equipment if the CPU
Units are changed to PROGRAM mode. The operating mode can be re-
turned to the previous setting after the parameters have been downloaded.
During the download, the following progress monitor will be displayed to
show the progress of the download.
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
If the operating mode of one or more CPU Units was changed to download
the parameters, the CPU Units can be returned to the previous operating
mode. If the No Button is clicked, the CPU Units will remain in PROGRAM
mode.
4. The following dialog box will be displayed, indicating that the download was
completed.
6-2-11 Uploading Tag Data Link Parameters
Tag data link parameters (such as the tag set settings and connection set-
tings) can be uploaded from EtherNet/IP Units in the EtherNet/IP network.
The following procedure shows how to upload the parameters. For details on
connecting to the network from the Network Configurator, refer to 6-2-9 Con-
necting the Network Configurator to the Network.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator to the network.
2. There are two ways to upload the parameters.
• Uploading from All Devices in the Network
Select Network - Upload. The following dialog box will be displayed.
• Clicking the Yes Button:
Parameters will be uploaded only from the devices registered in the Net-
work Configuration Window. Parameters will not be uploaded from devices
that are not registered in the Network Configuration Window.
• Clicking the No Button:
• If parameters are being uploaded from all devices in the network, the
parameters will be newly uploaded from all devices. The current net-
work configuration information will be lost.
• If parameters are being uploaded from specified devices only, the up-
load operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be performed.
• Clicking the Cancel Button:
The upload operation will be cancelled and the upload will not be per-
formed.
• Uploading Individually from Particular Devices
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Select the icon of the EtherNet/IP Unit from which you want to upload. To
select multiple nodes, press and hold the Shift Key while selecting addi-
tional icons. (In the following example, 2 nodes are selected:
192.168.250.1 and 192.168.250.2.)
After selecting the icons, click the right mouse button over the icon to dis-
play the pop-up menu, and select Parameter - Upload.
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button or No Button.
During the upload, the following progress monitor will be displayed to show
the progress of the upload.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed, indicating that the upload was
completed.
6-2-12 Verifying the Tag Data Links
Tag data link parameters (such as the tag set settings and connection set-
tings) can be compared with the EtherNet/IP Units in the EtherNet/IP network.
The following procedure shows how to compare the parameters. For details
on connecting to the network from the Network Configurator, refer to 6-2-9
Connecting the Network Configurator to the Network.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Verifying the Network
Configuration
Compare the list of registered devices in the Network Configuration Window
with the devices connected on the EtherNet/IP network, and check the IP
addresses and device types. This function cannot be used to verify device
parameters.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator to the network.
2. The following progress monitor will be displayed to show the progress as
data is read from the network and compared.
3. The results of the comparison between the network configuration file and
data from the network are displayed as follows.
• Differences Not Found in the Comparison
• Differences Found in the Comparison
• Differences Found in the Device Type.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Click the OK Button or the Close Button.
Verifying the Device
Parameters
Use the following procedure to compare the device parameters for the devices
selected in the Network Configuration Window with those of the devices con-
nected on the EtherNet/IP network. The IP addresses, device types, and
device parameters are compared.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator to the network.
2. Click the icon of the EtherNet/IP Unit that is to be verified. To select multiple
nodes, hold down the Shift Key while clicking the icons. (In the following ex-
ample, the 192.168.250.1 and 192.168.250.2 nodes are selected.)
With the icons selected, right-click and select Parameter - Verify from the
pop-up menu.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button or the No Button.
4. One of the following dialog boxes will be displayed.
• Differences Not Found in the Comparison
• Differences Found in the Comparison
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
• Differences Found in the Device Type
Click the OK Button or the Close Button.
5. If multiple nodes have been selected, the following message will be dis-
played. Click the Yes Button.
The comparison results will be displayed in order of the selected nodes.
6-2-13 Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links
Automatically Starting Tag Data Links
Tag data links will start operating automatically immediately after the tag data
link parameters are downloaded from the Network Configurator. (They will
also start automatically when the power to the PLC is turned ON or the CPU
Unit is restarted.)
Starting and Stopping All Tag Data Links on the Network
Using the Network
Configurator
All tag data links on the network can be started and stopped by selecting I/O
Connection - Start/Stop from the Network Menu.
Starting and Stopping Tag Data Links for Individual Devices
Using the Network
Configurator
You can start and stop tag data links for individual devices using the following
buttons in the Monitor Device Dialog Box. This applies only to tag data links
for which the device is the originator. Access the Monitor Device Dialog Box
by selecting Monitor from the Device Menu.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Start Connection Button:
Starts all connections for which the device is the originator.
Stop Connection Button:
Stops all connections for which the device is the originator.
Note
Connections will be cut off if any of the following errors occurs in the CPU Unit
that is the originator while tag data links are active.
• Fatal CPU Unit error
• I/O refresh error
• CPU Unit WDT error
• I/O bus error
6-2-14 Clearing the Device Parameters
The device parameters saved in the EtherNet/IP Units in the EtherNet/IP net-
work can be cleared (returned to their default settings). The following proce-
dure shows how to clear the device parameters. For details on connecting to
the network from the Network Configurator, refer to 6-2-9 Connecting the Net-
work Configurator to the Network.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the Network Configurator to the network.
2. Select the icon of the EtherNet/IP Unit in which you want to clear the device
parameters. In the following example, 2 nodes are selected: 192.168.250.1
and 192.168.250.2. To select multiple nodes, press and hold the Shift Key
while selecting additional icons.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
3. Select Device - Reset. The following dialog box will be displayed.
• Clicking the Yes Button:
The following dialog box will be displayed.
Select one of the following options and click the OK Button.
• Emulate cycling power
Restarts the Unit.
• Return to the out-of-box configuration, and then emulate cycling power
Returns the Unit to its factory default settings, and restarts the Unit.
• Clicking the No Button:
The device parameters are not cleared or reset.
6-2-15 Saving the Network Configuration File
Device parameters set in the Network Configurator, or device parameters
uploaded from the network can be saved as a network configuration file.
1,2,3...
1. Select File - Save As. The following dialog box will be displayed.
The File name Field will contain Untitled.nvf as the default file name.
2. Input the file name, and click the Save Button.
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
The network configuration file save operation is complete.
3. When the network configuration is changed later, the existing network con-
figuration file can be overwritten by selecting File - Save or clicking the
Button.
4. You can select the Select target network Check Box in the Option Area to
save a network configuration file with only the required networks.
Select the check boxes of the networks to save and click the OK Button.
6-2-16 Reading a Network Configuration File
A previously saved network configuration file can be read into the Network
Configurator.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
1,2,3...
1. Select File - Open or click the
Button. The following dialog box will
be displayed.
If the network configuration file that you want to read is not displayed,
change to (Look in) another folder.
2. When you click and select the network configuration file that you want to
read, that file name will be displayed in the File name Field.
3. Click the Open Button to read the network configuration file.
4. The Network Configurator’s Title Bar will display the name of the file that
was read.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
5. Select any of the options as necessary. The options are listed below.
Option
Function
Select target network
Allows you to select specific networks from the net-
work configuration and open them.
Add to current document
Allows you to add the networks from the network
configuration file being opened to the current config-
uration file.
Note
The save format will vary depending on the Network Configurator version.
Configuration files (*.ncf) created using the Network Configurator for Ether-
Net/IP (version 2 or higher) can be imported (opened) by selecting External
Data - Import from the File Menu.
6-2-17 Checking Connections
Check the consistency of connection parameters for network configuration
files with device parameters set using the Network Configurator and device
parameters uploaded from the network.
1. Select Check Connections in the Network Menu. The following dialog box
will be displayed if parameters are normal.
The following dialog box will be displayed if there are parameter errors.
Check the displayed details and review the settings.
If an inconsistency occurs, open the originator's Edit Device Parameter Di-
alog Box and click the Connection Tab. The inconsistent connection will
be displayed with a
icon (instead of the normal
icon). To change
the connection setting and select a different target variable, select the con-
nection as shown below and click the Edit Button.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Icon (When normal:
)
6-2-18 Changing Devices
Devices that are registered in a network configuration with the Network Con-
figurator can be changed. Select Change Device from the Device Menu to
display a list of the devices that can be changed to. Select the desired device.
A device can be changed only when there is complete or upward compatibility
with the device being changed to.
Device Changes
Device after change CJ1W-
CS1W-
EIP21
CJ1W-
EIP21
CS1W-
EIP21
CJ1W-
EIP (CJ2)
CJ2B-
EIP21
CJ2M-EIP21
EIP21
Revi-
sion
1.01
1.01
OK
---
2.01
OK
OK
---
2.01
OK
OK
OK
---
2.01
OK
OK
OK
OK
---
2.01
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
---
2.01
Device before change
CJ1W-EIP21
1.01
1.01
2.01
2.01
2.01
2.01
2.01
---
OK
No
No
No
No
No
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
CS1W-EIP21
No
No
No
No
No
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
CJ1W-EIP21
OK
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
CS1W-EIP21
OK if no vari- OK if no vari-
ables in tags ables in tags
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
CJ1W-EIP (CJ2)
CJ2B-EIP21
OK if no vari- OK if no vari-
ables in tags ables in tags
OK
OK
OK if there are
less than 33 tags
OK if no vari- OK if no vari-
ables in tags ables in tags
OK
---
CJ2M-EIP21
6-2-19 Displaying Device Status
Device status is displayed using the following icons in Maintenance Mode. To
enter maintenance mode, select Large Icons - Maintenance Mode from the
View Menu.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Tag Data Links
Section 6-2
Icon
(gray)
Status
Offline
Default (no configuration)
(turquoise edge)
(green)
Idle (CPU Unit of PLC is in PROGRAM mode.)
Communications normal (CPU Unit of PLC is in RUN or MONI-
TOR mode.)
(blue)
Warning (A non-fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the
PLC.)
(yellow)
(red)
Alarm (A fatal error has occurred in the CPU Unit of the PLC.)
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links
Section 6-3
6-3 Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links
6-3-1 Ladder Programming Related to Tag Data Links
If data in the ladder program is linked by tag data links, add conditions 1 to 4
as input conditions, add conditions 5 and 6.
For details on the various flags, refer to 4-2 CIO Area Allocations.
Conditions showing the EtherNet/IP Unit’s Tag Data Links are enabled:
1. The Unit Error Occurred Flag (n+10, bit 00) is OFF,
2. and the Online Flag (n+11, bit 00) is ON,
3. and the Tag Data Link Operating Flag (n+11, bit 01) is ON.
Conditions showing that connections are established with the target
device, and tag data links are operating:
4. The corresponding Normal Target Node Flag (in words n+20 to n+23) is
ON.
ting. For details on the layout settings, refer to 4-2-2 Details of the Allocated
CIO Area Words.
Note With revision 2 or higher, the Normal Target Node Flag will turn ON
only after the data for all connections for the target device has been
refreshed in the CPU Unit. With revision 1, the Normal Target Node
Flag will turn ON after the data for only one connection for the tar-
get device has been refreshed in the CPU Unit.
Condition showing that the Target Node PLC is operating (OMRON PLCs
only):
5. The corresponding Target Node PLC Operating Flag (in words n+2 to n+5)
is ON.
Condition showing the Target Node PLC’s fatal or non-fatal error status
(OMRON PLCs only):
6. The corresponding Target Node PLC Error Flag (in words n+6 to n+9) is
OFF.
When you want to use the Target Node PLC Error Flag, the PLC status
must be included in the tag sets for both the originator and target. Include
tions in the Edit Tag Set Dialog Boxes. For details, refer to 6-3-2 Status
Flags Related to Tag Data Links.
Example of Programming
to Detect Normal Status
The following programming can be used to confirm that normal communica-
tions are being performed for each target node. If the PLC status is included in
the tag data, the status of the PLC can also be detected.
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links
Section 6-3
Programming for Revision 2 or Higher
Tag Data Link
Operating
Normal Target Node
Flag 1
PLC Operating
Flag 1
PLC Error
Flag 1
Node 1 Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
n+11 bit 01
n+20 bit 01
n+2 bit 01
n+6 bit 01
Normal Target Node
Flag 2
PLC Operating
Flag 2
PLC Error
Flag 2
Node 2 Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
n+20 bit 02
n+2 bit 02
n+6 bit 02
Programming for Revision 1 and Revision 2
Tag Data Link
Operating
All Tag Data Links
Operating
Normal Operation Flag
n+11 bit 01
n+12 bit 14
PLC Operating
Flag 1
PLC Error
Flag 1
Node 1 Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
n+2 bit 01
n+6 bit 01
PLC Operating
Flag 2
PLC Error
Flag 2
Node 2 Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
n+2 bit 02
n+6 bit 02
Programming to Detect
Errors: Example 1
The following programming can be used to check for errors for each target
node. This programming is used to detect errors only after the data links for all
nodes have started normally.
Programming for Revision 2 or Higher
Tag Data Link
Operating
Normal Target Node
Flag 1
Node 1
Error output
n+11 bit 01
n+20 bit 01
Normal Target Node
Flag 1
Node 1
Error output
n+20 bit 01
Normal Target Node
Flag 2
Node 2
Error output
n+20 bit 02
Normal Target Node
Flag 2
Node 2
Error output
n+20 bit 02
Programming to Detect
Errors: Example 2
The following programming can be used to detect tag data link errors at the
local node.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links
Section 6-3
Programming for Revision 1 or Higher
Tag Data Link
Operating
Unit Error
Occurred
DIFD
10000
n+11 bit 01
n+10 bit 00
Unit Error
Occurred
DIFU
10000
n+10 bit 00
10000
Release Flag
Local node
Error output
Local node
Error output
Example of Programming
to Process Data
The following type of programming can be used to process data only when the
data links are operating normally.
The parts of the ladder program
that use the data link area for
Normal Operation
the relevant node are processed
Additional part
Flag
only when the corresponding
Normal Operation Flag is ON.
Normal Operation
Flag
Interlocks (IL and ILC instructions) and jumps (JMP and JME instructions) can
also be used to process data only when the data links are operating normally
as shown below.
Node A Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node A data processing
ILC
Node B Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node B data processing
ILC
Node C Data Link
Normal Operation Flag
IL
Node C data processing
ILC
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ladder Programming with Tag Data Links
Section 6-3
Note
Even if an error occurs in communications with a target device, the input data
from the target device will remain stored in words allocated in memory to the
local node. To prevent malfunctions, write the ladder program so that input
data processing will not be performed when the Unit Error Occurred Flag
(word n+10 bit 00) is ON.
6-3-2 Status Flags Related to Tag Data Links
The status of the tag data links is reflected in the following words.
Name (allocated area) Contents
Target Node PLC Operating Flag Each flag indicates the operating status of the
Information
corresponding target node PLC of connections
in which the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator.
The flag corresponding to the target node’s tar-
get ID will be ON when the PLC Operating Flags
for all connections with that target node indicate
that the PLC is operating.
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+2 to n+5
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+32 to n+47
Note Corresponds to the PLC
status’s PLC Operating
Flag.
Each node address’s flag location (i.e., target ID)
can be changed from the Network Configurator.
The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC
status is included in the communications data for
both the originator and target.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
Target Node PLC Error Flag Infor- Each flag indicates the error status (logical OR
mation
of non-fatal and fatal errors) of the corresponding
target node PLC of connections in which the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit is the originator. The flag corre-
sponding to the target node’s target ID will be
ON if even one error is indicated in any of the
connections with that target node.
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+6 to n+9
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+48 to n+63
Note Corresponds to the PLC
Each node address’s flag location (i.e., target ID)
can be changed from the Network Configurator.
status’s PLC Error Flag.
The PLC status flags are enabled when the PLC
status is included in the communications data for
both the originator and target.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
Normal Target Node Flag Table
Each flag indicates the connection status of the
corresponding target node PLC of connections
in which the EtherNet/IP Unit is the originator.
The flag corresponding to the target node’s tar-
get ID will be ON when connections are estab-
lished for all connections with that target node
Layout set to default settings:
Words n+20 to n+23
Layout set to user settings:
Words n+16 to n+31
Note Does not correspond to the indicate that the PLC is operating.
PLC status.
Each node address’s flag location (i.e., target ID)
can be changed from the Network Configurator.
The data in this table is refreshed when neces-
sary.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 7
Message Communications Functions
7-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 FINS Message Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Explicit Message Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-4 Message Communications Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-5 Message Communications Error Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-6 Message Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
188
190
192
193
194
195
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 7-1
7-1 Overview
The message communications functions send command/response messages
between nodes on the Ethernet network. The messages can be sent between
a computer and PLC, between two PLCs, between an OMRON PLC and a
master made by another company, or between slaves. The messages can be
used to send/receive data; read time data, error logs, and other data; or con-
trol operation, e.g., by force-setting/resetting bits.
There are two types of messages: FINS messages and explicit messages.
Item
FINS messages
Explicit messages
Outline
Message communications for
OMRON products that use the
FINS protocol.
Standard ODVA message communi-
cations using the CIP protocol.
Remote
device
• Computer with an Ethernet inter- • Computer with an Ethernet inter-
face
face
• OMRON PLCs (with a CS/CJ-
series EtherNet/IP Unit, built-in
EtherNet/IP port, or Ethernet
Unit)
• Another company’s masters or
slaves.
• OMRON PLCs (with a CS/CJ-
series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port)
Features
• Send and receive the various
FINS commands to provide an
even greater range of services
than the CIP UCMM messages.
• Supports message communica-
tions with other companies’ Ether-
Net/IP devices.
CS/CJ Series
• Provide transparency in mes-
sage communications with other
OMRON networks, such as Con-
troller Link, SYSMAC LINK, and
Ethernet.
• CS1W-EIP21
• CJ1W-EIP21
• CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP
• CJ2M-CPU3@
(CS1/CJ1 CPU Units with unit
version 2.0 or later or CJ2 CPU
Units: Up to 8 levels, CPU Units
with unit version earlier than 2.0:
Up to 3 levels)
Send
FINS communications function
Receive
Message communications functions
Send
Explicit message
communications function
Receive
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Section 7-1
Overall Structure
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
CMND(490)
instruction
FINS
message
function
FINS message
CMND(490)
instruction
(2810 Hex)
Explicit
message
function
FINS
Explicit message
OMRON special message communications
FINS message
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP) network
EtherNet/IP message communications
Explicit message
Note
With the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, message communica-
tions are possible even if the I/O link function is disabled.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Message Communications
Section 7-2
7-2 FINS Message Communications
Messages containing FINS commands can be exchanged over the Ethernet
network between nodes that support FINS messages.
Note
FINS message communications can be executed without any particular
restrictions over the Ethernet network with OMRON Ethernet Units (CS1W-
ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21), computers (CX-One or Fins Gateway applications),
and NS-series Programmable Terminals.
Type of FINS message
Data send/receive commands
SEND/RECV instructions
Any kind of FINS command
CMND(490) instructions
Network
communications
instructions
PLC to PLC (both must
be CS/CJ-series PLCs
with a CS/CJ-series Eth-
erNet/IP Unit, built-in
EtherNet/IP port, or
Ethernet Units) (See
note 1.)
CS/CJ-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Command to
EtherNet/IP Unit
Command
Note Inter-network com-
munications are
CS/CJ-series PLC
possible with
Command to
CPU Unit
Ethernet networks
or other networks,
such as Controller
Link. (See note 2.)
Command
Data length (excluding
command code)
SEND instruction: 990 words: RECV
instruction: 990 words.
CMND instruction: 1,990 bytes max.
Note
1. When two or more Communications Units (including the EtherNet/IP Units
and built-in EtherNet/IP ports) are mounted to a CS/CJ-series PLC and
FINS messages are being used, the EtherNet/IP Units and built-in Ether-
Net/IP ports must be registered in the CS/CJ-series PLC’s local network
routing table. The commands will not be sent if the Unit is not registered in
the routing tables.
2. When a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is con-
nected to an Ethernet network, message communications can be conduct-
ed between networks, including other Ethernet networks as well as other
networks such as Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK. Up to eight levels of
networks can be crossed, provided that routing tables (containing local
network tables and relay network tables) have been registered in the CPU
Units of each PLC on the network.
3. A Programming Device connected to the CPU Unit of a PLC connected to
the network can be used to program and monitor another PLC that is on
the network. Up to eight levels of networks can be crossed for CS1/CJ1-
series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, CJ2 CPU Units, and CX-
Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Message Communications
Section 7-2
Up to 8 network levels, including the EtherNet/IP network, can be crossed.
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Unit
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Remote I/O communications
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
Controller Link
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
Note FINS commands sent and received by the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP
Unit include commands addressed to the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
and commands addressed to the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Explicit Message Communications
Section 7-3
7-3 Explicit Message Communications
Explicit messages defined in EtherNet/IP can be used to send service
requests to other companies’ EtherNet/IP masters/slaves and OMRON PLCs
with CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
Note Specific FINS commands (commands 2810 and 2801) are used to send
explicit messages.
Explicit message
Sending
Receiving
Network communi-
cations instruction
CIP UCMM messages can be sent to an EtherNet/IP Automatically responds to explicit mes-
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port by a CMND(490)
instruction containing FINS command code 2810
Hex.
sages from other devices.
Functions supported • Masters/slaves made by other manufacturers:
• Masters made by other manufacturers
Supported services determine supported functions.
• PLC with a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
in remote devices
• PLC with a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in or built-in EtherNet/IP port: Supports the
EtherNet/IP port: reading/writing of the local CPU Unit’s sta-
Supports the reading/writing of a remote CPU Unit’s tus information and I/O memory data.
status information and I/O memory data.
Note The CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports (CS1W-
EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21, CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, or CJ2M-CPU3@) contain a PLC
Object, so that other devices can read/write the I/O memory of the CPU Unit
with the built-in EtherNet/IP port or the CPU Unit to which the EtherNet/IP Unit
is mounted.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Communications Specifications
Section 7-4
7-4 Message Communications Specifications
CPU Unit function
Unit model number
CS/CJ Series
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21, CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, or CJ2M-CPU3@
Communications
instructions
Sending/ receiving
data
SEND and RECV instructions
FINS commands
CMND(490) instruction
There are two kinds of FINS commands: commands addressed to the CPU
Unit, and commands addressed to the CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Sending Ether-
Net/IP CIP UCMM
messages
CMND(490) instruction
Sends CIP UCMM messages to other companies’ masters/slaves, or PLCs
with a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port mounted.
Number of desti-
nation nodes
FINS message com- 1:N communications
munications
Explicit message
communications
1:N communications
Send functions:
CIP unconnected (UCMM) communications only
Receive functions: CIP unconnected (UCMM) and CIP connected (Class 3)
communications
Transmission data FINS message com- • SEND: 990 words (1,980 bytes) max. normally, or 727 words (1,454 bytes)
length (not includ- munications
ing the command
code)
max. when broadcasting
• RECV: 990 words (1,980 bytes) max.
• CMND: 1,990 bytes max. normally, or 1,462 bytes max. when broadcasting
(data after the FINS command code)
Explicit message
communications
CMND: 492 bytes max.
No. of simultaneous instructions
One each for 8 ports (ports 0 to 7)
Refer to 3-25 Network Instructions in the CS/CJ Series Programmable Con-
trollers Instructions Reference Manual (W340) for information on ports (logi-
cal ports).
Response monitoring time
Retries
Default setting: 2 s
User setting: 0.1 to 6553.5 s
0 to 15
Internetwork con- Same network type Supports internetwork communications between Ethernet networks con-
nections
nected to CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports (up
to 3 levels).
Different network
type
Supports internetwork communications between the EtherNet/IP network
connected to a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
and other networks such as Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK (up to 3 lev-
els).
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Communications Error Indications
Section 7-5
7-5 Message Communications Error Indications
There are two ways to obtain information on communications errors that occur
in message communications: checking the EtherNet/IP Unit’s error log or
checking its indicators.
1,2,3...
1. Each time a communications error occurs, an error code is placed in an er-
ror record in the error log stored in RAM in the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU
Unit with the built-in EtherNet/IP Port. Up to 64 records can be stored in
the error log. The time and date that the error occurred are also recorded
together.
The error log can be read or cleared from the CPU Unit by sending an FINS
command to the EtherNet/IP Unit (Error Log Read/Clear). The contents of
the error log can also be monitored from the Configurator.
Code
Code
64 records
Code
FINS command
CPU Unit
Read-out
Monitor
Configurator
2. When a communications error has occurred, details on the error are indi-
cated by the MS and NS indicators and the 7-segment display on the front
panel of the EtherNet/IP Unit or CPU Unit with the built-in EtherNet/IP port.
This information can be used for troubleshooting.
Example: Routing table error
MS
Flashing red
Not relevant
NS
Communications status 3
15
00
EtherNet/IP CPU
Unit Unit
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Communications Errors
Section 7-6
7-6 Message Communications Errors
The following table shows the main errors that may occur when messages are
sent or received. Refer to SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Processing
for corrective measures and details on errors that are recorded in error log but
not indicated by the LED indicators.
Error
Indicators
NS
Error code
(Hex)
MS
7-segment
display
(See note.)
Routing table error
Flashing red
No change
No change
Lit red
HC
021A
0211
0002
0006
0103
0105
0107
0108
010B
010D
010E
010F
0110
0111
0112
0117
0118
0119
0120
0122
0123
0124
0125
IP address duplication error
F0
HE
H7
CPU Unit service monitoring error
No change
Not lit
Flashing red
Other CPU error
Too many retries, cannot send
Node address setting error, cannot send
Remote node not part of network, cannot send
No Unit with specified unit address, cannot send
CPU Unit error occurred, cannot send
Destination address not set in routing tables, cannot send
Routing tables not registered, cannot send
Routing tables error occurred, cannot send
Too many relay connections, cannot send
Maximum command length exceeded, cannot send
Header error; cannot send
No change
No change
No change
Reception buffer full, packet discarded
Invalid packet discarded
Local node busy, cannot send
Unexpected routing error
Service not supported in present mode, packet discarded
Transmission buffer full, packet discarded
Maximum frame length exceeded, routing impossible
Packet discarded due to response time-out
Note
The 7-segment display alternately displays the error and the node address of
the node where the error occurred.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Communications Errors
Section 7-6
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 8
FINS Communications
This section provides information on communicating on EtherNet/IP Systems and interconnected networks using FINS
commands. The information provided in the section deals only with FINS communications in reference to EtherNet/IP
Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports.
FINS commands issued from a PLC are sent via the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions programmed
into the user ladder-diagram program. Although an outline of these instructions is provided in this section, refer to the CS/
CJ-series Programmable Controllers Programming Manual (W340) for further details on programming these instructions.
8-1 Overview of FINS Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-1 Communications On an Ethernet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-2 Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1-3 FINS Communications Service Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 FINS/UDP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 FINS/TCP Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-1 Routing Table Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-4-2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC . . . . . . . . .
8-4-3 Routing Table Setting Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5 Using FINS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-1 CX-Programmer (CX-Server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-5-2 FinsGateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-1 Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-2 PLC Communications Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-3 Using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-4 Writing Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-6-5 Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
198
198
199
199
200
200
202
202
207
207
208
209
211
211
215
220
220
221
222
226
230
232
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of FINS Communications
Section 8-1
8-1 Overview of FINS Communications
8-1-1 Communications On an Ethernet Network
The EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports support the FINS com-
munications service, which can be used simultaneously with the CIP commu-
nications service.
FINS communications data is sent and received as UDP/IP packets or TCP/IP
packets.
PLC
or host computer
EtherNet/IP Unit
Packet (FINS command)
Ethernet
(EtherNet/IP)
Packet (FINS response)
EtherNet/IP Unit
PLC
In the FINS communications service, both an IP address for IP (the Internet
layer) and a FINS node address for FINS (the application layer) are used for
the remote device. Also, 9600 is used as the default setting for the local UDP
or TCP port number (i.e., the transport layer) for identifying the application
layer, i.e., the FINS communications service. (Another number can be set for
For details on pairing FINS node addresses with IP addresses and UDP/TCP
port numbers, refer to 5-2 IP Addresses in FINS Communications.
FINS
Application Layer
Transport Layer
Node Number
TCP
UDP
IP
UDP Port No.
TCP Port No.
IP Address
Internet Layer
Physical Layer
Ethernet
Ethernet Address
The FINS communications service is a communications method based on
UDP/IP, and it is supported by most OMRON Ethernet-related products. (In
this manual it is called the FINS/UDP method.) In addition to supporting the
FINS/UDP method, the CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-CPU3@, CS1W-EIP21,
and CJ1W-EIP21 support FINS communications using TCP/IP. (In this man-
ual, this is called the FINS/TCP method.)
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview of FINS Communications
Section 8-1
8-1-2 Using the FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP Methods
It is recommended that FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP be used as follows:
• When remote devices do not support the FINS/TCP method:
Use the FINS/UDP method for FINS communications with those devices.
• When FINS nodes are connected on the same Ethernet segment:
Use the FINS/UDP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/UDP offers a slight advantage in performance.
• When FINS nodes are connected over multiple IP network layers:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
• When the quality of connections is unreliable, as with wireless LAN:
Use the FINS/TCP method between those nodes.
Note FINS/TCP offers superior communications quality.
8-1-3 FINS Communications Service Specifications
Item
Specifications
Number of nodes
Message length
Number of buffers
Protocol name
Protocol used
254
2,012 bytes max.
192
FINS/UDP method
UDP/IP
FINS/TCP method
TCP/IP
16
Number of connections ---
Port number
Protection
Other
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
9600 (default)
Can be changed.
No
Yes (Specification of client IP addresses when Unit is used as a
server)
Items set for each UDP
port
Items set for each connection
• Server/client specification
• Broadcast
• Remote IP address specification
• IP Address Conversion
When client: Specify the IP address of the remote Unit (server).
When server: Specify IP addresses of clients permitted to con-
nect.
• Automatic FINS node address allocation:
Specify automatic allocation of client FINS node addresses.
• Keep-alive:
Specify whether remote node keep-alive is to be used.
TCP/IP Setting
• Remote node keep-alive time
Internal table
This a table of correspondences for remote FINS node addresses, remote IP addresses, TCP/
UDP, and remote port numbers. It is created automatically when power is turned ON to the
PLC or when the Ethernet Unit is restarted, and it is automatically changed when a connection
is established by means of the FINS/TCP method or when a FINS command received.
The following functions are enabled by using this table.
• IP address conversion using the FINS/UDP method
• Automatic FINS node address conversion after a connection is established using the FINS/
TCP method
• Automatic client FINS node address allocation using the FINS/TCP method
• Simultaneous connection of multiple FINS applications
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 8-2
8-2 FINS/UDP Method
8-2-1 Overview
FINS/UDP Features
The FINS/UDP method is a FINS communications method that uses the UDP/
IP protocol. UDP/IP is a connectionless communications protocol. When a
message is sent from one node to another, the two nodes have an equal rela-
tionship and there is no clear connection. If using TCP is like making a tele-
phone call, then UDP is more like delivering a memo by hand. Although the
UDP protocol is fast, data communications are less reliable than with TCP.
In particular, when sending large amounts of data involving significant routing,
the user must program measures, such as retries, into applications in order to
improve reliability.
Node
Node
Data transmission 1
Data transmission 2
Data transmission 3
Data is sent in one direction, with no
confirmation of whether the data was
received. Because there are few procedures
involved, data can be sent at high speed but
with less reliability than with TCP.
The FINS/UDP method has the following features:
• Because FINS/UDP is a connectionless protocol, there is no limit to the
number of corrections.
• FINS/UDP can be used for broadcasting.
• When data is sent via an IP network with multiple layers (such as the
Internet), communications reliability drops.
FINS/UDP Frame Format
The following diagram shows the structure of a UDP packet used for sending
and receiving data on an Ethernet network.
Ethernet Ver. 2
IP
UDP
FINS frame
FCS
UDP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/UDP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, UDP frame, and FINS frame. A UDP data sec-
tion (FINS frame) that exceeds 1,472 bytes is split into packets for transmis-
sion. The split UDP data is then joined automatically at the UDP/IP protocol
layer. There is normally no need to pay attention at the application layer to this
split, but it may not be possible to send 1,472-byte UDP packets over an IP
network with multiple layers. When using the FINS communications service in
a system such as this, select the FINS/TCP method.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/UDP Method
Section 8-2
UDP Port Numbers for
FINS/UDP
The UDP port number is the number for UDP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed by UDP/IP, this port number must be allocated to the communi-
cations service.
The default setting for the UDP port number (i.e., the UDP port number of the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port) is 9600. To set another number,
set the number on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of the CX-Programmers Edit
Parameters Dialog Box.
At the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, a UDP/IP frame received
with a FINS/UDP port number is recognized as a FINS frame.
Procedure for Using FINS/UDP
1,2,3...
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to Initial Settings in 3-1-1 Procedures.
2. Keep the CX-Programmer connected online, right-click the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port in the PLC IO Table Dialog Box, and select
Edit - Unit Setup. Set the following in the CPU Bus Unit Setup Area from
the FINS/UDP Tab Page of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
• IP Address Conversion
• FINS/UDP Port No. (Default: 9600)
• IP Address List (Set only when the conversion method is set to IP ad-
dress table.)
• Dynamic Change of remote IP addresses
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button. The
setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in
the CPU Unit.
4. Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer it to each PLC.
5. Create a ladder program that includes the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions.
Note
Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Pro-
grammer).
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 8-3
8-3 FINS/TCP Method
8-3-1 Overview
FINS/TCP Features
The FINS/TCP method is a FINS communications method that uses the TCP/
IP protocol. TCP/IP is a connection-type communications protocol. Before a
message is sent from one node to another, it is necessary to establish a vir-
tual circuit, i.e., a connection. Once a connection has been established, com-
munications are quite reliable. The arrival of data that is sent via the
connection is confirmed by an acknowledgement (ACK) response, and retries
are executed automatically as required.
When FINS/TCP is used, it must be determined which node is the server and
which nodes are the clients.
For communications between a personal computer and a PLC, the computer
should normally be set as the client and the PLC as the server. For communi-
cations between two PLCs, either one can be set as the client and the other
as the server.
Node
Node
(Client)
(Server)
Request to establish a connection
Connection
established
Notification of establishing
connection
Acknowledgement
Data transmission 1
Acknowledgement
An acknowledgement is received whenever a
connection is established or data is sent, so
transmissions are more reliable but somewhat slower.
Compared to the FINS/UDP method, the FINS/TCP method has the following
characteristics.
• Data transmission is more reliable, due to factors such as retry process-
ing at the TCP/IP layer. The FINS/TCP method is thus better suited to
dealing with communications errors in an IP network that spans several
layers.
• Remote clients can be restricted by means of settings at the server (i.e.,
the server can be protected from access by non-specified IP addresses).
• Broadcasting cannot be used.
• TCP/IP has various retry procedures, and this tends to lower its perfor-
mance in comparison with UDP/IP.
• There is a limit to the number of connections that can be made (i.e., 16
connections maximum), and any given node can communicate only with
up to 16 other nodes at a time.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 8-3
• After a FINS/TCP connection (connection number, remote IP address)
has been set in the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the Network Configurator’s
Edit Parameters Dialog Box, it can be dynamically changed from the lad-
der program using a FINS command (i.e., FINS/TCP CONNECTION
REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
FINS/TCP Frame Format
The following diagram shows the structure of a TCP packet sent over an
Ethernet network.
Ethernet Ver. 2
IP
TCP
FINS/TCP header
FINS frame
FCS
TCP packet
As the diagram shows, a nested structure is used with the FINS/TCP method,
i.e., Ethernet Ver. 2, IP frame, TCP frame, FINS/TCP header frame, and FINS
frame. A TCP data section (FINS/TCP header + FINS frame) that exceeds the
segment size (default setting of 1,024 bytes in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port, with automatic adjustment for optimum values between the
nodes) is split into TCP packets for transmission. The split TCP data is then
joined automatically at the remote node's TCP/IP protocol layer. The TCP/IP
protocol layer, however, cannot determine where the data has been split, so
the TCP data sections from multiple packets are all joined together. Therefore,
when using the FINS/TCP method, FINS/TCP headers must be added at the
beginning of FINS frames in order to serve as FINS frame delimiters. The
length of the data in the following FINS frame is stored in the header, allowing
the frame to be separated out by the remote node. With the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port and FinsGateway (Ver. 2003 or higher) the appro-
priate frames are separated out automatically, so there is normally no need to
be pay attention to it at the application layer.
TCP Port Number for
FINS/TCP
The TCP port number is the number for TCP to identify the application layer
(i.e., the FINS communications service in this case). When communications
are executed using TCP/IP, this port number must be allocated for the com-
munications service.
The default setting for the TCP port number (i.e., the TCP port number of the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port) is 9600. To set another number,
make the setting for the FINS/TCP port on the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the CX-
Programmer’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
The FINS/TCP port number set in the FINS Configuration Tab Page is used by
the FINS/TCP server's TCP socket. The FINS/TCP client's TCP socket uses
any TCP port number that can be used at that node. (With the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port and FinsGateway (Ver. 2003 or higher), an
unused TCP port is automatically detected and utilized.)
At the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, a TCP/IP frame that is
received is recognized as a FINS frame, according to the remote TCP port
number in the frame.
FINS/TCP Connection
Numbers
FINS/TCP allows up to 16 FINS/TCP connections to be established simulta-
neously, and these 16 connections are managed at the EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port by connection numbers. When setting FINS/TCP con-
nection settings in the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the Network Configurator’s Edit
Parameters Dialog Box, set them individually using these connection num-
bers.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 8-3
FINS/TCP Connection Status (Word n+24)
While a connection with a remote node is established, the bit corresponding to
the FINS/TCP connection status turns ON in the section of the CPU Bus Unit
words allocated in the CIO Area. The bit turns OFF if the connection is termi-
nated by a communications error or a FINS command (i.e., FINS/TCP CON-
NECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST).
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
n+24
*: Bit 15 corresponds to connection No. 16, bit 00 to connection No. 1, etc.
Note
The starting word of the FINS/TCP Connection Status Area is different in the
CS1W-ETN21 and CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Units; it is n+23 in the Ethernet
Units. If a ladder program using FINS/TCP communications was created for
Ethernet Units, and is being reused for EtherNet/IP Units and built-in Ether-
Net/IP ports, change the word starting word address for this area from n+23 to
n+24.
FINS/TCP
Communications
Procedure
With FINS/TCP, FINS node addresses are exchanged immediately after a
connection is established. This makes it possible to determine the FINS node
addresses to which the 16 connection numbers, and to manage them in an
internal table.
Personal computer
(Client)
Ethernet/IP Unit
(Server)
Example:
Example:
IP address C
IP address S
FINS node number A
FINS node number B
Passive open
Connection request (C→S)
Connection established
Active open
Connection established
Remote node No. received
Local node No. sent
Connection established
Local node No. sent
FINS node number A sent
FINS node number B sent
FINS node numbers exchanged
Remote node No. received
FINS frame sent
FINS frame sent
Full duplex communications
Normal data communications
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP server, it is termi-
nated in the following ways.
• When the connection is closed by the client.
• When a FINS command to close the connection (FINS/TCP CONNEC-
TION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST) is sent by the client.
• When there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is
in effect.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 8-3
After a connection has been established as a FINS/TCP client, it can be termi-
nated in the following ways.
• If the connection is closed by the server.
• If there is no response from the client when the keep-alive function is in
effect.
Even if the connection is closed at the FINS/TCP client, requests continue to
be made to the FINS/TCP server every few seconds to open a connection.
Note
After the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is powered up or
restarted, the IP address for the connection used as the FINS/TCP client is
the remote IP address that was set in the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the CX-Pro-
grammer’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box. To dynamically change the remote IP
address (i.e., during CPU Unit operation), execute the CMND(490) instruction
in the ladder program and send a FINS command (FINS/TCP CONNECTION
REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST; command code: 27 30 hexadecimal)
to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Procedure for Using FINS/TCP
1,2,3...
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to Initial Settings in 3-1-1 Procedures.
2. Make the following settings on the FINS/TCP Tab Page of the CX-Pro-
grammer's Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
• FINS/TCP port (default: 9600)
• Server/Client: Specifies whether the connection will operate in FINS/
TCP server mode or client mode.
• Target IP address for client: Specifies the IP address of the target
FINS/TCP server.
• Target IP address for server: Specifies allowed client IP addresses
when protection is enabled.
• Automatically allocated FINS node address for server: Specifies the
address to allocate when automatically allocating a FINS node ad-
dress to the target FINS/TCP client.
• Keep-alive: Specified whether to use the keep-alive function.
Note Normally this function is used and the option is selected.
• Enable protect via IP address:
Note Select this option only when protecting as the server.
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button. The
setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in
the CPU Unit.
4. Make the routing table settings and transfer them to each PLC. (See note
1.)
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer it to each PLC.
5. Create a ladder program that includes the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions.
Note
(1) Routing tables are required in the following situations:
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network
(e.g., remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a
CX-Programmer)
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC
(i.e., CPU Unit)
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS/TCP Method
Section 8-3
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network.
(2) If EtherNet/IP is selected for CX-Programmer communications, FINS
message communications and remote programming/monitoring from the
CX-Programmer will be possible as long as CIP routing is possible for the
entire communications path. Routing tables do not need to be set. If FINS
messages are sent from a PLC, however, then routing tables must be set.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing Tables
Section 8-4
8-4 Routing Tables
When the FINS communications service is used, routing tables must be cre-
ated in advance. Routing tables are required in the following circumstances.
• When communicating with a PLC or computer on another network (e.g.,
remote programming or monitoring using FINS messages or a CX-Pro-
grammer)
• When multiple Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
CPU Unit).
• When routing tables are used for one or more other nodes on the same
network.
It is not necessary to set routing tables if one Communications Unit is
mounted to the PLC and the nodes are connected as one network. The rout-
ing tables are required not only for nodes communicating via the FINS com-
munications service but also for all relay nodes on the network.
8-4-1 Routing Table Overview
The routing tables describe the transmission path for FINS messages when
the FINS communications are used. It consists of two tables: A local network
table and a relay network table.
Local Network Table
The local network table is a table describing the correspondences among unit
numbers of the Communications Units and Boards mounted to each node.
Example
Unit #04
Unit #05
Unit #06
Unit #07
Local Network Table
Local network
address
Unit number
1
2
3
4
04
05
06
07
Network #1
Network #2
Network #3
Network #4
Note
1. The unit number is set (0 to F: 1 to 15) using the rotary switch on the front
of the EtherNet/IP Unit (built-in port).
2. The network address is the number of the network (1 to 127) to which the
Communications Unit or Board is connected. It is set when the local net-
work table is created.
Relay Network Table
A relay table is a table that shows the nodes to which data should be sent first
in order to send data to a network that is not connected to the local node. It
shows the correspondence between the address of the final destination net-
work, and the network address and node address of the first relay point of the
path to reach there. When internetwork communications are carried out, the
end network can be reached by following the relay points.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing Tables
Section 8-4
The following example shows routing tables for sending data from PLC #1 (the
local node: network address 1, node address 1) to PLC #4 (the destination
node: network address 3, node address 2).
Node #2
Unit #0
PLC #3
(relay node)
PLC #4 (destination node)
Node #2
PLC #2 (relay node)
Node #1
Unit #1
PLC #1 (local node)
Node #3
Node #1
Node #1
Node #2
Network #2
Network #3
Network #1
PLC #2
relay network table
End network
local network table
PLC #1
relay network table
PLC #3
Local
network
address
End
Relay
Relay
End
Relay
Relay
Unit
number
network network node
network network node
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
3
0
1
To go to network #3,
first go to node #2 at
network #2.
(The network is the same,
so go to node #2 at network #3.)
To go to network #3,
first go to node #3 at
network #1.
(To go to network #3
according to the local
network table, go
through unit
number 1 of the local
CPU Rack.)
Note
In the above example, the routing tables required for a message to reach PLC
#4 from PLC #1 are shown. Additional settings would be required in the rout-
ing tables for a message to reach PLC #1 from PLC #4. Refer to 8-4-3 Rout-
ing Table Setting Examples for routing table setting examples.
8-4-2 Connecting and Using a Peripheral Device for the PLC
Routing tables must be created by a CX-Integrator connected to the PLC.
(They cannot be created using a Programming Console.) For details on how
to connect and use the CX-Integrator, refer to the CX-Integrator Operation
Manual (W445). (CX-Integrator is automatically installed when CX-One is
installed.)
Note
1. When routing tables are transferred from the CX-Integrator to the PLC, all
of the CPU Bus Unit are reset so that the routing tables that have been cre-
ated can be read and enabled. Before transferring the routing tables, con-
firm that there will be no problems in the system when the CPU Bus Units
are reset.
2. To transfer routing tables for multiple nodes to a PLC in one batch, connect
the CX-Integrator to a PLC with only one Communications Unit mounted.
Routing tables cannot be transferred to other nodes from a PLC with mul-
tiple Communications Units mounted.
3. Routing tables can only be transferred as a batch to multiple nodes within
the same network as the PLC to which the CX-Integrator is connected.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing Tables
Section 8-4
8-4-3 Routing Table Setting Examples
■ Example 1: Local Network Table for a PLC With Multiple Units Mounted
This example shows the local network table settings for a PLC to which multi-
ple CPU Bus Units are mounted.
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP) network
(Network #A)
Controller Link network
(Network #B)
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
EIP: EtherNet/IP Unit
CLK: Controller Link Unit
E C C P
I
L
P
S
P
K U
Unit #a Unit #b
Local Network Table
Local
network
CPU Bus
Unit
No.
1
2
A
B
a
b
■ Example 2: Three Interconnected Networks
This example shows the relay network table settings for three different inter-
connected networks.
Relay Network Table
End
network
Relay
network
No.
Node
PLC #1
1
2
B
C
A
A
b
b
Node #a
Network #A
Network #B
PLC #2
Node #b
Node #c
1
C
B
e
PLC #3
1
2
A
C
B
B
c
e
Node #d
PLC #4
Node #e
Node #f
1
A
B
c
Network #C
PLC #5
1
2
A
B
C
C
f
f
Node #g
In the table for PLC #3, for example, if network #A is taken as the end net-
work, then network #B becomes the relay network and node #c becomes the
relay node. If network #C is taken as the end network, then network #B still
becomes the relay network and node #e becomes the relay node.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Routing Tables
Section 8-4
■ Example 3: All Nodes
This example uses the following configuration to show the routing tables for all
nodes.
E
Unit #5
Node #6
PLC
1
I
P
Network #10
Unit #4
Unit #3
C E
E S
Node #5
Node #4
Unit #2
PLC
2
PLC
3
L
I
I
L
Unit #7
K P
P K
Node #15
Node #3
Network #30
Network #20
C
C
L
K
S
S
L
K
PLC
L
PLC
5
PLC
6
PLC
7
L
4
K
K
Unit #0
Node #1
Unit #5
Node #5
Unit #6
Node #10
Unit #1
Node #2
PLC #1 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
network Unit No.
010 05
End
Relay
Relay
node
004
005
No.
No.
1
2
network
network
1
2
3
020
030
010
010
3
PLC #2 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
End
Relay
Relay
node
005
No.
No.
1
2
network Unit No.
network
network
1
2
3
010
020
03
02
030
010
3
PLC #3 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
End
Relay
Relay
No.
network Unit No.
network
network
node
No.
1
2
1
2
3
010
030
04
07
020
010
004
3
PLC #4 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
network Unit No.
020 00
End
Relay
Relay
node
003
003
No.
No.
1
2
network
network
1
2
3
010
030
020
020
3
PLC #5 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
network Unit No.
020 01
End
Relay
Relay
node
003
003
No.
No.
1
2
network
network
1
2
3
010
030
020
020
3
PLC #6 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
network Unit No.
030 05
End
Relay
Relay
No.
No.
1
2
network
network
node
1
2
3
010
020
030
030
015
015
3
PLC #7 Routing Table
(Local network table)
(Relay network table)
Local
CPU Bus
End
Relay
Relay
No.
network Unit No.
network
network
node
No.
1
2
1
2
3
030 06
010
020
030
030
015
015
3
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
8-5 Using FINS Applications
8-5-1 CX-Programmer (CX-Server)
The following examples show how to connect online from a CX-Programmer
on an Ethernet network to a PLC on the Ethernet network.
■ System Configuration Example 1: No Routing
In this example, an online connection is made by FINS/UDP to a PLC on an
Ethernet network (PLC1 in the diagram below) from a CX-Programmer/CX-
Integrator connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/UDP method
• IP Address Conversion: Automatic (Dynamic) generation method
CX-Programmer/CX-Integrator
Node number: 1
IP address: 192.168.250.1
EtherNet/IP Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic
generation method (dynamic)
EtherNet/IP Unit node number: 2
EtherNet/IP Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
Ethernet port
Target: PLC1
Ethernet or EtherNet/IP (Network address: None)
FINS/UDP method
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC1)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
Setting
PLC name
PLC1
Network classification
Ethernet
Network Tab Page
FINS transmission source address
0
FINS destination
Network number
Node address
0
2
Frame length
2,000 bytes
2 seconds
1
Response monitor time
Workstation node address
Automatic generation method
IP address
Driver Tab Page
Not selected
192.168.250.2 (Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP
port IP address)
Port number
9600
CX-Programmer's FINS/UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box
Item Setting
FINS/UDP Port
Default (9600)
IP Address Conversion
IP Router Table
Automatic (Dynamic) generation method
None
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
Example: Inputs to the CX-Programmer's Setup Window
Example: Change PLC Settings
Example: Network Settings (Network Tab Page)
Note
When FinsGateway is selected as the network type, make sure that the frame
length is set to 2,000 bytes max.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
Example: Network Settings (Driver Tab Page)
■ System Configuration Example 2: Using Routing Tables
In this example, an online connection is made via the Ethernet to a PLC on a
Controller Link network (PLC 3 below) from a CX-Programmer/CX-Integrator
connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/UDP method
• IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Controller
Link Unit
CX-Programmer/CX-Integrator
EtherNet/IP Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Node address: 1
IP address: 192.168.250.1
Gateway between networks
PLC1
EtherNet/IP Unit node address: 2
EtherNet/IP Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
EtherNet/IP Unit unit number: 0
Ethernet port
Controller Link Unit node address: 1
Controller Link Unit unit number: 1
Controller Link Unit
PLC3
Controller Link Unit
PLC2
Target PLC
Ethernet or EtherNet/IP
(network address 1)
Routing
according to
routing table
Node address 3
Node address 2
Routing to final network address 2
requires relaying through node
address 2 of relay network address
1 (EtherNet/IP Unit).
Controller Link (network address 2)
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC3)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
Setting
PLC name
PLC3
Network classification
Ethernet
1
Network Tab
Page
FINS destination
FINS transmission
source address
Network number
Node address
2
3
Frame length
2,000 bytes
2 seconds
Response monitor time
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
Settings for target PLC (PLC3)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
Driver Tab Page Workstation node address
Automatic generation method
Setting
1
Not selected
IP address
192.168.250.2 (Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP
port IP address)
Port number
9600
CX-Programmer's FINS/UDP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box
Same as for System Configuration Example 1.
Routing Table Settings and Transfer to Each PLC
Set the routing tables with CX-Integrator, and transfer them.
1. Using CX-Integrator, connect online, and select Routing table − Settings.
Then create FINS local routing tables (a local network table and a relay
network table).
Example: PLC 1 Routing Table Settings
• Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network number
0
1
1
2
• Relay Network Table
None
Example: PLC 2 and PLC 3 Routing Table Settings
• Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network number
0
2
• Relay Network Table
In order to relay from PLC2/3 to the final network number 1, it is necessary
to relay via node address 1 (i.e., the Controller Link Unit) on relay network
number 2.
Final network number Relay network number
Relay node address
1
2
1
2. Save the routing table file (File - Save local routing table file).
3. Next, to connect online, select Communication Settings from the Net-
work Menu. For each PLC, register a PLC with a direct serial connection
(node address: 0), and select it.
4. With the CX-Integrator, select Work Online from the Network Menu.
5. Select Tools - Start Routing table, read the saved file, and select Op-
tions - Transfer to PLC. Click Yes to transfer the routing tables to the con-
nected PLC.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
8-5-2 FinsGateway
FinsGateway Ver. 2003 must be used to communicate using FINS/TCP
between applications serving as communications drivers and CS1W-EIP21,
CJ1W-EIP21, CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, or CJ2M-CPU3@ EtherNet/IP Units.
FinsGateway Ver. 3.@ or lower versions can be used, however, when commu-
nicating by the FINS/UDP method only.
■ Overview of Setup Methods
1. Starting FinsGateway Settings
Select FinsGateway − FinsGateway Setup to start the FinsGateway Setup.
2. ETN_UNIT Driver Setup
1. Double-click on ETN_UNIT in the settings for the network and Unit. The fol-
lowing ETN_UNIT Properties Window will be displayed.
• Network Tab Page
• Network number
Set the network number for the personal computer
(Ethernet port).
• Local node address
• Communication unit number
Set the personal computer (Ethernet port) node
address (1 to 254) on the Ethernet network.
Set the unit number in decimal (16 to 31) for the per-
sonal computer (Ethernet port).
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
• Communication Unit Tab Page
• UDP port number
Set the local UDP port number for the personal com-
puter (Ethernet port). The default is 9600.
• Priority Network Card
If multiple Network Cards are mounted at the personal
computer, select the Network Card that is to be given
priority.
• FINS - IP address conver- Set the IP address conversion method.
sion
• UDP Nodes Tab Page: Automatic Generation Method (Dynamic or Passive)
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
• UDP Nodes Tab Page: IP Address Table Method or Combined Method
Click the Add Button, and then set the IP address table in the following Ether-
net Node Definition Dialog Box.
• Node address:
• IP address:
Set the remote FINS node address.
Set the remote IP address.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
• TCP Nodes Tab Page
Click the Add Button, and then set the IP address table in the following Ether-
net Node Definition Dialog Box.
• Node address:
• IP address:
Set the remote FINS node address.
Set the remote IP address.
• Destination port number: Set the FINS/TCP port number for the remote node.
Normally the PLC's default setting of 9600 should be
specified.
• Keep-alive setting:
Sets the keep-alive function. Normally this should be
selected.
3. Starting FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Service
Select ETN_UNIT from Services under the Basic Tab in the FinsGateway
Setup Window, and then click the Start Button.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FINS Applications
Section 8-5
■ System Configuration Example 3: Connecting the CX-Programmer Online
Using the FINS/TCP Method
In this example, an online connection is made by FINS/TCP to a PLC on an
Ethernet network (PLC1 in the diagram below) from a CX-Programmer/CX-
Integrator connected to the Ethernet network.
Conditions
• FINS/TCP method
CX-Programmer/CX-Integrator
Node number: 1
EtherNet/IP Unit
IP address conversion: Automatic generation method (dynamic)
IP address: 192.168.250.1
FinsGateWay Version 2003
EtherNet/IP Unit node number: 2
EtherNet/IP Unit IP address: 192.168.250.2
Ethernet port
Target: PLC1
Ethernet or EtherNet/IP (Network number: none)
FINS/TCP method
CX-Programmer's Change PLC Dialog Box
Settings for target PLC (PLC1)'s Change PLC Dialog Box
PLC name
Network classification
Setting
PLC1
FinsGateway
Network Tab
Page
FINS destination
Network number
Node address
0
2
Frame length
2,000 bytes
2 seconds
Response monitor time
CX-Programmer's FINS/TCP Tab Page in Edit Parameters Dialog Box
Item
Setting
FINS/TCP Port
IP Router Table
Default (9600)
None
Not set. (All defaults are used.)
FinsGateway ETN_UNIT Setup
TCP Nodes Tab Page: Ethernet Node Definition Dialog Box
Item
Node address
IP address
Setting
2
192.168.250.2
Destination port number 9600
Keep-alive setting
Selected (yes)
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
8-6 Communicating between OMRON PLCs
FINS commands can be sent from the CPU Unit of a PLC by using the
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
SEND(090): Writes I/O data from the local node to another node.
RECV(098): Reads I/O data from another node to the local node.
CMND(490): Issues FINS commands for controlling operations such as send-
ing and receiving I/O memory data to and from other nodes, reading informa-
tion regarding other nodes, and so on.
8-6-1 Communications Specifications
The following table shows the specifications for PLC communications using
the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions.
Item
Specifications
Destination
1:1
1:N
SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490) instructions
SEND(090), CMND(490) instructions (broadcasting)
Data length
SEND(090):
990 words (1,980 bytes) max.; broadcasting:
727 words (1,454 bytes)
RECV(098):
990 words (1,980 bytes) max.
CMND(490):
1,990 bytes max.; broadcasting: 1,462 bytes (after FINS com-
mand code)
Data contents
The following data is sent and received with the execution of
each instruction.
SEND(090):
Sends request for remote node to receive data, and receives
response data.
RECV(098):
Sends request for remote node to send data, and receives
response data.
CMND(490):
Sends any FINS command and receives response data.
Communications Ports 0 to 7 (Eight transmissions can occur simultaneously.)
port number
Response moni-
tor time
0000:
2 s (default)
0001 to FFFF:
0.1 to 6,553.5 s in 0.1-s increments (specified by user)
Number of retries 0 to 15 retries
Note
1. The maximum data length is limited to 512 bytes for data exchange be-
tween the PLC and SYSMAC LINK Systems or the PLC and SYSMAC
BUS/2 Remote I/O Systems.
2. When broadcasting, do not require a response.
Use the FINS/UDP method for broadcasting.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
8-6-2 PLC Communications Data Areas
The following table shows the I/O data areas involved when SEND(090) and
RECV(098) are used.
Area
Range
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
CIO Area
Work Area
Holding Area
Auxiliary Area
Timer Area
Counter Area
DM Area
H000 to H1535
A000 to A959 (See note 1.)
TIM0000 to 4095
CNT0000 to 4095
D00000 to D32767
EM Area
E00000 to E32767 (See note 2.)
Note
1. Data cannot be written to words A000 to A447 in the Auxiliary Area.
2. A maximum of 13 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CS1/CJ1 CPU
Unit. A maximum of 25 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CJ2H CPU
Unit. A maximum of 4 banks in the EM Area can be used for a CJ2M CPU
Unit. For details regarding the EM Area, refer to the operation manual for
the PLC that is used. Refer to the operation manual for your CPU Unit to
confirm EM Area support.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
8-6-3 Using SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
Make the settings shown below when using the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) instructions in the user’s ladder-diagram program in the PC.
SEND(090)
The SEND(090) instruction sends the data in n number of words, starting from
the beginning word S at the local node, to the words starting from the begin-
ning word D at the remote destination node (node address N).
Destination node number N
Local node
0
0
15
S→
15
D→
Number
of words
(n)
n
(@)SEND(90)
S
D
C
S: Local node beginning word
D: Destination beginning word
C: First word of control data (below)
15
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
C
C+3
0
0
Number of retries
Number of words (n)
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Communications port number: 0 to 7
15
11
8 7
0
C+1
0
0
Response
0: Required.
1: Not required.
Destination network number
00 (Hex):
Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
10 to 1F: (Hex): Unit #0 to #15
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Destination node number N
00 to FE (Hex): 0 to 254
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by
setting the destination node number to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
The message service does not guarantee that a message will reach the desti-
nation node. A message may be lost during transmission due to factors such
as noise. To prevent this from occurring when using message services, it is
common to set up retry processing at the node from which instructions are
issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instructions, retry
processing is executed automatically by specifying the number of retries, so
specify a number other than 0.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
RECV(098)
With the RECV(098) instruction, the data in m number of words, starting from
the beginning word S at the remote node (node address M) is received at the
words starting from the beginning word D at the local node.
Local node
15
D→
Remote node number N
0
0
15
S→
Number
of words
(m)
m
(@)RECV(98)
S: Remote node beginning word
D: Local beginning word
S
D
C
C: First word of control data (below)
15
0
15
10 8 7
0
3
0
C
C+3
0
Number of retries
Number of reception words (m)
0001 to 03DE (Hex): 1 to 990 words
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
Communications port number: 0 to 7
15
11
8 7
0
C+1
0
0
Response
0: Required.
Destination network number
00 (Hex): Local network
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
1: Not required.
15
11
8 7
0
C+2
C+4
Response monitor time
Destination Unit address
0000 (Hex): 2 s
00 (Hex):
CPU Unit
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
10 to 1F: (Hex): Unit #0 to #15
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Remote node number M (send source)
00 to FE (Hex): 0 to 254
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach
the destination node. A message may be lost during transmission due to fac-
tors such as noise. In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes-
sage services, it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which
instructions are issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions, retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num-
ber of retries, so specify a number other than 0.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
CMND(490)
The CMND(490) instruction sends n bytes of command data, starting from the
beginning word S at the local node, to the node at node address N. the data in
m number of words, starting from the beginning word S at the remote node
(node address M) is received at the words starting from the beginning word D
at the local node.
Local node
0
Destination node number N
15
S
Command
Com-
mand
data: n
bytes
Interpretation
Execution
(S−1)
n
+−
2
Response
D
Re-
sponse
data: m
bytes
(D−1)
m
+−
2
(@)CMND(490)
S
D
C
S: Beginning command storage word
D: Beginning response storage word
C: First word of control data (below)
15
0
C
C+1
C+2
Number of bytes of command data (n)
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 1 to 1,990 bytes
15
0
Number of bytes of response data (m)
0000 to 07C6 (Hex): 1 to 1,990 bytes
15
11
8 7
0
15
10 8 7
3
0
0
0
C+4
0
0
Number of retries
Destination network number
0 to F (Hex): 0 to 15 retries
00 (Hex):
Local network
Communications port number: 0 to 7
01 to 7F (Hex): 1 to 127
15
8 7
0
Response
C+3
0: Required.
1: Not required.
Destination Unit address
00 (Hex): CPU Unit
15
10 8 7
3
0
10 to 1F: (Hex): Unit #0 to #15
C+5
E1 (Hex):
FE (Hex):
Inner Board
Unit connected to network
Response monitor time
0000 (Hex): 2 s
0001 to FFFF (Hex): 0.1 to 6,553.5 s
(in units of 0.1 s)
Destination node number N
00 to FE (Hex): 0 to 254
The same data can be broadcast to all nodes on the network by
setting the destination node number to FF (Hex).
The range of node addresses is different for networks other than Ethernet.
Note
The message services function does not guarantee that a message will reach
the destination node. A message may be lost during transmission due to fac-
tors such as noise. In order to prevent this from occurring when using mes-
sage services, it is common to set up retry processing at the node from which
instructions are issued. With the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions, retry processing is executed automatically by specifying the num-
ber of retries, so specify a number other than 0.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
Commands Addressed to CS/CJ-series CPU Units
The following table provides a list of FINS commands that can be processed
by a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit. For details, refer to the CS/CJ-series Program-
For details on FINS commands that can be processed by the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port, refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed
to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports.
Usage
Command
code
Name
Function
MR
01
SR
01
I/O memory area
access
MEMORY AREA READ
Reads the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
01
01
01
01
02
03
04
05
MEMORY AREA WRITE
MEMORY AREA FILL
Writes the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words.
Writes the same data to the specified
range of I/O memory area words.
MULTIPLE MEMORY AREA READ
MEMORY AREA TRANSFER
Reads the contents of specified non-
consecutive I/O memory area words.
Copies the contents of consecutive I/O
memory area words to another I/O
memory area.
Parameter access 02
(registered I/O
01
02
03
PARAMETER AREA READ
Reads the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
tables, routing
02
PARAMETER AREA WRITE
PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR)
Writes the contents of consecutive
parameter area words.
tables, etc.)
02
Writes the same data to the specified
range of parameter area words.
Program area
access
03
03
03
04
06
07
08
01
PROGRAM AREA READ
PROGRAM AREA WRITE
PROGRAM AREA CLEAR
RUN
Reads the UM (User Memory) area.
Writes to the UM (User Memory) area.
Clears the UM (User Memory) area.
Operating mode
changes
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR.
04
02
STOP
Changes the CPU Unit’s operating
mode to PROGRAM.
Machine configura- 05
01
02
CPU UNIT DATA READ
Reads CPU Unit data.
tion reading
05
CONNECTION DATA READ
Reads the model numbers of the device
corresponding to addresses.
Status reading
06
06
01
20
CPU UNIT STATUS READ
CYCLE TIME READ
Reads the status of the CPU Unit.
Reads the maximum, minimum, and
average cycle time.
Time data access 07
07
01
02
20
01
02
03
CLOCK READ
Reads the present year, month, date,
minute, second, and day of the week.
CLOCK WRITE
Changes the present year, month, date,
minute, second, or day of the week.
Message display
Access rights
09
MESSAGE READ/CLEAR
ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT FORCED ACQUIRE
ACCESS RIGHT RELEASE
Reads and clears messages, and reads
FAL/FALS messages.
0C
0C
0C
Acquires the access right as long as no
other device holds it.
Acquires the access right even if
another device already holds it.
Releases the access right that has been
acquired.
Error log
21
21
21
01
02
03
ERROR CLEAR
Clears errors or error messages.
Reads the error log.
ERROR LOG READ
ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR
Clears the error log pointer.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
Usage
Command
code
Name
Function
MR
22
SR
01
File memory
FILE NAME READ
Reads file memory data.
22
02
SINGLE FILE READ
Reads a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
22
03
SINGLE FILE WRITE
Writes a specified length of file data
from a specified position within a single
file.
22
22
04
05
FILE MEMORY FORMAT
FILE DELETE
Formats (initializes) the file memory.
Deletes specified files stored in the file
memory.
22
07
FILE COPY
Copies files from one file memory to
another file memory in the same sys-
tem.
22
22
08
FILE NAME CHANGE
Changes a file name.
0A
MEMORY AREA–FILE TRANSFER
Transfers or compares data between the
I/O memory area and the file memory.
22
22
0B
0C
PARAMETER AREA–FILE TRANSFER Transfers or compares data between the
parameter area and the file memory.
PROGRAM AREA–FILE TRANSFER
Transfers or compares data between the
UM (User Memory) area and the file
memory.
22
23
15
01
CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
FORCED SET/RESET
Creates or deletes a directory.
Debugging
Force-sets or force-resets bits, or
releases force-set status.
23
02
FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
Cancels all bits that have been force-set
or force-reset.
8-6-4 Writing Programs
Programs incorporating the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490)
instructions are generally created using the Communications Port Enabled
Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag as input conditions. CS/CJ-
series CPU Units have eight communications ports. Only one instruction can
be executed at any given port at one time, however, so the program must not
overlap the use of any of the ports. A program example is provided below.
Communications port
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
Instruction 1
Instruction 2
Instruction 3
Instruction 4
Instruction 5
Instruction 6
Instruction 7
Instruction 8
There are eight communications ports, so up to eight
communications instructions can be executed at a time. The
number of messages that can be sent or received with a
single CPU Bus Unit service, though, is not more than two
each for the CPU Unit to the EtherNet/IP Unit and for the
EtherNet/IP Unit to the CPU Unit.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
Execution
condition
C
Input A remains ON from start to completion of commu-
nications instruction.
KEEP(011) A
Reset B
A
Creates operand and control data in a given
area.
Operand,
control data
created with
@MOV and
@XFER.
Communications
instructions
@SEND
Executes communications instructions.
@RECV
@CMND
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
A
A
Creates reset input. (Turns reset B ON
after execution of communications in-
struction.)
DIFU(013) B
Communications
Port Error Flag
Send Error Flag display
(Retry can be executed.)
Execution
condition
Communications
Port Enabled Flag
Exclusive control so execution is not simultaneous.
A
Use exclusive control so that no other communica-
tions instructions are started before execution of the
above communications instruction is complete.
KEEP(011) C
Reset D
(Continued in same way.)
The execution status of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instruc-
tions is always reflected by the communications flags (i.e., the Communica-
tions Port Enabled Flag and the Communications Port Error Flag). The CS/
CJ-series CPU Unit’s communications flags are allocated in the Auxiliary Area
as shown in the following table.
Flag name
Address
Bits
Contents
Word
Communications Port A202
Enabled Flag
Bit 7: Port 7
Bit 6: Port 6
Bit 5: Port 5
Bit 4: Port 4
Bit 3: Port 3
Bit 2: Port 2
Bit 1: Port 1
Bit 0: Port 0
OFF: Execution enabled
(being executed)
ON: Execution disabled
(not being executed)
Communications Port A219
Error Flag
Bit 7: Port 7
Bit 6: Port 6
Bit 5: Port 5
Bit 4: Port 4
Bit 3: Port 3
Bit 2: Port 2
Bit 1: Port 1
Bit 0: Port 0
0: Normal completion
1: Abnormal completion
Note
In CS/CJ-series PLCs, communications ports 0 to 7 are also used when exe-
cuting the PCMR(260) (PROTOCOL MACRO), TXDU(256), and RXDU(255)
instructions, so these flags are shared by SEND(090), RECV(098),
CMND(490), PCMR(260), TXDU(256), and RXDU(255).
SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) cannot be executed at a communi-
cations port if PCMR(260) TXDU(256), or RXDU(255) is being executed at
that port.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
Communications Port
Completion Codes
The status of a SEND(090), RECV(098), and CMND(490) instruction after
execution is reflected as a communications port completion code, in one word
(two bytes) of data as shown in the following table. (The value is 0000 during
instruction execution.) The recorded status is saved until execution of the next
instruction.
Word
A203
Contents
Communications Port 0 Completion Code
Communications Port 1 Completion Code
Communications Port 2 Completion Code
Communications Port 3 Completion Code
Communications Port 4 Completion Code
Communications Port 5 Completion Code
Communications Port 6 Completion Code
Communications Port 7 Completion Code
A204
A205
A206
A207
A208
A209
A210
The meanings of the communications port completion codes are the same as
those for FINS commands and responses. Bits 08 to 15 in the communica-
tions port completion code correspond to the first byte of the response code,
and bits 00 to 07 correspond to the second byte. For details, refer to 14-6
Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes.
Communications Port Error Flag and Completion Codes CMND(490)
Errors that occur when CMND(490) is used generate a Communications Port
Error Flag and are recorded in a communications port completion code only in
the following cases:
• When a response timeout error has occurred.
• When the number of communications data bytes exceeds the maximum
value for the Unit (i.e., 2,000 bytes for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Eth-
erNet/IP port).
• When the actual number of response bytes is greater than the number of
reception bytes that has been set. (The response is not stored in this
case.)
Errors other than these are recorded in the response codes of the responses
stored from the beginning response storage word onwards. Be careful of
these, because there are no Communications Port Error Flags and they are
not recorded in a communications port completion code.
Timing of Communications Flag Changes
• The Communications Port Enabled Flag remains OFF during communica-
tions and turns ON when they are completed (regardless of whether or
not an error occurs).
• The Communications Port Error Flag retains its status until the next trans-
mission or reception.
• The Communications Port Error Flag turns OFF with the execution of the
next communications instruction even if there was an abnormal comple-
tion.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
Example
1
Communications Port Enabled Flag
0
Instruction 3
being executed.
Instruction 1
being executed.
Communications instruction:
SEND(090), RECV(098), CMND(490)
Instruction 2
being executed.
1
Communications Port Error Flag
0
0000
0000
0000
Communications Port
Completion Code
Completion
0000 (Normal completion)
0202
(Unit address setting error)
0000 (Normal completion)
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
8-6-5 Program Example
Execution
condition A20207
(See note 1.)
000000
120002
S
When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7
is ON, and RECV(098) is not being executed, the send
execution program will start when execution condition
CIO 000000 turns ON.
KEEP
120000
R
120001
120000
Input CIO 120000 remains ON from the start of
SEND(090) execution until completion.
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
#000A
D00000
Control Data Creation
Word Contents
Meaning
#0002
D0000 00 0A Number of send words = 10
D0001 00 02 Destination network number = 2
D00001
D0002 04 00 Destination node number = 4
Destination unit address = 0
#0400
D00002
07 05
D0003
Response required.
Communications port No. used = 7
Number of retries = 5
#0705
D00003
D0004 00 64 Response monitor time = 10 s
#0064
D00004
Send Data Creation
@XFER(70)
Ten words of data from word CIO 0000 is
stored from D00010 onwards.
#000A
0000
D00010
@SEND(90)
Ten words of data from D00010 at the local node is
sent to D00020 onwards at network number 2, node
number 4, unit address 0 (the PLC).
D00010
D00020
D00000
(See note 1.)
120000 A20207
120000 A21907
DIFU(13)
Reset Input Creation
Send Error Display
120001
121000
(Continued on next page.)
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communicating between OMRON PLCs
Section 8-6
(Continued from previous page.)
Execution
condition
000001
A20207
(See note 1.) 120000
When the Communications Port Enabled Flag for port 7
is ON, and SEND(090) is not being executed, the trans-
mission execution program will start when execution
condition CIO 000001 turns ON.
S
KEEP
120002
R
120003
120002
Input CIO 120002 remains ON from the start of
RECV(098) execution until completion.
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
@MOV(21)
#0010
D00005
Control Data Creation
Word Contents
Meaning
D0005 00 10 Number of reception words = 16
D0006 00 03 Source network number = 3
#0003
D00006
D0007 20 00 Source node number = 32
Source unit address = 0
#2000
D00007
D0008 07 05 Response required.
Communications port No. used = 7
Number of retries = 5
#0705
D0009 00 00 Response monitor time = Default
D00008
#0000
D00009
A total of 16 words of data beginning from word A100
at network number 3, node number 32, unit address 0
(the PLC) is received at word CIO 2000 onwards of the
local node.
@RECV(98)
A100
2000
D00005
120002 A20207 (See note 1.)
DIFU(13)
Reset Input Creation
120003
121001
120002 A21907
Reception Error Display
120003
120002
A21907
Reception Data Processing
@XFER(70)
If there is no reception processing completion error, the
16 words of data received from word CIO 2000 on-
wards is stored at D00040 onwards.
#0016
2000
D00040
Note
1. With CS/CJ-series PLCs, the Communications Port Enabled Flags at bits
0 to 7 in word A202 turn OFF even when the PCMR(260) instruction is be-
ing executed using the ports corresponding to those flags.
2. Before using the sample program as is, confirm that the memory areas
(words and bits) used in the sample program are not already being used in
the user program o r by Special I/O Units.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications
Section 8-7
8-7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS Communications
When applications are constructed using FINS communications services,
communications errors (from multiple response timeouts) may occasionally
occur due to high traffic, depending on the system configuration and the appli-
cation programs. This section describes precautions for systems with high
traffic in FINS communications.
■ Conditions for High Traffic
A heavy communications load may occur at an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port if FINS messages and CIP messages from multiple nodes
are concentrated on that EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. The
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port and the CPU Unit may have insuf-
ficient processing capacity for the volume of FINS messages (commands)
that are coming from the network.
For example, suppose that approximately 20 ms are required to process a sin-
gle FINS frame (i.e., 20 ms from the time that the command is received at the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port until a response is sent). If 100 or
more FINS frames (commands) are received at once from multiple communi-
cating nodes, it will take approximately 2 seconds to send a response to the
last command. If a timeout is set at the remote node for 2 seconds or less,
then a timeout will be generated. A retry will begin due to the timeout, and the
traffic to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port will thus be increased
even further, until ultimately the responses to all the nodes will be too slow. At
this point, the system is overloaded.
■ Avoiding Errors due to High Traffic
To avoid high traffic from FINS communications, the communications load
must be kept down to a reasonable level. To accomplish this, follow the proce-
dure below.
that node. (For details, refer to 10-5-1 Maximum Transmission Delays (Ex-
cluding Delays in the Network).)
3. Set the timeout value for all of the SEND(090), RECV(098), and
CMND(490) FINS commands at all the remote nodes to at least 1.5 times
the total processing time for all of the FINS frames.
4. As much as possible, implement communications traffic testing up to the
point of actual system operation. If any problem occurs, adjust the traffic.
5. If a commercially-available protocol analyzer can be used, then the actual
FINS frame processing time (i.e., the time from when a command is re-
ceived at the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port until a response
is sent) can be measured under high traffic conditions and the communi-
cations traffic can be further adjusted as required.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 9
Message Communications
This section describes message communications using FINS commands sent from the ladder program in the CPU Unit of
the PLC.
9-1 Sending Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1-1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND(490). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2 Receiving Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-2-1 List of PLC Object Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
243
248
249
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
9-1 Sending Explicit Messages
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports can send
explicit messages. Only CIP unconnected message (UCMM) communications
can be used to send explicit messages. Explicit messages can be sent to the
following destinations.
• EtherNet/IP Units made by other manufacturers
• Other PLCs with a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port
Example
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
Other manufacturer's
EtherNet/IP node
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit
Explicit messages can be sent
Explicit message
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
When the destination is another company’s EtherNet/IP node, an explicit mes-
sage can be sent to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port using
FINS command code 28 01 or 28 10, through the Connection Manager class’s
Unconnected Send service, as shown in the following diagram.
Other company's
EtherNet/IP node
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
FINS
header
Explicit
message
FINS
header
Explicit
message
CMND
(490)
EtherNet/IP
network
Note: Use 28 01 for the
FINS command code.
FINS
header
FINS
header
Response
Response
When sending an explicit message, set the local node’s EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port as the destination of the FINS command, and not the
actual destination (other company’s EtherNet/IP node). Specify the node
address of the actual destination in the command data of the explicit message
send command.
There are two ways to send an explicit message send command:
1,2,3...
1. CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command (28 10)
Messages can be routed through multiple CIP network layers. (Messages
can be routed through 16 network levels. The explicit message send com-
mand may time out if routing is attempted for more than 16 networks.
2. EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command for DeviceNet Units (28 01)
This command is compatible with the DeviceNet Unit’s explicit message
send command (28 01) in the ladder program. The message must be sent
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
in the same network layer and the remote node’s IP address range is lim-
ited.
The following diagram shows an example of actual node address specifica-
tions.
EtherNet/IP Unit
with unit number 2
The node address of the non-OMRON node is set as the
CMND
destination node address in the FINS command data.
S
15
8 7
0
D
C
2
0
8
6
0
1
S
S+1
Command code
PLC's
CPU
Unit
Node 05
FINS
command
Explicit command block
Node address of the non-
OMRON node: 06 Hex
15
8 7
0
5
F
E
0
C+3
Explicit message
Other company's
EtherNet/IP node
Destination node address:
Local node address: 05
Destination unit address:
FE or 12 (Hex)
Note Depending on conditions, the destination slave may not always accept an
explicit message. Always perform retry processing when sending explicit mes-
sages.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND (28 10)
This command sends an explicit message for CIP routing to another node’s
specified class and receives a response. There are two command formats:
one with a specified route path (path to the target device), and the other with-
out the route path.
Command Block
• Relay Hop Format
The following format includes the route path (routing service data). Specify
the entire routing path in the command’s request path.
502 bytes max.
Request path
28 10
52
02
20
06
24
01
Command Transport
Message
monitoring
time
Instance ID: 01 Hex
8-bit instance ID: 24 Hex
Class ID Connection Manager: 06 Hex
8-bit class ID: 20 Hex
Request path size = 2 words: 02 Hex
code
ID
Service code
Unconnected Send service: 52 Hex
Routing service data
502 bytes max.
00
Message
request size
Request path
Request data
Route path
(variable length)
(variable length) (variable length)
Route path size
Request path size
Service code
Padding data
(when necessary)
Time Out Ticks
Priority/Time Tick
Routing
service data
Last hop
data
Routing
service data
• Last Hop Format
The following format does not include the route path.
2810 Hex
Command Transport
code ID
Message
monitoring time
502 bytes max.
Request path size
(variable length)
Request data
(variable length)
Request path size
Service code
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
Response Block
The following normal response is returned to a transmitted CIP UCMM MES-
SAGE SEND command if it was completed normally.
2810 Hex 0000 Hex
Command Response Transport No. of bytes
code
code
ID
502 bytes max.
00 00
received
00
Hex Hex Hex
Service response data
(variable length)
Reserved
General status
Reserved
Service code (response)
The following response is returned if an error occurs in a transmitted CIP
UCMM MESSAGE SEND command.
2810 Hex 0000 Hex
Command Response Transport No. of bytes
code
code
ID
received
502 bytes max.
00
Hex
Additional status
(variable length)
Service
response data
(variable length)
Additional status size
General status
Reserved
Service code (response)
The following response is returned if the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND com-
mand could not be sent or timed out.
2810 Hex
(See note.)
Command Response
code
code
Note: There may be additional data depending on
the response code, e.g., for a relay error.
Parameters
Transport ID (command, response):
When multiple CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND commands are being sent, the
Transport ID identifies the commands. This Transport ID is returned
unchanged in the response.
Message monitoring time (command):
Specifies the monitoring time in 10-ms units, in order to monitor the time from
the point that the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port extracts the CIP
explicit message from this command until a response is received. The moni-
toring time can be set between 0.01 and 655.35 s.
Service code (command, response):
In the command, this code is the service code defined for EtherNet/IP.
In the response, bit 15 of the service code specified in the command is turned
ON and the resulting value is returned.
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
In the routing format for rely hops, the first service code (in the routing service
data) is 52 Hex, which is the Unconnected Send service.
Request path size (command):
Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the request path
field.
In the routing format for relay hops, the first request path size (in the routing
service data) is 02 Hex.
Request path (command):
Specifies the request path (class ID, instance ID, etc.) in bytes. If there is an
odd number of bytes, pad the last byte with a 0 so that the data is in full word
units.
vice data) is 20 06 24 01 Hex (Connection Manager). For details, refer to the
description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications.
Request data (command):
In the command, specify the data determined by the service code.
In the response, the reception data determined by the service code will be
returned.
Priority/Time tick (command):
ority/Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D CIP Message
Communications.
Time Out Ticks (command):
Specifies the base value of the timeout time. For details, refer to the descrip-
tion of the Priority/Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks at the end of Appendix D
CIP Message Communications.
Message request size (command):
Specifies the number of bytes of data from the second service code to the
request data. The data size is specified in LSB, MSB order.
For example, if there are 400 bytes, the data size is 0190 hex bytes, which is
entered as 90 01 hex.
Padding data (command):
If the message request size specifies an odd number of bytes, use 00 hex as
padding in the last byte. The padding data is not required if there is an even
number of bytes.
Route path size (command):
Specifies the number of words of data that are specified in the route path field.
Route path (command):
Specifies the path (route path) to the target device. For details, refer to the
description of the Route Path in Appendix D CIP Message Communications.
No. of bytes received (response):
This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of bytes of data
received after the service code (response).
General status (response):
The general status defined in EtherNet/IP is returned. The normal response is
00 hex. For details, refer to the description of the Response Codes in Appen-
dix D CIP Message Communications.
Additional status size (response):
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
This hexadecimal value is returned to indicate the number of words of data in
the additional status field.
Additional status (response):
The additional status defined in EtherNet/IP is returned. For details, refer to
the description of the Response Codes in Appendix D CIP Message Commu-
nications.
Service response data (response):
The reception data determined by the service code is returned.
Description
• The CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an Ether-
Net/IP-defined explicit message to another company’s node and receive a
response.
• Unlike other FINS commands, the destination of a CIP UCMM MESSAGE
SEND command’s control data is the local node’s EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port, and the actual destination node is specified in
the command’s route path.
• When an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port receives an explicit
message, it automatically returns a response to the message.
• When specifying the timeout time, the proper values are different for last-
hop and relay-hop methods. With the last-hop method, set the timeout
time for the actual request service processing. With the relay-hop method,
the timeout for the relay path must be added to the timeout time for the
actual request service processing.
In CIP routing, the node/Unit performing the routing subtracts the timeout
time for 1 hop, deletes its own address from the routing information, and
relays the message to the next node/Unit.
Set the following timeout values for command processing.
The maximum number of relay nodes (Units) is 16. If the number is more
than 16, the explicit message send command may time out even if the con-
ditions of network and each node (Unit) are normal. If more than 16 relay
nodes (Units) have been set, a constant time must be specified for the re-
quest service processing timeout time (normally 0000 hex).
• Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks =
(5 s × Number of relay nodes/Units) + Request processing timeout
• Message monitoring time ≥ Priority Time Tick and Time Out Ticks
• CMND(490) timeout set value = Message monitoring time
A timeout may occur sooner than the actual set value, depending on the
point where the timeout occurs in the path.
• General status = 01 hex, and Additional status = 0204 hex
A FINS timeout error response (0205 hex) may occur if the CMND(490)
timeout set value or message monitoring time is less than the Priority Time
Tick and Time Out Ticks.
Note
1. For details on the parameters of explicit messages, refer to the EtherNet/
IP and CIP specifications.
2. The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA) can be contacted at
the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet/IP and CIP specifi-
cations.
ODVA Headquarters
4220 Varsity Drive, Suite A
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48108-5006
USA
TEL: 1 734-975-8840
FAX: 1 734-922-0027
Email [email protected]
WEB www.odva.org
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (28 01)
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND will send a DeviceNet Unit-compatible explicit
message to the specified class of another node and receive a response.
The other node is specified with the destination node address in the com-
mand. The actual destination IP address is as follows.
Destination IP address =
(Local IP address & Subnet mask)
+ Destination node address
Command Block
Response Block
28
01
468 bytes max.
Command
code
Class ID
Service code
Instance ID
Service data
Destination node address
Normal Response
28
01
00
00
498 bytes max.
Service data
Command Response No. of bytes
code
code
received
Service code
Destination node address (remote node)
Error Responses
The following response is returned if an error occurs for the explicit message.
28
01
00
00
94
Command Response No. of bytes
code code received
Error code
Service code 94 (Hex)
Destination node address (remote node)
The following response is returned if the explicit message cannot be sent or
times out.
28
01
Command Response
code code
Parameters
Destination node address (command):
The node address of the destination of the explicit message.
The node address of the local EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is
specified in the control data for the CMND(490), but the node address of the
actual destination is specified here in the FINS command. The destination
node address cannot be set to 00 hex or FF hex.
Service code (command, response):
A service code defined for EtherNet/IP. In a normal response, bit 15 of the ser-
vice code specified in the command will be turned ON and returned. In an
error response, 94 Hex will always be returned.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
Class ID (command):
The class ID of the destination of the explicit message.
Instance ID (command):
The instance ID of the destination of the explicit message.
Service data (command, response):
The data defined for the services codes.
No. of bytes received (response):
The number of bytes received from the destination node address (remote
node).
Destination node address (remote node):
The node address of the OMRON Special I/O Slave Unit or Slave manufac-
tured by another company to which the explicit message was sent is returned.
Error code (response):
An error code defined in EtherNet/IP (1-byte general status and 2-byte addi-
tional status) is returned. The data format is DeviceNet-compatible (2 bytes
total), so the returned Error Code is converted to the 1-byte general status
and a 1-byte additional status (high byte only).
Description
• The EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command is used to send an EtherNet/
IP-defined explicit message to another company’s node and receive a
response.
• Unlike other FINS commands, the destination of a EXPLICIT MESSAGE
SEND command’s control data is the local node’s EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port, and the actual destination node is specified in
the command’s route path.
Always specify the local node’s EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
in the CMND(490) instruction’s control data. An error will occur if another
node’s Master Unit is specified as the destination.
• When an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port receives an explicit
message, it automatically returns a response to the message.
• A time of 2 s is used for request service processing timeouts.
Set the CMND(490) instruction’s timeout set value to 2 s or longer.
When there is a timeout, the error code will be 0102 hex.
When the CMND(490) instruction’s timeout set value is less than 2 s, a
FINS timeout error response of 0205 hex may occur.
Note
1. For details on the parameters of explicit messages, refer to the EtherNet/
IP specifications.
2. The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA) can be contacted at
the following address to obtain copies of the EtherNet/IP and CIP specifi-
cations.
ODVA Headquarters
4220 Varsity Drive, Suite A
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48108-5006
USA
TEL: 1 734-975-8840
FAX: 1 734-922-0027
Email [email protected]
WEB www.odva.org
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
9-1-1 Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND(490)
With a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, a
CMND(490) in the CPU Unit’s ladder program can send CIP UCMM explicit
messages.
Send the CIP UCMM explicit message’s command data in a FINS command
following the 2810 hex FINS command code.
The CIP UCMM explicit message’s response is received following the
2810 hex FINS command code and the FINS completion code.
The following command is used: [ CMND
S: First command word
S
D
C ]
D: First response word
C: First control data word
Command data is set in order starting with the word specified for the
CMND(490) operand S (first command word) and continuing with words with
higher addresses in I/O memory in the command block format.
Command Format Example: Get_Attribute_All Service to Identity Object
Request path
28
10
00
00
05 DC
52
02
20
06
24
01
0A
0C
06
00
Message
request size
Command
code
Transport
ID
Time Out Ticks
Service code
Unconnected Send service: 52 Hex
Priority/Time Tick
Instance ID
Request path size = 2 words: 02 Hex
8-bit class ID: 20 Hex
Class ID Connection Manager: 06 Hex
8-bit instance ID: 24 Hex
Routing service data
Route path
Request path
01 24
01
02
20
01
08
00
12
0D
31
1
39
9
32
2
2E
31
1
36
6
.
Route path
size
(8 words)
Route path size (13 bytes)
Ethernet port: 12 Hex
Instance ID
8-bit instance ID: 24 Hex
Class ID identity object
8-bit class ID
Request path size (2 words)
Service code
Get_Attribute_All service
Last hop data
Route path
Routing service data
38
8
2E
32
2
35
5
30
0
2E
32
2
00
.
.
Padding data
Routing service data
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
Setting the Command Data for CMND(490)
15
08 07
00
Bit
S+0
28
00
05
52
20
24
0A
06
01
20
24
08
12
31
32
31
38
32
30
32
10
00
DC
02
06
01
0C
00
02
01
01
00
0D
39
2E
36
2E
35
2E
00
FINS command code
S+1
S+2
Transport ID
Message monitoring time
S+3
Service code = 52 hex, Request path size = 02 hex
8-bit class ID = 20 hex, Class ID = 06 hex (Connection Manager)
8-bit instance ID = 24 hex (request path), Instance ID = 01 hex
Priority/Time Tick = 0A hex, Time Out Ticks = 0C hex
Message request size
S+4
S+5
S+6
S+7
S+8
Service code = 01 hex (Get_Attribute_All service), Request path size = 02 hex
S+9
8-bit class ID = 20 hex, Class ID = 01 hex (Identity Object)
8-bit instance ID = 24 hex, Instance ID = 01 hex
Link
path
S+10
S+11
S+12
S+13
S+14
S+15
S+16
S+17
S+18
S+19
Route path size = 8 words
Ethernet port = 12 hex (Extended Link Address Size = 1 hex, Ethernet port number = 2 hex), Route path size = 13 bytes
1 9
2 .
1 6
Route path
IP address
8 .
2 5
0 .
2
192.168.250.2
The response data is set in the same way, starting from the word specified for
CMND(490) operand D (first response word) and continuing with words with
higher addresses in I/O memory in the response block format.
Note Request path data or request data that is in word (2-byte) or double-word (4-
byte) units, such as word data and ERROR CLEAR codes, is specified from
low to high (U) bytes in command block format. For example, to specify word
data 1234 hex, specify 34 hex and then 12 hex. To specify the double word
data 12345678 hex, specify 78 hex, 56 hex, 34 hex, and then 12 hex. The
command blocks are shown in the following diagram.
Command Block
Example: 1234 hex
Example: 12345678 hex
Service Data
Service Data
The format from CMND(490) operand S onwards will be set as follows:
Example: 1234 hex
From higher byte
Bit
Example: 12345678 hex
From higher byte
Bit
From lower byte
Bit
From lower byte
Bit
Similarly, when the additional status data and service response data in the
response block is in word (2-byte) or double-word (4-byte) units, such as word
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
data and ERROR CLEAR codes, is also returned in the same order from low
to high bytes in the response block.
Example: Sending Explicit Messages Using CMND(490)
EtherNet/IP Unit
with unit number 0
CMND(490)
instruction
PLC's
CPU
Unit
Network address: 01 hex
Node address: 05 hex
Unit address: 10 hex
Explicit
message
EtherNet/IP node of other manufacturer
Operation
The identity object information (class ID = 01 hex) is read from the other com-
pany’s EtherNet/IP node at IP address 192.168.250.2, using the CIP UCMM
MESSAGE SEND command, 28 10. The command data is stored in the DM
Area starting at DM01000, and the response data is stored in the DM Area
starting at D02000. If the command ends with an error, the end code is stored
in D00006 and command transmission is retried.
Command Details
[CMND
S
D
C ]
S = D01000: First command word
D01000 = 2810 hex
D01001 = 0000 hex
D01002 = 05DC hex
D01003 = 5202 hex
Command Code
Transport ID: 0000 hex
Message monitoring time: 15.00 s
Slave code: 52 hex (Unconnected Send)
Request path size: 2 words
Request path: 20 06 24 01 hex
(Connection Manager)
D01004 = 2006 hex
Class ID: 06 hex
D01005 = 2401 hex
Instance ID: 01 hex
Words S+6 to S+19 contain the request data.
D01006 = 0A0C hex
Priority/Time_Tick: 0A hex
Time Out Ticks: 0C hex
D01007 = 0600 hex
Message request size: 6 bytes
Words S+8 to S+10 contain the request message request.
D01008 = 0102 hex
Service: 01 hex (Get_Attribute_All)
Request path size: 2 words
Words S+9 and S+10 contain the request path.
D01009 = 2001 hex
8-bit class ID: 20 hex
Class ID: 01 hex
D01010 = 2401 hex
8-bit instance ID: 24 hex
Instance ID: 01 hex (Identity object)
Words S+11to S+19 contain the root path.
D01011 = 0800 hex
D01012 = 120D hex
Route path size: 8 words
Extended link address size = 1 hex
Route path size: 13 bytes (characters) = 0D hex
IP address: “19”
IP address: “2.”
IP address: “16”
D01013 = 3139 hex
D01014 = 322E hex
D01015 = 3136 hex
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
D01016 = 382E hex
D01017 = 3235 hex
D01018 = 302E hex
D01019 = 3200 hex
IP address: “8.”
IP address: “25”
IP address: “0.”
IP address: “2”
Padding data: 00 hex
D = D02000:
C = D00000:
First response word at local node
First control word
D00000 = 0028 hex
Number of command bytes: 40 bytes
D00001 = 0064 hex
D00002 = 0001 hex
D00003 = 0510 hex
Number of response bytes: 100 bytes
Destination network address: 1
Destination node address: 5
Destination unit address: FE hex (or 10 hex)
Response, communications port 0, no retries
Response monitoring time: 16.0 s
D00004 = 0000 hex
D00005 = 00A0 hex
Response
D02000 = 2801 hex
D02001 = 0000 hex
D02002 = 0000 hex
D02003 = 001D hex
D02004 = 8100 hex
Command code
FINS completion code
Transport ID
Number of bytes received: 29 bytes
Service code (response): 81 hex
Reserved: 00 hex
D02005 = 0000 hex
General status: 00 hex
Reserved: 00 hex
Words C+6 to C+18 contain the service response data.
D02006: 2F00 hex
D02007: 0C00 hex
D02008: 0C00 hex
D02009: 0101 hex
D020010: 3000 hex
D020011: 5303 hex
D020012: 0011 hex
D020013: 0A43 hex
D020014: 5331 hex
D020015: 572D hex
D020016: 4549 hex
D020017: 5032 hex
D020018: 3100 hex
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending Explicit Messages
Section 9-1
Program Example
A20011
(071)
000000
BSET #0000 D00000 D02999
Sets 0000 in D00000 to D02999.
(021)
First Cycle Flag
MOV #0028 D00000
Sets 0028 in D00000. (Number of send data bytes: 40)
Sets 0064 in D00001. (Number of receive data bytes: 100).
(021)
MOV #0064 D00001
(021)
Sets 0001 in D00002. (Destination network address: 01).
MOV #0001 D00002
(021)
Sets 0510 in D00003. (Destination node address: 05, destination unit address: 10)
MOV #0510 D00003
(021)
Sets 0000 in D00004.
MOV #0000 D00004
(Response required, port number 0, number of retries = 0)
(021)
Sets 00A0 in D00005. (Response monitoring time: 16.0 s)
MOV #00A0 D00005
(021)
MOV #2810 D1000
(021)
MOV #0000 D1001
(021)
MOV #05DC D1002
(021)
MOV #5202 D1003
(021)
MOV #2006 D1004
(021)
MOV #2401 D1005
(021)
MOV #0A0C D1006
(021)
MOV #0600 D1007
(021)
MOV #0102 D1008
(021)
MOV #2001 D1009
Command data
(021)
MOV #2401 D1010
Set the CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND command's command data
in words D01000 to D01019 in routing data format.
(021)
MOV #0800 D1011
(021)
MOV #120D D1012
(021)
MOV #3139 D1013
(021)
MOV #322E D1014
(021)
MOV #3136 D1015
(021)
MOV #382E D1016
(021)
MOV #3235 D1017
(021)
MOV #302E D1018
(021)
MOV #3200 D1019
(021)
MOV #0001 0000
Execution
condition
Moves 0001 into CIO 0000.
000000
A20200
151100
(490)
CMND D01000 D02000 D00000
Sends 8 bytes of command data to destination node address 06, receives
14 bytes of response data, and stores it in the local node starting at D02000.
(D00000 is control data.)
000013
Communications
Enabled Flag
Online Flag
(n+11, bit 00)
(025)
ASL 0000
Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the left.
000001
A20200
A21900
(021)
000018
000024
Copies the completion code (network communications error response code)
from A203 to D00006.
MOV A203 D00006
Communications
Enabled Flag
Network Communication
Execution Error Flag
(026)
ASR 0000
Shifts the contents of CIO 0000 one bit to the right and
retries in the next cycle (CIO 000000 ON).
(001)
END
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
9-2 Receiving Explicit Messages
The CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports are
equipped with a PLC Object that is functionally compatible with CS/CJ-series
DeviceNet Units. The Unit will receive messages addressed to the PLC
Object, process service requests addressed to the CPU Unit, and return
responses. The CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP ports
support CIP unconnected message (UCMM) communications and CIP con-
nected (Class 3) communications as reception functions.
The following services are provided by the PLC Object.
• CPU Unit status read/write
• CPU Unit I/O memory read/write
• CPU Unit error log read/clear
Explicit messages can be received from the following sources:
• EtherNet/IP nodes made by other manufacturers
• OMRON PLCs with a CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit or a CPU Unit with a
built-in EtherNet/IP port. (Messages from CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units
and built-in EtherNet/IP ports must be CIP unconnected messages
(UCMM).)*
* Messages from CS/CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units and built-in EtherNet/IP
ports must be CIP unconnected messages (UCMM).
Example
CS/CJ-series
CS/CJ-series
EtherNet/IP Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Other company's
Ethernet node
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit
Explicit messages
can be sent.
Explicit message
Ethernet (EtherNet/IP)
Note For an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port with version 2.0 or higher,
change the class ID of the PLC Object from 2F hex to C4 hex.
When using a PLC Object with a DeviceNet Unit or EtherNet/IP Unit with ver-
sion 1.0, and converting to EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port with a
version 2.0 or higher, the class ID must be changed according to the commu-
nications application.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
9-2-1 List of PLC Object Services
PLC Objects provide the following services.
Status Read/Write for CPU Units
Services
Service
code
Class ID
C4 Hex
Instance ID
Request
service data
Contents
CPU Unit Informa- 0E Hex
tion Read
00 Hex
Attribute ID =
64 Hex
Reads the operating mode of the
CPU Unit.
(2F Hex)
(See note.)
Attribute ID =
65 Hex
Reads if there is a fatal or non-fatal
error in the CPU Unit.
Attribute ID =
66 Hex
Reads CPU Unit model.
CPU Unit Write
10 Hex
40 Hex
Attribute ID =
64 Hex,
Attribute Value
Changes the operating mode of the
CPU Unit.
Attribute ID =
65 Hex
Attribute Value
Clears errors.
CPU Unit Status
Read
None
Reads the detailed status of the CPU
Unit.
Operation status: Stop, run, CPU
standby
Operating modes: PROGRAM, MON-
ITOR, RUN
Fatal error information: Error flags,
including memory errors, I/O bus
errors, system errors
Messages: Message No. when MSB
instruction executed by CPU Unit
Error codes: Error code for the most
serious errors
Error messages: Messages stored in
CPU Unit when FAL/FALS instruction
executed
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
I/O Memory Read/Write for CPU Units
Service
Service
code
Class ID
Instance ID
Request
service
data
Contents
Byte Data Read 1C Hex
C4 Hex
(2F Hex)
(See note.) to 14 Hex)
Specifies
Address,No. Reads the specified node data in byte units.
area (01 Hex of read bytes The word data is read in order, from high to
low bytes.
Read data: 200 bytes max.
Word Data
Read
1D Hex
Address,No. Reads the specified node data in word
of read
units. The word data is read in order, from
high to low bytes.
words
Read data: 200 bytes max.
Byte Data Write 1E Hex
Word Data Write 1F Hex
Address,
byte data
Writes the specified node data in byte units.
The word data is specified in order, from
high to low bytes.
Write data: 200 bytes max.
Address
word data
Writes the specified node data in word
units. The word data is specified in order,
from high to low bytes.
Write data: 200 bytes max.
Note With a EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port with unit version 2.0 or
later, the PLC object class ID is C4 hex. (With unit version 1.0, the PLC object
class ID is F2 hex.)
The commands and responses for the explicit messages that can be sent and
received are described on the following pages.
In the following command and response formats, all boxes represent 1 byte
each.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
CPU Information Read (Service Code: 0E Hex)
Reads CPU Unit information, including operating mode, fatal/non-fatal errors,
and the CPU Unit model.
Command Block
C4
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
0E
(2F)
(*)
00
(*)
Attribute ID
Class ID
Instance ID
Service Code
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
8E
Service Code
Attribute Value
Parameters
Service code (command, response): 0E Hex is specified for commands.
For responses, the highest bit be ON and 8E Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): Always 00 Hex.
Attribute ID (command): The read information is specified by the attribute ID.
The attribute IDs are listed in the following table.
Attribute ID (Hex)
Contents
Attribute value size
64
65
66
CPU Unit operating mode 1 word (2 bytes)
CPU Unit errors
CPU Unit model
1 word (2 bytes)
22 bytes
• CPU Operating Mode (when Attribute ID = 64 Hex)
Reads the CPU Unit operating mode.
• CPU Unit Errors (when Attribute ID = 65 Hex)
Reads if there are any fatal or non-fatal errors in the CPU Unit.
• CPU Unit Model (when Attribute ID = 66 Hex)
Reads the CPU Unit model.
Read data (response): The specified information is returned in order.
• CPU Unit operating mode (attribute ID = 64 Hex).
The CPU Unit operating mode is returned in 1-word (2-byte) hexadecimal for-
mat, as follows:
0001 Hex: PROGRAM mode; 0002 Hex: MONITOR mode;
0004 Hex: RUN mode
PROGRAM mode
MONITOR mode
RUN mode
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Note The codes for the above modes are 1-word (2-byte) data and are returned in
low byte first. For example, for PROGRAM mode, the code is returned as 01
Hex followed by 00 Hex.
• CPU Unit Errors (when Attribute ID = 65 Hex)
The CPU Unit fatal/non-fatal error data is returned in 1-word (2-byte) hexa-
decimal format, as follows:
01 Hex: Error; 00 Hex: No error.
1: Error
• CPU Unit Model (when Attribute ID = 66 Hex)
The CPU Unit model is returned in ASCII.
Size: 2 bytes (Always 1400 Hex) + Model: 20 bytes (fixed). Unused area is
filled with 20 Hex (spaces) and returned.
20 bytes
Byte Byte
Byte Byte Byte
Unit name
CPU Unit Write (Service Code: 10 Hex)
This PLC Object service writes CPU Unit information, including the operating
mode and clearing errors.
Command Block
C4
(2F)
(*)
10
00
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
(*)
Attribute ID
Attribute Value
Class ID
Service Code
Instance ID
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
Parameters
90
Service Code
Service code (command, response): 10 Hex is specified for commands. For
responses, the highest bit will turn ON and 90E Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): Always 00 Hex.
Attribute ID (command): Information to write is specified by the attribute ID.
The attribute IDs are listed in the following table.
Attribute ID (Hex)
Contents
CPU Unit operating mode 1 word (2 bytes)
CPU Unit errors 1 word (2 bytes)
Attribute value size
64
65
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
• CPU Operating Mode (Attribute ID = 64 Hex)
Changes the CPU Unit operating mode.
The Attribute Values are as follows:
0001 Hex: PROGRAM mode; 0002 Hex: MONITOR mode;
0004 Hex: RUN mode
Note The specified code for the above operating modes are 1-word (2-byte
data, and are specified with the low byte first. For example, for PRO-
GRAM mode, the code is specified as 01 Hex followed by 00 Hex. Ac-
cordingly, the low to high bytes for the above codes are set as high
to low bytes in I/O memory, when setting the codes as data for oper-
and S of CMND(490).
• Clearing CPU Unit Errors (when Attribute ID = 65 Hex)
Clears any fatal or non-fatal errors in the CPU Unit. Sets the error clear
code to Attribute Value. The error clear codes are listed in the following
table.
Error code
(Hex)
Data cleared
FFFE
Current error (clears the highest priority error)
Interrupt task error
0008B
009A
Basic I/O error
009B
PLC Setup error
02F0
Inner Board non-fatal error
Special I/O Unit error
0300 to 035F
00A0 to 00A1
0500 to 055F
00E7
SYSMAC BUS error
Special I/O Unit settings error
I/O verification error
When registered and actual I/O tables are different
When disconnecting or connecting I/O Units
00F7
Battery error
0200 to 020F
CS/CJ-series CPU Bus Unit error (last 2 digits are binary code for
the Unit No.)
For parity errors generated when data transferred between CS/CJ-
series CPU Bus Unit and CPU Unit
For watchdog timer errors in CS/CJ-series CPU Bus Unit
0400 to 040F
4101 to 42FF
CPU Bus settings error (last 2 digits are binary code for the Unit
No.)
System error (FAL): FAL instruction executed
Note Error clear codes are 1-word (2-byte) data, so the above codes are
specified with the low byte first. The low to high bytes for the above
codes are set as high to low bytes in I/O memory, when setting the
codes as data for operand S of CMND(490). For example, to specify
battery error 00F7 Hex, specify the error code as F7 Hex followed by
00 Hex, as shown in the following diagram.
C4
(2F)
10
00
65
F7
00
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
Attribute ID
Attribute Value
Class ID
Service Code
Instance ID
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
CPU Unit Status Read (Service Code: 40 Hex)
This PLC Object service reads status details (operation status, operating
mode, fatal and non-fatal errors, etc.) from the CPU Unit.
Command Block
C4
(2F)
(*)
40
00
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
(*)
Class ID
Service Code
Instance ID
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
C0
Service Code
Detailed status
Parameters
Service code (command, response): 40 Hex is specified for commands. For
responses, the highest bit will turn ON and C0 Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): Always 00 Hex.
Read data (response): The read data is given in the following table. The data
is returned after the service code in the order shown in the table (high to low).
Operation Status
RUN mode
Fatal error information (L)
Fatal error information (H)
Non-fatal error information (L)
Non-fatal error information (H)
Message exists/does not exist (L)
Message exists/does not exist (H)
Error code (L)
Error code (H)
Error message (16 bytes)
• Operation status: Returns the operation status of the CPU Unit in 1-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
The values of bits 3 to 6 are not fixed. Always mask them when address-
ing the status data.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Bit
7
6
-
5
-
4
-
3
-
2
1
0
Operation status
Unspecified
0: Stopped (User program is not being executed.)
1: Operating (User program is being executed.)
Flash memory access status (CS1H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D only)
0: Memory is not being written.
1: Memory is being written.
Battery status (CS1H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D only)
0: No battery
1: Battery installed
CPU status
0: Normal
1: CPU standby (waiting for SYSMAC Bus Remote I/O or other event)
• Operating mode: Returns the operating mode of the CPU Unit in 1-byte
(2-digit) hexadecimal.
0001 Hex: PROGRAM mode; 0002 Hex: MONITOR mode;
0004 Hex: RUN mode
• Fatal error information: Returns the fatal error information for the CPU
Unit in 2 bytes (low to high).
1: System error (FALS)
1: Cycle time over
1: Program error
1: I/O setting error
1: No. of I/O points exceeded
1: Inner Board fatal error
1: Number duplicate use error
1: I/O Bus error
1: Memory error
• Non-fatal error information: Returns the non-fatal error information for
the CPU Unit in 2 bytes (low to high).
Unspecified (reserved for system use)
1: Special I/O Unit error
1: CPU Bus settings error
1: Battery error
1: SYSMAC BUS error
1: Special I/O Unit
1: CS1-series CPU Bus Unit error
1: Inner Board error
1: I/O verification error
1: PLC system error
1: Unspecified (reserved for system use)
1: Basic I/O Unit error
1: Interrupt task error
1: Unspecified (reserved for system use)
1: System error (FAL)
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
• Message Exists/Does Not Exist: When the MSG instruction is executed
by the CPU Unit, the bit corresponding to the message number will turn
ON and be returned in 2 bytes (from low to high bytes).
Message No. 0 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 1 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 2 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 3 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 4 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 5 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 6 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
Message No. 7 (1: exists; 0: does not exist)
• Error Code: The highest priority error code of the errors existing when
the command is executed will be returned in 2-byte decimal (from low to
high bytes). If there are no errors, the error code will be 0000.
Note For information on the severity of error codes, refer to the CS1 Series
CPU Unit Operation Manual (W339) or the CJ Series CPU Unit Op-
eration Manual (W393).
• Error Messages: If the above error codes have occurred when FAL/FALS
instructions are executed with registered messages, those messages are
returned in 16-byte ASCII. If there are no registered messages or if the
error codes have not occurred due to execution of FAL/FALS instructions,
the code is returned in ASCII with 20 Hex (space) in 16 bytes.
Byte Data Read (Service Code: 1C Hex)
Byte Data Read reads any I/O memory area data in a CPU Unit. The read
word data is in byte units. The response block data is returned in low-to-high
byte order.
Command Block
C4
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
(2F)
(*)
1C
(*)
Address L No. of bytes read
Class ID
Service Code
Instance ID
Address H
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
9C
Service Code Word data L
Word data H
Word data L
Word data H
Read data (200 bytes max.)
Parameters
Service code (command, response): 1C Hex is specified for commands.
For responses, the highest bit will turn ON and 9C Hex will be returned.
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): The memory area that will read the data is specified
as shown in the following table.
Instance ID (Hex)
CPU Unit memory area
for read
Word range
0000 to 6143
01
03
04
05
CIO
DM
D00000 to D32767
W000 to W511
H000 to H1535
WR
HR
08 to 20
EM, banks 0 to 18
En_00000 to En_32767
(n: 0 to 18)
Address L, Address H (command): The address of the first word from which
to read the data is specified in hexadecimal as shown below.
Address L: The lower 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
Address H: The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
No of Read Bytes (command): The number of bytes of read data is specified
in 1-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal. The range is 01 to C8 Hex (1 to 200 decimal).
No. of bytes received (response): The number of bytes received from the
destination node address (remote node) is returned in hexadecimal.
Destination node address (response): The node address of the CS/CJ-
series EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port that returned the response
is returned in hexadecimal.
Read data (response): The specified area, word, and byte data is returned in
order from word H (high byte: bits 8 to 15) to word L (low byte: bits 0 to 7). If
an odd number is specified for the number of read bytes, the last 1 byte of
data will be read to the high word.
Important Points
The actual address L, address H, and number of read bytes that can be spec-
ified depends on the model of the CPU Unit, and the data area being read. Do
not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are using.
Word Data Read (Service Code: 1D Hex)
Word Data Read reads I/O memory area data in a CPU Unit. The read word
data is in word units. The response block data is returned in low-to-high byte
order.
Command Block
C4
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
(2F)
(*)
1D
(*)
Class ID Address L
No. of words read
Address H
Service Instance ID
Code
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Response Block
9D
Service Code Word data H
Word data L
Word data H
Word data L
Read data (200 bytes max.)
Parameters
Service code (command, response): ID Hex is specified for commands. For
responses, the highest bit will turn ON and 9D Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): The type of memory area that will read the data is
specified as shown in the following table.
Instance ID (Hex)
CPU Unit memory area
for read
Word range
0000 to 6143
01
03
04
05
CIO
DM
D00000 to D32767
W000 to W511
H000 to H1535
WR
HR
08 to 20
EM, banks 0 to 18
En_00000 to En_32767
(n: 0 to 18)
Address L, Address H (command): The address of the first word to read the
data from is specified in hexadecimal as shown below.
Address L: The lower 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
Address H: The higher 2 digits when the first word address is given in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
No of Read Words (command): The number of words of read data is speci-
fied in 1-byte (2-digit) hexadecimal. The range is 01 to 64 Hex (1 to 100 deci-
mal).
Read data (response): The specified area, word, and byte data is returned in
order from word L (low byte: bits 0 to 7) to word H (high byte: bits 8 to 15).
Important Points
The actual address L, address H, and number of write data bytes that can be
specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit, and the data area being
written. Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are
using.
Byte Data Write (Service Code: 1E Hex)
Byte Data Write writes data to an I/O memory area in a CPU Unit. The write
word data is in byte units. The command block is specified in high-to-low byte
order, as shown in the following diagram.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Command Block
C4
(2F)
(*)
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
1E
(*)
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
Class ID
Address L
Word data L
Word data L
Word data H
Write data (200 bytes max.)
Address H
Service Instance ID
Code
Word data H
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
Parameters
9E
Service Code
Service code (command, response): IE Hex is specified for commands. For
responses, the highest bit will turn ON and 9E Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): The type of memory area to which the data will be
written is specified as shown in the following table.
Instance ID (Hex)
CPU Unit memory area
for write
Word range
0000 to 6143
01
03
04
05
CIO
DM
D00000 to D32767
W000 to W511
H000 to H1535
WR
HR
08 to 20
EM, banks 0 to 18
En_00000 to En_32767
(n: 0 to 18)
Address L, Address H (command): The address of the first word to which
the data will be written is specified in hexadecimal as shown below.
Address L: The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4-
digit hexadecimal.
Address H: The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4-
digit hexadecimal.
Write data (response): The specified area and write data is returned in order
from word H (higher byte: bits 8 to 15) to word L (lower byte: bits 0 to 7). For
byte data write, specify an even number.
Important Points
The actual address L, address H, and number of write data bytes that can be
specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit, and the data area being
written. Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are
using.
Word Data Write (Service Code: 1F Hex)
Word Data Write writes data to any I/O memory area in a CPU Unit. The write
word data is in word units. The response block data is returned in low-to-high
byte order.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Explicit Messages
Section 9-2
Command Block
C4
The class ID depends on the unit version.
Version 2.0: The class ID is C4.
(2F)
(*)
1F
(*)
Version 1.0: The class ID is 2F.
Class ID
Address L
Word data H
Word data H
Word data L
Address H
Word data L
Service Instance ID
Code
Write data (200 bytes max.)
Note A body format of either 8 bits or 16 bits is possible.
Response Block
Parameters
9F
Service Code
Service code (command, response): IF Hex is specified for commands. For
responses, the highest bit will turn ON and 9F Hex will be returned.
Class ID (command): Always C4 (2F).
The class ID depends on the unit version. The class ID is C4 for unit version
2.0, and 2F for unit version 1.0.
Instance ID (command): The memory area to which the data is written is
specified as shown in the following table.
Instance ID (Hex)
CPU Unit memory area
for write
Word range
0000 to 6143
01
03
04
05
CIO
DM
D00000 to D32767
W000 to W511
H000 to H1535
WR
HR
08 to 20
EM, banks 0 to 18
En_00000 to En_32767
(n: 0 to 18)
Address L, Address H (command): The address of the first word to which
the data is written is specified in hexadecimal as shown below.
Address L: The lower 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4-
digit hexadecimal.
Address H: The higher 2 digits when the first word address is displayed in 4-
digit hexadecimal.
Write data (response): The specified area and write data is returned in order
from word L (lower byte: bits 0 to 7) to word H (higher byte: bits 8 to 15).
Important Points
The actual address L, address H, and number of write data bytes that can be
specified depends on the model of the CPU Unit, and the data area being
written. Do not exceed the boundary of the data areas for the PLC you are
using.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 10
Communications Performance and Communications Load
This section describes the communications performance in an EtherNet/IP network, and shows how to estimate the I/O
10-1 Communications System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-1 Tag Data Link Communications Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-2 Calculating the Number of Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1-3 Network Transmission Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2 Adjusting the Communications Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-2 Tag Data Link Bandwidth Usage and RPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-4 Changing the RPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2-5 RPI Setting Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3 I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-1 Timing of Data Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-2 EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H Built-in Port Data Processing Time . . . .
10-3-3 Effect on the CPU Unit’s Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-3-4 Tag Data Link I/O Response Time Calculation Example. . . . . . . . .
10-4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports. . . . . . . . .
10-4-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-4-2 Tag Data Link I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5 Message Service Transmission Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-5-1 Maximum Transmission Delays (Excluding Delays in the Network)
262
262
264
265
268
269
270
271
272
276
283
283
283
284
285
291
291
292
294
294
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
10-1 Communications System
10-1-1 Tag Data Link Communications Method
Packet Interval (RPI)
Settings
In EtherNet/IP tag data links, the data transmission period is set for each con-
nection as the packet interval (RPI). The target device will send data (i.e., out-
put tags) once each packet interval (RPI), regardless of the number of nodes.
Also, the heartbeat frame is sent from the originator to the target for each con-
nection. The target uses the heartbeat to check to see if errors have occurred
in the connection with the originator. The data transmission period of the
heartbeat frame depends on the packet interval (RPI) settings.
■ Heartbeat Frame Transmission Period
• Packet interval < 100 ms
The heartbeat frame transmission period is 100 ms.
• Packet interval ≥ 100 ms
The heartbeat frame transmission period is the same as the RPI.
Example
In this example, 2 tag data link connections are set for node 2 (the originator)
and node 1 (the target).
The packet interval (RPI) for output data 1 is set to 10 ms.
The packet interval (RPI) for output data 2 is set to 15 ms.
In this case, output data 1 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 10 ms, and out-
put data 2 is sent from node 1 to node 2 every 15 ms, as shown in the follow-
ing diagram. Also, data is sent from node 2 (the originator) to node 1 (the
target) with a heartbeat of 100 ms for connection 1 and a heartbeat of 100 ms
for connection 2.
Node 1
Target
Node 2
Output data 1
Originator
Connection 1 heartbeat
Output data 2
100-ms interval
10 ms
Connection 2 heartbeat
100-ms interval
Output data 1
15 ms
10 ms
Output data 2
Output data 1
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
Packet Interval (RPI)
and Bandwidth Usage
(PPS)
In a tag data link, the number of packets transferred each second is called the
bandwidth used or PPS (packets per second).
The PPS is calculated from the RPI and heartbeat as follows for each connec-
tion:
PPS used in a connection (pps)
= (1,000 ÷ RPI (ms)) + (1,000 ÷ Heartbeat transmission period (ms))
The following equation is used to calculate the total number of packets trans-
ferred by each EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port in 1 second.
Unit’s total PPS = Total PPS of originator connections
+ Total PPS of target connections (See note.)
Note Connections set as target connections must be added, too.
The maximum number of packets that the Unit can transfer in 1 second
(called the allowed Unit bandwidth) is 6,000 pps (CJ2M: 3,000 pps), so set the
connection below this maximum value.
Example
Node 1 has both originator and target connections, with send RPI of 200 ms
and 2 ms, and receive RPI of 1 ms.
Node 2 has originator connections only, with receive RPI of 200 ms, 2 ms, and
5 ms.
Node 3 has target connections only, with send RPI of 5 ms and 1 ms.
O: Originator
T: Target
HB: Heartbeat
Node 1
O
T
T
RPI: 200 ms
HB: 200 ms
RPI: 1 ms
HB: 100 ms
RPI: 2 ms
HB: 100 ms
T
O
O
Node 2
Node 3
O
RPI:5ms
HB:100ms
T
Each node’s total PPS is calculated as follows.
• Total PPS of node 1 Unit
= 1,000 / 200 ms + 1,000 / 2 ms + 1,000 / 1 ms (for data)
+1,000 / 200 ms + 1,000 / 100 ms + 1,000 / 100 ms (for heartbeat)
= 1,530 pps
• Total PPS of node 2 Unit
= 1,000 / 200 ms + 1,000 / 2 ms + 1,000 / 5 ms (for data)
+1,000 / 200 ms + 1,000 / 100 ms + 1,000 / 100 ms (for heartbeat)
= 730 pps
• Total PPS of node 3 Unit
= 1,000 / 5 ms + 1,000 / 1 ms (for data)
+1,000 / 100 ms + 1,000 / 100 ms (for heartbeat)
= 1,220 pps
All of the Units are within the allowed Unit bandwidth of 6,000 pps (CJ2M:
3,000 pps), so they can transfer data.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
10-1-2 Calculating the Number of Connections
The maximum number of connections for the Unit is 32 for the CJ2M and 256
for other CPU Units.
The number of connections must be set to 32 or less for the CJ2M and 256 or
less for other CPU Units combining both connections that the Unit opens as
the originator and connections that are opened from an originator with the
Unit as the target.
Example
Node 1 opens two connections as the target with node 2 and one connection
as the originator with node 3. Therefore, the total is three connections. Node 2
opens two connections as the originator with node 1 and one connection as
the target with node 3. Therefore, the total is three connections. Node 3 opens
one connection as the target with node 1 and one connection as the target
with node 2. Therefore, the total is two connections. In either case, the con-
nections can be opened because the maximum number of connections for the
Unit is less than 32 for the CJ2M and less than 256 for other CPU Units.
O: Originator
T: Target
Node 1
T
O
T
T
O
O
Node 2
Node 3
O
T
Also, if multicast is set, one packet will be sent, but the number of connections
will be consumed.
Example
Node 3 sends one multicast packet to node 1 and node 2. At that time, node 3
opens one connection as the target with node 1 and one connection as the
target with node 2 for a total of two connections. Caution is required because
the number of connections consumed is the same as for unicast connections
even when multicast connections are set.
O: Originator
T: Target
Node 1
O
Multicast
T
Multicast
Node 2
Node 3
O
T
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
10-1-3 Network Transmission Delay Time
In an EtherNet/IP network, the tag data link packets are sent once each
packet interval (RPI), but several delays occur between the transmission of
packets from each node and the arrival of the packets at the destination
nodes. The following diagram shows the 4 major delay sources.
Total network transmission delay = (1) Send processing delay + (2) Ca-
ble delays + (3) Switching hub delay
+ (4) Receive processing delay
EtherNet/IP
Unit
EtherNet/IP
Unit
(1) Send
processing
delay
(4) Receive
processing
delay
Data
Switching hub
(2) Cable delay (3) Switching hub delay
(2) Cable delay
The lengths of these delays depend on many factors, such as the tag data link
connection settings (number of connections and data sizes), number of
nodes, the switching hub being used, and cable lengths. Each delay is
described in detail below.
1. Send Processing
Delay
The send processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port when data packets are sent once each packet
interval. This delay varies with the RPI error shown in the following graph, so
the send processing time is the maximum value for each RPI.
Packet interval (RPI)
0.5 to 1,000 ms
RPI error (±) (%)
15 − (RPI (ms) ÷ 100)
1,000 ms to 10,000 ms
5% of the RPI
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
1,000 2,000 3,000
4,000 5,000 6,000
RPI [ms]
7,000 8,000 9,000 10,000
2. Cable Delay
The cable delay is the time required for the data signal to pass through the
cable and reach the destination. When an STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable of
category 5, 5e, or higher is being used, the maximum cable delay is 545 ns/
100 m. The cable delay represents a very small percentage of the total tag
data link delay.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
3. Switching Hub
Delay
The switching hub delay is the delay time between the arrival of the packet at
the switching hub and the output of the packet from the hub’s transmission
port. This delay depends on the total number of connections used for recep-
tion and data sizes used in the tag data links. In addition, this delay depends
on the switching hub maker and model, but the delay can be approximated
with the following table. (For a precise estimate, contact the switching hub
manufacturer.)
The following values are the delays when cascade connections are not being
used. If cascade connections are used, more nodes can be connected, but
the switching hub delays will increase.
Words per connection
Number of connections used for reception
16
0.2 ms
0.7 ms
1.2 ms
1.7 ms
2.0 ms
32
0.3 ms
1.3 ms
2.3 ms
3.3 ms
4.0 ms
64
0.5 ms
2.5 ms
4.6 ms
6.6 ms
7.9 ms
128
1.0 ms
5.0 ms
9.1 ms
13.2 ms
15.7 ms
256
1.9 ms
2 words
200 words
400 words
600 words
722 words
10.0 ms
18.2 ms
26.4 ms
31.4 ms
4. Receive Processing
Delay
The receive processing delay is the delay that occurs within the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port from the reception of the data packet at the
Unit until the completion of reception processing in the Unit. This delay
depends on the size of the connections used in the tag data links and the
number of connections. In practice, the delay depends on the number of con-
nections used in tag data links with less than 200 words. If the number of con-
nections is “n”, the maximum delay can be calculated with the following
equation.
Maximum reception processing delay = 1 + (n × 0.043) ms
The size of the connections may cause a delay when the data sizes are
smaller and a large number of packets may be received in a fixed interval,
because the data may wait for receive processing.
Example Calculation
of the Tag Data Link
Delay
This example shows how to calculate the tag data link delay when the follow-
ing tag data link connection settings have been made.
In this case, 17 EtherNet/IP Units or built-in EtherNet/IP ports are being used,
and one Unit is receiving 200 words of data from each of the other Units at a
packet interval (RPI) of 5 ms. Thus, 16 tag data link connections are used.
The length of the cables between the Units is 50 m for all connections.
Send processing delay = 5 ms × (15 − 5/100)% = 0.7475 ms
Cable delay = 545 ns × 50 m/100 = 272.5 ns
Switching hub delay = 0.7 ms
Receive processing delay = 1 + (16 × 0.043) ms = 1.688 ms
Tag data link delay = 0.7475 ms + 0.0002725 ms + 0.7 ms + 1.688 ms
≈ 3.14 ms
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Section 10-1
PLC #1
PLC #2
PLC #3
PLC #17
5 ms
5 ms
#2
#3
200 words
200 words
200 words
× 16
5 ms
#17
200 words
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
10-2 Adjusting the Communications Load
In an Ethernet network using a switching hub, the network bandwidth is not
shared by all of the nodes; independent transmission paths are established
between individual nodes through the switching hub.
A dedicated communications buffer is established in the switching hub for
communications between the nodes and full-duplex communications (simulta-
neous transmission and reception) are performed asynchronously with other
transmission paths. The communications load in other transmission paths
does not affect communications, so packet collisions do not occur and stable,
high-speed communications can be performed.
The switching hub functions shown in the following table determine the perfor-
mance of tag data links.
Item
Description
Buffer capacity
This is the amount of data that can be buffered when packets
accumulate at the switching hub.
Multicast filtering
QoS function
This function transfers multicast packets to specific nodes
only.
This function performs priority control on packet transfers.
The following table shows the tag data link settings that can be made for indi-
vidual EtherNet/IP Units as well as the setting ranges.
Item
Contents
Settings
Network bandwidth
Allowed tag data link
communications band- link packets that can be pro-
Physical Ethernet baud rate
Maximum number of tag data
100 Mbps or 10 Mbps
CJ2M: 3,000 pps max.
Other CPU Units: 6,000
width
cessed in 1 second (pps: pack- pps max.
ets per second)
Connection resources
Number of connections that can CJ2M: 32 max.
be established
Other CPU Units:
256 max.
Packet interval
(RPI: Requested Packet
Interval)
Refresh cycle for tag data
CJ2M: 1 to 1,000 ms
Other CPU Units:
0.5 to 10,000 ms
(in 0.5 ms units)
When the tag data link settings exceed the capabilities of the switching hub
being used, increase the RPI value. Particularly when using a switching hub
that does not support multicast filtering, the settings must be made consider-
ing that multicast packets will be sent even to nodes without connection set-
tings.
In addition, if the required tag data link performance cannot be achieved with
the switching hub’s capabilities, reevaluate the overall network configuration
and correct it by taking steps such as selecting a different switching hub or
splitting the network.
The following sections show how to check the device bandwidth being used
by the tag data links in the designed network, and how to set the appropriate
values.
Note
If the Network Configurator is used to set the connection type in the connec-
tion settings to a multicast connection, multicast packets will be used. If the
connection type is set to a point-to-point connection, multicast packets will not
be used.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
10-2-1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links
The Network Configurator can display the bandwidth actually used for tag
data links at each EtherNet/IP Unit, based on the connections set in the net-
work configuration.
The device bandwidth used by tag data links can be checked by clicking the
Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Net-
work Configuration Window.
Item
Comment
Description
The IP address of the device.
#
A description of the device. The comment is displayed below
the device icon. The model number of the device is displayed
by default.
Usage of Capacity The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth
used for tag data links for the device is displayed.
Bandwidth used ÷ Allowable tag data link bandwidth
The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering
is used.
The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering
is not used.
Mbit/s
The bandwidth used for communications by the device of the
100-Mbps network bandwidth is shown.
The values outside parentheses are for when multicast filtering
is used.
The values inside parentheses are for when multicast filtering
is not used.
Usage of IP Multi-
cast Addresses
The number of multicast IP addresses actually used for com-
munications by the device is shown.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Item
Total usage of IP
Description
The number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net-
multicast addresses work is shown. This value is used to estimate the number of
multicast filters for switching.
Network Total of
Max. Mbit/s
The total network bandwidth used for tag data link communica-
tions in the entire network is shown. Tag data links will not
operate normally if 100 Mbps is exceeded for the network
bandwidth.
Checking the Usage of
Capacity and Network
Bandwidth for Tag Data
Links
The percentage of the allowable communications bandwidth for tag data links
for each EtherNet/IP Unit is displayed as the Usage of Capacity and the band-
width used for tag data link communications in the entire network is displayed
as the Mbit/s.
The usage of capacity and used network bandwidth that are displayed in
parentheses are for a switching hub that does not use multicast filtering. In
this case, multicast packets will be sent to even the nodes without connection
settings, so the displayed values will include these packets as well.
These values can be adjusted according to instructions in 10-2-4 Changing
the RPI.
Checking the Total
Number of Multicast IP
Addresses in the Network
When using a switching hub that provides multicast filtering, there must be
enough multicast filters for the network being used. The number of multicast
IP address used in the entire network that is displayed by the Network Config-
urator as the Network Total of Max. Mbit/s is based on connection settings.
Make sure that the number of multicast IP addresses used in the entire net-
work does not exceed the number of multicast filters supported by the switch-
ing hub. If necessary, change to a switching hub with enough multicast filters,
parentheses). Adjust these values according to instructions in 10-2-4 Chang-
ing the RPI.
Checking the Total
Maximum Network
Bandwidth
The Network Configurator displays the total maximum bandwidth that can be
used for the entire network as the Network Total of Max. Mbit/s. This value
indicates the maximum bandwidth that can be used on the transmission paths
when switching hubs are cascaded. If the value exceeds the bandwidth of a
cascade connection in the actual network, the maximum bandwidth for part of
the communications path may be exceeded, depending on how the network is
wired.
If this occurs, either calculate the bandwidth usage for each communications
path and be sure that the maximum bandwidth is not exceeded for any cas-
the total maximum network bandwidth is not exceeded. Adjust the bandwidth
according to instructions in 10-2-4 Changing the RPI.
10-2-2 Tag Data Link Bandwidth Usage and RPI
The usage of capacity can be adjusted using the RPI setting. If the RPI is
made shorter, the usage of capacity will increase. If the RPI is made longer,
the usage of capacity will decrease.
The RPI can be set in any one of the following ways.
• Setting the same interval for all connections
• Setting a particular device’s connection
• Setting a particular connection
When the same RPI is set for all connections, the usage of capacity will basi-
cally increase proportionally as the RPI is made shorter.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Example:
If the RPI is set to 50 ms for all connections and the usage of capacity is
40%, the usage of capacity may increase to 80% when the RPI is reduced
to 25 ms for all connections.
Note
Performing message communications or other network operations from the
Network Configurator (such as monitoring or other operations that place a
load on the network) or from the user application when the tag data link band-
width usage of capacity is between 80% and 100% can create an excessive
load on the network and result in timeouts. If timeouts occur, increase one or
all of the RPI settings or reduce the usage of capacity.
10-2-3 Adjusting Device Bandwidth Usage
Switching Hubs without
Multicast Filtering (100-
Mbps Hubs)
100 Mbps for each node? (This appears as “Mbit/s” in the dialog box
shown on page 269.)
→ If any node exceeds 100 Mbps, change the connections settings, such
as the RPI.
• Is the usage of capacity without multicast filtering under 100% for each
node? (This appears as “Usage of Capacity” in the dialog box shown on
page 269.)
→ If any node exceeds 100%, change the connections settings, such as
the RPI.
• Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps? (This appears as
“Network Total of Max. Mbit/s” in the dialog box shown on page 269.)
→ If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps, the bandwidth of part
of the transmission path (e.g., a switching hub or media converter) had
been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired (e.g., switch
hub or cascade connection), causing a tag data link to operate abnor-
mally. Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con-
nections. If the bandwidth is exceeded, rewire the network or increase the
bandwidth between switching hubs (e.g., to 1 Gbps). If these countermea-
sures are not possible, change the connection settings, e.g., the RPI set-
tings, and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total
network bandwidth is not exceeded.
Switching Hubs with
Multicast Filtering (100-
Mbps Hubs)
• Is the network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps for each node?
→ If any node exceeds 100 Mbps, change the connections settings, such
as the RPI.
• Is the usage of capacity under 100% for each node?
→ If any node exceeds 100%, change the connections settings, such as
the RPI.
• Is the total network bandwidth usage under 100 Mbps? (This appears as
“Network Total of Max. Mbit/s” in the dialog box shown on page 269.)
→ If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps, the bandwidth of part
of the transmission path (e.g., a switching hub or media converter) had
been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired (e.g., switch
hub or cascade connection), causing a tag data link to operate abnor-
mally. Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con-
nections. If the bandwidth is exceeded, rewire the network or increase the
bandwidth between switching hubs (e.g., to 1 Gbps). If these countermea-
sures are not possible, change the connection settings, e.g., the RPI set-
tings, and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total
network bandwidth is not exceeded.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
• Is the network bandwidth usage without multicast filtering under 100
under 100% for each node? (These appear as “Mbit/s” and “Usage of
Capacity” in the dialog box shown on page 269.)
→ If the total bandwidth usage exceeds 100 Mbps, the bandwidth of part
of the transmission path (e.g., a switching hub or media converter) had
been exceeded as the result of how the network was wired (e.g., switch
hub or cascade connection), causing a tag data link to operate abnor-
mally. Check the bandwidth of the transmission path for all cascade con-
nections. If the bandwidth is exceeded, rewire the network or increase the
bandwidth between switching hubs (e.g., to 1 Gbps). If these countermea-
sures are not possible, change the connection settings, e.g., the RPI set-
tings, and adjust the bandwidth for all cascade connections until the total
network bandwidth is not exceeded.
10-2-4 Changing the RPI
the tag data link's allowable bandwidth by following the procedures in 10-2-1
Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links. The usage of capacity without
multicast filtering can be adjusted against the tag data link's allowable band-
width by changing the packet interval (RPI). If the required communications
performance cannot be achieved by changing the settings, reevaluate the net-
work starting with the network configuration.
1,2,3...
1. Make the required settings in the Network Configurator’s Network Config-
uration Window.
2. Click the Detail Button in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bot-
tom of the Network Configuration Window.
The Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box will be displayed.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
The Usage of Capacity column will show the percentage of the allowed tag
data link bandwidth being used, and the Mbit/s column will show the net-
work bandwidth being used.
3. The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the associated devic-
es’ RPI settings.
The RPI settings can be changed with the following three methods.
Method 1: Same Packet Interval Set for all Connections
The usage of capacity can be adjusted by changing the RPI for all of the
connections at the same time.
a. Click the Set Packet Interval (RPI) Button at the bottom of the Usage
of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box.
b. The Set Packet Interval (RPI) Dialog Box will be displayed. Input a new
RPI value, and click the OK Button.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Method 2: Changing a Particular Device’s RPI Setting
The usage of capacity can be adjusted for only a particular device by
changing the packet intervals (RPI) for all of the device’s connections to-
gether. In this case, the usage of capacity will also change for the devices
that are the target devices of the connection which was adjusted.
a. Click the Set Packet Interval (RPI) Button at the bottom of the Usage
of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box.
b. The Set Packet Interval (RPI) Dialog Box will be displayed. In the Tar-
get Device Area, deselect the target devices that are not being adjust-
ed by removing the check marks.
c. Input a new RPI value, and click the OK Button.
Method 3: Changing a Particular Connection’s RPI Setting
The usage of capacity can be adjusted by individually changing the packet
intervals (RPI) setting for a particular connection. In this case, the usage
of capacity will also change for the device that is the target device of the
connection which was adjusted.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
a. Click the Close Button at the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth
Dialog Box.
b. Double-click the device that is set as the originator of the desired con-
nection. The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
c. In the Register Device List, select the connection for which you want
to change the RPI, and click the Edit Button.
d. The device’s Edit Connections Dialog Box will be displayed. Input a
new RPI value, and click the OK Button.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
setting described above has been performed, reconsider the network con-
figuration considering the following points. Refer to 10-2-3 Adjusting De-
vice Bandwidth Usage.
• Reduce the number of nodes and number of connections.
• Split the network.
5. Check the bandwidth usage again.
If the connection settings have been changed, click the Detail Button in the
Usage of Device Bandwidth Area at the bottom of the Network Configura-
tion Window and check bandwidth usage according to the instructions in
10-2-1 Checking Bandwidth Usage for Tag Data Links. It is particularly im-
portant to check the usage of capacity when an individual connection’s RPI
setting was changed without using the Set Packet Interval (RPI) Button at
the bottom of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box.
6. Run user tests to verify that there are no problems with the new settings.
10-2-5 RPI Setting Examples
The following examples explain how to calculate the packet intervals (RPI) in
the following network configuration.
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Example Conditions
Connections
In this example, there are 10 CS1W-EIP21 Units and 10 CJ1W-EIP21 Units
for a total of 20 devices connected in the network. Each device has one 100-
word tag for transmission and nineteen 100-word tags for reception, so that
the Units exchange data mutually.
By default, the packet intervals (RPI) are set to 10 ms for all of the connec-
tions. The devices’ IP addresses range from 192.168.250.1 to
192.168.250.20.
192.168. 250.1
192.168.250.2
192.168. 250.3
192.168.250.20
IP address:
CS1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1W-EIP21
100 words
Transmit
100 words
100 words
Transmit
Tag data link area with
100 words × 20 Units
Transmit
100 words
Transmit
10 CS1W-EIP21 Units + 10 CJ1W-EIP21 Units = 20 Units total
The RPI is 10 ms (ethernet default) for all connections.
Checking the Device
Bandwidth Usage
When the Detail Button is clicked in the Usage of Device Bandwidth Area, it is
apparent that the percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being
used by each device’s tag data link (Usage of Capacity) is 39.67%, as shown
in the following dialog box.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Changing the
Settings
Method 1: Same Packet Interval Setting for All Connections
The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used (Usage of
Capacity) was 39.67% with the RPI set to 10.0 ms for all of the connections,
so the RPI will be set to 5.0 ms, with a target of 80% or less of the allowable
bandwidth.
Click the Set Packet Interval (RPI) Button at the bottom of the Usage of
Device Bandwidth Dialog Box. The Set Packet Interval (RPI) Dialog Box will
be displayed. Input 5.0 ms as the new RPI value, and click the OK Button.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
If the packet interval for all connections has been set to the same setting, the
dialog box will show that the usage of capacity for the tag data link's allowable
communications bandwidth is 73.00% and the fastest set value is 5.0 ms.
Method 2: Changing the Packet Interval (RPI) of Only Specific Devices
In this example, we want faster tag data links for devices 192.168.250.1 and
192.168.250.10 only. Click the Set Packet Interval (RPI) Button at the bottom
of the Usage of Device Bandwidth Dialog Box to display the Set Packet Inter-
val (RPI) Dialog Box.
In the Target Device Area, deselect all devices other than 192.168.250.1 and
192.168.250.10 by removing the corresponding check marks. Input 5.0 ms as
the new RPI value, and click the OK Button.
The percentage of the allowed tag data link bandwidth being used (Usage of
Capacity) increases to 74.67% for devices 192.168.250.1 and
192.168.250.10, which indicates that the RPI is set to a higher speed for
these devices’ connections.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
The Usage of Capacity values also indicate that the Usage of Capacity has
increased (from 39.67% to 43.00%) for all of the other devices, which connect
with devices 192.168.250.1 and 192.168.250.10.
In this case, if there is no multicast filter, the value becomes 106.33%. If there
is no multicast filter for a switching hub, communications errors may occur
depending on the communications load of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Eth-
erNet/IP Unit port.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
Method 3: Changing the Packet Interval (RPI) of Only Specific
Connections
In this example, we want a faster tag data links for just a particular connection
of device 192.168.250.1.
Double-click device 192.168.250.1 in the Network Configuration Window.
Information about the connection with device 192.168.250.20 is registered in
the Register Device List. Double-click this connection to edit the settings.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Communications Load
Section 10-2
In the Edit Connection Dialog Box, input 1.0 ms as the new RPI value, and
click the OK Button. The tag data link bandwidth being used by device
192.168.250.1 (Usage of Capacity) increases to 54.67%, which indicates that
a RPI is set to a higher speed for this device.
In this case, the tag data link bandwidth being used by device 192.168.250.20
(Usage of Capacity) also increases (from 39.67% to 56.33%).
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
10-3 I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Note
This section describes the data processing time for an EtherNet/IP Unit or a
ent. For details, refer to 10-4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in
EtherNet/IP Ports.
10-3-1 Timing of Data Transmissions
The following diagram shows the timing of tag data link transmissions
between the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port and the CPU Unit.
The data transmission is processed during the I/O refresh period. Send data
is processed with transmission at regular intervals, and received data is pro-
cessed together with the send data when new data has been received from
other nodes. The following diagram shows the timing of data transmissions.
Data received
EtherNet/IP
Unit processing
EtherNet/IP Unit data
processing time
(Refer to 10-3-2.)
Basic
pro-
cesses
Basic
pro-
cesses
Peripheral
servicing
Program
execution
CPU Unit processing
I/O refreshing
Data exchange processing
CPU Unit’s cycle time
If there is an interrupt for data transmission processing, the CPU Unit’s cycle
time is extended by that interrupt processing time. Refer to 10-3-2 EtherNet/IP
Unit or CJ2H Built-in Port Data Processing Time for details.
10-3-2 EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H Built-in Port Data Processing Time
The following formula approximates the time required for the EtherNet/IP Unit
or CJ2H built-in port to process data transmissions with the CPU Unit (i.e., the
data processing time).
Approximation of the data processing time for an
EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H Built-in Port
(0.0008 × Number of data transmission words) + 1.0 ms
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
The maximum number of tag data link words that can be transferred by one
EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port is 184,832 words. However, if the num-
ber of tag data link words exceeds the number of words that can be
exchanged with the CPU Unit at one time, the data will be divided and trans-
ferred in multiple data exchanges. The following table shows the number of
words that each CPU Unit can exchange at one time.
CPU Unit
Number of words per data transmission
CS/CJ Series
Output/Send: About 7,405 words max. (If there are more words,
the data will be divided.)
Input/Receive: About 7,405 words max. (If there are more words,
the data will be divided.)
Note The total amount of send data and receive data that can be
exchanged at one time is about 14,810 words maximum.
SYSMAC CJ2
Series
Output/send: About 6,432 words max. (If there are more words, the
data will be separated into multiple transmissions.)
Input/receive: About 6,432 words max. (If there are more words,
the data will be separated into multiple transmissions.)
Note The total amount of send data and receive data that can be
transferred at one time is about 12,864 words maximum.
The number of data exchanges may double as given in the following table
according to the relation with the CPU Unit’s cycle time and the data process-
ing time of the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port.
Condition
CPU Unit’s cycle time
> EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port
data processing time
CPU Unit’s cycle time
≤ EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port
data processing time
Number of data transmissions
Number of data transmissions
based on the data size
Number of data transmissions × 2
based on the data size
Note
(1) With CS/CJ-series PLCs, consecutive data area words specified in the
tag set will be transferred together if possible. Up to 19 send data blocks
can be processed in one data transmission; up to 20 receive data blocks
can be processed in one data transmission. If there are more blocks, the
data will be divided and transferred in separate data transmissions.
(2) The preceding data processing time approximation is the standard formu-
la when a higher priority processing event does not occur in peripheral
servicing. For example, if an instruction such as SEND, RECV, or FAL is
executed, the instruction’s processing will have higher priority, so the data
processing time may be longer.
10-3-3 Effect on the CPU Unit’s Cycle Time
The CPU Unit’s cycle time is affected when the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-
in port refreshes tag data and status data with the CPU Unit. This effect
depends on the size of the tag data links, and can be approximated with the
values in the following table. When there are multiple EtherNet/IP Units or
CJ2H built-in ports, the effect is cumulative.
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
CPU Unit
CJ2H
Effect of EtherNet/IP Unit or
CJ2H built-in port only
Total effect when tag data links are being used
CPU Rack: 0.1 ms
CPU Rack: Value from left column + 0.1 ms + No. of words trans-
ferred × 0.33 µs (See note 2.)
Expansion Rack: 0.13 ms
Expansion Rack: Value from left column + 0.1 ms + No. of words
transferred × 0.45 µs
CJ2M
CPU Rack: 0.14 ms
CPU Rack: Value from left column + 0.02 ms + No. of words trans-
ferred × 0.78 µs
Expansion Rack: 0.16 ms
Expansion Rack: Value from left column + 0.02 ms + No. of words
transferred × 0.92 µs
CJ1
0.25 ms
0.17 ms
0.1 ms
0.2 ms
0.1 ms
0.25 ms + 1.5 ms + (Number of words × 1 µs)
0.17 ms + 0.1 ms + (Number of words × 0.7 µs)
0.1 ms + 0.1 ms + (Number of words × 0.7 µs)
0.2 ms + 1.5 ms + (Number of words × 1 µs)
0.1 ms + 0.1 ms + (Number of words × 0.7 µs)
CJ1M
CJ1-H
CS1
CS1-H
Long-distance 0.2 ms × Coefficient 2
Rack
(0.2 ms × Coefficient 2) + 1.5 ms + (Number of words × 1 µs ×
Coefficient 3)
Note
(1) When one of the listed CPU Bus Units is mounted in a CS-series Long-
distance Rack, the I/O refreshing time is extended by the distance to the
Rack in which the Unit is mounted, regardless of the model of the CPU
Unit. The following graph shows the coefficients (2 and 3) required to cal-
culate this effect.
Coefficient
Distance to Long-distance Rack (m)
(2) The additional time for CJ2H CPU Units with unit version 1.1 or later will
be as follows if high-speed interrupts are enabled.
0.1 ms + Number of words transferred × 0.87 µs
10-3-4 Tag Data Link I/O Response Time Calculation Example
When using the tag data link functions of the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in
port, there is a time lag between the point when the data link area’s data
changes due to an input at a node and the point when the change is output at
another node’s data link area. This time lag is called the tag data link
I/O response time.
This example shows how to calculate the minimum and maximum I/O
response times in the following configuration for connection 1 opened
between node 1 and node 2.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
EtherNet/IP
PLC#1
PLC#2
PLC#3
Node 3
Node 2
Node 1
Input switch (external input device)
Output relay (external output device)
Output
Input
W000.01
W000.01
Tag Data Link Table
Connection 1
PLC#3
PLC#2
PLC#1
RPI = 10 ms
W000
W000
722 words x 16 connections
Total: 11,552 words
RPI = 10 ms
Outputs
Inputs
Inputs
RPI = 100 ms
256 words x 16 connections
Total: 4,096 words
Outputs
The following table gives the items required to find the I/O response time and
values used in calculations for this system configuration.
Item
Value used in calculation example
PLC#1
PLC#2
External I/O device delay time
Input device delay:
1.5 ms
Output device delay:
2.0 ms
Cable length
50 m
CPU Unit model
RPI
CJ2H CPU Unit
10 msec
0
CJ2H CPU Unit
---
Number of receive connections
CPU Unit cycle time
32
10 msec
15 msec
None
Total number tag
data link words
Number of send 11,552
words
Number of
None
15,648
receive words
Maximum Tag Data Link I/O Response Time
You can find the maximum I/O response time from the total of (1) to (6) in the
following figure.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
: I/O processing
: Data exchange
Tag data link I/O response time
(4) Network transmission delay time
(2) Send data
(1) Input ON
(6) Output ON
response time
processing
time
response
time
(5) Receive data
processing time
(3) RPI
Input
Calcu-
lation
PLC #1 processing
Send data processing time
Cycle time x 2
Tag data link refresh cycle
Receive data processing time
Calcu-
lation
PLC #2 processing
Cycle time x 4
Output
(1) Node 1 (PLC #1) Input ON Response Time
This is the delay time for the external input device from when the input occurs
until the switch actually turns ON and the time until the input data is stored in
the memory area of the CPU Unit for PLC #1. In this system, the input switch
delay time is 1.5 ms. Also, one CPU cycle time is required until the data is
stored in the memory area of the CPU Unit. Therefore, the input ON response
time is 1.5 ms + 10 ms, or 11.5 ms.
(2) Node 1 (PLC #1) Send Data Processing Time
This is the time until memory data in the CPU Unit is transferred to the Ether-
Net/IP Unit. If the amount of data that can be processed in one data transmis-
sion with the CPU Unit is exceeded, data transmission will be performed over
multiple cycles of the CPU Unit, and so time is calculated for the number of
transmissions times the CPU Unit cycle times. The following table gives the
send data processing times and breakdown for node 1 (PLC #1) in this sys-
tem configuration. Refer to 10-3-2 EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H Built-in Port Data
Processing Time for details on the calculation formula for each item.
Item
Calculation formula
Time
A CPU Unit cycle time
10 m sec
for PLC #1
B Number of transmis- Number of data transmission words (11,552
2
sions based on the data words) ÷ 6,432 words (using a CJ2 CPU
size
C EtherNet/IP Unit data 0.0008 × 6,432 + 1.0 (Maximum number of 6.15 m sec
processing time transmission words per cycle)
Unit)
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
Item
Calculation formula
Time
D Number of data trans- A 10 m sec > C 6.15 m sec
2
missions
Total:
To meet the conditions, the number of trans-
missions is the same as B.
CPU Unit cycle time of A PLC #1 × D Num- 20 m sec
ber of data transmissions
(2) Send data process-
ing time
(3) Packet Interval (RPI)
This is the communications refresh cycle set for each connection using the
Network Configurator. In this system, it is the refresh cycle for connection 1
(10 ms), which includes W000.01.
(4) Network Transmission Delay Time
switching hub delay, and cable delay. Refer to 10-1-3 Network Transmission
Delay Time for details on the calculation formula for network delay time. In this
system, it is 5.2 ms.
Delay item
A Send processing delay
B Cable delay
Calculation formula
10 m sec × (15-10 msec/100)%
545 nsec + 50 m/100
Max. delay time
1.49 msec
272.5 nsec
2.7 msec
C Switching hub delay
2 msec + Approx. 0.7 msec
1 + (0 connection × 0.043)
D Receive processing
1.0 msec
delay
Total:
A + B + C + D
5.2 msec
(4) Network Transmission
Delay Time
(5) Node 2 (PLC #2) Receive Data Processing Time
This is the time to transfer the data received by the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H
built-in port to the memory area in the CPU Unit. Receive data is transferred
in the order that it is received, but if the amount of data that can be processed
in one transmission is exceeded, multiple cycles are required to transfer the
data. Also, data transmission is performed only once per CPU Unit cycle.
Therefore, if data transfer has ended in the cycle in which data is received, the
start of transmission for received data will be delayed by one CPU Unit cycle
time.
In this system configuration, data transfer is performed a maximum of three
times based on the data size of node 2 (PLC #2) to transfer received data for
node 1 (PLC #1) and node address 3 (PLC #3). Also, the cycle time of PLC #2
is 15 ms, the effect on the CPU Unit cycle time is 2.3 ms, and the data pro-
cessing time for the EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2H built-in port is 6.15 ms. The
number of data transmissions is thus calculated as 3. In addition, the number
of data transmissions is calculated as a maximum of 4 (3 + 1) because it is
necessary to consider a delay of one CPU Unit cycle time in transferring
received data.
Item
Calculation formula
Time
15 msec
3
A CPU Unit cycle time
---
B Number of transmis-
sions based on the data
size
Number of data transmission words (15,648
words) ÷ 6,432 words (using a CJ2 CPU
Unit)
C EtherNet/IP Unit data
processing time
0.0008 × 6,432 + 1.0 (Maximum number of 6.15 msec
transmission words per cycle)
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
Item
Calculation formula
Time
D Number of data trans- A 10 m sec > C 6.15 m sec
4
missions
Total:
To meet the condition to enable processing
in one data transmission, the number of
transmissions is the same as B plus 1.
(Delay of one CPU Unit cycle time)
A Cycle time × D Number of data trans-
60 msec
(5) Receive data process- missions
ing time
(6) Output ON response time
This is the delay time for the external output device from when the output bit
turns ON in the memory of the CPU Unit until the output is actually performed.
In this system configuration, the delay time for an output relay is 2.0 ms. Also,
one CPU cycle time is required until the data is stored in the memory area of
the CPU Unit.
Item
A CPU Unit cycle time of PLC #2
B Output relay delay time
Time
15 msec
2.0 msec
Total:
17.0 msec
(6) Node 2 (PLC #2) output ON response time
The maximum tag data link I/O response time for this system configuration
found from the total of (1) to (6) is 124 ms.
(1) Node 1 (PLC #1) input ON response time
(2) Node 1 (PLC #1) send data processing time
(3) Packet Interval (RPI)
11.5 msec
20 msec
10 msec
5.5 msec
60 msec
17 msec
124 msec
(4) Network Transmission Delay Time
(5) Node 2 (PLC #2) receive data processing time
(6) Output ON response time
Maximum I/O response performance (total of (1) to (6))
Note
The I/O response time may be longer due to noise, or other events.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I/O Response Time in Tag Data Links
Section 10-3
Minimum Tag Data Link I/O Response Time
: I/O processing
: Data exchange
Tag data link I/O response time
(2) Network transmission delay time
(1) Input ON
response
time
(3) Output ON
response time
Input
Calcu-
lation
PLC #1 processing
Tag data link refresh cycle
Calcu-
lation
PLC #2 processing
Output
The minimum tag data link I/O response time, which occurs when there are no
processing delays, is calculated as follows.
(1) Node 1
Input switch delay time
1.5 ms
(PLC #1) input ON response time
CPU Unit cycle time of PLC #1 10.0 ms
(2) Transmission time (722 send data words)
0.121 msec
(3) Node 2
CPU Unit cycle time of PLC #2 15.0 ms
(PLC #1) output ON response time
Output relay delay time
2.0 ms
Total (tag data link I/O response time)
28.6 ms
When the baud rate is 100 Mbps, the transmission time can be calculated with
the following equation. If a network delay does not occur, just this transmis-
sion time is added.
Transmission time =
(Number of send data words × 2 + 74) × 8 × 0.00001 ms
Note
The I/O response time may be longer due to noise, or other events.
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Section 10-4
10-4 Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP
Ports
10-4-1 Overview
The built-in EtherNet/IP port on a CJ2M CPU Unit (CJ2M-CPU3@) supports
tag data links for up to 32 connections, with a data size of 20 words per con-
nection. These specifications are different from those of CJ2H built-in ports
and EtherNet/IP Units. The maximum number of words that can be transmit-
ted for tag data links is 640 words. This 640 words is the amount of data that
is processed for one data transmissions between the CPU Unit and the CJ2M
built-in port.
The tag data link specifications of CJ2M built-in ports are provided in the fol-
lowing table. If these specifications are insufficient for the required system
configuration, use a CJ2H built-in port on a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP CPU Unit or a
CJ1W-EIP21 EtherNet/IP Unit.
Tag Data Link Specifications for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
CJ2M built-in port
(CJ2M-CPU3@)
Reference: CJ2H built-in port
(CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP)
Number of connections
Packet interval (RPI)
32
256
1 to 10,000 ms (in 0.5-ms units)
3,000 pps
0.5 to 10,000 ms (in 0.5-ms units)
6,000 pps
Allowed communications
bandwidth per Unit (PPS)
Number of tags that can be
registered
32
256
Tag types
CIO Area, DM Area, EM Area, Holding Area, Work Area, and network symbols
256
8 (7 tags when the tag set contains the PLC status)
Number of registrable tag sets 32
Number of tags per connec-
tion
Maximum size of 1 tag set
20 words
722 words
(The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag (The PLC status uses 1 word when the tag
set contains the PLC status.)
set contains the PLC status.)
Maximum data size per con-
nection
20 words
722 words
Maximum link data size per
node
640 words
184,832 words
Maximum number of tags that Output/Transmission
can be refreshed per CPU Unit (CPU → EtherNet/IP): 32
cycle
Output/Transmission
(CPU → EtherNet/IP): 256
Input/Reception (EtherNet/IP → CPU): 32 Input/Reception (EtherNet/IP → CPU): 256
Data that can be refreshed per Output/Transmission (CPU → EtherNet/IP): Output/Transmission (CPU → EtherNet/IP):
CPU Unit cycle
640 words
6,432 words
Input/Reception (EtherNet/IP → CPU):
640 words
Input/Reception (EtherNet/IP → CPU):
6,432 words
Note The total for output/transmission and Note The total for output/transmission and
input/reception is 640 words. input/reception is 12,864 words.
Tag Data Link System
Configuration
Example
This example configuration is based on the maximum specifications for CJ2M
built-in ports where all nodes send and receive data to the other nodes. In this
case, the maximum send area for each node in a 17-node configuration is 20
words.
For example, node 1 establishes 16 send connections and 16 receive connec-
tions to the other 16 nodes, for a total of 32 connections. The maximum data
size per connection is 20 words, so the send area in node 1 is 20 words and
the receive areas in node 1 are each 20 words.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Section 10-4
If the same RPI is set for all connections, 12 ms is the lowest setting that can
be used.
■ Calculation Example
(1,000 ÷ 12 [ms] (RPI) + 1,000 ÷ 100 [ms] (heartbeat transmission period)) ×
32 (connections) = 2,987 pps < 3,000 pps
Send connections = 16
(20 words × 16 = 320 words)
*All nodes use CJ2M built-in ports.
Node 17
Node 3
Node 2
Node 16
Node 1
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Send 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Send 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Send 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Send 20 words
Receive 20 words
Send 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive 20 words
Receive connections = 16
(20 words × 16 = 320 words)
10-4-2 Tag Data Link I/O Response Time
With tag data links, if the data in the data link area for a node changes due to
an input to that node, a certain amount of time is required for the data in data
link area at another node to be updated and output.
The I/O response time for tag data links can be calculated for a CJ2M built-in
port in the same was as it can for a CJ2H built-in port (refer to 10-2-4 Chang-
ing the RPI). Here, formulas to calculate guideline I/O response times are pro-
vided. (Tag data link delays are ignored because the data link size handled by
the built-in CJ2M port is small.)
Maximum I/O Response Time
Input ON delay + Cycle time of sending PLC × 2 + RPI + Cycle time of receiv-
ing PLC × 2 + Output ON delay
Minimum I/O Response Time
Input ON delay + Cycle time of sending PLC + Cycle time of receiving PLC +
Output ON delay
PLC #2
Node 2
PLC #1
Node 1
Connection
RPI: 12 ms
20
words
20
words
Cycle time: 10 ms
Cycle time: 5 ms
Output ON response
time: 2.0 ms
Input ON response time:
1.5 ms
All connections
EtherNet/IP
Input
Output
Data link
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tag Data Link Performance for CJ2M Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Section 10-4
For example, the maximum and minimum I/O response times would be as fol-
lows for the above system.
Maximum response time:
1.5 ms + 5 ms × 2 + 12 ms + 10 ms × 2 + 2.0 ms = 45.5 ms
Minimum response time:
1.5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms + 2.0 ms = 18.5 ms
Note
If the message service is used at the same time on the CJ2M built-in port, the
tag data link I/O response time will change.
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
10-5 Message Service Transmission Delay
This section explains the maximum transmission delay that can occur
between the execution of a SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) instruc-
tion in the ladder program until completion of the instruction. This delay does
not include the time required for the tag data link or the execution time of the
ladder program itself.
10-5-1 Maximum Transmission Delays (Excluding Delays in the Network)
Use the following equation to calculate the maximum transmission delay that
can occur between the execution of a SEND(090) or RECV(098) instruction in
the ladder program until completion of the instruction.
SEND(090) Instruction
Execution of SEND(090)
in user program
CPU Bus Unit service cycle
(Local node)
CPU Bus Unit service processing time
(Local node)
Send processing
Transmission delay
Receive processing
CPU Bus Unit service cycle
(Remote node)
CPU Bus Unit service
processing time (Remote node)
CPU data set
processing
Maximum transmission delay
Maximum transmission delay =
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (local node)
+ Send processing
+ Transmission delay
+ Receive processing
+ CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote node)
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle (Local Node)
The following table shows the service cycle, which depends on the CPU Unit’s
CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
One CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with asyn- 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. for
chronous memory access
peripheral servicing of each Special I/O Unit, CPU
Bus Unit, peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner
Board)
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time (Local
Node)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time, which
depends on the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
Set peripheral servicing time
Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with asyn- 1 ms max.
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
Send Processing
(Number of words being transferred × 0.002) + 0.550 ms
Transmission Delay
The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, as shown in the following table. (There may
be additional delays due to the other devices in the network, such as switch-
ing hubs.)
Baud rate
100Base-TX
10Base-T
Delay time
(Number of words being transferred × 0.0013) + 0.0118 ms
(Number of words being transferred × 0.0019) + 0.0157 ms
Receive Processing
(Number of words being transferred × 0.003) + 0.704 ms
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle (Remote Node)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle, which depends on
the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
One CPU Unit cycle time
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution
built-in EtherNet/IP time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time
built-in EtherNet/IP
port is not given
priority.
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
One CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with asyn- 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. for
chronous memory access
peripheral servicing of each Special I/O Unit, CPU
Bus Unit, peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner
Board)
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time (Remote
Node)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time, which
depends on the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Processing time details
Set peripheral servicing time
Normal Mode (See note.)
Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Priority peripheral servicing
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing
built-in EtherNet/IP execution time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or Set peripheral servicing time
built-in EtherNet/IP (Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle
port is not given
priority.
time)
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
Set peripheral servicing time
Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Parallel processing with asyn- 1 ms max.
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
Note
Depending on the actual operating environment, the transmission time may
be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here. The following
factors can cause longer transmission times: other traffic on the network, win-
dow sizes of network nodes, other traffic at the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Eth-
erNet/IP port itself (e.g., simultaneous tag data link communications), and the
system configuration.
Example Calculation
In this example, SEND(090) is used to send 256 words of data between two
PLCs. The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following
operating conditions.
• Local node’s CPU cycle time: 10 ms
• Local node’s CPU execution mode: Normal
• Local node’s CPU peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
• Remote node’s CPU cycle time: 5 ms
• Remote node’s CPU execution mode: Normal
• Remote node’s CPU peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
• Baud rate: 100Base-TX
Item
Calculated value
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local
node)
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (local node)
0.4 ms
Send processing
(256 × 0.002) + 0.550 = 1.062 ≅ 1.1 ms
(256 × 0.0013) + 0.0118 = 0.3446 ≅ 0.3 ms
(256 × 0.003) + 0.704 = 1.472 ≅ 1.5 ms
Transmission delay
Receive processing
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote 5 ms
node)
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (remote node)
0.2 ms
Maximum transmission delay
10 + 0.4 + 1.1 + 0.3 + 1.5 + 5 + 0.2 = 18.5 ms
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
RECV(098) Instruction
Execution of RECV(099)
in user program
CPU Bus Unit service cycle
(Local node, 1)
CPU Bus Unit service cycle
(Local node, 2)
CPU Bus Unit service
processing time (Local node, 2)
CPU Bus Unit service processing time
(Local node, 1)
Send processing
(Command)
CPU data set
processing
Transmission delay
(Response)
Transmission delay
(Command)
Transmission delay
(Response)
Receive processing
(Command)
Send processing
(Response)
CPU Bus Unit service processing time
(Remote node)
CPU Bus Unit service cycle
(Remote node)
Maximum transmission delay
Maximum transmission delay =
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (Local node, 1)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (Local node, 1)
+ Send processing (Command)
+ Transmission delay (Command)
+ Receive processing (Command)
+ CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote node)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (remote node)
+ Send processing (Response)
+ Transmission delay (Response)
+ Receive processing (Response)
+ CPU Bus Unit service cycle (Local node, 2)
+ CPU Bus Unit service processing time (Local node, 2)
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle (Local Node, 1)
The following table shows the service cycle, which depends on the CPU Unit’s
CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
One CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. for
peripheral servicing of each Special I/O Unit, CPU
Bus Unit, peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner
Board)
Parallel processing with asyn-
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time (Local
Node, 1)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time, which
depends on the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
Set peripheral servicing time
Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle time
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
1 ms max.
Parallel processing with asyn-
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
Send Processing
Command
Response
0.550 ms
(Number of words being transferred × 0.002) + 0.550 ms
Transmission Delay
The transmission delay time depends on the baud rate set for the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, as shown in the following table. (There may
be additional delays due to the other devices in the network, such as switch-
ing hubs.)
Baud rate
Delay time
100Base-TX Command 0.0118 ms
Response (Number of words transferred × 0.0013) + 0.0118 ms
Command 0.0157 ms
10Base-T
Response (Number of words transferred × 0.0019) + 0.0157 ms
Receive Processing
Command
Response
0.704 ms
(Number of words being transferred × 0.003) + 0.704 ms
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle (Remote Node)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle, which depends on
the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
One CPU Unit cycle time
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution
built-in EtherNet/IP time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time
built-in EtherNet/IP
port is not given
priority.
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
One CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with asyn- 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. for
chronous memory access
peripheral servicing of each Special I/O Unit, CPU
Bus Unit, peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner
Board)
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time (Remote
Node)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time, which
depends on the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Processing time details
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Normal Mode (See note.)
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Priority peripheral servicing
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing
built-in EtherNet/IP execution time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or Set peripheral servicing time
built-in EtherNet/IP (Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle
port is not given
time)
priority.
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
CPU execution mode
Processing time details
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
Parallel processing with asyn- 1 ms max.
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Cycle (Local Node, 2)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service cycle, which depends on
the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Normal Mode (See note.)
Priority peripheral servicing
Processing time details
One CPU Unit cycle time
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice instruction execution
built-in EtherNet/IP time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or One CPU Unit cycle time
built-in EtherNet/IP
port is not given
priority.
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
One CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with asyn- 0.2 ms + peripheral servicing time (1 ms max. for
chronous memory access
peripheral servicing of each Special I/O Unit, CPU
Bus Unit, peripheral port, RS-232C port, and Inner
Board)
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
CPU Bus Unit Service
Processing Time (Local
Node, 2)
The following table shows the CPU Bus Unit service processing time, which
depends on the CPU Unit’s CPU processing mode setting.
CPU execution mode
Processing time details
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Normal Mode (See note.)
(10% for CJ2 CPU Units)
Priority peripheral servicing
EtherNet/IP Unit or Time slice peripheral servicing
built-in EtherNet/IP execution time
port is given prior-
ity.
EtherNet/IP Unit or Set peripheral servicing time
built-in EtherNet/IP (Default: 4% of CPU Unit cycle
port is not given
priority.
time)
Parallel processing with syn-
chronous memory access
4% of CPU Unit cycle time
Parallel processing with asyn- 1 ms max.
chronous memory access
Note CJ2 CPU Units support only Normal Mode.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
Note
Depending on the actual operating environment, the transmission time may
be longer than the one calculated with the equations given here. The following
factors can cause longer transmission times: other traffic on the network, win-
dow sizes of network nodes, other traffic at the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Eth-
erNet/IP port itself (e.g., simultaneous tag data link communications), and the
system configuration.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message Service Transmission Delay
Section 10-5
Example Calculation
In this example, RECV(098) is used to receive 256 words of data from another
PLC. The maximum transmission delay is calculated based on the following
operating conditions.
• Local node’s CPU cycle time: 10 ms
• Local node’s CPU execution mode: Normal
• Local node’s CPU peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
• Remote node’s CPU cycle time: 15 ms
• Remote node’s CPU execution mode: Normal
• Remote node’s CPU peripheral servicing time: Default (4%)
• Baud rate: 100Base-TX
Item
Calculated value
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local
node, 1)
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (local node, 1)
0.4 ms
Send processing (command)
Transmission delay (command)
Receive processing (command)
0.550 ms ≅ 0.5 ms
0.0118 ms ≅ 0.1 ms
0.704 ms ≅ 0.7 ms
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (remote 15 ms
node)
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (remote node)
0.6 ms
Send processing (command)
Transmission delay (command)
Receive processing (command)
(256 × 0.002) + 0.550 = 1.062 ≅ 1.1 ms
(256 × 0.0013) + 0.0118 = 0.3446 ≅ 0.3 ms
(256 × 0.003) + 0.704 = 1.472 ≅ 1.5 ms
10 ms
CPU Bus Unit service cycle (local
node, 2)
CPU Bus Unit service processing
time (local node, 2)
0.4 ms
Maximum transmission delay
10 + 0.4 + 0.5 + 0.1 + 0.7 + 15 + 0.6 + 1.1 +
0.3 + 1.5 + 10 + 0.4 = 40.6 ms
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 11
FTP Server
11-1 Overview and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2 FTP Server Function Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-1 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-2-2 Connecting to the FTP Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3 Using the FTP Server Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function . . . . . . . . . .
11-3-3 FTP Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-4 FTP Server Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5 Using FTP Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-1 Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-2 Using the Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-5-3 Error Messages and FTP Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6 Checking FTP Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-6-1 FTP Status Flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7 Using File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-1 File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-2 File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-3 Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-7-4 I/O Memory Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-8 FTP File Transfer Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-9 Host Computer Application Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
302
302
303
303
303
304
305
305
305
306
307
308
308
308
313
314
314
315
315
315
317
317
320
321
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview and Specifications
Section 11-1
11-1 Overview and Specifications
11-1-1 Overview
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port has a built-in FTP (File Trans-
fer Protocol) server function, so other computers on the Ethernet can read or
write (upload/download) large files in the EM file memory by executing FTP
commands from the FTP client software.
FTP can be used for EtherNet/IP Units with unit version 2.0.
FTP client
Intranet
Specify the file and upload or download
using FTP commands such as get and put.
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port
Download
Upload
Large file
Files in the EM File Memory or the
Memory Card mounted to the CPU
Unit.
Note
Only one FTP client can connect at the same time.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Server Function Details
Section 11-2
11-1-2 Specifications
Item
Specification
Executable com-
mands
open:
user:
ls:
Connects the specified host FTP server.
Specifies user name for the remote FTP server.
Displays the Memory Card file names.
dir:
Display the Memory Card file names and details.
rename: Changes a file name.
mkdir: Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host.
rmdir: Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host.
cd:
Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory.
cdup:
pwd:
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory.
Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory.
type:
get:
Specifies the data type of transferred files.
Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card.
Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card.
mget:
put:
mput:
delete: Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card.
mdelete: Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card.
close: Disconnects the FTP server.
bye:
Closes the FTP (client).
Closes the FTP (client).
quit:
Protection
Protocol
FTP login name consists of 12 letters max. CONFIDENTIAL is the default login name.
Password consists of 8 characters max.
FTP (port number: 20/TCP, 21/TCP)
1
Number of connec-
tions
Note
The PLC, however, is unable to read or write files at other nodes using FTP
because the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port does not support
FTP client functions.
11-2 FTP Server Function Details
11-2-1 File Types
The file system in the CPU Unit that can be accessed by the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port includes files in any Memory Card mounted in the
CPU Unit and files in the EM file memory. The directory tree is shown below.
/:
root
MEMCARD:
EM:
Memory card directory
EM file memory directory
A connection will be initially made to the root directory.
Note
1. The date of the MEMCARD directory displayed for ls or dir commands in
the root directory will be the date of the file system volume label.
2. The login date will be displayed for EM files and for MEMCARD if a volume
label has not been created.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Server Function Details
Section 11-2
11-2-2 Connecting to the FTP Server
The host computer must connect to the FTP server before the FTP server
functions can be used. The login name and password set in the Unit Setup will
be used when connecting. The default FTP login name is “CONFIDENTIAL”
and no password is required.
The FTP server in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port can con-
nect to only one client at a time. If a client attempts to connect when the FTP
server is in use, a message will be returned and connection will be refused.
Note
When general-purpose FTP software is used, files can be transferred and
read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer.
Login Name and Password Setting
The default login name for FTP is “CONFIDENTIAL” and no password is set
for the default login, so login is possible by simply entering “CONFIDENTIAL”
as the login name. A user-set login name and password can also be set in the
User Setup (CPU Bus Unit System Setup).
Login Messages
Status
Normal
connection
Message
220 xxx.xx.xx.xx yyyyyyyyyy FTP server (FTP Ver-
sion z.zz) ready.
xxx.xx.xx.xx:IP address of EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port
yyyyyyyyyy: EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port model
number (e.g., CS1W-EIP21)
z.zz: Firmware version of EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port
FTP server
busy
221 FTP server busy, Goodbye.
Setting Restrictions
The following restrictions apply to login names and passwords.
• The login name and password must consist of alphanumeric characters,
hyphens, and/or underscores. They are not case sensitive.
• A login name consists of 12 characters.
• A password consists of 8 characters.
• Always set a password when setting a new login name. The login name
will not be valid unless a password is set for it.
• If a login name is not set or contains illegal characters, the default login
name, CONFIDENTIAL, must be used. No password is required and any
password that is set will be ignored.
FTP File Transfer Mode
FTP has two file transfer modes: ASCII mode and binary mode. Before start-
ing to transfer files, use the typecommand (specifies the data type of trans-
ferred files) to select the required mode.
Always select binary mode for binary files (extensions .IOM, .STD, or .OBJ) in
the CS/CJ-series file memory and other program files (with extensions such
as .CXP).
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the FTP Server Function
Section 11-3
11-3 Using the FTP Server Function
11-3-1 Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to Initial Settings on page 34.
2. When using a user-set FTP login name and password:
With the CX-Programmer online, right-click the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX-Programmer, and se-
lect Edit - Unit Setup. Set the following on the FTP Tab Page of the Edit
Parameters Dialog Box.
• FTP login name
• FTP password.
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button. The
setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area in
the CPU Unit.
4. When reading from and writing to the Memory Card:
Mount the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
5. Connect the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port using the FTP cli-
ent software.
6. Enter the FTP login name and password set in the Unit Setup and log into
the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Note Once logged in, the ftp commands can be used, such as cd
(Change Directory), and get (Obtain File).
7. Search in the following directories for the required file in the Memory Card
mounted to the CPU Unit or the EM File Memory.
File memory type
Memory Card
Directory
\MEMCARD
\EM
EM File Memory
8. Download the files.
9. Exit the connection.
Note
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port will be restarted when the
settings data is transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Area, so that
the new settings are read and become effective. Verify that it is safe for the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port to restart before transferring the
settings data.
11-3-2 List of Settings Required for the FTP Server Function
Make the following settings for the unit setup when the server function is used.
CX-Programmer
tab
Settings
Setting conditions
Page
FTP
Login
User-set (when the default, CON- 306
FIDENTIAL, is not used)
Password
Port No.
User-set
Rarely required (when the default,
21, is not used)
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the FTP Server Function
Section 11-3
11-3-3 FTP Tab
The CPU Bus Unit System Setup, which is set when using the FTP server
function, is shown in the CX-Programmer's Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
■ Settings
Setting
Details
Default value
None
Login
Set the login name to externally connect to
the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port via FTP.
(CONFIDENTIAL is
used.)
Password
Port No.
Set the password to externally connect to the None
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
via FTP.
FTP port number of the EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port.
0
(21 is used.)
This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
FTP uses two ports: a port for control and a
port for data transfer. Set the control port
only. The data transfer port uses the value
set for the control port –1.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP Server Application Example
Section 11-4
11-4 FTP Server Application Example
The following procedure shows how to use the FTP server by connection with
the default login name, CONFIDENTIAL. No password is required.
Note
The login name and a password must be set in the CPU Bus Setup for the
Ethernet Unit in the CPU Unit to use any login name other than CONFIDEN-
TIAL.
Note
When general-purpose FTP software is used, files can be transferred and
read using a graphical user interface similar to Explorer.
1,2,3...
1. Make sure that a Memory Card is inserted in the CPU Unit and turn ON
the power supply to the PLC. If EM File Memory is to be used, create the
EM File Memory.
2. Connect to the FTP server from a computer on the Ethernet by entering
the text that is underlined in the following diagram.
IP address of the Ethernet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
$ ftp 150.31.2.83
connected to 150.31.2.83
Results
220 **IPaddress** CJ1W-EIP21 FTP server(FTP**version**)ready
Name:CONFIDENTIAL
Login name
230 Guest logged in.
3. Enter FTP commands (underlined in the following diagram) to read and
write files. The following directory tree is used in this example.
/:
root
EM
MEMCARD
ABC (subdirectory)
DEF.IOM (file)
ftp> ls
File names read
200 PORT command successful.
150 opening data connection for ls(**IPaddress**port#**)(0bytes).
MEMCARD
Results
EM
226 Transfer complete.
** bytes received in 0 seconds(**bytes/s)
ftp> cd MEMCARD
Change to MEMCARD
directory
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> get ABC/DEF.IOM
Results
Transfer DEF.IOM from
ABC directory
200 PORT command successful.
150 opening data connection for abc/def.iom(**IPaddress**port#**)(**bytes).
226 Transfer complete
Results
**bytes received in *.*** seconds(**bytes/s)
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
11-5 Using FTP Commands
This section describes the FTP commands which the host computer (FTP cli-
ent) can send to the FTP server of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port. The descriptions should also apply to most UNIX workstations, but slight
differences may arise. Refer to your workstation’s operation manuals for
details.
11-5-1 Table of Commands
The FTP commands which can be sent to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Eth-
erNet/IP port are listed in the following table.
Command
open
user
ls
Description
Connects the specified host FTP server.
Specifies user name for the remote FTP server.
Displays the Memory Card file names.
dir
Display the Memory Card file names and details.
Changes a file name.
rename
mkdir
rmdir
cd
Creates a new directory in the working directory in the remote host.
Deletes a new directory from the working directory in the remote host.
Changes the Ethernet Unit work directory to the specified directory.
cdup
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent direc-
tory.
pwd
Displays the Ethernet Unit work directory.
Specifies the data type of transferred files.
Transfers the specified file from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers multiple files from the Memory Card to the local host.
Transfers the specified local file to the Memory Card.
Transfers multiple local files to the Memory Card.
Deletes the specified file from the Memory Card.
Deletes multiple files from the Memory Card.
Disconnects the FTP server.
type
get
mget
put
mput
delete
mdelete
close
bye
Closes the FTP (client).
quit
Closes the FTP (client).
• The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is considered to be the
remote host and the host computer (FTP client) is considered to be the
local host.
• A remote file is a file on the Memory Card or in EM File Memory in the
CPU Unit. A local file is one in the host computer (FTP client).
• The parent directory is the directory one above the working directory.
11-5-2 Using the Commands
open
Format
open [IP_address or host_name_of_FTP_server]
Function
Connects the FTP server. Normally when the FTP client is booted, the FTP
server IP address is specified to execute this command automatically.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
user
Format
user [user_name]
Function
Specifies the user name. Specify the FTP login name set in the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port system setup. The default FTP login name is
“CONFIDENTIAL.”
If a non-default login name is used, it must be followed by the password. In
this case, enter the FTP password set in the system setup.
The user name is automatically requested immediately after connection to the
FTP server.
ls
Format
ls [-l] [REMOTE_FILE_NAME [local_file_name]]
Function
Displays the remote host (Memory Card or EM File Memory) file names.
Set the switch [-l] to display not only the file names but the creation date and
size as well. If the switch is not set, only the file names will be displayed.
You can specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory if desired.
If a local file name is specified, the file information will be stored in the speci-
fied file in the host computer.
dir
Format
dir [REMOTE_FILE_NAME [local_file_name]]
Function
Displays the file names, date created, and size of the files in the remote host
(Memory Card or EM File Memory). It displays the same information as com-
mand [ls -l].
Specify a file name in the Memory Card or EM File Memory as the remote file
name.
If a local file name is specified, the file information is stored in the specified file
in the host computer.
rename
Format
rename CURRENT_FILE_NAME NEW_FILE_NAME
Function
Changes the specified current file name to the specified new file name.
renamecan be used only to change the file name. It cannot be used to move
the file to a different directory.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
mkdir
Format
mkdir DIRECTORY_NAME
Function
Creates a directory of the specified name at the remote host (Memory Card or
EM File Memory).
An error will occur if a file or directory of the same name already exists in the
working directory.
rmdir
Format
rmdir DIRECTORY_NAME
Function
Deletes the directory of the specified name from the remote host (Memory
Card or EM File Memory).
The directory must be empty to delete it.
An error will occur if the specified directory does not exist or is empty.
pwd
Format
pwd
Function
Displays the remote host’s (Ethernet Unit) current work directory.
cd
Format
cd [directory_name]
Function
Changes the remote host (Ethernet Unit) work directory to the specified
remote directory.
The files in the Memory Card are contained in the MEMCARD directory under
the root directory (/). The files in EM File Memory are contained in the EM
directory under the root directory (/). The root directory (/) is the directory
used when logging into the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. No
MEMCARD directory will exist if a Memory Card is not inserted in the PLC or
if the Memory Card power indicator is not lit. No EM directory will exist if EM
File Memory does not exist.
cdup
Format
cdup
Function
Changes the working directory at the remote host to the parent directory (one
directory above the current working directory).
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
type
Format
type data_type
Function
Specifies the file data type. The following data types are supported:
ascii: Files are transferred as ASCII data
binary (image): Files are transferred as binary data.
All files are treated by the PLC as binary files. Before reading or writing any
files, always use the type command to set the file type to binary. File con-
tents cannot be guaranteed if transferred as ASCII data.
The default file type is ASCII.
get
Format
get FILE_NAME [receive_file_name]
Function
Transfers the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory
to the local host.
A receive file name can be used to specify the name of the file in the local
host.
mget
Format
mget FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to transfer multiple remote files from
the Memory Card or EM File Memory to the local host.
put
Format
put file_name [DESTINATION_FILE_NAME]
Function
Transfers the specified local file to the remote host (Memory Card or EM File
Memory).
A destination file name can be used to specify the name the file is stored
under in the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
Any existing file with the same name in the remote host (Memory Card or EM
File Memory) will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file.
If an error occurs during file transfer, the file being transferred will be deleted
and the transmission will end in an error.
mput
Format
mput FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to transfer multiple local files to the
remote host (Memory Card or EM File Memory).
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
Any existing file with the same name in the remote host (Memory Card or EM
File Memory) will be overwritten by the contents of the transferred file.
If an error occurs during file transfer, the file being transferred will be deleted
and the transmission of that file will end in an error. However, mput execution
will continue and remaining files will be transferred.
delete
Format
deleteFILE_NAME
Function
Deletes the specified remote file from the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
mdelete
Format
mdelete FILE_NAME
Function
Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) to delete multiple remote files from
the Memory Card or EM File Memory.
close
Format
close
Function
Disconnects the FTP server of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port.
bye
Format
bye
Function
Ends the FTP (client).
quit
Format
quit
Function
Ends the FTP (client).
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using FTP Commands
Section 11-5
11-5-3 Error Messages and FTP Status
Error Messages
The error messages returned by the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port are listed in the following table.
Message
Meaning
PPP is a directory.
The path name indicated at PPP is a directory.
The path name indicated at PPP is not a directory.
Another Unit currently has the access right.
PPP is not a directory.
Another unit has access authority
(FINS error 0 x 3001).
Bad sequence of commands.
The RNFR command has not been executed.
Can't create data socket (X.X.X.X, YY).
Cannot access to device (FINS error 0 x 250F).
Cannot get memory blocks.
A socket cannot be created.
A file device error has occurred.
A message memory block cannot be allocated.
The command format is incorrect.
Command format error (FINS error 0 x 1003).
Connect error.
A connection error has occurred.
Directories of old and new paths are not same.
Directory name length exceeded max. size.
Directory not empty (FINS error 0 x 2108).
Fatal error (FINS error 0 x 1101).
The directories before and after changing the name are different.
The directory name is too long.
The directory must be empty to delete it.
A parameter error has occurred.
Fatal error (FINS error 0 x 1103).
File or directory already exists.
The specified file or directory name already exists.
The file or directory name is incorrect.
File or directory already exists
(FINS error 0 x 2107).
File or directory name illegal.
File or directory name illegal
(FINS error 0 x 110C).
File read error (FINS error 0 x 1104).
File read error (FINS error 0 x 110B).
File write error (FINS error 0 x 2106).
File write error (FINS error 0 x 2107).
FINS error MRES 0 x XX: SRES 0 x XX.
Length of directory name too long.
No space to create entry (FINS error 0 x 2103).
No such device (FINS error 0 x 2301).
No such file or directory.
An error occurs when reading the file.
An error occurs when reading the file.
Some other FINS error has occurred.
The path name of the directory is too long.
There are too many files to create a new one.
The file device cannot be found.
The specified file or directory does not exist.
No such file or directory (FINS error 0 x 2006).
No such file or directory (FINS error 0 x 2106).
Not enough memory.
The communications buffers are full.
The file device is full.
Not enough space in the system.
(FINS error 1104).
PLC communication error (timeout).
Socket canceled.
File access timed out.
The socket was canceled.
Socket error NN.
A socket bind error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
A data reception error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
A data send error occurred. The error code will be given at NN.
Socket receive error NN.
Socket send error NN.
Timeout (900 seconds): closing control connection. The connection was closed because the client did not respond for
15 minutes.
Too many open files.
Too many sockets have been created.
Writing is not possible.
Write access denied.
Write access denied. (FINS error 0 x 2101).
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking FTP Status
Section 11-6
PPP: Path name
XXX: IP address
YY: Port number
MM: FINS error code
NN: Socket error code
11-6 Checking FTP Status
11-6-1 FTP Status Flag
The current status of the FTP server can be obtained from the service status
in the words allocated to the EtherNet/IP Unit in the CPU Bus Unit Area in the
CIO Area. The word containing the FTP Status Flag can be computed as fol-
lows: CIO 1500 + (25 x unit number) + 13
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
n+13
FTP Status Flag
Meaning
Status of
bit 00
1
0
FTP server busy (a user is connected)
FTP server free
Note
1. File operations for files on the Memory Card are performed during FTP
communications. Do not remove the Memory Card or turn OFF power to
the PLC while FTP is being used.
2. When using File Memory Instruction from the program in the CPU Unit,
program exclusive control using the FTP Status Flag so that the same data
is not manipulated simultaneously by more than one instruction.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 11-7
11-7 Using File Memory
There are two media that can be used to store files in memory for CS/CJ-
series PLCs:
• Memory Cards
• EM File Memory
CPU Unit
File
Memory Card
File
File
EM File
Memory
File
11-7-1 File Memory
Media
CS/CJ-
series
Memory
Cards
Memory type
Flash memory 8 MB
15 MB
Capacity
Model
HMC-EF861
File data recognized by CPU Unit
• Complete user program
• Specified portions of I/O Memory
• Parameter area data (e.g. PLC
Setup)
HMC-EF171
HMC-EF371
30 MB
EM File
Memory
RAM
Max. capacity of EM Area All EM Area banks
in CPU Unit
from specified bank in
I/O Memory (specified
in PLC Setup)
11-7-2 File Types
■ File Names
Files are distinguished by assigning file names and extensions. The following
characters can be used in file names and extensions:
Alphanumeric characters: A to Z and 0 to 9. (Names converted to all-caps)
! & $ # ’ [ ] - ^ ( ) _
The following characters cannot be used in files names and extensions:
, . / ? * ” : ; < > = + (spaces)
File names are not case sensitive and will be converted to all-caps in the PLC
file system. File names can be up to 8 character long with 3-character exten-
sions. An error will occur if a file name or extension is too long. The first period
(.) in a file name will be taken as the delimiter between the file name and
extension. Extensions are determined by the file type.
■ Directories
Up to five levels of directories (including root as the first level) can be created
as file storage locations. A maximum of 65 characters can be used in direc-
tory names.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 11-7
File Names Handled by CPU Unit
The files described in the following table can be read or written by the CPU
Unit.
File type
Data file
File name
Extension
Contents
Description
********
.IOM
Specified ranges of
I/O Memory
• Contains word (16-bit) data from a starting
word through an end word in one memory
area.
• The following areas can be used: CIO, HR,
WR, AR, DM, and EM.
Program file
********
********
.OBJ
.STD
Complete user pro-
gram
• Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks, as well as task infor-
mation for one CPU Unit.
Parameter area file
• PLC Setup
• Registered I/O
tables
• Contains all of the parameter data for one
CPU Unit.
• There is no need for the user to distinguish
the various types of data contained in the
file.
• The file can be automatically read to or
written from the CPU Unit simply by speci-
fying the extension (.STD)
• Routing tables
• CPU Bus Unit
Setup and other
setup data
Files
trans-
ferred at
startup
Data files
AUTOEXEC .IOM
I/O Memory data for
the specified number
of words starting from
D20000
• There does not necessarily need to be a
data file in the Memory Card when the
automatic file transfer function is used at
startup.
• The AUTOEXEC.IOM file always contains
DM Area data starting at D20000.
• All data in the file will be transferred to
memory starting at D20000 at startup.
Program
files
AUTOEXEC .OBJ
Complete user pro-
gram
• There must be a program file in the Mem-
ory Card when the automatic file transfer
function is used at startup.
• Contains all the programs for cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks, as well as task infor-
mation for one CPU Unit.
Parameter AUTOEXEC .STD
area file
• PLC Setup
• Registered I/O
tables
• There must be a parameter file in the
Memory Card when the automatic file
transfer function is used at startup.
• Contains all of the parameter data for one
CPU Unit.
• There is no need for the user to distinguish
the various types of data contained in the
file.
• Routing tables
• CPU Bus Unit
Setup and other
setup data
• All parameters in the file will be automati-
cally transferred to specified locations in
memory at startup.
Note
1. Refer to information on file memory in the CS/CJ-series Programmable
Controllers Operation Manual (W339).
2. All files transferred automatically at startup must have the name AUTOEX-
EC.
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 11-7
11-7-3 Initializing File Memory
Memory
Initialization method
Memory
Cards
1. Insert the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card from a Programming Device
(Programming Consoles included).
EM File Mem- 1. Specify in the PLC Setup the first bank to convert to file memory.
ory
2. Initialize EM File Memory from the CX-Programmer.
11-7-4 I/O Memory Data Format
■ IOM Format
The IOM format is a data format used for binary data specified by the ladder
instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit.
If five words of data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadeci-
mal, 9ABC hexadecimal, etc.) is contained in an attached file in IOM format,
the data will be stored in the attached file as shown in the following diagram.
Example: Binary data format with a delimiter after every 10 fields.
I/O memory
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
.IOM file contents
XX XX
XX 12 34 56 78 9A BC DE F0 12 34
48 bytes
(Reserved by the system.)
■ TXT Format
The TXT format is a data format (using tab delimiters) specified by the ladder
instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit. The format is configured according to the
specified FREAD(700) and FWRIT(701) parameters, as follows:
Data format
Use of CRs and CR position
• Words without delimiters
• No CRs
• Double words without delimiters
• Words delimited by tabs.
• Double words delimited by tabs
• CR after every 10 fields.
• CR after each field.
• CR after every 2 fields.
• CR after every 4 fields.
• CR after every 5 fields.
• CR after every 16 fields.
If data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadecimal, 9ABC
hexadecimal, etc.) is contained in an attached file in TXT format, the data will
be converted into ASCII format in words or double-words. The words are
delimited by inserting tabs ([HT]: 09), and carriage returns (CR) after specified
fields ([CR][LF]: 0D0A).
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 11-7
Example: Data format using words delimited by tabs and CRs after every
10 fields.
I/O memory
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
.TXT file contents
31 32 33 34 09 35 36 37 38 09 39 41 42 43 09
1
2
3
4 [HT] 5
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 09
8 [CR][LF] 9 C [HT]
6
7
8 [HT] 9
A
B
C [HT]
5
6
7
A
B
.TXT file displayed as text
1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678
9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0@1234@5678@9ABC@DEF0
@...[HT]: Used to display tab space when displayed as text.
■ CSV Format
The CSV format is a data format (using comma delimiters) that is specified by
ladder instructions, READ DATA FILE (FREAD(700)) and WRITE DATA FILE
(FWRIT(701)), in the CPU Unit. The CSV format is configured according to
the specified FREAD(700) and FWRIT(701) parameters, as follows:
Data format
Use of CRs and CR position
Words delimited by commas.
• No CRs
• CR after every 10 fields.
• CR after each field.
• CR after every 2 fields.
• CR after every 4 fields.
• CR after every 5 fields.
• CR after every 16 fields.
Double words delimited by com-
mas.
If word data from the I/O memory (1234 hexadecimal, 5678 hexadecimal, up
to DEF0 hexadecimal) is contained in an attached file in CSV format, the word
data will be converted into ASCII format in word or double-word units. The
words are delimited by inserting comma delimiters (',':2C), and CRs after
specified fields ([CR][LF]: 0D0A).
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using File Memory
Section 11-7
Example: Data format using words delimited by commas with CRs after every
10 fields.
I/O memory
+0
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
+9
+0
1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678
+10 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0 1234 5678 9ABC DEF0
.CSV file contents
31 32 33 34 2C 35 36 37 38 2C 39 41 42 43 2C
1
2
3
4
,
5
6
7
8
,
9
A
B
C
,
35 36 37 38 0D 0A 39 41 42 43 2C
8 [CR] [LF] 9
5
6
7
A
B
C
,
.TXT file displayed as text
1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678
9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0,1234,5678,9ABC,DEF0
Note
FREAD(700) will not be able to read the last byte in a file that has been written
to the Memory Card if the file contains an odd number of bytes. Add 00 hexa-
decimal to the end of the file if necessary to write an even number of bytes to
the Memory Card.
Note
The UM and DM Areas contain binary data. Set the data type to binary using
the type command before reading or writing files using FTP. (Refer to type
on page 311.)
For details on how to use File Memory Instructions, refer to the CS/CJ Series
Instructions Reference Manual (W340).
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FTP File Transfer Time
Section 11-8
11-8 FTP File Transfer Time
File transfers using FTP can require 30 or 40 minutes depending on the
capacity of the file. Approximate file transfer time are provided in the following
table for reference.
All times are in seconds unless otherwise specified.
■ CS1 CPU Units and CJ1 CPU Units
File system
Memory Card
EM File Memory
CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM RUN
PROGRAM RUN
Cycle time
1 KB
---
20 ms
6.0 s
---
20 ms
2.9 s
Transfers using
put
0.7 s
4.5 s
7.4 s
14.4 s
0.3 s
2.8 s
4.9 s
9.6 s
0.4 s
2.5 s
5.0 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
1 KB
38.3 s
72.1 s
21.5 s
44.7 s
120.8 s
0.8 s
141.4 s 11.0 s
Transfers using
get
1.4 s
0.2 s
1.9 s
3.8 s
8.6 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
19.3 s
37.6 s
75.7 s
11.4 s
26.7 s
68.2 s
■ CS1-H CPU Units, CJ1-H CPU Units, CJ1-R CPU Units, CJ2-H CPU Units,
and CJ2M CPU Units
File system
Memory Card
EM File Memory
CPU Unit status Operating mode PROGRAM
RUN
PROGRAM
RUN
Cycle time
1 KB
---
20 ms
2.7 s
---
20 ms
0.6 s
Transfers using
put
0.5 s
1.8 s
3.2 s
6.2 s
0.2 s
1.7 s
2.5 s
4.9 s
0.2 s
0.7 s
1.5 s
3.6 s
0.2 s
1.0 s
2.3 s
4.9 s
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
1 KB
11.6 s
21.1 s
40.2 s
0.3 s
6.6 s
14.0 s
32.5 s
0.2 s
Transfers using
get
30 KB
60 KB
120 KB
4.8 s
4.1 s
9.4 s
9.7 s
18.8 s
27.0 s
Note
1. The above times assume that the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the
PLC Setup is set to the default value of 4%.
2. If the Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time in the PLC Setup is increased, FTP
files will be transferred faster.
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Computer Application Example
Section 11-9
11-9 Host Computer Application Example
The following procedure provides an example of FTP operations from a host
computer. In this example, the following assumptions are made.
• The IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is regis-
tered in /etc/hosts on the host name as [cs1].
• The default FTP login name is being used (CONFIDENTIAL).
• A processing results data file called RESULT.IOM already exists on the
Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
• A processing instructions data file called PLAN.IOM already exists on the
workstation.
The following procedure transfers the processing results file RESULT.IOM
from the Memory Card in the CPU Unit to the workstation and then the pro-
cessing instructions file PLAN.IOM is transferred from the workstation to the
Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
Underlined text is keyed in from the FTP client. The workstation prompt is indi-
cated as $ and the cursor is indicated as ■.
1,2,3...
1. Start FTP and connect to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
$ ftp cs1 ··· FTP started.
connected to cs1
220 **IPaddress** CS1W-ETN21 FTP server(FTP**version**)ready
Name(cs1:root): ■
2. Enter the login name.
Name(cs1:root):CONFIDENTIAL ··· Login name
230 Guest logged in.
ftp> ■
3. Make sure the Memory Card is inserted. The MEMCARD directory will be
displayed if there is a Memory Card in the CPU Unit.
ftp> ls ··· Make sure the Memory Card is inserted.
200 PORT command successful.
150 opening data connection for ls(**IPaddress**port#**)(0 bytes).
MEMCARD
226 Transfer complete.
15 bytes received in 0 seconds(**bytes/s)
ftp> ■
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host Computer Application Example
Section 11-9
4. Change to the MEMCARD directory.
ftp> cd MEMCARD ··· Change to MEMCARD directory.
250 CWD command successful.
ftp> ■
5. Change data type to binary.
ftp> type binary ··· Binary data type set.
200 Type set to I.
ftp> ■
6. Transfer the file RESULT.IOM to the workstation.
ftp> get RESULT.IOM ··· File read.
200 PORT command successful.
150 opening data connection for result.iom (**IPaddress**port#**) (**bytes).
226 Transfer complete.
** bytes received in *.*** seconds (**bytes/s)
ftp> ■
7. Write the file PLAN.IOM to the Memory Card.
ftp> put PLAN.IOM ··· File written
200 PORT command successful.
150 opening data connection for plan.iom (**IPaddress**port#**).
226 Transfer complete.
** bytes received in *.** seconds (**bytes/s)
ftp> ■
8. End FTP.
ftp> bye ··· FTP ended.
221 Goodbye.
$ ■
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 12
Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
This section provides an overview of the automatic clock adjustment function, including details on specifications, required
12-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-1-2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-2-2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function. . . . .
12-2-3 Auto Adjust Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12-4-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment (SNTP) Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
324
324
325
325
325
326
327
328
328
328
12-4-2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function 328
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment
Section 12-1
12-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment
12-1-1 Overview
The EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port can obtain the clock informa-
tion from the SNTP server (see note 1) at a particular time or when a desig-
nated bit turns ON and then refresh the internal clock information of the CPU
Unit to which it is mounted (referred to as the local CPU Unit).
Intranet
SNTP server
Automatic clock adjustment
The clock information can be broadcast to other CPU Units on the same Network.
24: 00: 00
Ethernet
EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port
24: 00: 00
Clock data is obtained from the
SNTP server and written at a particular
time or when a designated bit turns ON.
Note
(1) The SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) server is used to control the
time on the LAN.
(2) An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock
adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table.
CPU Unit
Conditions
CPU Units manufactured on or
When the CPU execution mode is set to other
before January 31, 2003 (lot num- than normal mode (priority peripheral servicing
bers 030131 or earlier):
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
mode, parallel processing with synchronous
memory access mode, or parallel processing
with asynchronous memory access mode).
AND
When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to
RUN or MONITOR mode.
(3) The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the
side or top corner of the CPU Unit.
(4) The lot numbers are as follows:
YYMMDDnnnn, in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year, MM
the month, DD the day, and nnnn the serial number.
(5) In accordance with SNTP protocol specifications, automatic adjustment
will not be possible from February 7, 2036. In EtherNet/IP Units or built-
in EtherNet/IP ports, this function will no longer operate from February 7,
2036 (an error message will not be displayed).
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 12-2
12-1-2 Specifications
Item
Specification
Protocol
SNTP
123 (UDP)
Port number
Can also be set from the CX-Programmer in the Unit Setup.
Adjustment timing
Automatic (fixed time) and manual (manual only cannot be
set)
Access to SNTP
server
Writes the clock information
from the SNTP server to the
local CPU Unit.
Obtains the clock information
from the SNTP server set up
on the Network, and applies
the information obtained to
the local CPU Unit.
Refresh timing
When the automatic clock adjustment switch is turned from
OFF to ON and at a specified time.
12-2 Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
12-2-1 Procedure
1,2,3...
1. Make the basic settings.
Refer to Initial Settings on page 34.
2. With the CX-Programmer online, right-click the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port in the IO Table Dialog Box of the CX-Programmer, and se-
lect Edit - Unit Setup Set the following on the Auto Adjust Time Tab Page
of the Edit Parameters Dialog Box.
• SNTP server specification (required)
• Access to the SNTP server is enabled when writing clock information from
the SNTP server to the local CPU Unit when the Automatic Clock Adjust-
ment Switch is turned from OFF to ON and at a set automatic adjustment
time.
• Automatic clock adjustment setting.
3. To perform automatic clock adjustment manually, turn the Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch from OFF to ON. (The Automatic Clock Adjustment
Switch is word n bit 05 in the words allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Area,
where n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number.)
4. Select Transfer to PLC from the PLC Menu and click the Yes Button. The
Unit Setup (CPU Bus System Setup) will be transferred to the CPU Unit
(the setting data will be transferred to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup Ar-
ea).
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 12-2
12-2-2 Settings Required for Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
The following settings must be set in the Unit Setup when using the automatic
clock adjustment function.
CX-
Programmer
tab
Settings
Setting conditions
Reference
Auto Adjust
Time
Server specification
type
Required.
12-2-3 Auto Adjust
Time on page 327
IP Address
Host name
One or the other is
required, depending
on the Server specifi-
cation type setting.
Port No.
Rarely required.
(Change when a set-
ting other than the
default setting of 123
is required.)
Get the time informa- Required.
tion from the SNTP
server
Auto Adjust Time
Retry timer
Optional
Optional (Change
when the default set-
ting of 10 seconds is
unacceptable.)
Adjust Time
IP Address
Port No.
Optional
DNS (See
note.)
Required.
3-8 TCP/IP and Link
Settings on page 52
Rarely required.
(Change when a set-
ting other than the
default setting of 53
is required.)
Retry timer
Optional (Change
when the default set-
ting of 10 seconds is
unacceptable.)
Note
When the Server specification type field in Auto Adjust Time Tab is set to Host
name.
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Automatic Clock Adjustment Function
Section 12-2
12-2-3 Auto Adjust Time
The contents in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup that are set for using mail
send and receive functions are shown in the CX-Programmer’s Edit Parame-
ters Dialog Box.
Item
Contents
Default
Get the time
information from SNTP server's clock.
the SNTP
Enable to set the CPU Unit's clock to the time at the Not
selected
(disabled)
The clock can be changed only for the CPU Unit to
server
which the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
is mounted.
Auto Adjust
Time
Set the time at which the SNTP server is to be
accessed to synchronize the clocks.
0:0:0
When the time that is set here arrives, the SNTP
server is accessed and the CPU Unit clock is
adjusted to match the SNTP server clock.
Server specifi-
cation type
Select whether the SNTP server used for automatic IP Address
clock adjustment is to be specified by IP address or
by host domain name (i.e., by host name).
IP Address
Set the IP address for the SNTP server that is to be 0.0.0.0
used for automatic clock adjustment.
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by IP address has been selected.
Host name
Set the host domain name (i.e., the host name) for
the SNTP server that is to be used for automatic
clock adjustment.
None
This setting is enabled only when server specification
by host name has been selected.
Port No.
Set the port number for connecting to the SNTP
server that is to be used for automatic clock adjust-
ment. This setting does not normally need to be
changed.
0
(Number
123 is
used.)
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch
Section 12-3
Item
Contents
Set the time to elapse before retrying when a connec- 0
Default
Retry timer
tion to the SNTP server fails. This setting does not
normally need to be changed.
(10 s)
Adjust Time
This sets in the CPU Unit's clock data the time differ- +0:0
ence made up from the SNTP server's clock data.
To use the clock data from the SNTP server just as it
is, input 0.
12-3 Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch
The Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch is allocated in the CIO Area as
shown below. The first word n of the CIO Area is calculated using the following
equation.
n = CIO 1500 + (25 × unit number)
Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch
(Bit 05 of n)
The Unit control bit is shown in the following diagram.
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
n
Automatic Clock
Adjustment Switch
When the Automatic Clock Adjustment Switch turns from OFF to ON, the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port obtains the clock data from the SNTP
server on the network, and applies it to the local CPU Unit. After applying the
data, the switch automatically turns OFF again.
12-4 Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
12-4-1 Automatic Clock Adjustment (SNTP) Errors
The following table shows the main causes and remedies for errors that occur
in the automatic clock adjustment function (SNTP).
Cause
Correction
SNTP, DNS server address not set
Reset each server address (IP address or
host name).
SNTP, DNS server communications time- Inspect the communications path (Ether-
out
Net/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port,
cable connections, hub, router, server),
and correct the situation that is causing
the error.
CPU Unit internal clock could not be set The automatic clock adjustment function
is not supported by certain CPU Units
(models, lot numbers) if they are in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
12-4-2 Error Log Error Codes for the Automatic Clock Adjustment
Function
When an error occurs while the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is
operating, the error code, detailed error code, and time the error occurred are
saved in the error log. The following table provides a list of the error codes.
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
Section 12-4
The error log can be read by sending FINS commands to the EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in EtherNet/IP port or by using the mail receive function and specifying
the ErrorLogRead command.
Error
code
Meaning
Detailed error code
1st byte 2nd byte
Server set- 00H: DNS 01: IP address
Correction
EEPROM
03C1
Set the server
settings correctly
based on the
information in the
detailed error
code.
---
ting error
03H:
02: Host name
03: Port number
SNTP
04H: FTP
06H:
04: Other
parameters
BOOTP
07H:
SNMP
08H:
SNMP
Trap
09H:
FINS/
UDP
0AH:
FINS/
TCP
03C4
Server
connection 03H:
error
00H: DNS 01: Specified
Take either of the ---
following mea-
sures.
host does not
exist
SNTP
04H: FTP
06H:
BOOTP
07H:
02: No service
at specified host tings for each
• Correct the set-
server.
• Inspect the com-
munications
path (EtherNet/
03: Timeout
04: Closed uni-
laterally by host
SNMP
08H:
SNMP
Trap
05: Cannot con-
IP Unit or built-in
nect because
EtherNet/IP
account infor-
port), cable con-
nections, hub,
router, server),
mation does not
match
06: Host name
resolution error
and correct the
situation that is
causing the
error.
07: Transmis-
sion error
08: Reception
error
09: Other error
0AH: Error in
obtained IP
address
03C6
Clock data 0001: Clock data could not Clear the CPU
---
---
write error be refreshed because of a
Unit error.
CPU Unit error.
0002: Clock data could not The automatic
be refreshed because the
CPU Unit could not write
clock adjustment
function is not
clock data in that operation supported by cer-
mode.
tain CPU Units
(models, lot num-
bers) if they are in
RUN or MONI-
TOR mode.
(See note.)
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Clock Adjustment Error Processing
Section 12-4
Note
(1) For details on other error log information, refer to the Operation Manual,
Construction of Networks: SECTION 14 Troubleshooting and Error Pro-
cessing.
(2) An error will occur in the following CPU Units when the automatic clock
adjustment function is executed under the conditions shown in the table.
CPU Unit
Conditions
CPU Units manufactured on or
When the CPU execution mode is set to other
before January 31, 2003 (lot num- than normal mode (priority peripheral servicing
bers 030131 or earlier):
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
mode, parallel processing with synchronous
memory access mode, or parallel processing
with asynchronous memory access mode).
AND
When the CPU Unit operating mode is set to
RUN or MONITOR mode.
(3) The manufacturing date can be determined from the lot number on the
side or top corner of the CPU Unit.
(4) The lot numbers are as follows:
YYMMDDnnnn, in which YY indicates the last two digits of the year, MM
the month, DD the day, and nnnn the serial number.
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 13
Maintenance and Unit Replacement
13-1 Maintenance and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1-2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-1-3 Unit Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-2 Simple Backup Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13-3 Using the Backup Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
332
332
332
332
333
336
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance and Replacement
Section 13-1
13-1 Maintenance and Replacement
This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as
regular maintenance, as well as the Unit replacement procedure required if an
EtherNet/IP Unit needs to be replaced.
13-1-1 Cleaning
Clean the EtherNet/IP Unit regularly as described below in order to keep the
network in its optimal operating condition.
• Wipe the Unit daily with a dry, soft cloth.
• When a spot can’t be removed with a dry cloth, dampen the cloth with a
neutral cleanser (2% solution), wring out the cloth, and wipe the Unit.
• A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum, vinyl, or tape that was left on
for a long time. Remove the smudge when cleaning.
!Caution Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner, benzene, or chemical wipes.
These substances could damage the surface of the Unit.
13-1-2 Inspection
Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in its optimal operating
condition. In general, inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months, but
inspect more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humid-
ity or under dirty/dusty conditions.
Inspection Equipment
Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system.
Normally Required
Equipment
Have a standard and Phillips-head screwdriver, multimeter, alcohol, and a
clean cloth.
Occasionally Required
Equipment
Depending on the system conditions, a synchroscope, oscilloscope, ther-
mometer, or hygrometer (to measure humidity) might be needed.
Inspection Procedure
Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below
standard.
Item
Standard
Inspection
Environmental
conditions
Ambient and cabinet temperature 0 to 55°C
Thermometer
Ambient and cabinet humidity
10 to 90% (with no condensa- Hygrometer
tion or icing)
Dust/dirt accumulation
None
Visual
Installation
Are the Units installed securely?
No looseness
Phillips-head
screwdriver
Are the Ethernet cable connectors No looseness
fully inserted and locked?
Visual
13-1-3 Unit Replacement Procedure
Replace a faulty EtherNet/IP Unit as soon as possible. If the built-in EtherNet/
IP port is faulty, replace the CPU Unit as soon as possible. We recommend
having spare Units available to restore network operation as quickly as possi-
ble.
Precautions
Observe the following precautions when replacing a faulty Unit.
• After replacement, verify that there are no errors with the new Unit.
• When a Unit is being returned for repair, attach a sheet of paper detailing
the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer.
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple Backup Function
Section 13-2
• If there is a faulty contact, try wiping the contact with a clean, lint-free
cloth dampened with alcohol.
Note
To prevent electric shock when replacing a Unit, always stop communications
in the network and turn OFF the power supplies to all of the nodes before
removing the faulty Unit.
Settings Required
after Unit
After a Unit has been replaced, verify that the following steps have been made
correctly.
Replacement
• Set the node address and unit number.
• Connect the Ethernet cable.
• Set the configuration data (parameter settings) again and download them.
13-2 Simple Backup Function
Overview
The simple backup function can be used to back up not only all of the data in
the CPU Unit, but also all of the data stored in memory in the EtherNet/IP Unit
or data for the built-in EtherNet/IP port. All of this data will automatically be
backed up to the Memory Card.
The simple backup function can be used for the following EtherNet/IP Units
and built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• CS-series EtherNet/IP Unit (CS1W-EIP21) mounted to a CS1D/CS1-
H CPU Unit
• CJ-series EtherNet/IP Unit (CJ1W-EIP21) mounted to a CJ1-H/CJ1M/
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP CPU Unit
• A built-in EtherNet/IP port on a CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CJ2M-CPU3@
CPU Unit
When the EtherNet/IP Unit’s setup data is written to the Memory Card using a
simple backup operation, it is stored in the Memory Card as a Unit/Board
backup file with the file name BACKUP@@.PRM. (The @@ digits in the
backup file name indicate the unit address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port, which is the unit number + 10 hex.)
This backup file is also used when reading data from the Memory Card or
comparing data with a file in the Memory Card.
EtherNet/IP Unit
Memory Card
Power Supply Switch
CPU Unit
All data
• Backup
• Restore
• Compare
All setup data
Memory Card
Note
The following table shows the Units that support the simple backup function.
Confirm that the Units being used support the function.
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1D
CS1-H
Yes
Yes
---
---
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple Backup Function
Section 13-2
CPU Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CS1
No
---
---
---
---
---
---
CJ1-H
CJ1
Yes
No
CJ1M
CJ2H
CJ2M
Yes
Yes
Yes
Applications
Use the simple backup function when creating a backup data file for the entire
PLC (including the CPU Unit, EtherNet/IP Units, built-in EtherNet/IP port, and
Serial Communications Units/Boards), or when replacing all the Units.
Backup Sources and
Restore Targets
The data that was backed up with the simple backup function can be restored
to Units or built-in ports as shown in the following table. Network Configuration
designations are given for the model numbers and versions of the backup
sources and restore targets.
The model number must be the same for both the backup source and restore
target. The CIP revision must be the same or higher.
Restore target
CS1W-EIP21
CJ1W-EIP21
CJ2B-EIP21 CJ2M-EIP21 CJ1W-EIP21
(CJ2)
Backup source
Rev. 1.1
Rev. 2.1
Rev. 2.1
Rev. 2.1
Rev. 2.1
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21
Rev. 1.1
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
(See note 1.)
No
No
No
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21
Rev. 2.1
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
CJ2B-EIP21
Rev. 2.1
CJ2M-EIP21
Rev. 2.1
CJ1W-EIP21 (CJ2)
Rev. 2.1
Note
(1) Functions added for revision 2.1 will be set to their default settings.
The number of settings will be increased, so an error will occur in the
comparison after data is restored.
(2) Data backed up for revision 1.1 using a simple backup can be restored to
error will occur in the comparison. When changing the unit version, refer
to 6-2-18 Changing Devices for information on the Network Configurator
device change function.
Operating Methods
Backing Up EtherNet/IP
Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP
Port Setup Files to the
Memory Card
Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit as
shown in the following table, and press the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for 3 seconds with the Memory Card inserted into the slot. Release the
switch when the BUSY indicator lights.
DIP switch settings
SW7
SW8
ON
OFF
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Simple Backup Function
Section 13-2
EtherNet/IP Unit
All setup data
Memory Card
CPU Unit
All data
Power Supply Switch
Memory Card
Backup
This operation will create an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port set-
tings file, and write that file to the Memory Card along with the other backup
files. When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed, the MCPWR
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once and then remain lit while
data is being written. If the data is written normally, the MCPWR indicator will
turn OFF. The BUSY indicator will flash while the data is being written.
Note
The backup operation will fail if it is performed after the device parameters
were not downloaded successfully from the Network Configurator or CX-Pro-
grammer. Perform the backup operation only if the device parameters were
downloaded normally.
Restoring the EtherNet/IP
Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP
Port Setup File from the
Memory Card
(Reading and Setting the
Data in the Unit)
Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit, as
shown in the following table, and turn the power to the CPU Unit OFF and
then ON again with the Memory Card inserted into the slot.
DIP switch settings
SW7
SW8
ON
OFF
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
All data
Power ON
All setup data
Memory Card
Restore
This operation will read the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port setup
data file from the Memory Card and restore the data in the EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port.
When the power supply is ON, the MCPWR indicator on the front of the CPU
Unit will turn ON, flash once, and then remain lit while data is being read. The
BUSY indicator will flash while data is being read. After the data has been
read correctly, the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF. If the MCPWR
indicator flashes five times or if only the BUSY indicator turns OFF, it means
that an error has occurred.
Note
If the restoration from the Memory Card fails, an “H8” error will be displayed
on the 7-segment display on the front panel. If this happens, the data on the
Memory Card may not be correct. Confirm that the backup operation was
completed normally before performing the restore operation.
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Backup Tool
Section 13-3
Comparing EtherNet/IP
Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP
Port Data with the Setup
File in the Memory Card
Set pins 7 and 8 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit, as
shown in the following table, and press down the Memory Card Power Supply
Switch for 3 seconds.
DIP switch settings
SW7
SW8
OFF
OFF
Memory Card
Power Supply Switch
EtherNet/IP Unit
CPU Unit
All data
All setup data
Memory Card
Compare
This operation will compare the data in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port setup file in the Memory Card with the device parameters in the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
When the Memory Card Power Supply Switch is pressed, the MCPWR indica-
tor on the front of the CPU Unit will flash once, and then remain lit while data
is being compared. The BUSY indicator will flash while data is being com-
pared. If the data matches, the MCPWR and BUSY indicators will turn OFF. If
the MCPWR and BUSY indicators both flash, it means that the data does not
match or that an error has occurred.
Note
Data backed up for revision 1.1 using a simple backup can be restored to an
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port with revision 2.1, but an error will
occur in the comparison. When changing the unit version, refer to 6-2-18
Changing Devices for information on the Network Configurator device change
function.
13-3 Using the Backup Tool
Overview
The PLC Backup Tool of the CX-Programmer can be used to back up, com-
pare, and restore data for all Units or only specified Units in the PLC that is
connected online.
PLC Backup Tool
Specified backup
folder
Default folder:
C:\Backup\yymmdd_hhmmss
CJ2
CPU Unit with Configuration Units
(CPU Bus Units and Special I/O Units)
Restore/compare
Back up
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Backup Tool
Section 13-3
Usage
The PLC Backup Tool can be used for the following:
• Backing up all data in a PLC
• Comparing all of the data in a PLC with data that was previously backed
up in the computer
• Using the restore function to transfer all of the PLC data to a system with
the same configuration
• Transferring data to a new Unit after replacing a faulty Unit
Procedure
Select PLC Backup Tool from the CX-Programmer's Tool Menu. You can also
select OMRON - CX-One - CX-Programmer - PLC Backup Tool from the
Windows Start Menu.
Backup Menu
Button
Backup from PLC
Function
Click this button to back up data. All of the data
in the target PLC will be backed up to the com-
puter.
Compare
Click this button to compare data. The data in
the PLC can be compared to the data in a
backup file or the data in two backup files can be
compared. Any differences will be displayed.
Restore to PLC
Click this button to restore data. The data in a
backup file will be transferred to the PLC to
restore the status that existed when the data
was backed up.
Communications Settings
Button
Function
Communications Settings
Click this button to set communications condi-
tions for the target PLC. The current PLC model
and network type will be displayed.
Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for detailed procedures.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Backup Tool
Section 13-3
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECTION 14
Troubleshooting and Error Processing
This section describes error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep
the EtherNet/IP network operating properly. We recommend reading through the error processing procedures before
14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-1-1 The Network Configurator’s Device Monitor Function . . . . . . . . . .
340
340
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
347
358
364
364
364
364
365
368
368
369
369
370
371
371
14-3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4 Error Log Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4-1 Error Log Data Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4-2 Error Log Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4-3 FINS Commands for Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-4-4 Error Log Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5-1 CPU Unit's ERR/ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5-2 General Ethernet Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5-3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5-4 Tag Data Link Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-5-5 Message Timeout Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator
14-1-1 The Network Configurator’s Device Monitor Function
Connect the Network Configurator online, select the device to be checked,
right-click to display the pop-up menu, and select Monitor.
The Monitor Device Dialog Box will be displayed.
Note
If a communications error occurs during monitoring, the dialog box will con-
tinue to show the last information that was collected. To start monitoring
again, close the Monitor Device Dialog Box, and then open the dialog box
again.
Status 1 Tab Page
The information displayed on the Status 1 Tab Page shows the status of the
flags in the following allocated CIO Area words: Unit status 1, Unit status 2,
Communications status 1, Communications status 2, and Communications
status 3. There will be a check mark in the box when the corresponding flag is
ON.
In addition, the Target Node Status Field shows the connection status of the
target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the tag data link
originator. The icon will be blue if the connection is normal, or red if an error
occurred.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
Status 2 Tab Page
The Status 2 Tab Page’s Target PLC Status Field shows the status of the tar-
get node PLCs that are connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the tag data
link originator. The icon will be blue if the CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONI-
TOR mode, gray if it is in PROGRAM mode, or red if an error occurred.
The Connected Status of FINS/TCP Connections Field shows the status of
FINS/TCP connections. There will be a check mark in the box when the corre-
sponding connection is established (connected).
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
Note
The target PLC status is can be used when the PLC status is selected for all
the target sets for both originator and target connections. For those that are
not selected, the status will be grayed-out.
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
Connection Tab Page
The Connection Tab Page’s Target Node Status Field shows the connection
status of the target nodes that are connected with the EtherNet/IP Unit as the
tag data link originator. The icon will be blue if the connection is normal, or red
if an error occurred.
In addition, the Connection Status Area shows the current status each con-
nection that is set as the originator. This information can be used to identify
the cause of tag data link errors. For details on the connection status, refer to
14-3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
Error History Tab Page
The Error History Tab Page displays the error log stored in the EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. Errors that occurred in the past are recorded,
and can be cleared or saved in a computer file as required.
in other cases the records are retained. For details on the error log, refer to
14-4 Error Log Function.
Controller Error History
Tab Page
The error history of the CPU Unit for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port is displayed on this tab page. The error history shows errors that have
occurred. It can be cleared or saved in a file in the computer.
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
Refer to the operation manual of the CPU Unit for details on error information.
Tag Status Tab Page
This tab page shows if the tag settings for each tag for tag data links is set so
that data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit. The following status is dis-
played.
Ok:
Data was exchanged normally.
Processing to solve: The symbol or I/O memory address for the tag is being
resolved. When the resolution is completed normally, a
connection will be established and the data exchange
will start.
Area type error:
The area (e.g., EM bank) specified by the tag setting
does not exist in the CPU Unit. A connection will not be
established for a tag for which this error occurs.
Out of address range: The area specified by the tag setting is outside of the
area address range in the CPU Unit. A connection will
not be established for a tag for which this error occurs.
Size error:
Not exist:
Different sizes are set for the network symbol and the
tag settings. Connections will not be opened for tags
with this error.
A network symbol is not set in the symbol table in the
CPU Unit for the specified tag setting. A connection will
not be established for a tag for which this error occurs.
PLC I/F error:
There is a problem in the bus interface with the CPU
Unit. Determine the cause based on the indicators and
the error log.
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Status with the Network Configurator
Section 14-1
If the status is not “OK,” check the tag data link settings or the network symbol
settings in the symbol table in the CJ2 CPU Unit.
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Ethernet Information Tab
Page
The Ethernet Information Tab Page shows the communications status at the
communications driver level. The error counter information can be used to
confirm whether communications problems have occurred. The tag data link
information can be used to confirm characteristics such as the bandwidth
usage (pps).
14-2 Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
14-2-1 Errors Occurring at the EtherNet/IP Unit or Built-in EtherNet/IP
Port
Errors Related to CPU Unit
Data Exchange
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error Cause Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
Flashing Not lit
red
H1
Duplicate unit The same unit
Operation stops.
---
Set the unit num-
bers correctly and
restart the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or built-
in EtherNet/IP port.
number
number is set on
another Unit.
Flashing Not lit
red
H2
CPU Unit
faulty
---
Operation stops.
---
Replace the CPU
Unit if the error
recurs when the
CPU Unit is
restarted.
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
Lit red
Not lit
H3
EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP
port faulty
---
Operation stops.
---
Replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for a
built-in EtherNet/IP
port) the CPU Unit
if the error recurs
when the Unit is
restarted.
Flashing Not lit
red
H4
H6
Node address The node
Operation stops.
---
Set the node
setting error
address set on
address correctly
and restart the Eth-
erNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP
port.
the switches is
invalid (00 or
FF.)
Flashing Not lit
red
CPU Unit
faulty
---
Records the error in
the error log (time/
date all zeroes).
000F Replace the CPU
Unit if the error
recurs when the
CPU Unit is
Operation stops.
restarted.
Flashing Not lit
red
H7
H8
I/O table not
registered
The CPU Unit’s Operation stops.
I/O table is not
registered.
0006 Create the I/O
table.
Flashing ---
red
Simplebackup The simple
function
restore error
The settings of the
EtherNet/IP Unit or
---
Perform the simple
backup operation
again. If the error
recurs, replace the
Memory Card, or
EtherNet/IP Unit,
or (for a built-in
backup func-
tion’s data resto- built-in EtherNet/IP
ration failed.
port are all cleared,
unless the backup file
does not exist, a
Memory Card is not
mounted, or the PLC
model does not
EtherNet/IP port)
the CPU Unit.
match.
Flashing ---
red
H9
I/O bus error
An error
occurred while
exchangingdata link connection, it
with the CPU
• If the Unit is the orig- 000E Check and correct
inator of the tag data
the CPU Unit’s
operating environ-
ment.
stops communica-
Unit.
tions.
• If the Unit is the tar-
get of the tag data
link connection and
the PLC status is
included in the com-
munications data,
the corresponding
Target Node PLC
Error Flag will be
turned ON.
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
Flashing ---
red
HA
CPU Unit
A parity error
Records the error in
0012 Register the rout-
ing tables in the
CPU Unit again
and restart the
memory error occurred during the error log. If the
an operation routing tables were
such as reading being read, the rout-
the routing
tables.
ing tables are treated
as missing.
CPU Unit.
Replace the CPU
Unit if the error
recurs.
A memory error • If a symbol (tag
has occurred for name) is specified in
0017 Download the tag
data to the CPU
Unit again.
the tag data-
the tag data link or
base in the CPU Unit Status Area,
Replace the CPU
Unit if the error
recurs.
Unit (CJ2H/
CJ2M CPU Unit
only).
refreshing the user-
specified status area
is stopped and tag
data links will oper-
ate as follows:
• Tag data link com-
munications will be
stopped for origina-
tor connections.
• Communications will
continue for target
connection. If PLC
status is included in
the communications
data, the target node
PLC error flag for
the relevant target
node will be turned
ON.
Note Recovery is
possible from
this error. If
recovery is
achieved, the
tag data links
will be
restarted to
return to nor-
mal status.
Flashing Not lit
red
Hb
CPU Unit
event servic-
ing timeout
A timeout
Operation stops.
0011 Replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for a
built-in EtherNet/IP
port) the CPU Unit.
if the error recurs
when the Unit is
occurred during
an operation
such as reading
the routing
tables to the
CPU Unit.
restarted.
Flashing ---
red
HC
Hd
Routing table There is a logic The Unit continues
021A Create the routing
tables again.
error
error in the rout- operating without the
ing table set-
routing tables.
tings.
Flashing ---
red
I/O refresh
error
The EM Area
bank in which
the device
Tag data is not
refreshed if it is
assigned to a non-
existent area.
0347 Stop using the EM
Area bank (in
which the device
parameters were
set) as file mem-
ory, or correct the
device parameters.
parameters
were set was
converted to file
memory while
the tag data link
was operating.
Note:
Recovery is possible
for this error.
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
Flashing ---
red
HE
CPU Unit ser- Servicing from
vice monitor- the CPU Unit
• If the Unit is the orig- 0002 Check and correct
inator of the tag data
link connection, it
the CPU Unit’s
operating environ-
ment.
ing error
was not com-
pleted within the stops communica-
fixed interval.
The monitoring
time is normally
11 s.
tions.
• If the Unit is the tar-
get of the tag data
link connection and
the PLC status is
included in the com-
munications data,
the corresponding
Target Node PLC
Error Flag will be
turned ON.
Note:
Recovery is possible
for this error. When
operation is restored,
tag data link startup
processing will be
performed and opera-
tions will return to
normal.
Flashing ---
red
HF
CPU Unit
watchdog
timer error
An error
occurred in the
CPU Unit.
• If the Unit is the orig- 0001 Replace the CPU
inator of the tag data
link connection, it
stops communica-
tions.
Unit.
• If the Unit is the tar-
get of the tag data
link connection and
the PLC status is
included in the com-
munications data,
the corresponding
Target Node PLC
Error Flag will be
turned ON.
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Errors Related to the CPU
Unit
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
Flashing ---
red
HH
CPU Unit
Fatal Error
A fatal error
occurred in the
CPU Unit.
• If the Unit is the orig- 0015 Eliminate the
inator of the tag data
link connection, it
stops communica-
tions.
cause of the error
in the CPU Unit.
The tag data link
will restart auto-
matically when the
cause of the error
is eliminated.
• If the Unit is the tar-
get of the tag data
link connection and
the PLC status is
included in the com-
munications data,
the corresponding
Target Node PLC
Error Flag will be
turned ON.
---
---
---
Output OFF
Error
An Output OFF The tag data link’s
---
Turn OFF the CPU
Unit’s Output OFF
Bit (A50015). The
tag data link’s send
data will be
restored automati-
cally when this bit
is turned OFF.
(output inhibit)
condition
send data will be
cleared to 0 in accor-
occurred in the dance with the Output
CPU Unit.
OFF settings, and
data transfer will con-
tinue with that data.
Errors Related to the
Control Bits
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
---
---
C6
Multiple
Switches ON software
Two or more
The error code will be ---
displayed on the 7-
segment display for
30 seconds, and the
Multiple Switches ON
Error Flag (n+11, bit
Execute control bit
operations one at a
time.
switches were
ON simulta-
neously, or a
second soft-
ware switch was 14) will go ON.
turned ON
The error display will
before a prior
operation was
completed.
be cleared the next
time that a settings
operation is com-
pleted normally.
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Errors Related to the Tag
Data Links
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
---
---
d5
Verification
Error (target
The target regis- The Unit will periodi- ---
tered in the cally attempt to
Check the follow-
ing items:
Not
non-existent) device parame- reconnect to the tar-
record • Is the registered
ed for
ters does not
exist.
get.
node’s power
supply ON?
The Verification Error ver-
Flag (n+12, bit 00),
Unit Error Occurred
Flag (n+10, bit 00),
and Network Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 01) will go ON.
sion
2.0 or
higher
• Is the cable con-
nected?
• Is the cable dam-
aged or loose?
• Is there excessive
noise?
---
---
d6
Connection
Failed
The connection The Unit will periodi- 03D4 Correct the device
could not be
established
because device get.
parameters
(such as the
variable name
and size) did not
match in the
originator and
target, or con-
nection
cally attempt to
reconnect to the tar-
parametersettings,
and download the
device parameters
again from the Net-
work Configurator.
The Verification Error
Flag (n+12, bit 00)
and Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00) will go ON.
resources are
insufficient.
---
---
d9
Tag Data Link A timeout
Error
The Unit will periodi- 03D5 Check the follow-
ing items:
occurred in the cally attempt to
tag data link.
(Tag data was
not received
from the target
within the speci-
fied timeout
time.)
reconnect to the tar-
• Is the registered
get where the error
node’s power
occurred.
supply ON?
• Is the cable con-
nected?
• Is the cable dam-
aged or loose?
• Is there excessive
noise?
The Tag Data Link
Error Flag (n+12, bit
02), Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), and Network
Error Occurred Flag
(n+10, bit 01) will go
ON.
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Errors Related to Memory
Access
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error Cause Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
Case 1:
Access Error occurred in the The error record
Unit's non-vola- remains in RAM only.
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
Flashing ---
red
E9
Memory
An error
0602 Download the Unit
Setup from the tab
pages of the Edit
Parameters Dialog
Box of the CX-Pro-
grammer and
tile memory
Subsequent writes to
itself. This error non-volatile memory
will occur in the are all ignored. Other
following cases. than that, normal
download the
operation continues.
device parameters
from the Network
Configurator. If the
error recurs,
replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for a
built-in EtherNet/IP
port) the CPU Unit.
1. An error oc-
(Error records con-
curred while
tinue to be written to
writing the er-
RAM.)
ror log.
Case 2:
2. An error oc-
curred while
writing the
Tag data links and
message communica-
tions will continue
operating.
device pa-
rameters.
The Unit Error
Note:
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), Unit Memory
Error Flag (n+10, bit
04), and Non-volatile
Memory Error Flag
(n+14, bit 15) will turn
ON.
This error does
not indicate
checksumerrors
detected when
reading data.
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
Flashing ---
red
E8
Device Param- The I/O Area set There is an error in
021A Download the Unit
Setup from the tab
pages of the Edit
Parameters Dialog
Box of the CX-Pro-
grammer and
eters Error
in the device
parameters
the parameter set-
tings stored in the
does not exist in Unit’s non-volatile
the CPU Unit, or memory. (An error
the EM Area
was converted
to file memory.
can occur when
power is interrupted
while data is being
written to non-volatile
memory.)
download the
device parameters
from the Network
Configurator. If the
error recurs,
replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for a
built-in EtherNet/IP
port) the CPU Unit.
A checksum
error or logic
error was
The Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00) and Invalid
Communications
Parameter Flag
(n+12, bit 04) will go
ON.
detected in the
parameters.
The Unit was
mounted to a
different PLC
(e.g., from CJ1
to CJ2) after the
Unit settings
were made.
If the ladder pro-
gram uses the
OUT instruction to
turn ON the CPU
Bus Unit Restart
Bit, change the
OUT instruction to
the SET instruc-
tion and download
the parameters
again.
Flashing ---
red
EA
IP Advanced
Settings Error
03D1 Identify the error
log data, correct
the settings, and
then download the
Unit Setup from the
tab pages of the
Edit Parameters
Dialog Box of the
CX-Programmer
Flashing ---
red
F2
EthernetBasic
Settings Error
03D0 Download the set-
tings from the TCP/
IP or Ethernet Tab
Pages of the Edit
Parameters Dialog
Box of the CX-Pro-
grammer or down-
load the TCP/IP
settings from the
Network Configu-
rator.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Errors Related to the
Network
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Indicator
Error Cause Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
Ethernet Link The link with the • The Unit will be
log
(hex)
MS
NS
7-segment
---
---
E1
03D3 Check the follow-
ing items:
Not Detected switching hub
could not be
offline and unable to
communicate.Errors
will be returned to all
communications
requests.
• Data exchanges
(refreshing) will con-
tinue with the CPU
Unit.
• Is the cable con-
nected?
• Is the cable dam-
aged or loose?
• Is there excessive
noise?
detected.
Note This error
will not
occur
when
data links
are not
set for
The Unit Error
version
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), Network Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 01), and Link OFF
Error Flag (n+10, bit
09) will go ON.
2.0 or
higher.
The Link Status Flag
(n+13, bit 14) will go
OFF.
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
---
---
E3
Server Con-
nection Error occurred in
An error
The DNS Server
Error Flag (n+14, bit
05) will turn ON.
03C4 Perform one of the
following:
De-
communica-
tions with the
DNS server.
tails:
00xx
• Correct the DNS
server settings.
• Check the com-
munications path
(EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in
EtherNet/IP port,
cable connec-
tions, hubs, rout-
ers, and servers)
and correct any
problems.
An error
Case 1:
03C4 Perform one of the
occurred with
the BOOTP
server.
The Unit will continue
sending requests to
the BOOTP server
until there is a
following:
De-
tails:
06xx
• Correct the
BOOTP server
settings.
1. There was no
response
response. In the
meantime, the Unit
will be offline and
unable to communi-
cate. Errors will be
returned to all com-
municationsrequests.
Data exchanges
(refreshing) will con-
tinue with the CPU
Unit.
• Check the com-
munications path
(EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in
EtherNet/IP port,
cable connec-
tions, hubs, rout-
ers, and servers)
and correct any
problems.
from the
BOOTP serv-
er.
2. The BOOTP
server at-
tempted to
set an invalid
IP address in
the EtherNet/
IP Unit or
Case 2:
built-in Ether-
The Unit will operate
with the default IP
address
Net/IP port.
(192.168.250.node_
address).
The Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), Network Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 01), and BOOTP
Server Error Flag
(n+14, bit 10) will go
ON.
An error
The SNTP Server
Error Flag (n+14, bit
11) will turn ON.
03C4 Perform one of the
occurred in
communica-
tions with the
STNP server.
following:
De-
tails:
03xx
• Correct the SNTP
server settings.
• Check the com-
munications path
(EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in
EtherNet/IP port,
cable connec-
tions, hubs, rout-
ers, and servers)
and correct any
problems.
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the LED Indicators and Display for Troubleshooting
Section 14-2
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
---
---
E3
Server Con-
An error
---
03C4 Perform one of the
nection Error occurred in
transmission to
the SNMP trap.
following:
De-
tails:
07xx
• Correct the
SNMP trap set-
tings.
• Check the com-
munications path
(EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port, cable
connections,
hubs, routers, and
servers) and cor-
rect any prob-
lems.
---
Lit red
F0
IP Address
Duplication
The IP address • The Unit will be
of the EtherNet/ offline and unable to
0211 Check the IP
addresses set on
IP Unit or built-in communicate.Errors
EtherNet/IP port will be returned to all
other nodes.
Restart the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or built-
in EtherNet/IP port
after correcting the
IP address settings
to eliminate dupli-
cations.
is the same as
the IP address
set for another
node.
communications
requests.
• Data exchanges
(refreshing) will con-
tinue with the CPU
Unit.
The Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), Network Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 01), and IP
Address Duplication
Error Flag (n+10, bit
06) will go ON.
Flashing ---
red
F3
Address mis- The target IP
match
• Operation will con-
---
Check the IP
address conver- tinue with the set IP
sion method is address as the local
set to Automatic IP address.
address and the
Node Address Set-
ting Switch setting.
generation, but
the last byte of
the local IP
The Address Mis-
match Flag (n+14,
bit 14) will turn ON.
address does
not match the
value set on the
Node Address
Setting Switch.
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Indicator
NS
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
(hex)
MS
7-segment
Flashing Not lit
red
F4
Communica-
tions Control- occurred in the
ler Error
An error
• The Unit will be
020F Replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for
the built-in Ether-
Net/IP port) the
CPU Unit if the
error recurs when
the Unit is
offline and unable to
communicate.Errors
will be returned to all
communications
Communica-
tions Controller
in the EtherNet/
IP Unit or built-in requests.
EtherNet/IP
port.
• Data exchanges
(refreshing) will con-
tinue with the CPU
Unit.
restarted.
The Unit Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 00), Network Error
Occurred Flag (n+10,
bit 01), and Commu-
nications Controller
Error Flag (n+10, bit
05) will go ON.
Flashing ---
red
C8
Node Address The Node
Operation will con-
---
Restart the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or built-
in EtherNet/IP port
after setting the
correct node
Setting
Address Setting tinue.
Changed Dur- Switch was
ing Operation changed during Changed During
The IP Address
operation.
Operation Flag (n+11,
bit 02) will turn ON.
address.
Errors Related to the Unit
Indicator
The 7-segment display alternates between the node address and error code.
Error
Cause
Unit operation (Flag Error Countermeasure
status)
log
MS
NS
7-segment
(hex)
Lit red
Not lit
---
Special Unit
Error
An error
Records the error in
the error log.
0601 Restart the CPU
Unit.
occurred in a
Special I/O Unit
or CPU Bus
Unit.
Operation stops.
Replace the Ether-
Net/IP Unit or (for
the built-in Ether-
Net/IP port) the
CPU Unit if the
error recurs.
14-3 Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
This section explains how to identify and correct errors based on the tag data
tion Tab Page of the Network Configurator’s Monitor Device Window. For
details, refer to 14-1-1 The Network Configurator’s Device Monitor Function.
Note
1. The connection status has the same meaning as the Connection Manag-
er’s General and Additional error response codes, as defined in the CIP
specifications.
2. The Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA) can be contacted at
the following address to obtain a copy of the CIP specifications.
ODVA Headquarters
4220 Varsity Drive, Suite A
Ann Arbor, Michigan 48108-5006
USA
TEL: 1 734-975-8840
FAX: 1 734-922-0027
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Email [email protected]
WEB www.odva.org
The following table shows the possible originator/target configurations.
Configuration
Originator
Target
Configuration 1
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-
CPU3@
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-
CPU3@
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-
CPU3@
Other company’s device
Other company’s device
CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21,
CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP, CJ2M-
CPU3@
The following table shows the likely causes of the errors causes for each con-
figuration and connection status (code).
Connection status
General Additional
Source of error
Handling
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
Status
(hex)
Status
(hex)
00
0000
Normal status code:
---
---
---
The connection has been
opened and the tag data link is
communicating normally.
01
0100
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
Attempted to open multiple con-
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer for details on
tions.
(Contact the origina-
tor device’s manufac-
nections at the same connec-
tion.
preventing the error turer for details on
from occurring in the preventing the error
future.)
from occurring in the
future.)
01
01
0103
0106
Error code returned from target: This error does
Confirm that the tar- Confirm that the
not occur.
get supports Class
1.
originator supports
Class 1.
Attempted to open a connection
with an unsupported transport
class.
Duplicate consumers:
If the tag data link Depends on the tar- If the tag data link is
is stopped or get’s specifications. stopped or started,
started, this error (Contact the target
may occur accord- device’s manufac-
ing to the timing, turer.)
but the system will
Attempted to open multiple con-
nections for single-consumer
data.
this error may occur
according to the tim-
ing, but the system
will recover automat-
ically.
recover automati-
cally.
01
01
0107
0108
Error code returned from target: This error does
This error does not
occur.
This is not an error
because the connec-
tion is already
closed.
not occur.
Attempted to close a connec-
tion, but that connection was
already closed.
Error code returned from target: This error does
Check which con-
nection types can be nection types can be
used by the target. used by the origina-
Check which con-
not occur.
Attempted to open a connection
with an unsupported connection
type.
(Contact the manu- tor.
facturer.)
(An error will occur if
a connection other
point-to-point can be than multicast or
set. point-to-point is set.)
Only multicast and
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Connection status
General Additional
Source of error
Handling
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
Status
(hex)
Status
(hex)
01
0109
Error code returned from target: Check the connection sizes set in the originator and target.
The connection size settings
are different in the originator
and target.
01
0110
Error code returned from target: Check whether
Depends on the tar- Check whether the
the tag data link is get’s specifications. tag data link is
stopped at the tar- (Contact the target
get. (Restart the device’s manufac-
tag data link com- turer.)
munications with
The target was unable to open
the connection, because of its
operating status, such as down-
loading settings.
stopped at the origi-
nator. (Restart the
tag data link commu-
nications with the
control bit.)
the control bit.)
01
01
0111
0113
Error code returned from target: This error does
Check the target’s
RPI setting specifica- RPI setting to 10
tions.
Set the originator’s
not occur.
The RPI was set to a value that
seconds or less.
exceeds the specifications.
Error code generated by origi-
nator or returned from target:
Check the con-
nection settings
(number of con-
nections) at the
originator and tar- target.
get.
Check the connec-
tion settings (number tion settings (number
of connections) at
the originator and
Check the connec-
of connections) at
the originator and
target.
Attempted to open more con-
nections than allowed by the
specifications (CJ2M: 32, other
CPU Units: 256).
Check the connec-
Check the connec-
tion specifications for tion specifications for
another company’s
devices.
another company’s
devices.
01
01
01
01
0114
0115
0116
0117
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Check the origina-
get’s specifications. tor’s connection set-
not occur.
The Vendor ID and Product
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tings.
Code did not match when open-
ing connection.
Confirm that the tar-
get device’s EDS file
is correct.
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Check the origina-
get’s specifications. tor’s connection set-
not occur.
The Product Type did not match
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tings.
when opening connection.
Confirm that the tar-
get device’s EDS file
is correct.
Error code returned from target: Check the major
Depends on the tar- Check the origina-
get’s specifications. tor’s connection set-
and minor revi-
sions set for the
target device and device’s manufac-
connection. If nec- turer.)
The Major/Minor Revisions did
not match when opening con-
nection.
(Contact the target
tings.
essary, obtain the
EDS file and set it
again.
Confirm that the tar-
get device’s EDS file
is correct.
Error code returned from target: Check whether
Depends on the tar- Check the origina-
the originator and get’s specifications. tor’s connection set-
The tag set specified in the con-
nection’s target variables does
not exist.
target tag sets
and tags are set
correctly.
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tings. Check whether
the target’s tag sets
and tags are set cor-
rectly.
CJ2 CPU Units
Only: Check sym-
bol settings in the
CPU Unit.
CJ2 CPU Units Only:
Check symbol set-
tings in the CPU
Unit.
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Connection status
General Additional
Source of error
Handling
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
Status
(hex)
Status
(hex)
01
011A
Error code returned from origi- An unexpected
nator:
An unexpected net- Follow the operating
network load may work load may have specifications for the
have been been received. Use originator. (Consult
received. Use the the Network Configu- the originator manu-
Network Configu- rator Device Monitor facturer.)
rator Device Moni- or the Ethernet Tab
Connection could not be estab-
lished because the buffer was
full due to high traffic.
tor or the Ethernet Page to check the
Tab Page to check bandwidth usage,
the bandwidth
usage, and cor-
rect the load. If
there are places
and correct the load.
If there are places
where broadcast
storms occur, such
where broadcast as loop connections
storms occur, in the network con-
such as loop con- nection format, then
nections in the
network connec-
tion format, then
correct them.
correct them.
01
01
011B
0203
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Set the originator’s
get’s specifications. RPI setting to 0.5 ms
not occur.
The RPI was set to a value that
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
or greater.
is below the specifications.
Error code returned from target: Tag data link communications from the target timed out. Check
the power supply and cable wiring of the devices in the commu-
The connection timed out.
nications path, including the target and switches. If performance
has dropped due to heavy load, change the performance set-
tings. For example, increase the timeout time or RPI setting.
01
01
0204
0205
Error code returned from target: There was no response from the target. Check the power supply
and cable wiring of the devices in the communications path,
including the target and switches.
cess timed out.
The connection-opening pro-
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There was a parameter error in
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
the frame used to open the con-
nection.
01
0302
Error occurred at originator or
error code returned from target: tor and target con- connection settings and target connec-
Check the origina- Check the target’s
Check the originator
nection settings
(number of con-
nections and
RPI).
(number of connec- tion settings (number
The tag data link’s allowable
bandwidth (pps) was exceeded.
tions and RPI).
of connections and
RPI).
01
01
01
0311
0312
0315
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There was a parameter error in
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
the frame used to open the con-
nection.
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There was a parameter error in
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
the frame used to open the con-
nection.
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There was a parameter error in
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
the frame used to open the con-
nection.
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Connection status
General Additional
Source of error
Handling
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
Status
(hex)
Status
(hex)
01
0316
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There was a parameter error in
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
the frame used to close the con-
nection.
01
031C
Error code generated in origina- This error does
The originator gener- Depends on the orig-
ates this code when inator’s specifica-
tor:
not occur.
an unsupported
response code is
returned from the
target in reply to a
connection-opening
request.
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
Some other error occurred.
08
---
Error code returned from target: This error does
Depends on the tar- Depends on the orig-
get’s specifications. inator’s specifica-
not occur.
There is no Forward Open or
(Contact the target
device’s manufac-
turer.)
tions. (Contact the
originator device’s
manufacturer.)
Large Forward Open service in
the target device.
D0
0001
Error code generated in origina- The connection
The meaning of this Depends on the orig-
error code is defined inator’s specifica-
tor:
was stopped
because the Tag by each vendor, so it tions. (Contact the
Data Link Stop Bit depends on the tar- originator device’s
was turned ON, or get’s specifications. manufacturer.)
the settings data (Contact the target
The connection operation is
stopped.
is being down-
loaded.
device’s manufac-
turer.)
Either turn ON the
Tag Data Link
Start Bit, or wait
until the settings
data has been
downloaded.
Includes Control-
ler stop errors,
Unit failure, and
EM bank files at
the refresh desti-
nation. To handle
these errors, refer
to 14-2-1Errors
Occurring at the
EtherNet/IP Unit
or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port.
D0
0002
Error code generated in origina- Wait until the
The meaning of this Depends on the orig-
tor:
opening process- error code is defined inator’s specifica-
ing is completed. by each vendor, so it tions. (Contact the
depends on the tar- originator device’s
get’s specifications. manufacturer.)
(Contact the target
The connection is being opened
(opening processing in
progress).
device’s manufac-
turer.)
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connection Status Codes and Error Processing
Section 14-3
Connection status
General Additional
Source of error
Handling
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 3
Status
(hex)
Status
(hex)
Unique OMRON Error Codes
01
0810
Error code returned from target: This error may
The meaning of this The meaning of this
error code is defined error code is defined
by each vendor, so it by each vendor, so it
depends on the tar- depends on the origi-
occur if the CPU
Unit’s cycle time
was long when
opening the con- get’s specifications. nator’s specifica-
nection, the speci- (Contact the target
fied EM bank was device’s manufac-
New data could not be obtained
from the CPU Unit when open-
ing connection. (The Unit will
automatically retry, and attempt
tions.
to open the connection again.)
(Contact the origina-
tor device’s manufac-
turer.)
converted to file
memory, or some
problem in the
PLC caused the
PLC to stop.
turer.)
If the cycle time
was too long, the
problem will be
resolved automat-
ically. If the EM
bank is set as file
memory, change
the storage loca-
tion for the tag
data. If the PLC
has stopped,
identify and cor-
rect the error.
If the PLC system
is stopped, iden-
tify the cause of
the error from the
CPU Unit error
data.
01
0811
Error code generated in origina- This error may
The meaning of this The meaning of this
error code is defined error code is defined
by each vendor, so it by each vendor, so it
depends on the tar- depends on the origi-
tor:
occur if the CPU
Unit’s cycle time
was long when
New data could not be obtained
from the CPU Unit when open-
ing connection. (The Unit will
automatically retry, and attempt
to open the connection again.)
opening the con- get’s specifications. nator’s specifica-
nection, or the
(Contact the target
tions.
specified EM bank device’s manufac-
was converted to turer.)
file memory.
(Contact the origina-
tor device’s manufac-
turer.)
If the cycle time
was too long, the
problem will be
resolved automat-
ically. If the EM
bank is set as file
memory, change
the storage loca-
tion for the tag
data.
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log Function
Section 14-4
14-4 Error Log Function
Errors detected by the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port are stored
in the error log along with the date and time of their occurrence. The error log
can be read and cleared from the Network Configurator.
Some error log records are cleared when the CPU Unit’s power goes OFF,
and other records are not cleared.
14-4-1 Error Log Data Specifications
Each error is recorded as one record in the error log.
Item
Record length
Number of records
Data type
Specifications
10 bytes/record
64 records max.
Binary (time information: BCD)
Structure of Each Record
Bit 15
Bit 00
Error code
Detail code
Seconds
Hour
Minutes
Day of month
Year
Month
14-4-2 Error Log Registration
Error Log Storage Area
When an error occurs, information on the error and the time stamp are stored
in the Unit’s internal RAM as an error log record. Serious errors are recorded
in non-volatile EEPROM as well as RAM. The time read from the CPU Unit
during cyclic servicing is used for the time stamp.
The error log records stored in EEPROM are copied to RAM when the Unit
starts operating, so these records are retained even when the Unit’s power is
turned OFF or the Unit is restarted.
When the error log is read, the error log records in RAM are read. When the
error log is cleared, the error log records in both RAM and EEPROM are
erased.
Error Log Overflows
The error log can record up to 64 records. If another error occurs when the log
is full, the oldest record will be erased to make room for the new error record.
Power Interruptions when
Saving to EEPROM
If the power supply is interrupted or the Unit is restarted while the error log is
being written to EEPROM, the error log may be corrupted. When the Unit
starts, it performs a checksum test on the error log data read from EEPROM
to detect corrupted data.
14-4-3 FINS Commands for Error Logs
The following FINS commands can be sent to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port to read or clear the error log.
Command code Function name
MRC SRC
21
02
03
ERROR LOG READ
For details, refer to Appendix E FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP
Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log Function
Section 14-4
14-4-4 Error Log Error Codes
Error
code
(hex)
Error
Detail code
Saved in
EEPROM
First byte
Second byte
0001
0002
0006
CPU Unit watchdog timer error
CPU Unit service monitoring error
Other CPU error
00 hex
Monitoring time (ms)
00 hex
Yes
Yes
Yes
Bit D11: Unit not in Registered I/O Tables
(Other bits are reserved for system use.)
000E
000F
0011
0012
I/O bus error
00 hex
00 hex
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU Unit initialization error
Event timed out
00 hex
00 hex
MRC (main command)
01 hex: Read error
02 hex: Write error
SRC (subcommand)
03 hex: Routing tables
CPU Unit memory error
50 hex: CPU Bus Unit
Area (CIO or DM)
0015
0017
0103
0105
0107
0108
CPU Unit fatal error
00 hex
00 hex
00 hex
00 hex
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Tag database error
Resend count exceeded (send failed)
Node address setting error (send failed)
Remote node not in network (send failed)
FINS Command:
Bit 15: OFF
Bits 08 to 14: Source network address
Bits 00 to 07: Source node address
No Unit with specified unit address (send
failed)
FINS Response:
Bit 15: ON
Bits 08 to 14: Destination network address
Bits 00 to 07: Destination node address
010B
010D
CPU Unit error (send failed)
No
No
Destination address not in routing tables
(send failed)
CIP Frame:
FFFF
010E
010F
0110
0111
0112
0117
0118
0119
0120
0122
Not registered in routing tables (send failed)
Routing table error (send failed)
Too many relay points (send failed)
Command too long (send failed)
Header error (send failed)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Internal buffers full; packet discarded
Illegal packet discarded
Local node busy (send failed)
Unexpected routing error
Service not supported in current mode;
packet discarded
0123
0124
Internal send buffer full; packet discarded
No
No
Maximum frame size exceeded; routing
failed
0125
020F
0211
021A
Response timeout; packet discarded
Communications controller error
IP address duplication
No
00 hex
01 hex
Yes
Port number (always 02)
00 hex
Lower byte of IP address Yes
Logic error in setting table
02 hex: Network parame- Yes
ters
03 hex: Routing tables
04 hex: Unit Setup
0E hex: Unit name
12 hex: Status area layout
setting error
13 hex: Status area layout
setting verification error
15 hex: Installation in a
PLC of another series
(e.g., from CJ1 to CJ2)
after setting the Unit.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log Function
Section 14-4
Error
code
(hex)
Error
Detail code
Saved in
EEPROM
First byte
Second byte
0300
Parameter error; packet discarded
FINS Command:
Bit 15: OFF
No
Bits 08 to 14: Source network address
Bits 00 to 07: Source node address
FINS Response:
Bit 15: ON
Bits 08 to 14: Destination network address
Bits 00 to 07: Destination node address
CIP Frame:
FFFF
0347
03C0
I/O refreshing error
00 hex
00 hex
Yes
No
FINS/TCP setting error
01 to 10 hex:
Connection number
01: Automatically allo-
cated FINS node address
duplication
02: Destination IP address
error
03: Destination port num-
ber error
03C1
Server settings error
00 hex: DNS
01: IP address
02: Host name
03: Port number
04: Other parameter
No
03 hex: SNTP
04 hex: FTP
06 hex: BOOTP
07 hex: SNMP
08 hex: SNMP Trap
09 hex: FINS/UDP
0A hex: FINS/TCP
03C2
FINS/TCP packet discarded
01 to 10 hex:
Connection number
02 hex: Reopening
because remote node
closed
No
03 hex: Reopening
because of reception error
04 hex: Reopening
because of transmission
error
05 hex: Reopening
because RST received
from remote node
06 hex: Reopening
because of no keep-alive
response
07 hex: Illegal FINS/TCP
procedure
08 hex: Insufficient mem-
ory during server process-
ing
09 hex: Insufficient mem-
ory during client process-
ing
0A hex: Insufficient mem-
ory during node switching
03C3
FINS/UDP packet discarded
00 hex
01 to FE hex:
Source node address
No
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Log Function
Section 14-4
Error
code
(hex)
Error
Detail code
Saved in
EEPROM
First byte
00 hex: DNS
Second byte
03C4
Server connection error
01 hex: Specified host
does not exist
No
03 hex: SNTP
04 hex: FTP
02 hex: No such service at
specified host
06 hex: BOOTP
07 hex: SNMP
08 hex: SNMP Trap
03 hex: Timeout
06 hex: Host name resolu-
tion error
07 hex: Transmission error
08 hex: Reception error
09 hex: Other error
0A hex: Obtaining IP
address error
03C6
Clock write error
0001: The clock time
could not be updated
because a error occurred
in the CPU Unit.
Clear the error from the
CPU Unit.
No
0002: The clock time
could not be updated
Automatic Clock Adjust-
because the CPU Unit or ment Function and check
operating mode does not the application conditions.
support this function.
03D0
Ethernet basic setting error
01 hex: Ethernet setting
error
01 hex: Checksum error
Yes
11 hex: Inconsistent set-
tings
12 hex: Specified baud
rate is not supported.
02 hex: TCP/IP basic set- 01 hex: Checksum error
ting error
11 hex: Invalid IP address
12 hex: Invalid subnet
mask
13 hex: Invalid default
gateway address
14 hex: Invalid primary
name server
15 hex: Invalid secondary
name server
16 hex: Invalid domain
name
17 hex: Invalid host name
03D1
Ethernet advanced setting error
02 hex: FINS setting error 01 hex: Checksum error
Yes
10 hex: Invalid IP router
table
11 hex: Invalid FINS/UDP
setting
12 hex: Invalid FINS/TCP
setting
13 hex: Invalid FTP setting
14 hex: Invalid SNTP set-
ting
15 hex: Invalid SNMP set-
ting
16 hex: Invalid SNMP trap
setting
03D2
Packet discarded.
01 hex
00 hex
No
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 14-5
Error
code
(hex)
Error
Detail code
Saved in
EEPROM
First byte
Second byte
03D3
03D4
Link OFF error
00 hex
00 hex
No
Connection instance num- Lower byte of IP address No
ber (0 to 255)
Connection Status Codes and Error
Processing.
This error will not be stored when a
target node is missing for version 2.0
or higher.
03D5
0601
0602
Tag data link error
00 hex
Lower byte of IP address No
Yes
CPU Bus Unit error
Variable
CPU Bus Unit memory error
01: Read error
02: Write error
02 hex: Network parame- Yes
ter
(See
note.)
06 hex: Error log
09 hex: Identity data
0E hex: Unit name
0F hex: Ethernet basic
setting
10 hex: Ethernet
advanced setting
11 hex: MAC address
12 hex: Status area layout
setting
14 hex: Term Tag address
resolution memory write
error
Note
If a memory error occurs in the error log area of EEPROM, the record will not
be stored in EEPROM.
14-5 Troubleshooting
14-5-1 CPU Unit's ERR/ALM Indicator Lit or Flashing
Use the following table to troubleshoot the system when the CPU Unit’s ERR/
ALM indicator is lit or flashing when the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port is mounted.
An I/O verification • Confirm that the Unit is connected properly.
error occurred.
• Check the I/O table with the I/O Table Verification operation
and correct it if necessary. After correcting it, perform the I/O
Table Create operation.
A CPU Bus Unit
setting error
occurred.
• The CPU Bus Unit model registered in the I/O tables does
not match the model of CPU Bus Unit actually mounted.
Check the I/O tables with the I/O Table Verification operation
and correct it if necessary.
After correcting the I/O tables, perform the I/O Table Create
operation.
A CPU Bus error
occurred.
• Confirm that the Unit is connected properly.
• Restart the Unit. Replace the Unit if it doesn’t restart.
An I/O Bus error
occurred.
• Confirm that the Unit is connected properly.
• Restart the Unit. Replace the Unit if it doesn’t restart.
For details, refer to the CPU Unit’s Operation Manual.
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 14-5
14-5-2 General Ethernet Problems
The 100M and 10M • Confirm that the cable being used has the correct ratings.
Indicators on the
EtherNet/IP Unit or
CPU Unit are both
OFF.
• Confirm that the cable is properly connected to the switching
hub, and the hub’s power supply is ON. (The 7-segment dis-
play will indicate error E1.)
• If the switching hub’s settings can be changed, confirm that
the Ethernet link settings are the same as the settings for the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. (For details,
refer to 3-4 Network Installation.)
The NS Indicator
on the EtherNet/IP
Unit or CPU Unit is
lit red.
• Check whether the same IP address is set on another node.
(The 7-segment display will indicate error F0.)
14-5-3 Tag Data Links Fail to Start
Use the following table to troubleshoot tag data links when the Tag Data Links
Operating Flag (bit 15 in Communications Status 1) does not go ON.
The indicators on
the EtherNet/IP Unit
or CPU Unit are all
OFF.
• Check whether power is being supplied to the PLC.
• Check whether the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port is mounted in the Backplane correctly.
• If a watchdog timer (WDT) error has occurred in the PLC, fol-
low the procedures described in the PLC’s Operation Man-
ual to correct the problem.
• All of the indicators for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in Ether-
Net/IP port will be OFF if a CPU Bus Unit error has occurred.
Check for a CPU Bus Unit error.
• Restart the Unit. Replace the Unit if it doesn’t restart.
The MS indicator
on the EtherNet/IP
Unit or CPU Unit is
lit green, but the NS
indicator remains
OFF.
• If the EtherNet/IP Unit's 7-segment display is displaying an
error code, refer to the tables in 14-2 Using the LED Indica-
tors and Display for Troubleshooting.
• Confirm that the cables are properly connected to the
switching hub and the power supply to the switching hub is
ON.
• If data is being restored by the simple backup function, wait
until the restore operation is completed.
The MS indicator
on the EtherNet/IP
Unit or CPU Unit is
lit green, but the NS
indicator contin-
ues to flash green.
• If the EtherNet/IP Unit's 7-segment display is displaying an
error code, refer to the tables in 14-2 Using the LED Indica-
tors and Display for Troubleshooting.
• The NS indicator will continue to flash green if the tag data
link settings have not been set in the Unit. Use the Network
Configurator to set the tag data link settings in the Unit, and
then restart the Unit.
is lit green on the
EtherNet/IP Unit or
CPU Unit, but the
NS indicator con-
tinues to flash red.
based on the tables in 14-2 Using the LED Indicators and
Display for Troubleshooting, and eliminate the cause of the
error.
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Section 14-5
14-5-4 Tag Data Link Problems
The tag data isn't
simultaneous.
Observe the following precautions when writing application
programs:
• Maintain the simultaneity of data in connection-units between
the PLC and EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• If another company's device is being used, refer to that
device's user's manual for details.
At startup, the
received data is
OFF unexpectedly.
• When received data is used in the ladder program, use the
All Tag Data Links Operating Flag in Communications Status
1, or the Target Node PLC Operating Flag as a condition. If
the Target Node PLC Operating Flag is used, the PLC status
must be included in tag sets of both the sending and receiv-
ing nodes.
• If the Output OFF function (Output Inhibit) is enabled in the
output (produce) tag settings, all of the output data will be
OFF if a fatal error occurs in the CPU Unit or the Output OFF
Bit is turned ON. Check the status of the output (producer)
PLC.
The tag data links
• Check whether the baud rate is set to 10 Mbps, or a 10M or
start and stop com- 100M repeater hub is being used. The tag data link perfor-
municating inter-
mittently.
mance is based on the use of switching hubs. The bandwidth
listed in the specifications (CJ2M: 3,000 pps, other CPU
to full-duplex at 100 Mbps.
• Refer to 14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator
for details on checking the error counters on the Monitor
Device Window’s Ethernet Information Tab Page. The error
and discarded packet counters indicate problems such as
noise in the communications path, the use of substandard
cables, damaged cables/connectors, loose connectors,
abnormally high communications load, or incorrect wiring
(loops) in the switching hub wiring.
• Contact the switching hub manufacturer to determine
whether there are any problems with the transfer capacity of
the switching hubs in the communications path. If switching
hubs are arranged in a cascade connection, there may be a
heavy load concentrated at a mid-level switching hub. In the
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port itself, processing
is performed with a higher priority than message communi-
cations, so specifications provide for a 3,000 pps bandwidth
in tag data link performance only.
• Refer to 14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator
for details on checking the connection status on the Monitor
which can be identified in the tables in 14-3 Connection Sta-
tus Codes and Error Processing.
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes
Section 14-6
14-5-5 Message Timeout Problems
Timeout errors
• When there is a high load in the tag data link, and the CPU
Unit’s cycle time is relatively long or there are messages
coming in from many nodes, the message service response
time may be delayed and messages may be discarded occa-
sionally.
occur frequently in
message services
(CIP UCMM, CIP
Class 3, or FINS).
• In this case, the communications load must be reduced by
increasing (slowing) the tag data link’s RPI, reducing the
message load, or increasing the timeout value.
Monitor Device Window’s Ethernet Information Tab Page.
Refer to 14-1 Checking Status with the Network Configurator
for details.
• The error log error codes that indicate discarded messages
(insufficient memory) due to heavy communications loads
@@09, or @@0A), 03C3, and 03D2. Refer to 14-1 Checking
Status with the Network Configurator for details on reading
• For information on preventing high loads in FINS communi-
cations, refer to 8-7 Precautions on High Traffic in FINS
Communications.
14-6 Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes
The cause of errors that occur when using the SEND(090), RECV(098), or
CMND(490) instructions can be identified from the response codes. (Refer to
the description of Communications Port Completion Codes in 8-6-4 Writing
Programs for the storage locations of response codes generated by the
SEND(090), RECV(098), or CMND(490) instructions.)
This section describes the completion codes produced by EtherNet/IP Units.
For details on completion codes produced by CPU Units, other CPU Bus
Units, or computers equipped with FINS services, refer to the device’s opera-
tion manual.
th th
th
The 6 , 7 , and 15 bits of the response codes have specific functions. The
th
6 bit will be ON when a non-fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the remote
th
node; the 7 bit will be ON when a fatal error has occurred in the PLC at the
th
remote node; and the 15 bit will be ON when a network relay error has
occurred. The following table explains the meaning of the completion codes.
First byte
Second byte
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Main response code (RES)
Sub response code (SRES)
PLC Fatal Error Flag
Relay Error Flag
PLC Non-fatal Error Flag
Main response
code
Sub response code
Value and meaning
Item to check
Likely cause
Corrective action
Value and
meaning
00 Normal
completion
00 ---
---
---
---
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes
Section 14-6
Main response
code
Sub response code
Value and meaning
Item to check
Likely cause
Corrective action
Value and
meaning
01 Local node 03 Local node send
---
Lack of available space in The load (traffic) on the Ether-
error
error
internal buffers
net Unit is too heavy. Check
your user applications.
05 Node address set-
ting error
Local IP
address
The network cannot be
used because the IP
address setting is incor-
rect.
Correct the local IP address.
07 Local node busy
(send failed)
System load
Lack of available space in The load (traffic) on the Ether-
internal buffers
net Unit is too heavy. Check
your user applications.
02 Remote
node error
01 Remote node not in IP address
IP address of remote
node not set correctly.
Set IP address of remote
node into IP address table
and, if internetwork transmis-
sion is required, into the IP
router table.
network
table and IP
router table
02 No Unit with speci-
fied unit address
Instruction’s
control data
There is no Unit with the Check the remote node's unit
specified unit address. address.
05 Response timeout
Transfer condi- Message packet was cor- Increase the number of trans-
tions
rupted by transmission
error.
mit retry attempts.
(Use FINS
status read
commands.)
Instruction’s
control data
The response monitoring Set a longer response moni-
time is too short.
toring time.
Read the error The transmission frame
log.
Read out the error log and
may be corrupted or the correct the system as
internal reception buffer
full.
required.
03 Unit error
(Controller
error)
01 Communications
controller error
Affected con- Error occurred in the
Take corrective action, refer-
troller’s ERC
indicator
communications control- ring to troubleshooting proce-
ler. dures in this section.
02 PLC error
Affected
node’s LED
CPU Unit error occurred Clear the error in the CPU
in the PLC at the remote Unit. (Refer to the PLC's oper-
indicators
node.
ation manuals.)
04 Unit number setting Unit number
error
The unit number setting
is incorrect.
Confirm that the unit number
set on the switch is within the
specified range and that the
same unit number is not used
twice in the same network.
04 Service not 01 Unsupported com-
Command
code
The specified command Check the command code.
code is not supported by
supported
mand
the destination Unit.
FINS header
frame length
A short frame (4 bytes) is The EtherNet/IP Unit does not
being used for the FINS support short headers.
header frame.
05 Routing
error
01 Routing table setting Routing tables Remote node is not set in Set the destination address in
error
the routing tables.
the routing tables.
02 Routing tables not
registered
Routing tables Destination is unknown
because there are no
Set routing tables at the local
node, remote node, and any
relay nodes.
routing tables.
03 Routing table error
Routing tables Routing table error
Set the routing tables cor-
rectly.
04 Too many relay
points
Network con- The maximum number of Redesign the network, or
figuration
network levels (3) was
exceeded in the com-
mand.
reconsider the routing tables
to reduce the number of relay
nodes in the command.
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes
Section 14-6
Main response
code
Sub response code
Value and meaning
Item to check
Likely cause
Corrective action
Value and
meaning
10 Command 01 Command too long
format error
Command
data
The command is too
long.
Check the command format of
the command and set it cor-
rectly.
The command exceeded
1,473 bytes when broad-
casting.
02 Command too short Command
The command is too
short.
data
03 Number of items
does not match
Command
data
The specified number of Check the number of items
items does not match the and amount of data, and
amount of data
amount of write data.
make them agree.
05 Header parameter
error
Command
data
Data for another node on Check the command format of
the same network was
received from the net-
work.
the command and set it cor-
rectly.
Attempted to send
response data for a
broadcast address.
11 Parameter 00 Parameter error
error
Parameters in The specified parame-
Check the command data and
set the parameters correctly.
command
data
ters are incorrect.
The UDP/TCP socket
number was not within
the proper range.
Be sure the socket number is
between 1 and 8.
The local UDP port num- Set the local UDP port num-
ber might be set to 0.
ber correctly.
01 No data area code
Variable type A correct memory area
Check the command’s data
in command
data
code has not been used area code in the Results Stor-
or EM Area is not avail-
age Area and set the appro-
able.
priate code.
03 Address out-of-
range error
First word
address in
command
data
The first word is in an
inaccessible area.
Check the data area range,
and set a first word that is in
an accessible area.
The specified bit number Check the command’s data
is not 00.
area code in the Results Stor-
age Area. The bit address
must be 00 for EtherNet/IP
Units.
04 Address range over- Command
The address range speci- Set the address in the com-
flow
data
fied in the command is
not correct.
mand data so that the start
address plus the number of
words does not exceed
accessible memory.
0B Response too long
Command
data
The response frame is
longer than allowed.
Correct the number of data
elements or other parameters
in the command data for
which the response is being
returned.
0C Parameter error
08 Cannot change
Parameters in The specified parame-
Check the command data and
set the parameters correctly.
command
data
ters are incorrect.
21 Cannot
write
IP address
conversion
method
A FINS message was
received from an IP
Correct the relationships
the ones in the Unit
to SECTION 5 Determining IP
Addresses for details.
Setup with FINS node
addresses that could not
be dynamically changed.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting with FINS Response Codes
Section 14-6
Main response
code
Sub response code
Value and meaning
Item to check
Likely cause
Corrective action
Value and
meaning
22 Status error 0F Cannot execute
Socket status The same socket service Use the corresponding socket
because service is
being processed.
mode dis-
area
is already in progress at status flag in PLC memory to
the specified socket num- be sure that socket service
(operating
ber.
has finished before starting
services again.
agreement)
10 Socket not open
Socket status The specified socket is
Open the socket. (For TCP
sockets, wait until the connec-
tion is made.)
area
not open.
11 Local node busy
(send failed)
System load
Lack of available space in The load (traffic) on the Ether-
internal buffers
net Unit is too heavy. Check
your user applications.
20 FINS/TCP not con-
nected
Unit Setup
Not opened due to sys-
tem settings.
Correctly set the Unit Setup,
FINS/TCP connection num-
ber, remote IP address, and
remote port number.
21
Not opened due to a
change command from
the FINS/TCP connec-
tion’s remote node.
22
23
24
25
Closed by remote node;
opening again.
Opening again because
of a reception error.
Opening again because
of a send error.
Opening again because
of an RST response in
keep-alive.
26
Opening again because
there was no response in
keep-alive.
30 Establishing connec- Command
tion data
A connection is already
established with the
specified remote node.
Correct the settings for the
FINS/TCP connection num-
ber, the remote IP address,
and the remote port number.
31 Cannot change con- Unit Setup
The specified connection Correct the settings for the
nection
and com-
mand data
number is not set as a
FINS/TCP client in the
Unit Setup.
Unit Setup, the FINS/TCP
connection number, the
remote IP address, and the
remote port number.
32 Cannot execute
Command
While a remote node
change was being pro-
cessed for the specified
connection number, a
request for a change was
received and the pro-
cessing was stopped.
Correct the settings for the
FINS/TCP connection num-
ber, the remote IP address,
and the remote port number.
because service was data
interrupted
23 No such
Unit (Envi-
ronment
05 Parameters
Unit Setup
IP address
IP address conversion
failed.
Check the IP address and
subnet mask in the Unit
Setup, and correct if neces-
sary.
error)
07 Configuration error
IP address conversion is Check the IP address conver-
conversion in set for automatic conver- sion setting in the Unit Setup.
Unit Setup
sion only.
This error will be generated
for the READ IP ADDRESS
TABLE command only.
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
CS/CJ-series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison
Item
Support for function
Ethernet Unit
EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/
IP port
Unit version 1.0
Yes
Unit version 2.0
Yes
Tag data link communications service
CIP message communications service
FINS/UDP service
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
FINS/TCP service
Socket service
File transfer (FTP)
No
Yes
No
Mail send/receive
No
Web functions
No
No
Automatic adjustment of PLC’s internal clock
Simple backup function
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Error log
Response to PING command
SNMP/SNMP trap
CIDR function for IP addresses
Online connection by EtherNet/IP using CX-One
Online connection by Ethernet (FINS) using CX-One
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Online connection by EtherNet/IP using Network Configu- No
rator
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CS/CJ-series Ethernet Unit Function Comparison
Appendix A
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Ethernet Network Parameters
Parameter
Value
4,096 bytes
Description
Maximum capacity of the TCP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the TCP receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the UDP send buffer
Maximum capacity of the UDP receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the FINS receive buffer
Maximum capacity of the RAW send buffer
Maximum capacity of the RAW receive buffer
TCP send buffer
TCP receive buffer 4,096 bytes
UDP send buffer 9,000 bytes
UDP receive buffer 9,016 bytes
FINS receive buffer 16,383 bytes
RAW send buffer
2,048 bytes
RAW receive buffer 2,048 bytes
Hold timer
75 s (See note.)
The hold timer is used for active open processing of TCP sockets.
An ETIMEDOUT error will occur if connection is not completed within
75 s.
Resend timer
Initial value:
250 ms The resend timer is used to monitor completion of reception of arrival
confirmations when transferring data via TCP sockets. If the timer setting
Maximum value: 64 s
is exceeded before arrival confirmation is received, data is resent.
Resends are performed from the first timeout (1 s) through the 12th time-
out (64 s).
An ETIMEDOUT error will occur after the 12th timeout.
Continue timer
Initial value:
Maximum value: 60 s
1 s
The continue timer starts if preparations have been completed to send
data but the send window is too small (either 0 or too small) to send the
data and the remote node has not requested that communications be
restarted. Confirmation of the window size is requested from the remote
node when the continue timer times out. The initial value of the timer is
5 s and confirmation processing will continue consecutively with increas-
ingly longer times until the maximum time of 60 s is reached.
2MSL timer
60 s
The 2MSL timer starts at the TCP socket that first closes the socket and
will run for 60 s in the TIME_WAIT status.
IP reassemble timer 12 s
A fragmented IP packet is discarded if it cannot be reassembled within
12 seconds.
ARP timer
20 min/3 min
If a complete ARP table entry (with an Ethernet address) is not referred
to for 20 minutes, it is removed from the table.
An incomplete ARP table entry (no response yet returned to the ARP
request) is removed from the table after 3 minutes.
Window size
(initial value of max-
imum window size)
4,096 bytes
The initial value of the maximum capacity used to control the conver-
gence of TCP sockets. Actually, the node negotiates with the remote
node and uses the smaller of the values for the two nodes. The window
size will fluctuate with the available space in the TCP reception buffers of
the remote node when processing communications.
Fragment size
Segment size
1,500 bytes
1,024 bytes
Data packets are fragmented into 1,500-byte IP packets. UDP data is
separated into 1,472-byte fragments before sending.
TCP data is separated into 1,024-byte units, unless the segments are dif-
ferent, in which case it will be separated into 536-byte units.
TTL (Time to Live) 30
Keep-alive timer First time: 5 min
Resend: 5 s × 5 times
Decremented each time an IP router is passed.
The keep-alive timer is used for the keep-alive function with TCP connec-
tions. It must be used with UCMM, Class 3.
Note The hold time is 3 s for the UCMM service, Class 3 service, and tag data link open/close processing.
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ethernet Network Parameters
Appendix B
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
TCP Status Transitions
The TCP socket status can be confirmed using the socket status data returned for the FINS command
SOCKET STATUS READ (27 64).
CLOSED
ACTIVE OPEN
snd SYN
CLOSE
Passive OPEN
LISTEN
CLOSE
rcv SYN
SEND
snd SYN, ACK
snd SYN
rcv SYN
snd ACK
SYN
RECEIVED
SYN
SENT
rcv ACK of SYN
rcv SYN, ACK
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
ESTABLISHED
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
CLOSED
WAIT
FIN
WAIT-1
rcv FIN
snd ACK
CLOSE
snd FIN
rcv ACK of FIN
FIN WAIT-2
CLOSING
LAST-ACK
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv ACK of FIN
rcv FIN
snd ACK
Timeout=2MSL
CLOSED
TIME WAIT
Status
CLOSED
Meaning
Connection closed.
LISTEN
Waiting for connection.
SYN sent in active status.
SYN received and sent.
Already established.
SYN SENT
SYN RECEIVED
ESTABLISHED
CLOSE WAIT
FIN WAIT 1
CLOSING
FIN received and waiting for completion.
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
LAST ACK
FIN WAIT 2
TIME WAIT
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life (2MSL).
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCP Status Transitions
Appendix C
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D
CIP Message Communications
The basic concepts of CIP message communications are described in this appendix from CIP Object on
page 381 through Example of CIP Message Creation on page 386. Read these sections to improve your
understanding of CIP message communications.
CIP Object
Object Model
In the CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) system, each device is modeled as a group of “Objects.” An Object
abstractly represents a related group of the device’s data values.
Object
Object
Object
Device
When accessing the device from the outside, access an Object.
An Object represents the abstracted device function, processing, and the resulting data.
A request from the outside of Object, such as Read Data, is called “Service.”
Data belonging to the Object is called “Attribute.”
The actual entity of Object is called “Instance” or “Object Instance.”
When Object is generalized, it is called “Class.” For example, “Japan” is one of Instances (Object Instances) of
Class “Nation.”
External request
(Example. Read, Write)
Attribute
Data
Service
Data
Data
Data
Processing
Object Instance
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Terminology
In CIP specifications, “Object,” “Class,” “Instance,” “Attribute” and “Service” are defined as follows:
Term
Object
Class
Meaning
An abstract representation of a particular component within a product.
A set of objects that all represent the same kind of system component. A class is a generalization of an
object. All objects in a class are identical in form and behavior, but may contain different attribute values.
Instance A specific and real (physical) occurrence of an object. For example: New Zealand is an instance of the object
class Country. The terms Object, Instance, and Object Instance all refer to a specific Instance.
Attribute A description of an externally visible characteristic or feature of an object. Typically, attributes provide status
information or govern the operation of an Object. For example: the ASCII name of an object; and the repeti-
tion rate of a cyclic object.
Service
A function supported by an object and/or object class. CIP defines a set of common services and provides for
the definition of Object Class and/or Vendor Specific services.
Specifying an Object Address (Request Path)
This is the basic concept involved in accessing an Object or Attribute.
Each Object Class has a “Class ID”.
There are two types of “Class ID”; one is standardized by ODVA and the other is decided independently by
each device vendor.
Each Object Instance also has ID. This is called “Instance ID.” Different Instance ID is assigned to each Object.
As for Object Class standardized by ODVA, Instance ID is given to it according to the ODVA method. On the
other hand, vendor's own Instance ID is decided independently by the vendor.
Each Attribute also has “Attribute ID.”
Each Object is accessed to by using “Class ID,” “Instance ID,” and “Attribute ID.”
In the device, you can designate Object by specifying these three IDs.
When requesting “Service,” you should specify “Class ID,” “Instance ID,” and “Attribute ID.” (Instance ID and
Attribute ID may not be required, depending on the Service.)
The “Class ID,” “Instance ID,” and “Attribute ID” identify a location in the device and are known as the request
path.
Attribute 1
Attribute 2
Class ID = 2
Attribute = 3
Attribute 3
Attribute 4
Instance ID = 1
Instance ID = 1
Class ID = 1
Device
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Route Path
Route Path
In the CIP, unlike the internet protocol, the transmission frame contains a complete relay route from the trans-
mission node to the reception node. The described route is called the “route path.” The route path is described
as “EPATH type.”
The basic concept of the route path is as follows:
First of all, specify a network port of the transmission node with the destination network, and specify a node
address (called the Link Address) on that network. For the relay node, similarly, specify a network port with the
destination network and node address on that network. Then, repeat the same procedure to the final destina-
tion.
X
Y
Z
Object A
Object B
#1
#2
#1
#3
Port-D
Port-A
Port-B
Port-C
When sending data from X to Z.
Route Path = Port A: #3, Port C: #1
Send data from the network port of X (Port-A) to #3 on that circuit, and the data
reaches Y. Then, send it from the network port of Y (Port-C) to #1 on that circuit.
Through this procedure, the destination node Z can be designated.
Description by EPATH Type
In CIP, the EPATH type is used to describe the route path and request path.
With this method, the route path and request path are divided into segments and a value is assigned to each
segment, so the route path description shows the path to the final destination when the data segments are
joined together.
The segment includes the segment type information and the segment data.
Segment 1
Segment 2
Segment 3
Segment 4
· · · ·
Details of Segment Type
The interpretation method of a segment is included in the first 1 byte, which consists of two parts; a 3-bit “Seg-
ment Type” and a 5-bit “Segment Format.”
Segment Type
Segment Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
According to CIP Specifications, the Segment Type specifications are decided as follows:
Segment Type
6
Description
7
5
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Port Segment
Logical Segment
Network Segment
Symbolic Segment
Data Segment
Data Type
Data Type
Reserved
The specifications of Segment Format are different for each Segment Type.
The following sections describe Port Segment, Logical Segment, and Data Segment which are needed to use
the CIP message communications instructions.
Port Segment
The Port Segment is used to specify the path described above.
Extended Link
Address Size
Segment Type
Port Identifier
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
Set the ID of the port in Port Identifier.
The Port Identifier is 4 bits, so it can have a value between 0 and 15. A port identifier of “0” is reserved and not
available. A port identifier of “1” indicates the backplane port.
A port identifier of “15” has a special meaning, which indicates that the size of Port Identifier is larger than
1 byte, and the 4-bit port identifier (15) is followed by 2-byte Port Identifier. The port identifier does not exceed
1 byte when using the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, so this special case is not explained here.
Set the Extended Link Address Size to “1” when that port’s Link Address is larger than 1 byte.
The following diagram shows the Port Segment value when the Extended Link Address Size is set to “0.”
Extended Link
Address Size
Segment Type
Port Identifier
Link Address
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Specify the size of Link Address when the Extended Link Address Size is set to “1.” The following diagram
shows the Port Segment value in this case.
Extended Link
Address Size
Segment Type
Port Identifier
Link Address Size
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
→
1
· · · · · · · · · · · ·
Link Address
Link Address
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
5
4
3
2
· · · · · ·
→
Always set the Link Address to an even number of bytes. If there is an odd number of bytes, pad the Link
Address with “00” so that it has an even number of bytes.
Logical Segment
The Logical Segment is used to specify the request path.
Segment Format Bits
Segment Type
Logical Type
Logical Format
7
0
6
0
5
1
4
3
2
1
0
Logical Type
3
Description
4
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Class ID
Instance ID
Member ID
Connection Point
Attribute ID
Special (Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format.)
Service ID (Do not use the logical addressing definition for the Logical Format.)
Reserved
Logical Format
Description
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
8-bit logical address
16-bit logical address
32-bit logical address
Reserved
The 32-bit logical address format is reserved and cannot be used.
The 8-bit and 16-bit logical address can be used for the Class ID and Instance ID, which specify the request
path.
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
The 8-bit logical address can be used for the Attribute ID. Use the Attribute ID when requesting a Service of a
particular Object of a particular device.
Example of CIP Message Creation
Setting the Route Path
Port Number
The following description explains the network port, which is used to specify the route path. In the CJ2 Series,
the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address.
CPU Unit
CJ2 (Not supported by CS1/CJ1 CPU Units.)
Each CPU Unit has one backplane port. By convention, the built-in port on a CJ2H-CPU6@-EIP or a
CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Unit functions as a CPU Bus Unit.
Port
Backplane
Port Number
1
The Backplane port is the Backplane. CPU Unit communications routed through CPU Bus Units always travel
through the backplane.
EtherNet/IP Unit or CJ2 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
The EtherNet/IP Unit has two ports. A CJ2 CPU Unit also has two built-in EtherNet/IP ports. One is a Back-
plane port and the other is an Ethernet port.
The Backplane port is the Backplane. Communications routed through the CPU Unit, a Special I/O Unit, or
another CPU Bus Unit always travel through the backplane.
Port
Backplane
Port Number
1
2
Ethernet
Link Address
The Link Address is a node address on the network, which is used to specify the route path.
The method to set the Link Address is different for each network.
In the CS/CJ Series, the Backplane is also considered part of the network when specifying the Link Address.
Backplane
• CPU Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit
In the CS/CJ Series, the base unit is recognized as a backplane port.
CPU Bus Units, such as the EtherNet/IP Unit, are also recognized as nodes on the backplane port.
The Link Address of a CPU Bus Unit on the Backplane is the “unit number + 10 hex.” For example, when
the unit number is 0, the Link Address is 10 hex. When the unit number is F, the Link Address is 1F hex.
The Link Address of a Special I/O Unit on the Backplane is the “unit number + 20 hex.” For example, when
the unit number is 0, the Link Address is 20 hex.
Network
• EtherNet/IP
The Ethernet port’s Link Address is described by the IP address.
The IP address must be described entirely in ASCII.
For example, IP address of 192.168.200.200 will be [31] [39] [32] [2E] [31] [36] [38] [2E] [32] [30] [30] [2E]
[32] [30] [30].
386
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Response Codes
General Status Code
The General Status Code is stored in the response data after execution of the CMND instruction has been
completed.
GeneralStatus
Code (hex)
Status Name
Description of Status
00
01
02
Success
Service was successfully performed by the object specified.
A connection related service failed along the connection path.
Connection failure
Resource unavailable
Resources needed for the object to perform the requested service were
unavailable.
03
04
Invalid parameter value See Status Code 20 hex, which is the preferred value to use for this condition.
Path segment error
The path segment identifier or the segment syntax was not understood by the
processing node. Path processing shall stop when a path segment error is
encountered.
05
Path destination
unknown
The path is referencing an object class, instance or structure element that is
not known or is not contained in the processing node. Path processing shall
stop when a path destination unknown error is encountered.
06
07
08
Partial transfer
Connection lost
Only part of the expected data was transferred.
The messaging connection was lost.
Service not supported The requested service was not implemented or was not defined for this Object
Class/Instance.
09
Invalid attribute value
Attribute list error
Invalid attribute data detected.
0A
An attribute in the Get_Attribute_List or Set_Attribute_List response has a
non-zero status.
0B
Already in requested
mode/state
The object is already in the mode/state being requested by the service.
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
Object state conflict
Object already exists
Attribute not settable
Privilege violation
The object cannot perform the requested service in its current mode/state.
The requested instance of object to be created already exists.
A request to modify a non-modifiable attribute was received.
A permission/privilege check failed.
Device state conflict
The device's current mode/state prohibits the execution of the requested ser-
vice.
11
12
Reply data too large
The data to be transmitted in the response buffer is larger than the allocated
response buffer
Fragmentation of a
primitive value
The service specified an operation that is going to fragment a primitive data
value, i.e. half a REAL data type.
13
14
15
16
17
Not enough data
The service did not supply enough data to perform the specified operation.
Attribute not supported The attribute specified in the request is not supported.
Too much data
The service supplied more data than was expected.
The object specified does not exist in the device.
Object does not exist
Service fragmentation The fragmentation sequence for this service is not currently active for this data.
sequence not in
progress
18
19
No stored attribute data The attribute data of this object was not saved prior to the requested service.
Store operation failure The attribute data of this object was not saved due to a failure during the
attempt.
1A
1B
Routing failure (request The service request packet was too large for transmission on a network in the
packet too large)
path to the destination. The routing device was forced to abort the service.
Routing failure
(response packet too
large)
The service response packet was too large for transmission on a network in
the path from the destination. The routing device was forced to abort the ser-
vice.
1C
Missing attribute list
entry data
The service did not supply an attribute in a list of attributes that was needed by
the service to perform the requested behavior.
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
GeneralStatus
Code (hex)
Status Name
Description of Status
1D
1E
1F
Invalid attribute value
list
The service is returning the list of attributes supplied with status information for
those attributes that were invalid.
Embedded service
error
An embedded service resulted in an error.
Vendor specific error
A vendor specific error has been encountered. The Additional Code Field of
the Error Response defines the particular error encountered. Use of this Gen-
eral Error Code should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre-
sented in this table or within an Object Class definition accurately reflect the
error.
20
21
22
Invalid parameter
A parameter associated with the request was invalid. This code is used when a
parameter does not meet the requirements of this specification and/or the
requirements defined in an Application Object Specification.
Write-once value or
An attempt was made to write to a write-once medium (e.g. WORM drive,
medium already written PROM) that has already been written, or to modify a value that cannot be
changed once established.
Invalid Reply Received An invalid reply is received (e.g. reply service code does not match the request
service code, or reply message is shorter than the minimum expected reply
size). This status code can serve for other causes of invalid replies.
23-24
25
Reserved by CIP for future extensions
Key Failure in path
Path Size Invalid
The Key Segment that was included as the first segment in the path does not
match the destination module. The object specific status shall indicate which
part of the key check failed.
26
The size of the path which was sent with the Service Request is either not
large enough to allow the Request to be routed to an object or too much rout-
ing data was included.
27
28
Unexpected attribute in An attempt was made to set an attribute that is not able to be set at this time.
list
Invalid Member ID
The Member ID specified in the request does not exist in the specified Class/
Instance/Attribute.
29
2A
Member not settable
A request to modify a non-modifiable member was received.
Group 2 only server
general failure
This error code may only be reported by DeviceNet group 2 only servers with
4K or less code space and only in place of Service not supported, Attribute not
supported and Attribute not settable.
2B-CF
D0-FF
---
Reserved by CIP for future extensions
Reserved for Object
Class and service
errors
This range of error codes is to be used to indicate Object Class specific errors.
Use of this range should only be performed when none of the Error Codes pre-
sented in this table accurately reflect the error that was encountered.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Example of Additional Status in case that General Status Is 01 Hex.
(Status of Connection Manager Object)
General Status
(hex)
Additional
Status (hex)
Explanation
01
0100
0103
0106
0107
0108
Connection in Use or Duplicate Forward Open.
Transport Class and Trigger combination not supported
Ownership Conflict
01
01
01
01
Connection not found at target application.
Invalid Connection Type. Indicates a problem with either the Connection Type or Prior-
ity of the Connection.
01
01
01
0109
0110
0111
Invalid Connection Size
Device not configured
RPI not supported. May also indicate problem with connection time-out multiplier, or
production inhibit time.
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0113
0114
0115
0116
0117
0118
0119
011A
011B
0203
0204
0205
0206
0207
0301
0302
0303
0304
0311
0312
0315
0316
0317
0318
0319
031A
031B
031C
031D
031F
0320-07FF
Connection Manager cannot support any more connections
Either the Vendor Id or the Product Code in the key segment did not match the device
Product Type in the key segment did not match the device
Major or Minor Revision information in the key segment did not match the device
Invalid Connection Point
Invalid Configuration Format
Connection request fails since there is no controlling connection currently open.
Target Application cannot support any more connections
RPI is smaller than the Production Inhibit Time.
Connection cannot be closed since the connection has timed out
Unconnected Send timed out waiting for a response.
Parameter Error in Unconnected Send Service
Message too large for Unconnected message service
Unconnected acknowledge without reply
No buffer memory available
Network Bandwidth not available for data
No Tag filters available
Not Configured to send real-time data
Port specified in Port Segment Not Available
Link Address specified in Port Segment Not Available
Invalid Segment Type or Segment Value in Path
Path and Connection not equal in close
Either Segment not present or Encoded Value in Network Segment is invalid.
Link Address to Self Invalid
Resources on Secondary Unavailable
Connection already established
Direct connection already established
Miscellaneous
Redundant connection mismatch
No connection resources exist for target path
Vendor specific
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CIP Message Communications
Appendix D
Priority/Time Ticks and Time Out Ticks
Format of the Priority/Time Tick
Time tick
Base value (ms)
Maximum time-out time (ms) that can be set
in the time out ticks
0000 hex
1
255
0001 hex
0010 hex
0011 hex
0100 hex
0101 hex
0110 hex
0111 hex
1000 hex
1001 hex
1010 hex
1011 hex
1100 hex
1101 hex
1110 hex
1111 hex
2
510
4
1,020
8
2,040
16
4,080
32
8,160
64
16,320
32,640
65,280
130,560
261,120
522,240
1,044,480
2,088,960
4,177,920
8,355,840
128
256
512
1,024
2,048
4,096
8,192
16,389
32,768
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units
or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Command code
MRC SRC
Function name
Remarks
---
04
05
06
08
03
01
01
01
02
03
02
03
20
30
RESET
CONTROLLER DATA READ
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
BROADCAST DATA SEND
ERROR LOG READ
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
21
27
ERROR LOG CLEAR
PING
FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE ---
CHANGE REQUEST
31
50
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
67
01
10
FINS/TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ ---
IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE
IP ADDRESS WRITE
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
IP ADDRESS TABLE READ
IP ROUTER TABLE READ
PROTOCOL STATUS READ
MEMORY STATUS READ
SOCKET STATUS READ
ADDRESS INFORMATION READ
IP ADDRESS READ
28
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND
CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND
RESET
Resets the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Command Block
04 03
Command code
Response Block
04 03
Command Response
code
code
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Precautions
• No response will be returned if the command ends normally. A response will be returned only if an error
occurs.
• In some cases, send requests (SEND(192)/RECV(193) instructions) made from the PLC to the EtherNet/
IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port just before execution of the RESET command may not be executed.
• Applications that use TCP/IP, such as FINS/TCP communications services, are closed immediately before
resetting.
Response Codes
Response code
1001
Description
Command too large
CONTROLLER DATA READ
Reads the following data from the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port: Model number, version, IP
address, subnet mask, FINS UDP port number, mode settings, Ethernet address.
Command Block
05 01
Command code
Response Block
05 01
20 byte
20 byte
Version
4 byte
4 byte
6 byte
Command Response
code
Model number
IP address
Subnet
mask
FINS UDP
port number setting
Mode
Ethernet address
code
Parameters
Model number, Version (Response)
The model number and version of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port are returned as ASCII char-
acters occupying 20 bytes each (i.e., 20 characters each). If all bytes are not used, the remaining bytes will be
all spaces (ASCII 20 Hex).
Example Model: CS1W-EIP21, CJ1W-EIP21, CJ2B-EIP21, or CJ2M-EIP21
Example Version: V2.00
By convention, the model number of the built-in EtherNet/IP port on a CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP CPU Unit is CJ2B-
EIP21.
By convention, the model number of the built-in EtherNet/IP port on a CJ2M-CPU3@ CPU Unit is CJ2M-EIP21.
IP Address, Subnet Mask (Response)
The IP address and subnet mask of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port are returned as 4 bytes
each.
FINS UDP Port Number (Response)
The UDP port number of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port for FINS is returned as 2 bytes.
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Mode Setting (Response)
The mode setting in the system setup is returned.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 1: Broadcast setting
Bits 2 and 3: IP address conversion method
Bit 4: UDP port number setting for FINS
Bit 5: TCP port number setting for FINS/TCP
Bit 8: Transmission speed (baud rate)
Bit 9: SNTP server specification method
Broadcast Address Setting
Bit 1
Meaning
0
1
Broadcast with host number set to all ones (4.3BSD specifications)
Broadcast with host number set to all zeroes (4.2BSD specifications)
Communications Partner IP Address Conversion Method Setting
Bit 3 Bit 2
Meaning
Automatic generation method (dynamic)
Automatic generation method (static)
IP address table reference method
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
Combined method (IP address table reference + automatic generation
(dynamic))
FINS/UDP Port Number Setting
Bit 4
Meaning
Meaning
Meaning
Meaning
0
1
Default (9600)
Unit Setup value
FINS/TCP Port Number Setting
Bit 5
0
1
Default (9600)
Unit Setup value
Baud Rate Setting
Bit 8
0
1
Automatic detection
Fixed
SNTP Server Specification Method
Bit 9
0
1
IP address
Host name
Ethernet Address (Response)
The Ethernet address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is returned.
Note This Ethernet address is listed on the label on the side of the EtherNet/IP Unit or (for a built-in EtherNet/
IP port), on the CPU Unit.
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
CONTROLLER STATUS READ
Reads the controller status.
Command Block
06 01
Command code
Response Block
06 01
2 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
4 byte
Command Response Communications Total number
Total number Total number Total number Total number
of of of of
packets received receive errors packets sent send errors send collisions
status 3
of
code
code
Parameters
Communications Status 3 (Response)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 2: EtherNet/IP basic setting error
Bit 3: IP address table error
Bit 4: IP router table error
Bit 6: Routing table error
Bit 9: EtherNet/IP advanced setting error
Bit 10: BOOTP server error
Bit 11: SNTP server error
Bit 14: Address mismatch
Bit 15: Non-volatile memory error
Ethernet Basic Setting Error
Bit 2
Meaning
0
1
No error
An error (such as an invalid IP address) was detected during the validity check of parameters related to the
TCP/IP Interface Object and Ether Link Object.
IP Address Table Error
Bit 3
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected (More than 32 records, invalid IP address, or invalid FINS node address).
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
IP Router Table Error
Bit 3
Meaning
0
No error
Error detected (More than 8 records, or invalid IP address).
1
Routing Table Error
Bit 6
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected in routing table check.
Ethernet Advanced Setting Error
Bit 9
Meaning
0
1
No error
An error was detected during the validity check of vendor-specific parameters for the TCP/IP Interface
Object and Ether Link Object.
BOOTP Server Error
Bit 10
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected. (A time-out occurred during communications with the BOOTP server).
SNTP Server Error
Bit 10
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected. (The setting of the host specification (IP address or host name) of the SNTP server is not
correct, or communications with the SNTP server timed out.)
Address Mismatch
Bit 14
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected. (The address conversion method was set for automatic generation, but the last eight bits of
the local IP address does not match the local node address (FINS node address), or the host section other
than the last byte of the local IP address is non-zero.)
Non-volatile Memory Error
Bit 15
Meaning
0
1
No error
Error detected. (The non-volatile memory’s service life has expired, or the memory has failed).
Total Number of Packets Received (Response)
The total number of packets received by the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is returned.
Total Number of Receive Errors (Response)
The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port was receiving
is returned.
The following types of error are detected:
• Short packet errors
• Alignment errors
• CRC errors
• Frame length errors (received frame: 1,515 bytes or more)
• Communications controller overflow errors
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Total Number of Packets Sent (Response)
The total number of packets sent by the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is returned.
Total Number of Errors Sent (Response)
The total number of packet errors detected while the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port was sending
is returned.
Total Number of Send Collisions (Response)
Returns the number of packets damaged by 16 collisions with data from other nodes during EtherNet/IP Unit or
built-in EtherNet/IP port transmissions.
Precautions
Counting of the total number of packets received, total number of receive errors, total number of packets sent,
total number of errors sent, and total number of send collisions is discontinued when the counted value
reaches the maximum value.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
INTERNODE ECHO TEST
Performs an echoback test (internode communications test) between specified nodes.
Command Block
08 01
1,998 bytes max.
Test data
Command
code
Response Block
08 01
1,998 bytes max.
Command Response
Test data
code
code
Parameters
Test Data (Command, Response)
This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes. Up to 1,998 bytes can be specified. The
response sends back data identical to the data specified in the command. An abnormality is assumed if the
data returned in the response differs from the test data sent.
Precautions
• The test destination node is the destination node specified in the CMND(194) instruction operands.
• Always specify the unit address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port in the CMND(194)
instruction.
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small (No test data)
BROADCAST TEST RESULTS READ
Reads the results (number of times data received) of the broadcast test.
Command Block
08 02
Command
code
Response Block
08 02
Command Response
Times
code
code
received
Parameters
Times Received (Response)
The number of times the data has been received normally during the broadcast send test is returned as a
hexadecimal number. The number of times received is cleared each time the result is read.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
BROADCAST DATA SEND
Sends test data simultaneously to all nodes on the network.
Command Block
08 03
1,460 bytes max.
Command
code
Test data
Parameters
Test Data (Command)
This command specifies the data to be sent to the specified nodes. Up to 1,460 bytes can be specified.
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Precautions
• No response is made to this command.
• When using this command, set the FINS header parameters (or the control data for the CMND(194)
instruction) as follows:
Destination node address: FF (broadcast data)
Destination unit address:
FE (EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port)
Response/no response flag: 1 (no response)
ERROR LOG READ
Reads the error log.
Command Block
21 02
Command Beginning
Number
of
code
record
number
records
Response Block
21 02
10 bytes
10 bytes
Command Response Maximum
Number
of stored
records
Number
of
records
Error log data
Error log data
code
code
number
of stored
records
Parameters
Beginning Record Number (Command)
The first record to be read. The first record number can be specified in the range between 0000 and 003F (0 to
63 decimal) where 0000 is the oldest record.
Number of Records (Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0001 and 0040 (1 to 64 decimal) in the command. The
response returns the actual number of records read.
Maximum Number of Stored Records (Response)
Indicates the maximum number of records that can be stored in the error log. The maximum number of error
log records depends on the model of CPU Unit or CPU Bus Unit being used. In an EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port, the maximum number of stored records is fixed at 40 (64 decimal).
Number of Stored Records (Response)
The number of records stored at the time the command is executed is returned.
Error Log Data (Response)
The specified number of error log records from the beginning record number is returned sequentially. The total
number of bytes in the error log is calculated as the number of records x 10 bytes/record. Each error log record
thus comprises 10 bytes, configured as follows:
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
1st byte
10th byte
Error code Detailed Minutes Second Day Hour Year Month
information
Error Code, Detailed Information
Details of the error stored in the record. Refer to 14-4-4 Error Log Error Codes for details.
Minute, Second, Day, Hour, Year, Month
Indicate the time at which the error stored in the record occurred.
Precautions
• If the error log contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter, all
records stored in the error log at the time the command is executed will be returned and the command exe-
cuted will end normally.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
1001
1002
1103
110C
Command too large
Command too small
Beginning record number is out of range
The number of read records is 0.
ERROR LOG CLEAR
Clears the error log for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP ports, and resets the number of stored
records to 0.
Command Block
21 03
Command code
Response Block
21 03
Command Response
code
code
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
1001
Normal end
Command too large
PING
Performs processing equivalent to a UNIX computer’s PING command (see below).
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Command Block
27 20
Command Destination IP address
code
Timeout
value
Response Block
27 20
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
Destination IP Address (Command)
The IP address (in hexadecimal) of the destination node for the PING command echo request packet.
Timeout Value (Command)
The wait time for the echo reply packet. The value is set in seconds. The timeout time is set at 20 seconds if the
value is specified as 0. If the echo reply packet is not received within the set time limit, the code for a timeout
error will be set as the results storage response code.
Remarks
PING Command
The PING command runs the echoback test using the ICMP protocol. When the PING command is executed,
an echo request packet is sent to the remote node ICMP. Correct communications are confirmed when the
returned response packet is received normally. The echo reply packet is automatically returned by the remote
node ICMP.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end (echo reply received from the remote node)
Timeout error
0205
1001
1002
1100
220F
2211
Command too large
Command too small
Zero destination address
PING command currently being executed
High traffic at Unit; cannot execute service.
FINS/TCP CONNECTION REMOTE NODE CHANGE REQUEST
Requests a remote node change for the FINS/TCP connection.
The default destination IP address in a connection in which the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is
used as a client is the destination IP address set under the FINS/TCP Tab Page in the Unit Setup. By sending
this command to the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port, the destination IP address for the specified
connection can be changed to another IP address.
Remote node changes can be made only for connection numbers specified as FINS/TCP clients in the Unit
Setup.
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Command Block
27 30
Command FINS/TCP
Remote IP
address
Remote TCP
port number
code
connection No.
Response Block
27 30
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
FINS/TCP Connection No. (Command)
Specifies, in two bytes, the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to 16) for which the change is to be made.
Remote IP Address (Command)
Specifies the remote node’s IP address (must be non-zero) in hexadecimal.
Remote Port Number (Command)
Specifies the remote TCP port number (must be non-zero) with this command.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
0105
Node address setting error
Local IP address setting error
0302
1001
1002
1100
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
Command too small
Connection number not set from 1 to 16
Remote IP address set to 0
Remote TCP port number set to 0
Connection already established with specified remote node
2230
2231
Specified connection number not set as FINS/TCP client in
Unit Setup
Remote node change processing for specified connection
number aborted because change request received during pro-
cessing
2232
FINS/TCP CONNECTION STATUS READ
Reads the FINS/TCP connection status.
Command Block
27 31
Command FINS/TCP
code
connection No.
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Block
27 31
Command Response FINS/TCP Connection
Local IP address
Local TCP
port number
Remote IP
address
Remote TCP TCP transition
port number
code
code
connection service
No.
Parameters
FINS/TCP Connection No. (Command, Response)
Command: Specifies, in two bytes, the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to 16) for which the status is to be
read.
Response: Specifies the FINS/TCP connection number (1 to 16) for which the status was read.
Connection Service (Response)
Specifies the service that is being used for the FINS/TCP connection as a number.
0003: FINS/TCP server
0004: FINS/TCP client
Local IP Address (Response)
Specifies the IP address for the local node in hexadecimal.
Local TCP Port Number (Response)
Specifies the TCP port number for the local node.
Remote IP Address (Response)
Specifies the IP address for the remote node in hexadecimal.
Remote TCP Port Number (Response)
Specifies the TCP port number for the remote node.
TCP Transitions (Response)
Specifies the TCP connection status using the following numbers.
For details on TCP status changes, refer to Appendix C TCP Status Transitions.
Number
00000000
00000001
00000002
00000003
00000004
00000005
00000006
00000007
00000008
00000009
Status
CLOSED
Meaning
Connection closed.
LISTEN
Waiting for connection.
SYN SENT
SYN RECEIVED
ESTABLISHED
CLOSE WAIT
FIN WAIT 1
CLOSING
SYN sent in active status.
SYN received and sent.
Already established.
FIN received and waiting for completion.
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
Completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
LAST ACK
FIN WAIT 2
0000000A TIME WAIT
After closing, pauses twice the maximum seg-
ment life (2MSL).
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
0105
Node address setting error
Local IP address setting error
CPU Unit error; execution not possible.
Command too large
0302
1001
1002
1100
Command too small
Connection number not set from 1 to 16
IP ADDRESS TABLE WRITE
Writes the IP address table.
Command Block
27 50
6 bytes
6 bytes
Command
code
Number
of records
IP address
table records
IP address
table records
Response Block
27 50
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
Number of Records (Command)
The number of records to write is specified in hexadecimal between 0000 and 0020 (0 to 32 decimal) in the
command. If this value is set to 0, the IP address table will be cleared so that no records are registered.
IP Address Table Records (Command)
Specify the IP address table records. The number of records specified must be provided. The total number of
bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records × 6 bytes/record. The configuration
of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
1
6 bytes
00
FINS node
number
IP address
FINS Node Address
Node address for communications via the FINS command (hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP address used by TCP/IP protocol (hexadecimal).
Precautions
• The registered IP address table will not be effective until the PLC or EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP
port is restarted.
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
• An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set
for automatic generation on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of the Unit.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end (echo reply received from the remote node)
Command too large
1001
1002
1003
Command too small
The number of records specified does not match the sent data
length.
110C
2307
The number of records is not between 0 and 32.
The FINS node address is not between 1 and 126
The IP address is 0.
IP address conversion method is set for automatic generation.
IP ADDRESS WRITE
Write the local IP address and the subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup.
Command Block
27 57
Command
code
IP address
Subnet mask
Response Block
27 57
Command Response
code
code
Parameters
IP Address (Command)
Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port using 4 pairs of 2-digit hexadec-
imal numbers in the range 00.00.00.00 to FF.FF.FF.FF (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 decimal). Specify 0.0.0.0 to
enable the local IP address set in the allocated DM Area words.
Example: 150.31.2.83
96 1F 02 53
Subnet Mask (Command)
Specify the local IP address of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port using 4 pairs of hexadecimal
numbers in the range 00.00.00.00 to FF.FF.FF.FF (0.0.0.0. to 255.255.255.255 decimal).
Example: 255.255.255.255
FF FF FF 00
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
Precautions
• The local IP address and subnet mask set by this command are written to the CPU Bus Unit System Setup
for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
• The new local IP address and subnet mask settings will become effective when the PLC or EtherNet/IP
Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is restarted.
IP ADDRESS TABLE READ
Reads the IP address table.
Command Block
27 60
Command Number of
code
records
Response Block
27 60
6 bytes
6 bytes
Command Response Maximum
Number
of stored
records
Number
of records
IP address
IP address
code
code
number
of stored
records
table records
table records
Parameters
Number of Records (Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0020 (0 to 32 decimal) in the command. If this
value is set to 0, the number of stored records is returned but the IP address table records are not returned.
The response returns the actual number of records read.
Maximum Number of Stored Records (Response)
The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP address table is returned. The maximum number
of stored records is fixed at 0020 (32 records).
Number of Stored Records (Response)
The number of IP address table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned as a hexadec-
imal number.
IP Address Table Records (Response)
The number of IP address table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned. The total
number of bytes in the IP address table records is calculated as the number of records × 6 bytes/record. The
configuration of the 6 bytes of data in each record is as shown in the following diagram.
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
1
6 bytes
00
IP address
FINS node
number
FINS Node Address
Node address for communications via the FINS command (in hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP number used by TCP/IP protocol (in hexadecimal).
Precautions
• If the IP address table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parame-
ter, all the records contained in the IP address table when the command is executed will be returned and
the command execution will end normally.
• An error response will be returned if the IP address conversion method in the system mode settings is set
to the automatic generation method on the FINS/UDP Tab Page of the Unit.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
1001
1002
2307
Command too large
Command too small
IP address conversion method is set to the automatic genera-
tion method.
IP ROUTER TABLE READ
Reads the IP router table.
Command Block
27 61
Command
code
Number
of records
Response Block
27 61
8 bytes
8 bytes
Command Response Maximum
IP router
IP router
Number
of stored
records
Number
of records
code
code
number
of stored
records
table records
table records
Parameters
Number of Records (Command, Response)
The number of records to read is specified between 0000 and 0008 (0 to 8 decimal) in the command. If this
value is set to 0, the number of stored records will be returned but the IP router table records will not be
returned. The response returns the actual number of records read.
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Maximum Number of Stored Records (Response)
The maximum number of records that can be stored in the IP router table is returned. The maximum number of
stored records is fixed at 0008 (8 records).
Number of Stored Records (Response)
The number of IP router table records stored at the time the command is executed is returned in hexadecimal.
IP Router table Records (Response)
The number of IP router table records specified in the number of records parameter is returned. The total num-
ber of bytes in the IP router table records is calculated as the number of records × 8 bytes/record. The configu-
ration of the 8 bytes of data in each record is shown below.
1
8 bytes
Router IP address
IP Network address
(Network ID)
IP Network Address
The network ID from the IP address in hexadecimal. The network ID part corresponding to the address class
(determined by the leftmost 3 bits) set here, is enabled.
Router IP Address
The IP address (in hexadecimal) of a router connected to a network specified with IP addresses.
Precautions
If the IP router table contains fewer records than the number specified in the number of records parameter, all
the records contained in the IP router table when the command is executed will be returned and the command
execution will end normally.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
Description
Normal end
1001
1002
Command too large
Command too small
PROTOCOL STATUS READ
Reads the protocol status or the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Command Block
27 62
Command
code
Response Block
27 62
48 bytes
IP status
184 bytes
184 bytes
12 bytes
Command Response
ICMP status
TCP status
UDP status
code
code
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Parameters
IP Status (Response)
Twelve types of IP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence. Each
value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1. Total number of IP packets received.
2. The number of IP packets discarded due to an error with the checksum in the packet header.
3. The number of IP packets discarded because the received packet was larger than the overall packet length
value in the packet header.
4. The number of IP packets discarded because the minimum size of the IP header data could not be stored
in the first short buffer (See note.) when an attempt was made to store the packet.
5. The number of packets discarded for one of the following reasons:
• The IP header length value in the IP header was smaller than the smallest size of the IP header.
• The size of the first short buffer (See note.) was smaller than the IP header length value in the IP header
when storing the packet.
6. The number of IP packets discarded because the IP header length was larger than the overall packet length
value in the packet header.
7. The number of fragmented packets received.
8. The number of received fragmented IP packets discarded because a queue for reassembly could not be
secured.
9. The number of fragmented IP packets discarded because they could not be reassembled within 12 seconds
after being received.
10. Always 0.
11. The number of packets addressed to other networks that have been discarded.
12. Always 0.
Note Refer to MEMORY STATUS READ on page 411 for details on the short buffer.
ICMP Status (Response)
Ten types (46 items) of ICMP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following
sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1. The number of times the ICMP error routine was called. The ICMP error routine uses ICMP packets to inform
the source about errors. The routine is called when an illegal packet is received (error in IP option processing
or error in relay processing) or if the object port does not exist when using UDP.
2. Always 0.
3. Always 0.
4. Total number of outputs of each packet type during ICMP output. The 19 statistical values are returned in
the order shown below. Contents are defined for 13 types only; all other types contain 0. Only #0, #3, #14,
#16, and #18 are counted by the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#15
#16
#17
#18
4 bytes
Type number
Description
#0
Echo reply
#1, #2
#3
Undefined, always 0
Destination unreachable
Source quench
#4
#5
Routing redirect
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Type number
Description
Undefined, always 0
#6, #7
#8
Echo
#9, #10
#11
Undefined, always 0
Time exceeded
#12
Parameter problem
Time stamp
#13
#14
Time stamp reply
Information request
Information request reply
Address mask request
Address mask reply
#15
#16
#17
#18
5. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the type-indication code was out of range.
6. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the overall packet length value in the packet
header was smaller than the minimum ICMP packet length.
7. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because of an incorrect checksum value in the packet
header.
8. The number of received ICMP packets discarded because the ICMP header length value in the packet head-
er did not match the lengths of individual header types.
9. The number of responses returned to received ICMP packets requiring a response.
10. Total number of inputs of each packet type during ICMP input. The 19 statistical values are returned in the
order shown below. Contents are defined for 13 types only; all other types contain 0.
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#15
#16
#17
#18
4 bytes
Type number
Description
#0
Echo reply
#1, #2
#3
Undefined, always 0
Destination unreachable
Source quench
#4
#5
Routing redirect
#6, #7
#8
Undefined, always 0
Echo
#9, #10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
#16
#17
#18
Undefined, always 0
Time exceeded
Parameter problem
Time stamp
Time stamp reply
Information request
Information request reply
Address mask request
Address mask reply
TCP Status (Response)
Three types (46 items) of TCP status information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following
sequence. Each value is returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1) Connection Information (60 Bytes)
Fifteen items are returned in the following sequence:
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
1. The number of times active connections were correctly established.
2. The number of times a SYN packet was received while waiting to establish a passive connection.
3. The number of times active or passive connections were correctly established.
4. The number of times an established connection was cut off.
5. The number of times the connection wait status was cut off.
6. The number of times protocol control blocks or other actively allocated structures were released.
7. The number of segments for the round-trip time (time from segment transmission to ACK).
8. The number of times the round-trip time was changed.
9. The number of times a delayed acknowledgement (ACK) was sent. If the order of the received segments is
reversed, ACK is sent with a packet of data separate from ACK (response to input data, etc.) or is immedi-
ately sent with the ACK for other data.
10. The number of times the connection was cut off because no ACK was returned after several resend at-
tempts.
11. The number of times no ACK was returned within the resend timer set time. (The resend timer sets the max-
imum time limit between the data being output and ACK being returned.)
12. The number of times no window advertisement is received within the time set on the duration timer. (The
duration timer sets the maximum time limit for a window advertisement to be received if the transmission
window is smaller than necessary and the resend timer is not set. If no window advertisement is received
within the time limit, the number of segments permitted by the transmission window are sent. If the trans-
mission window is set to 0, a window probe (1 octet of data) is sent before the timer restarts.)
13. The number of times no segment was sent or received within the time set on the hold timer.
14. The number of times the hold packet is resent. (Always 0.)
15. The number of times the hold packet is sent without response before the connection is cut off.
2) Send Information (40 Bytes)
Ten information items are returned in the following sequence:
1. The total number of packets sent.
2. The number of data packets sent.
3. The number of data bytes sent.
4. The number of data packets resent.
5. The number of data bytes resent.
6. The number of ACK packets sent.
7. The number of window probes (1 octet of data) sent.
8. The number of emergency data packets sent. (Always 0.)
9. The number of window advertisement packets sent.
10. The number of control packets (SYN, FIN, RST) sent.
3) Receive Information (84 Bytes)
Twenty-one information items are returned in the following sequence:
1. The total number of packets received.
2. The number of packets received continuously.
3. The number of bytes received continuously.
4. The number of received packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum.
5. The number of packets discarded because the TCP header was smaller than the minimum size for a TCP
header or was larger than the IP packet.
6. The number of packets discarded because the TCP header and IP header could not be stored in the first
short buffer.
7. The number of resent packets received.
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
8. The number of bytes in the resend packets.
9. The number of duplicated resend packets received.
10. The number of bytes in the duplicated resend packets received.
11. The number of out-of-range data packets received. (Always 0.)
12. The number of bytes in the out-of-range data packets received. (Always 0.)
13. The number of packets where the data was larger than the window.
14. The number of bytes in the packets where the data was larger than the window.
15. The number of packets received after closing.
16. The number of window probe packets received.
17. The number of resent ACK packets received.
18. The number of ACK packets received with no data set.
19. The number of ACK packets received.
20. The number of ACK packets received for received transmission acknowledgements (ACK).
21. The number of window advertisement packets received.
UDP Status (Response)
Three items of UDP information occupying 4 bytes each are returned in the following sequence. Each value is
returned as an 8-digit hexadecimal value.
1. The number of packets discarded because the size of the first short buffer was smaller than the minimum
size (28) of the IP header and UDP header when the packet was stored.
2. The number of packets discarded due to an incorrect checksum in the UDP header.
3. The number of packets discarded because the IP overall length in the IP header was shorter than the UDP
overall length in the UDP header.
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if network operation stops due to incorrect settings in the system setup.
Counting will be stopped when a count reaches the maximum value. The maximum values are as follows:
IP, ICMP, or UDP status:7FFFFFFF (2,147,483,647 decimal)
TC status:
FFFFFFFF (4,294,967,295 decimal)
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
1001
Normal end
Command too large
MEMORY STATUS READ
Reads the status of the network memory for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. The network
memory contains 2,991 bytes that are used as required as for communications buffers for communications ser-
vicing. The network memory consists of 23,928 short buffers (128 bytes each) and 64 long buffers (1,024 bytes
each).
Command Block
27 63
Command
code
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response Block
27 63
92 bytes
Command Response
Memory status
code
code
Parameters
Memory Status (Response)
A total of 23 data items in six areas are returned in the following order. Each item consists of 4 bytes.
1) Short Buffer Application: Two items are returned (8 bytes).
1. The number of short buffers currently being used.
2. The number of short buffers in the system (fixed at 23,928 decimal).
2) Short Buffer Application by Type: Thirteen items are returned (52 bytes).
1. The number of short buffers used for storing communications data
2. The number of short buffers used for protocol headers (TCP, UDP, IP, ICMP, ARP)
3. The number of short buffers used in socket structures
4. The number of short buffers used as protocol control blocks
5. The number of short buffers used for routing tables
6. Not used (always 0)
7. Not used (always 0)
8. The number of short buffers used for IP fragment re-assembly queue headers
9. The number of short buffers used for storing socket addresses
10. Not used (always 0)
11. The number of short buffers used for storing socket options
12. The number of short buffers used for storing access rights
13. The number of short buffers used for storing interface addresses
3) Long Buffer Application: Two items are returned (8 bytes).
1. The number of long buffers currently being used.
2. The number of long buffers in the system (fixed at 64 decimal).
4) Not Used: Always 0. (4 bytes)
5) Network Memory Application: Two items are returned (8 bytes).
1. The number of bytes used (in K bytes)
2. The percentage used
6) Memory Exhaustion Log (12 bytes)
Counts for the following values indicate a high load on the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port. These
high loads may be caused by problems in communications, particularly FINS communications and UDP sock-
ets. If these values are consistently high, check your applications.
1. The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer without WAIT when there were no short
buffers available.
2. The number of times an attempt was made to secure a short buffer with WAIT when there were no short
buffers available.
3. The number of times an attempt was made to release and secure a short buffer already being used by an-
other socket when there were no short buffers available.
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in
the system setup.
These values are cleared when the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is started or reset. Values will
be counted only until the maximum values are reached.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
SOCKET STATUS READ
Reads the network socket status of the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port.
Command Block
27 64
Command
code
Response Block
27 64
32 bytes
32 bytes
Socket status
Command Response
Socket status
code
code
Parameters
Socket Status (Response)
Returns eight types of information in records of 32 bytes each. A maximum of 62 records can be returned. The
format of each record is shown below.
Protocol (4 bytes)
The protocol used for the socket is returned as a number.
00 00 00 06: TCP; 00 00 00 11: UDP
Receive Queue (4 bytes)
The number of bytes in the reception queue.
Send Queue (4 bytes)
The number of bytes in the send queue.
Local IP Address (4 bytes)
The local IP address allocated to the socket.
Local Port Number (4 bytes)
The local port number allocated to the socket.
Remote IP Address (4 bytes)
The remote IP address allocated to the socket.
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Remote Port Number (4 bytes)
The remote port number allocated to the socket.
The TCP connection status is returned as one of the numbers shown in the following table. Refer to Appendix
C TCP Status Transitions for a diagram of transitions.
Number
Stage
Status
00 00 00 00 CLOSED
00 00 00 01 LISTEN
00 00 00 02 SYN SENT
Closed.
Waiting for connection.
SYN sent in active status.
00 00 00 03 SYN RECEIVED SYN received and sent.
00 00 00 04 ESTABLISHED
00 00 00 05 CLOSE WAIT
00 00 00 06 FIN WAIT 1
00 00 00 07 CLOSING
00 00 00 08 LAST ACK
00 00 00 09 FIN WAIT 2
00 00 00 0A TIME WAIT
Already established.
Received FIN, waiting to close.
Completed and FIN sent.
Completed and exchanged FIN. Awaiting ACK.
FIN sent and completed. Awaiting ACK.
Close completed and ACK received. Awaiting FIN.
After closing, pauses twice the maximum segment life (2MSL).
Precautions
All the above values are set to 0 if Ethernet communications functions are stopped due to improper settings in
the system setup.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
ADDRESS INFORMATION READ
Reads FINS node addresses and IP addresses
Command Block
27 65
Command
code
Response Block
6 bytes
27 65
Command Response
code code
Number
of addresses
Address
information
Parameters
Number of Addresses (Response)
Returns the number of pairs of FINS node addresses and IP addresses. With the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in
EtherNet/IP port, this value is always 0001 (1 decimal).
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Address Information
Returns the FINS node addresses and IP addresses. Each pair requires 6 bytes and has the following configu-
ration.
1
6 bytes
00
FINS node
number
IP address
FINS Node Address
Node address set in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port (hexadecimal).
IP Address
IP address set in the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port (hexadecimal).
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
IP ADDRESS READ
Reads the local IP address and subnet mask in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup and the FINS node address.
The values read with this command, however, are not necessarily the settings actually used for operation. The
settings that are actually used for operation can be confirmed using CONTROLLER DATA READ (page 392)
and ADDRESS INFORMATION READ (page 414).
This command is supported for CJ-series EtherNet/IP Units only.
Command Block
27 67
Command
code
Response Block
27 67
00
Command Response Number of
IP address
Subnet mask
code
code
addresses
FINS
node number
Parameters
Number of Addresses (Response)
The number of sets of FINS node addresses, IP addresses, and subnet masks being returned. The EtherNet/
IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is always 0001 (1 decimal).
FINS Node Address (Response)
Node address set on the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port (hexadecimal).
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
IP Address (Response)
The local IP address set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port
is returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal. If the local IP address set in the allocated
words in the DM Area is enabled, 0.0.0.0 is returned.
Subnet Mask (Response)
The subnet mask set in the CPU Bus Unit System Setup for the EtherNet/IP Unit or built-in EtherNet/IP port is
returned in order starting from the leftmost bytes in hexadecimal.
Response Codes
Response code
0000
1001
Description
Normal end
Command too large
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND
Sends a explicit request message to the specified object, and receives a response.
The rightmost 8 bits of the remote (destination) IP address are used as the remote MAC ID, and the remote IP
address is the network ID of the local IP address + the rightmost 8 bits of the remote IP address.
Command Block
28
01
468 bytes max.
Command
code
Class ID Instance ID Service Data
Service Code
Destination node address
Response Block
28
01
00
00
498 bytes max.
Command
code
End
Number of
Service Data
Service Code
Destination node address (remote node)
code bytes received
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0101
0105
Normal end
The local node’s network has not started up.
Local node setting error (A BOOTP errors occurs, and the IP
address is undetermined.)
0106
0201
0204
0205
Duplicate address error
The remote node’s network has not started up.
Remote node busy, cannot send.
No response returned from remote node. Monitoring timer
timed out.
1001
1002
1004
1005
Command length exceeds maximum command length.
Command length is less than minimum command length.
Command block format does not match.
Header error
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response code
110B
Description
Response length exceeds maximum response length.
Unit is busy.
2211
Description
For details, refer to EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (28 01) on page 241 in 9-1-1 Sending Explicit Messages
Using CMND(490).
CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND
Sends a message in the CIP message (UCMM) format.
Command Block
2810 hex
Command Transport Message monitoring
code
ID
timer
502 bytes max.
Request bus size
(variable length)
Request data
(variable length)
Request bus size
Service code
Response Block
2810 hex
0000 hex
Command
code
End
code
Transport Number of
ID
bytes received
502 bytes max.
00
00 00
hex hex hex
Service response data
(variable length)
Reserved
General status
Reserved
Service code (response)
Response Codes
Response code
Description
0000
0101
0106
0201
0204
0205
1001
1002
1004
Normal end
The local node’s network has not started up.
Duplicate address error
The remote node’s network has not started up.
Remote node busy, cannot send.
No response returned from remote node. Monitoring timer timed out.
Command length exceeds maximum command length.
Command length is less than minimum command length.
Command block format does not match.
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FINS Commands Addressed to EtherNet/IP Units or Built-in EtherNet/IP Ports
Appendix E
Response code
1005
Description
Header error
110B
2211
Response length exceeds maximum response length.
Unit is busy.
For details, refer to CIP UCMM MESSAGE SEND (28 10) on page 236 in 9-1-1 Sending Explicit Messages
Using CMND(490).
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix F
EDS File Management
This section explains the EDS file management functions used in the Network Configurator.
Installing EDS Files
Note Using Windows Vista or Windows 7
Is recommended that you start the Network Configurator from Run as administrator when you install an
EDS file in the Network Configurator. If the EDS file is installed on a Network Configurator that is started
in any other way, Windows security user management will cause the installed EDS file to not be recog-
nized when you log in using a different user account. You can run the Network Configurator as the
administrator by using the following procedure.
1. Select the Network Configurator from the Start Menu, and then right-click.
2. Select Run as administrator from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
EDS File - Install
The Network Configurator can support new devices if the proper EDS files are installed.
To install the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select EDS File and Install.
The following window will be displayed.
2. The device information will be displayed on the bottom of the window when the EDS file is selected.
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDS File Management
Appendix F
3. Select the EDS file to be installed and click the Open Button.
Next, select the icon file (*.ico), and the EDS file will be added to the Hardware List.
If the EDS file already exists, the new EDS file will overwrite the previous one.
If the hardware versions are different, an EDS file will be added to the Hardware List for each version.
Creating EDS Files
EDS File - Create
The EDS files are required by the Network Configurator in order to create a network configuration. To create an
EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select EDS File - Create.
2. Set the device information and I/O information.
The device information can be obtained from the device on the network if the network is online.
3. The device can be added to the Hardware List as a new device, just like installing an EDS file.
Note Device parameters cannot be set with the Network Configurator’s EDS file creation function. Obtain a
proper EDS file from the manufacturer of the device to make device parameter settings for the device.
Deleting EDS Files
EDS File - Delete
To delete an EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Hardware List.
2. Select EDS File - Delete.
The following confirmation window will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button.
The selected device will be deleted from the Hardware List together with the EDS file.
Saving EDS Files
EDS File - Save
To save the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Hardware List.
2. Select EDS file - Save As.
The following window will be displayed to specify the name of the folder where the EDS file will be saved
and the name of the EDS file.
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDS File Management
Appendix F
3. Input the folder and file names and click the Save Button The EDS file will be saved.
Searching EDS Files
EDS File - Search
To search the devices (EDS files) displayed in the Hardware List, use the following procedure.
1. Select EDS file - Find.
The following window will be displayed.
2. Input the character string and click the Find Next Button.
3. When there is a matching device found, the cursor will move to that position.
4. To quit the search operation, click the Cancel Button.
Note (1) The device will be found if it is located below the present cursor position.
(2) To search all the devices, select Hardware in the Hardware List before performing the search pro-
cedure.
Displaying EDS File Properties
EDS File - Property
To display the properties of the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the desired hardware (device) from the Hardware List.
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EDS File Management
Appendix F
2. Select EDS File - Property.
The following window will be displayed.
The time and date that the EDS file was created will be displayed, along with the device information.
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix G
Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or
Windows 7
Changing Windows Firewall Settings
Better firewall security for Windows XP (SP2 or higher), Windows Vista, and Windows 7 has increased the
restrictions for data communications on Ethernet ports. When using an EtherNet/IP connection*1 to one of the
following PLCs from an Ethernet port on a computer, you must change the settings of the Windows Firewall to
enable using CX-Programmer or Network Configurator communications.
Applicable PLCs:
• CJ2H-CPU@@-EIP/CJ2M-CPU3@
• CS1W/CJ1W-EIP@@
*1
CX-Programmer
• An EtherNet/IP connection includes the following cases:
• An online connection with the network type set to EtherNet/IP
• An automatic online connection to a PLC on an EtherNet/IP network when Auto Online - EtherNet/IP
Node Online is selected from the PLC Menu
Network Configurator
• A connection made by selecting Option - Select Interface - Ethernet I/F
Note Windows Firewall is mainly designed to prevent inappropriate access from external devices (e.g., via the
Internet). The changes to the Windows Firewall settings described in this document enable EtherNet/IP
connections to be used by the CX-Programmer. If the same computer is being used on a company net-
work or other network, confirm that the changes will not create security problems before proceeding with
the changes. The changes described in this document are required only when you connect using Ether-
Net/IP through an Ethernet port. No changes are necessary if you are connecting through any other
port, such as a USB port.
Changing Windows Firewall Settings
Windows XP
1. When you attempt to connect the CX-Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet/IP net-
work through an Ethernet port, the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Click the Unblock Button.
An EtherNet/IP connection will be accepted from CX-Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet/
IP connections will be enabled in the future as well.
Windows Vista or Windows 7
Use the following procedure to change the settings before attempting to connect from the CX-Programmer or
Network Configurator.
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7
Appendix G
The User Account Control Dialog Box may be displayed during this procedure. If it appears, click the Continue
Button and continue with the procedure.
1. Select Control Panel from the Windows Start Menu and change the display to Classic View.
2. Open the Administrative Tools and select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security from the dialog box that
is displayed.
3. Select Inbound Rules under Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer on the left side
of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box.
4. Select New Rule under Inbound Rules in the Actions Area on the right side of the dialog box.
5. Make the following settings for each step in the New Inbound Rule Wizard Dialog Box, clicking the Next But-
ton to move between steps.
Rule Type
Select Custom.
Program
Select All Programs.
Protocol and Ports
Select ICMPv4 as the protocol type.
Scope
Action
Profile
Name
Select Any IP address for everything.
Select Allow the connection.
Select Domain, Private, and Public.
Enter any name, e.g., Omron_EIP.
6. Click the Finish Button. The rule that you defined will be registered in the Inbound Rules (e.g., Omron_EIP).
Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security Dialog Box.
7. When you attempt to connect the CX-Programmer or Network Configurator to a PLC on an EtherNet/IP net-
work through an Ethernet port, the Windows Security Alert Dialog Box will be displayed.
8. Click the Unblock Button.
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7
Appendix G
An EtherNet/IP connection will be accepted from CX-Programmer or Network Configurator and EtherNet/
IP connections will be enabled in the future as well.
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Precautions for Using Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7
Appendix G
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
7-segment display, 24
C
cables
precautions, 41
cdup command, 303, 308
CIDR, 3, 94
A
Adjust Time field, 326, 328
applications
precautions, xxiv
Auto Adjust Time field, 326, 327
Auto Adjust Time Tab, 326, 327
allocations, 70
CIP, 3, 381
cleaning, 332
automatic clock adjustment
errors
overview, 324
settings, 326
Auxiliary Area
related data, 88
close command, 303, 308, 312
commands
FTP commands, 308
communications
high traffic conditions, 232
communications cables, xxv
communications test, 65
B
Backup Tool, 336
CJ-series, 15, 16
CS-series, 14
component names, 21
bits
connection
setting, 141
boots
Connections settings (Edit All Connections), 144
Connections Tab, 141
connectors (modular plug)
Contact Output Units
precautions, 43
control bits, 71
recommended models, 28
broadcast test
command, 397
buffers, 377, 411
CONTROLLER DATA READ, 392
bye command, 303, 308, 312
CPU Bus Units
precautions, xxvi
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
creating tags, 128
E
EC Directives, xxvi
saving, 420
searching, 421
using, 315
CS-series, 14
CX-Integrator, 46
CX-Programmer, 8, 46
cyclic communications
required settings, 35
EMS Standard, xxvi
EPATH type, 383
D
Datalink Tool, 57
default gateway, 54
error codes
table of error codes, 365
delays
error flags
error log
delete command, 303, 308, 312
clearing, 176
editing, 127
codes, 365
overflow, 364
specifications, 364
ERROR LOG READ, 398
error processing, 339
devices
registering, 125
DHCP client computer, 102
DHCP service
dimensions
errors
automatic clock adjustment, 328
error log
CS-series, 14, 19
dir command, 303, 308, 309
clearing, 399
reading, 398
error messages, 313
flags
distance
CJ-series transmission distance, 15, 16
DM Area
FINS communications, 394
message communications, 194, 195
Ethernet communications
addresses
allocations, 83
automatic clock adjustment
DNS Tab, 326
domain name, 55
parameters, 375, 377
Ethernet Units
dynamic changes of remote IP address
prohibiting, 99
reading status, 411
EtherNet/IP Datalink Tool, 57
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EtherNet/IP Units
resetting, 391
ETN11-compatible mode, 99
explicit message communications, 187, 233
FTP server
cd, 310
get, 311
receiving, 248
sending, 234
sending using CMND(490), 243
put, 311
type, 311
F
specifications, 199, 220
testing, 399
FINS communications services, 94
connecting, 304, 308
quitting, 312
status, 314
FINS node address
relationship to IP address, 94, 105
FINS response codes
FINS/TCP, 202
FTP Status Flag, 314
full duplex, 55
frame format, 203
procedure, 205
TCP port number, 203
frame format, 200
procedure, 201
FINS/UDP and FINS/TCP
G
gateway
general specifications, 14
327
global address, 106
GMRP, 29
FINS/UDP communications methods, 96
H
flags
preventing, 232
host name, 54
FTP Status Flag, 314
FTP, 3, 62, 302
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Host name field, 326, 327
reading, 406
I
status, 408
IP ROUTER TABLE READ, 406
I/O allocations
CIO Area, 70
DM Area, 83
I/O memory address, 116
L
LED indicators, 23
I/O tables
link setting (baud rate), 55
locking devices
precautions, xxv
creating, 46
importing, 136
indicators, 23
Low Voltage Directive, xxvi
ls command, 303, 308, 309
initial settings, 34
cable connections, 44
mounting Unit to PLC, 38
precautions, 41
M
maintenance, 332
Memory Cards, 303, 315
displaying directories, 309
See also FTP server
command, 396
IP address, 54, 92
automatic generation, 95
automatic generation (dynamic), 96
errors, 194
specifications, 193
IP address table method, 95, 97
private address, 106
IP Address field, 326, 327
mget command, 303, 308, 311
IP addresses
mode settings
allocating, 92
configuration, 92
IP communications
IP addresses
mounting procedure, 39
mput command, 303, 308, 311
MS indicator, 23
reading from Units, 392
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
multicast communications, 114
multicast filter, 29
PING, 399
PLC object services, 249
Port No. field, 306, 326, 327
N
port numbers
UDP port
n
beginning word of allocated CIO Area, 70
network
precautions, xxi
general, xxii
handling, 40
installation, 41
safety, xxii
wiring, 44
preferred DNS server, 54
private address, 106
reading, 178
saving, 177
Network Configurator, 121
requirements, 10
starting, 121
TCP/IP settings, 55
network devices
networks
network memory, 411
network parameters, 375
node addresses
setting, 36, 37
noise, xxiv
Contact Output Units, 43
reducing, 41
Normal Target Node Flags, 81, 86
NS indicator, 23
connecting, 46
CX-Net, 46
CX-Programmer, 46
Programming Console, 46
protocols
put command, 303, 308, 311, 320
pwd command, 303, 308, 310
QoS, 29
O
online editing, xxiii
quit command, 303, 308, 312
operating environment
precautions, xxiv
R
radioactivity, xxiv
P
accessible data areas, 221
delays, 297
packet interval (RPI)
setting, 262
Password field, 306
PCMR(260) instruction, 227
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
refresh cycle, 268
FTP server, 303
static electricity, xxiv
precautions, xxv
relay tables, 207
rename command, 303, 308
replacing Units
precautions, xxv
route path, 383
routing tables, 207
precautions, xxvi
status
subnet mask, 93
relay network table, 207
setting examples, 209
subnet masks, 54
reading from Unit, 392
switch
switching hub
S
environment precautions, 42
functions, 29
SYSMAC BUS/2, 220
SYSMAC LINK, 220
safety precautions, xxii
delays, 294
Setup Tab, 306
seven-segment display
short-circuits
T
uploading, 171
verifying, 172
Tag Data Link Start Bit, 72
Tag Data Link Stop Bit, 72
SNMP trap, 64
SNTP, 3, 63, 324
SNTP server
automatic clock adjustment
tag data links
errors, 328
obtaining clock information, 324
sockets
delay time, 265
functions, 115
TCP sockets
I/O response time, 283
overview, 112
testing communications, 399
specifications, 14
required settings, 35
432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specifications, 115
tag data links (cyclic communications), 6
tag set, 116
W
wiring
precautions, 44
tag sets
creating, 126
Target Node PLC Error Flags, 73, 87
Target Node PLC Operating Flags, 73, 87
sockets
status, 379
TCP/IP, 52
timers, 377
to, 61
troubleshooting, 368
twisted-pair cable
twisted-pair cables
precautions, 41
type command, 303, 308, 311
U
unit numbers
unit setup, 4, 61
Unit Status 1 Flags, 73
Unit Status 2 Flags, 75
uploading tag data link parameters, 171
user name
specifying, 309
User Settings Area, 85
using FTP commands, 308
V
verifying tag data link parameters, 172
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W465-E1-05
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
01
Date
June 2007
July 2008
Revised content
Original production
02
Added information for CJ-series CJ2 CPU Units and for new unit version 2.0 func-
tions.
03
04
December 2008 Added the CJ-series CJ2 CPU Units (CJ2H-CPU@@).
December 2009 Added information on methods to create connections and heartbeats.
Greatly changed the structure of sections 1 and 2.
Added and improved information on communications performance and communica-
tions load in section 10.
Made changes accompanying a new version of the Network Configurator (V3.10).
05
February 2010 Added the CJ-series CJ2M CPU Units (CJ2M-CPU3@).
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision History
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|